How to cram for a test

This article was co-authored by Arash Fayz. Arash Fayz is the Co-Founder and Executive Director of LA Tutors 123, an academic consulting and private tutoring company based in Los Angeles, California. Arash has over 10 years of educational consulting experience, managing the tutoring of students of all ages, abilities, and backgrounds to score higher on standardized tests and gain admission to their target schools. He has a BA in Applied Mathematics and Computer Science from the University of California, Los Angeles.

There are 8 references cited in this article, which can be found at the bottom of the page.

wikiHow marks an article as reader-approved once it receives enough positive feedback. This article received 17 testimonials and 93% of readers who voted found it helpful, earning it our reader-approved status.

This article has been viewed 1,005,741 times.

Have you have been too busy or simply procrastinated getting ready for a test? While cramming probably won’t get you an “A,” it can definitely save you from an “F.” Follow the suggestions below and get ready for a long, hard night.

How to cram for a test

How to cram for a test

Arash Fayz
Test Prep Tutor Expert Interview. 1 November 2019. If you don’t know them by heart, write them down on a separate piece of paper—your cramming notes—or on small note cards. [2] X Research source This will help you identify what you need to know, and you’ll have a handy set of flash cards.

  • The act of rewriting may also help you memorize the content. If you’re a good visual learner, then this will definitely help. If you’re a good auditory learner, meaning you learn by hearing, recite the words as you write them down on the note cards.
  • If you have enough time, consider rewriting your note cards several times. It may seem like overkill, but if you’re trying to learn facts and information, it’s very helpful. If you’re trying to learn equations or more practical applications, this repetition is not as useful.

How to cram for a test

How to cram for a test

Arash Fayz
Test Prep Tutor Expert Interview. 1 November 2019. If not, do the practice tests or review questions at the ends of your textbook chapters. Only do the questions that are directly relevant to the concepts you’ve identified as important. Don’t spend a lot of time on each question. If you get stuck on a question, note it and come back to it after you grade your test. [4] X Trustworthy Source American Psychological Association Leading scientific and professional organization of licensed psychologists Go to source

  • Grade your self-tests. Be honest with your grading. If you’re not, you will only hurt yourself when it comes to the actual test. Look at the questions you got wrong and compare those to your cramming notes or flashcards. You may need to make some new flashcards or revisit some of the concepts you thought you knew.
  • How to Study If You Only Have Minutes

    • Share
    • Flipboard
    • Email

    How to cram for a test

    How to cram for a test

    We’ve all been there: you either procrastinate or forget about a test until the last minute, at which point you realize that you have less than an hour to cram in as much knowledge as possible. Here’s how to make the most of your cram session and study for your test in an hour or less.

    Find a Quiet Study Space

    If you’re at school, head to the library or a quiet classroom. If you’re studying at home, turn off the TV, shut off your phone, power down the computer, and head to your room. Politely request that your friends and/or family give you time to study quietly. If you have only a short period of time to cram, you’ll need 100% of your focus.

    Review Your Study Guide

    If you’ve been lucky enough to receive a study guide from your teacher, use it! Study guides are a crammer’s best friend. Read through the study guide as many times as you can. Memorize as much of the content as possible, using mnemonic devices like acronyms or songs. You can also try reading out loud and discussing the content with a friend or family member. Don’t worry about making flashcards or taking notes—an in-depth review of the study guide itself will be more effective.

    Crack Open the Textbook

    If you do not have a study guide, grab a pen and a notebook and open up your textbook. After you’ve confirmed which chapter(s) the test will cover, read the first two pages of each relevant chapter. Look for major ideas, vocabulary, and concepts, and as you read, summarize any words or phrase that are bold or highlighted in the text. (You can do this summary process in writing if you have time, or simply state your summary out loud).

    After you’ve read the first two pages of every chapter, read the last page of every chapter and answer the review questions in your head. If you can’t figure out an answer to a review question, look it up in the textbook before moving on. These review questions are often good previews of the type of content to expect on your test.

    Review Notes, Quizzes and Assignments

    Don’t have access to your textbook? Gather as many notes, quizzes, and assignments relevant to your upcoming test as you can. Your personal notes will hold plenty of useful information, and your teacher’s quizzes and assignments are often one of the main sources of test questions. Read every page as you would a study guide or textbook chapter, focusing on key terms and concepts. Try to memorize as much of the content as you can with mnemonic devices.

    Quiz Yourself

    Using your study guide, textbook, and/or previous assignments, hold a quick quiz session. Look for key terms, then cover up the answers with your hand and try to define them. Next, look for big concepts, then flip over the pages and explain the concepts in your head. Circle or write down any topics you have trouble with and review them several times.

    If you have time and access to a study buddy, he or she can help out by guiding you through one last quiz session, but self-studying is just as productive.

    Write Down Your Mnemonic Devices

    As soon as the teacher hands out the test and says “begin”, write your newly-created mnemonic devices (acronyms, phrases, etc.) down on your test paper. Seeing these mnemonic devices will jog your memory as you go through the test.

    Ask the Teacher for Help

    If you get confused or stuck during the test, don’t be afraid to raise your hand and politely ask for help. Many teachers are willing to guide you in the right direction, particularly if they know you to be a hard-working student.

    Find Your Dream School

    COVID-19 Update: To help students through this crisis, The Princeton Review will continue our “Enroll with Confidence” refund policies. For full details, please click here.

    $25 Off

    Enter your email to unlock an extra $25 off an SAT or ACT program!

    By submitting my email address. I certify that I am 13 years of age or older, agree to recieve marketing email messages from The Princeton Review, and agree to Terms of Use.

    We promise your teacher isn’t out to get you. As unpleasant as taking a test can often be, it actually does more than just show your teacher what you know: it can actually help you learn.

    Studies have shown that students who are tested regularly actually learn more content and retain it longer than students who have not been tested. Great news for final exams. Frequent testing has even been shown to help decrease test anxiety.

    Not sure how to study for a test? Follow these study tips to make your best grade!

    How to cram for a test

    1. Get informed

    Don’t walk into your test unprepared for what you will face. Before you start studying, find out:

    • textbook chapters and topics the test will cover
    • test format

    Will there be multiple-choice questions or short answers? Will you write an in-class essay? The goals and layout of the test will determine how you tackle learning the material.

    2. Think like your teacher

    Your homeworks assignments, quizzes, handouts, daily notes, and classwork are all indicators of what your teacher thinks is important about the information and what might appear on the test.

    3. Make your own study aids

    When it comes to learning, a 2013 study showed that practice tests work BETTER than simply highlighting or re-reading your notes. So, turn your notes into flashcards or use a flashcard app for memorizing Spanish vocab. Ask your friends to quiz you or write your own practice test.

    4. Practice for the inevitable

    Outline essays ahead of time. For math tests, do plenty of practice problems similar to ones that you KNOW will appear. Make a list of questions that you think might show up on the test (and then make sure you can answer them!).

    5. Study every day

    If you have a test in a week, studying a little each day will help you identify tough concepts or weak areas in your knowledge in advance. Can’t figure out factoring? Log on to Homework Help and get your questions answered.

    6. Cut out the distractions

    How to cram for a test

    Distractions make it difficult to pay attention to what you’re doing, which in turn makes it harder to commit facts to memory. Give yourself a leg up by turning off the notifications on your phone, temporarily blocking your favorite websites, or sticking to instrumental music while you study (so you’re not tempted to sing along!). Taking a break every 45 minutes or so will also help you stay focused.

    7. Divide big concepts from smaller details

    If you’re studying a big topic—like the Civil War for history or cellular processes for biology—try breaking the material you need to study into chunks. Study one battle at a time or one chapter section at a time—and then quiz yourself. Ask yourself questions about what you’ve just studied, and even write your answers down.

    8. Don’t neglect the “easy” stuff

    Even if you’ve been acing a certain subject or concept all year and think the test will be a breeze, you should still give it a review before the big day. You don’t want to lose points for careless errors or forget to memorize a key geometry formula.

    9. Don’t skip school

    Missing classes automatically puts you at a disadvantage. Make sure you go to class (especially during the week leading up to the test) and attend any review sessions your teacher holds. Did you have to miss an important class? You can always ask your teacher or one of our tutors for help catching up.

    10. Review the day of the test

    Before you take the test, give yourself time for a quick review. Shuffle through those flashcards a couple of times or re-read your chapter outline. This will ensure the material is fresh in your mind.

    Still stuck on how to study for your test?

    Try an online tutoring session with one of our experts, and get help in 40+ subjects.

    How to cram for a test

    How to cram for a test

    There’s no need to feel completely frightened if you’ve procrastinated until the night before a test to study. Although you won’t be able to commit much to long-term memory in a one-night cram session, you can learn enough to pass the test using these techniques.

    How to Study the Night Before a Test

    • Eat a nutritious meal and prepare a few healthy snacks so you won’t need to get up later
    • Set up in a comfortable spot with your study materials (pencils, note cards, highlighters) and class materials (notes, quizzes, tests, handouts, study guides)
    • Focus for 30 to 45minutes, then break for 5
    • Take notes and use mnemonic devices to improve recall
    • Aim for comprehension over memorization
    • Explain concepts and ideas to a third party
    • Get a good night’s sleep

    Physical Needs

    The brain and the body are linked, so before you sit down to start a study session, it’s a good idea to take care of your body: go to the bathroom, get some water or tea, and be sure you’re dressed in a way that won’t distract you (nothing scratchy or stiff). Focus and calm are crucial to studying seriously; to get your body on the same page, try doing some deep breathing and yoga stretches to help you get your mind off any other concerns. Essentially, this prep is meant to get your body to help you, not distract you, so you have no excuses to break your study focus.

    Snacking during or before studying can be helpful, but choose wisely. The ideal meal is something without a lot of sugar or heavy carbs that can lead to an energy crash. Instead, grab some high-protein grilled chicken or scramble some eggs for dinner, drink green tea with acai, and follow it all with a few bites of dark chocolate. It’s always easier to stay on task and process information when your brain has been given what it needs to function properly.

    The other upside is that by eating something before you begin studying, you’ll be less tempted to get hungry (and distracted) and quit studying early. To further head off any distracting snack attacks, be prepared ahead of time. When you go to your study area, bring a snack with you. This should be something high in nutrients and mess-free, like mixed nuts, dried fruit, or a protein bar. Avoid highly processed foods like chips, and beware of sneaky foods like granola bars that are full of hidden sugar that will leave you stranded in an hour or so.

    One Step at a Time

    Start by getting organized. Get all the materials that relate to the test you’re taking—notes, handouts, quizzes, book, projects—and lay them out neatly in a way that makes sense to you. You might organize them by topic, in chronological order, or in some other way that works. Perhaps you like to use color-coded highlighters or stacks of notecards. The point is that there’s no one way to organize: You have to find the best system that helps you make connections with the material.

    By the night before a test, you should already have a good baseline of knowledge on the test topics. That means your goal here is to review and refresh. If your teacher gave you a study guide, start with that, quizzing yourself as you go along. Refer to your other materials if you can’t remember an item on the guide, and then write it down. Use mnemonic devices to help you remember bits of information that you wouldn’t otherwise, but try to avoid just memorizing everything: it’s harder to recall straight facts than it is to have a network of connected ideas that you can rely on.

    If you don’t have a study guide or if you’ve finished going over it, prioritize notes and handouts. Things like dates, names, and vocabulary words are likely to show up on tests, so study those first. After that, review the bigger-picture stuff: material that covers cause-and-effect relationships within the topic area and other ideas that could show up on an essay question. For these, memorization is less important than having a solid enough understanding to explain it back on a written answer.

    It can seem overwhelming, especially if you have a lot of material to review, so take it slowly. A good rule of thumb is to focus for 30- to 45-minute increments followed by 5-minute breaks. If you try to cram in all the information the night before the test, your brain will overload and you’ll have to work to regain your focus on studying. This is why it’s also useful to review for a few days before the test, not just the night before so you can spread out the material and review everything multiple times over of a few separate sessions.

    Buddy System

    If you really want to test your understanding of the material, try explaining it to someone who isn’t in the class. Get a family member or friend and “teach” them as much as you can remember. This will let you see how well you understand the concepts and how well you can make connections (to prepare for short-answer or essay questions).

    If you have a partner or a family member to help you, have them quiz you on the material. As you go, make a list of anything you get stuck on or can’t remember. Once you’ve been quizzed, take your list and study that material repeatedly until you’ve got it.

    Finally, write down all your mnemonic devices, important dates, and quick facts on one sheet of paper, so you can refer to it the morning before the big test.

    Final Preparations

    Nothing will make you do worse on a test than pulling an all-nighter. You may be tempted to stay up all night and cram in as much as is possible, but by all means, get some sleep the night before. When testing time comes, you won’t be able to recall all the information you learned because your brain will be functioning in survival mode.

    On the morning of the test, make sure to eat a healthy breakfast for plenty of energy. Throughout the morning, run through your review sheet: while you’re eating, at your locker, or on the way to class. When it comes time to put the review sheet away and sit down for the test, you can rest easy knowing that you’ve done everything possible to help your brain get through the test with flying colors.

    How to cram for a test

    Being properly organized and prepared for tests and exams can make all the difference to school performance. Effective studying starts with the right attitude—a positive outlook can shift studying from a punishment to an opportunity to learn.

    There is no one-size-fits-all approach when learning how to effectively study. Studying methods should be tailored to each student. Everyone has different abilities, so it is important to determine what works for you and what doesn’t. (Find out what type of learner you are and which study techniques will work best for you!)

    For some students, studying and staying motivated comes easily — others may have to work a little bit harder.

    What Is The Most Effective Way To Study?

    Finding the best way to study is an ongoing process. It isn’t something that can be left to the night before the test. You should be constantly improving your study skills to better understand what works (and what doesn’t).

    Learning how to study better helps avoid panic and frustration the next time a big test is coming up. After all, you are more likely to do well and be less stressed before a test when you have had time to properly review and practice the material!

    Mastering effective study habits not only makes it easier to learn but will also help you get better grades in high school and post-secondary.

    Discover the 12 secrets to studying effectively that will help you ace your next test.

    How To Study Effectively

    Get organized

    Carry a homework planner at all times. Entering homework, projects, tests and assignments as soon as they are assigned will make sure they aren’t forgotten about.

    Pay attention in class

    It’s important to concentrate and avoid distractions when the teacher is speaking. Practice active listening by concentrating on what’s being said and taking notes in your own words. This will help make sure you hear (and understand) what is being taught in class.

    Steer clear of distractions

    Distractions are everywhere—from cell phones to social media to friends. Be aware of what distracts you in class and know how to steer clear of these distractions. Avoid sitting next to friends if you know they will distract you. Turning off your cell phone will also help make sure you are paying attention to your teacher.

    Make sure notes are complete

    Writing clear and complete notes in class will help you process the information you are learning. These notes will also become study notes that can be reviewed before a test. Talk to friends or the teacher if you have missed a class to ensure your notes are complete.

    Ask questions if you don’t understand

    Raise your hand and ask questions if you don’t understand something. If you don’t feel comfortable asking in front of everyone, write yourself a reminder to talk to the teacher after class.

    Make a study schedule/plan

    When making a study schedule, look at your planner and think about what needs to be accomplished. Think about the types of questions that will be on the test and the topics that will be covered so you know what you should focus on. Set specific goals for each study session, like how many topics you will cover by the end of the session.

    Start Studying More Effectively

    Get more out of your study sessions with the complete study toolkit
    including note taking templates, tips, and more.

    Review notes from class every evening

    After school, review and expand on the notes from class. Reviewing notes helps move material learned from short-term memory into long-term memory, which will help next time you have a big test.

    Talk to teachers

    Teachers are there to help you do your best. Talk to your teacher and ask for clarification or extra help if you need it before your test. Taking the initiative to ask for help goes a long way with teachers!

    Designate a study area

    The best study spot is one that is quiet, well-lit, and in a low-traffic area. Make sure there is a clear workspace to study and write on. Everyone’s needs are different, so it is important you find a spot that works for you.

    Study in short bursts

    For every 30 minutes you study, take a short 10-15 minute break to recharge. Short study sessions are more effective and help you make the most of your study time. Find out more about taking a study break that works.

    Simplify study notes

    Make studying less overwhelming by condensing notes from class. Underline or highlight key words. Create visual aids like charts, story webs, mind maps, or outlines to organize and simplify information and help you remember better.

    Study with a group

    Working with classmates encourages an interactive environment to keep you engaged. This gives you a chance to test your knowledge with others, quiz each other on the content, and help boost each other’s confidence.

    Study Smart, Not Hard

    Knowing how to study effectively is a skill that will benefit you for life. Developing effective study skills requires lots of time and patience. If you follow these tips you’ll be on your way to discovering which type of studying works best for you—so you can knock your next test out of the park!

    Find more study tips by watching our video below

    Need some extra help? Oxford Learning is here for you. Get more study tips and learning resources to help you succeed in school:

    Study Tips

    • Share
    • Flipboard
    • Email

    How to cram for a test

    Interested in getting a better grade on every single test that you take? I bet you didn’t know that when you sit down to study, there are actually study tips that can help you make the most of your time. Oh. You did know? Well, good. Perhaps that’s why you’re on this page! You wanted to learn more about these eight study tips so you can learn the test information faster, stay focused longer, and get a score that’s higher than you’d get going it alone.

    Take a peek at the following study tips to get ready for the next test you take in school.

    Focus On Studying

    How to cram for a test

    So, you sit down to study and you can’t seem to keep your mind on your work, huh? Relax. This article has you covered because it has the tricks and tips to keep you on the right track. Read here for concrete ways to fix your wandering attention and stay focused on Napoleon’s conquests, the Pythagorean Theorem, your multiplication tables, or whatever else it is you’re supposed to be learning.

    Study Smart For Any Test

    How to cram for a test

    Got a multiple-choice test coming up? An essay exam? The Redesigned SAT? Need to know how to cram for your test in an hour? A few hours? A few days? Check out this list for study skills tips related to major tests, minor tests, and every single one of those tests and quizzes in between.

    Study In One of These 10 Places

    How to cram for a test

    Okay. We all know that studying in the middle of a hockey game is probably not ideal. So, where is a good place to park it, get out your notes, and learn some material? This study skills tip describes ten great places to learn a little bit about something new. Nope, your great-aunt’s funeral is not one of them, but we can understand why you’re tempted.

    Listen To Music Designed For Studying

    How to cram for a test

    Theorists argue about the efficacy of playing music while studying, but every good student knows that absolute quiet can sometimes send you flying off the nearest balcony. Check here for twenty-five lyric-free tunes sure to get you through your next study session, (and safely to your next class.) There are also links to study music spots on Pandora and Spotify, too.

    Avoid The Top 7 Study Distractions

    How to cram for a test

    This study skills tip is invaluable because it lets you know which distractions to watch out for before you pick up your notes. Here, you’ll find five internal distractions and five external distractions with quick, easy fixes, so you can be at the top of your game when you learn the test material.

    Use Mnemonic Devices

    How to cram for a test

    Roy G. Biv is not your crazy cousin’s new boyfriend. It’s an acronym used by school kids to remember the colors of the rainbow (although the “indigo” and “violet” colors are often replaced by purple). But that’s beside the point. Using an acronym, one of many mnemonic devices, to remember something is smart! Mnemonic devices can aid your memory when you’re trying to cram famous battles, scientific formulas, and dead poets’ last words into your brain before a test. This article gives you a few more.

    Studying for a math test does not have to feel overwhelming. Test-taking in general can cause anxiety, but by managing time and honing good study habits, you can help to ease the stress. Although many people may find math challenging and test-taking to be difficult, here’s how to study for a math test to make it easier and be successful.

    Top Reasons Students Lose Points on a Math Test

    First things first, it’s important to remember these tips in order to maximize your test score. The most common reasons why people lose points on a math test include:

    1. Directions:

    On any test, it’s of utmost importance to read the directions closely. See if you have to show your work or just provide answers. Many math tests offer partial credit if the work is right, even if the final answer is not.

    2. Bad Handwriting:

    Try to be as neat as possible so the person grading your test doesn’t misinterpret one number for another (i.e. a 3 for an 8). Also, some teachers may want you to box your final answer so it’s easy to locate.

    3. Math Vocabulary and Concepts:

    Math, like English, has vocabulary. Be sure to hone the vocabulary and concepts before a test so you understand what is being asked.

    How to cram for a test

    Photo by from Pexels

    How to Study for a Math Test in 10 Easy Steps

    Here are some of the top tips for how to study for math exams.

    1. Start Early

    Being prepared for a test starts with taking class seriously. Try not to miss any classes or lectures. While it helps to be in the classroom, it’s only useful if you pay close attention. When you don’t understand a concept, ask your teacher questions. Use the textbook as a resource and study a little everyday.

    2. Do Your Homework

    Homework is provided to reiterate and absorb the concepts from the lesson. Don’t copy others or skip it. When you do your homework, you are studying. By understanding basic math concepts, you can easily build to continue learning. If you see recurring problems or concepts, it’s likely those will be tested. Treat your homework like a study guide.

    3. Try a Planning Approach

    Rather than piling all your studying up at the last minute, try to plan ahead. Try to hone study skills and techniques to create good habits. Give yourself time limits and start studying 3 days before a test. As you get closer to the test day, you can lessen the load. Here’s an example of how the 3-2-1 approach works:

    • 3 days before a test: Study all vocabulary, do a lot of practice problems, and review any answers you got wrong on homework (60 minutes).
    • 2 days before a test: Review the vocabulary briefly. Perform 10-15 practice problems (45 minutes).
    • 1 day before a test: Review vocabulary. Do one homework problem from each previous night’s homework (30 minutes).

    4. Use Practice Tests and Exams

    Many teachers will provide you with old exams to practice. Sometimes, you can even find old exams online. Rework these problems and go over the homework and notes. By creating your own practice test, you can try your hand at each type of problem to prepare for what might show up on the test.

    5. Use Flashcards

    As mentioned above, math does mirror other subjects in the fact that there are concepts and vocabulary terms to memorize. Along with these, you must often know formulas. As such, it is useful to make flashcards with the aforementioned items to help remember them. Sometimes, teachers will let you use a study guide on a test. If so, include vocabulary words and formulas. If not, try a brain dump. When the test begins, write everything down while it’s fresh in your head so you can refer to the list during the test.

    6. Practice Online

    Leverage all types of resources. There are websites specifically dedicated to subjects in math, such as Other sites that can be of assistance include Khan Academy and YouTube.

    7. Try a Study Group

    Oftentimes, you may not understand a concept that your friend does. In these cases, it’s helpful to set up study groups and work alongside friends. Studying in groups can help keep you on track and learn from each other.

    8. Set Rewards

    Staying focused and studying in advance deserves rewards. As such, you can set up your own rewards systems based on what you like to do. For example, if you want to save up for a special gift, place a monetary reward in a jar every time you complete a homework assignment. After the test, go buy yourself a present. Or, consider rewarding yourself with self-care like a massage or a nice dinner when you successfully pass a test.

    9. Get Good Sleep

    Just as important as studying is getting enough sleep. There is research that suggests that memories become stable during sleep. Additionally, being deprived of sleep can detrimentally affect focus and attention. Therefore, when you plan when to study, make sure you can still get enough sleep.

    10. Learn from Mistakes

    After you get a graded test back, go over the mistakes and understand how to fix them. Since math concepts are known to build upon one another, it’s important you understand what was done wrong so that as the concepts repeat and build, you know what to do next time.

    How to cram for a test

    Photo by Louis Bauer from Pexels

    Extra Tips

    When possible, try to apply math to real life. This can happen by applying math in financial management situations, baking and cooking, home improvement, at work and more.

    Furthermore, when studying, try to do so distraction-free. Find a study environment that works best for you. Whether that’s a cafe, library or at home, limit distractions. You can do so by turning off electronic devices and only having the materials you need in your study space.

    It All Adds Up

    By taking your math classes and homework seriously from day one, you can alleviate unnecessary stress when it comes to test time. Although it may seem obvious, one of the best tips for how to study for a math test and perform your best is to believe in yourself and trust your intuition. Adopt a positive mentality and a proactive attitude and you can maximize your performance on exam day.

    When I was a student and teachers would say, “Study for your math test!” I would think, “How do I study for a math test?”

    I now realize that study is the wrong verb. You really need to ‘practice’ for a math test.How to cram for a test

    You not only need to KNOW material for a math test. You must know HOW TO DO something with that material. It requires a shift in preparation. Also, there is no way to prepare for a math test the night before. At that point, you either know the material or you don’t. There is no faking.

    First, it’s important to understand common reasons students lose points on math tests…

    5 Top Reasons Students Lose Points on Math Tests

    1. They didn’t follow directions! This is a big one! Always read the directions.
    2. Sloppy writing. Perhaps you wrote a “9,” but later read the digit as a “4.” That will obviously lead to a mistake. Most commonly, students misalign digits; for example, a digit that should be in the tens place gets added to the hundreds column.
    3. They are confused by math vocabulary. If you’re not sure what the difference is between a “sum” and a “product,” you’ll have trouble.
    4. Not doing homework regularly. Homework is your #1 study tool for math!
    5. Making errors on basic math facts. It helps to be fluent with your basic addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division facts. (NOTE: People with learning disabilities often struggle with “basic” facts. In that case, take your time to calculate facts carefully.)

    Simple awareness of these factors can have a positive impact on your grade! But, as you might guess, there is more you can do…

    Math Test Study Plan

    Step 1: Know your basic math facts! There are hundreds of math games on the internet to help you practice your facts. They are the foundation of math and will continue to hold you back if you cannot answer each of them (0-10) in a split-second. (Again, people with learning disabilities might never master basic math facts. If that’s the case, just take your time as you do math problems.)

    Step 2: View homework as a “study guide.” Circle all problems that you do not know how to do and ask for help in class the next day. As you correct your homework in class, circle all problems you did wrong and take notes about how to do them correctly.

    IMPORTANT TIME LIMIT: Don’t spend more than 60 minutes/night working on math homework. If you can’t finish the assignment in this amount of time, talk to your teacher. After 60 minutes, your brain will have exhausted it’s capacity for learning anything new. From there, you’ll most likely step into a tail-spin of confusion that will only escalate over time. You will be far more productive in the long-term if you stick to a time-limit.

    Step 3: Know your math vocabulary. (See our video, “How to Study Vocabulary” for a painless way to learn math vocab.)

    Step 4: Follow the “3-2-1” approach to study for your test:

    • 3 days before your test, study the math vocabulary (as described above). Also, do several practice problems; use the problems you originally got wrong on your homework. (Time limit: 60 minutes.)
    • 2 days before your test, review the vocabulary quickly. Do another 10-15 practice problems; use the problems you originally got wrong on your homework. (Time limit: 50 minutes.)
    • 1 day before your test, review those lovely vocabulary words and do one problem from each night’s homework. (Time limit: 30 minutes.)

    Step 5: When you first receive the test, write down any formulas or definitions you had to memorize. This will immediately free up some brain power for the rest of your test.

    Step 6: Read the directions! Twice.

    Step 7: Write neatly. Keep your numbers in the correct place-value!

    Step 8: When you are stuck, do as much as you can (you may get partial credit). Then, skip the problem and move on. Come back to it if you have time.

    Step 9: After your test is graded, make sure you understand how to correct any mistakes you made. If you do not understand the material now, you will continue to have problems in following chapters.

    Math can be challenging because everything you learn builds on knowledge you should have learned before. If you miss something, it will catch up with you. However, if you:

    • Learn your math facts,
    • Treat your homework like it is “test practice” (and learn from your mistakes)
    • learn math vocabulary (see simple video here)
    • Read the directions on the test…

    …it will not be long before your math test scores will SOAR!

    Get more easy-to-implement study and test-taking tips: For educators, click here. For parents, click here.

    How to cram for a test

    While it can be tempting for students to put off studying until they absolutely have to, cramming for tests actually leads to more stress, lowered comprehension, and poor performance.

    Why Cramming Doesn’t Work

    When students cram for a test at the last minute, they are studying to remember rather than studying to understand. With so much material to study in a short amount of time, their brain doesn’t have a chance to absorb or make lasting connections about what it is learning.

    As a result, students will forget the material almost as quickly as they learned it. Learning new material becomes more difficult because your child hasn’t retained what he or she has already learned. This can lead to your child playing a game of catch up to avoid falling farther behind.

    The solution? Ditching the late-night cram session routine.

    Find out how you can help your child learn to study without cramming and start building better study habits instead.

    How To Avoid Cramming When Studying For Your Next Test

    1. Stop Procrastinating

    Getting started is the hardest part for many students. Don’t put off studying until the last minute. Encourage your child to get started early, even if it’s something small. It’s much easier for your child to keep going once he or she has gotten started.

    Study A Bit Each Day

    Review what your child has learned in class each day. This can be a quick 10-15 minute session where your child goes over his or her notes from class. Daily recaps will help make studying for tests easier because your child is reviewing the material each day rather than trying to cram all this learning into a short amount of time.

    Plan Study Sessions In Advance

    When your child has an upcoming test, plan out which days will be reserved for studying. Having planned dedicated study days will give your child structure and help avoid procrastination.

    Follow A Schedule

    On top of planning study days, create a schedule that outlines exactly when your child will study. Block off time after school or after dinner that your child will use to study for the upcoming test. If there is no upcoming test, use this time to work on other projects and assignments.

    Find Your Child’s Best Study Time

    When creating your schedule, keep in mind when your child studies best. Some children prefer to study during the day, while others like studying later at night. Work with your child to find out he or she is most productive and schedule study sessions for that time of day.

    Prioritize School Work

    Even students with good intentions end up cramming last minute because they just have too much work. To make sure this doesn’t happen, help your child prioritize his or her work as soon as things are assigned. You can prioritize based on due date or how much an assignment or test is worth.

    Space Out Study Sessions

    Cram sessions aren’t effective because there is no long-term learning involved. By spacing out study sessions over a couple days (or even weeks) students’ minds have time to absorb, understand, and recall the material. Rather than studying for hours at one time, encourage your child to space out study sessions in the week leading up to the test.

    Study Material In Chunks

    Don’t try to study all the material at once. Instead, try studying a topic or two each day. Chunking material like this will make studying seem less overwhelming to your child. It will also help spread out study sessions for better long-term recall. Just make sure you start early enough to get through all the material!

    Take Good Notes In Class

    By taking good notes in class, it will be easier for your child to organize and review when it comes to test time. Taking organized, in-depth notes in class also means that your child already has quality review notes to study from.

    Keep Up With Homework & Assignments

    Falling behind on schoolwork is a big reason students find themselves cramming for tests. Know when homework and assignments are due, so you can schedule your child’s time effectively. This way, when your child has a test to study for, he or she isn’t scrambling to get everything done.

    Save The Night Before For Final Review

    Rather than cramming the night before a test, encourage your child to use the time for light review. The night before isn’t the time to start studying something new. Instead, go over any areas your child has been struggling with or needs an extra refresher.

    Learn From Your Experience

    If your child ends up in a situation where he or she is cramming the night before a test, take time to figure out why. Did your child have too much other work? Did he or she procrastinate getting started? Once you know the reasons, think about how your child can avoid the situation next time. This might be using an agenda to keep better track of assignments or getting started studying for the next test earlier.

    How to cram for a test

    While creating a solid study plan that spans over several days is considered the best practice for exams, sometimes life happens, and students need to fit a week’s worth of studying into a few days, or even just one night. With that in mind, here are three study plans students can use no matter how much (or little) time they have.

    Steps for Every Study Plan

    In her text Essential Study Skills, 8th ed, author Linda Wong outlines the process for creating a study plan that all students can benefit from as they approach finals week.

    Step 1: Identify specific topics and make a list of all topics and materials that need to be reviewed before the upcoming test.

    Step 2: Schedule specific days and times to review the materials and topics.

    Step 3: Create a plan of action for each review session. To avoid wasting review time, create a pattern or plan for reviewing each time you sit down. Throughout this review process, plan to make summary notes for the information you feel you need to review further.

    “The 5-Day Plan”

    Ideally, studying should start at least five days in advance of the exam to allow students an ample amount of time to go over course concepts and materials, and reach out to their instructor or peers if they find they have any questions. Linda Wong outlines the 5-day study plan in her text and suggests how students could organize their study sessions:

    Organize specific blocks of time on days 1, 2, 3, and 4 for review sessions. On day 5, dedicate all of your study time to reviewing your summary notes. Mark the study/ review days and times on your calendar or your weekly schedule. Coordinate these times with other students if you are going to review with a study partner or study group.

    Example of schedule:

    “The 3-Day Plan”

    Like the 5-day plan, the 3-Day plan has the benefit of giving the student time to fully go over course materials and lecture notes, and also gives them just enough time to reach out to their instructor or peers with questions.

    Students should still create a schedule like the one for the 5-day plan, but rather than try to block out longer periods of time for studying and set themselves up for information overload, students should block out multiple shorter blocks of time and take regular short breaks to help maintain focus.

    Here’s an example schedule for the 3-Day plan:

    “The 1-Day Plan”

    Sometimes life happens, and even though they meant to start studying days in advance, many students find themselves in the quandary of having to cram for an exam during finals week. Unfortunately, studying for hours-long sessions or pulling an all-nighter usually isn’t an effective strategy for memory retention, but there are four steps students can take to improve their odds:

    Step 1: Follow steps like you would for a 5-day plan, by organizing materials, identifying topics, and creating a schedule—taking care to include time to breaks.

    Step 2: Study—review materials, create summary notes for difficult concepts and take regular breaks. If students have other classes or activities, saving summary or lecture notes to their smartphone or using apps like MindTap are great strategies for studying on the go.

    Step 3: Get some sleep! Many students think pulling an all-nighter will help them perform better, but a lack of sleep impedes working memory function and attentiveness—which won’t help at all on exam day.

    Reference: Wong, Linda. 2015. Essential Study Skills, 8 th ed. Stamford, CT: Cengage Learning.

    Explore Events

    Connect with us in person or online on our events page.

    How to cram for a test

    Corbis / Getty Images / Getty Images

    Exams can seem intimidating and overwhelming for biology students. The key to overcoming these obstacles is preparation. By learning how to study for biology exams you can conquer your fears. Remember, the purpose of an exam is for you to demonstrate that you understand the concepts and information that have been taught. Below are some excellent tips to help you learn how to study for biology exams.

    Get Organized

    An important key to success in biology is organization. Good time management skills will help you to become more organized and waste less time preparing to study. Items such as daily planners and semester calendars will help you to know what you need to do and when you need to have it done.

    Start Studying Early

    It is very important that you start preparing for biology exams well in advance. I know, I know, it is almost ​tradition for some to wait until the last minute, but students who implore this tactic don’t perform their best, don’t retain the information and get worn out.

    Review the Textbook and Lecture Notes

    Be sure that you review your lecture notes before the exam. You should start reviewing your notes on a daily basis. This will ensure that you gradually learn the information over time and don’t have to cram.

    Your biology textbook is a wonderful source for finding illustrations and diagrams that will help you visualize the concepts you are learning. Be sure to reread and review the appropriate chapters and information in your textbook. You will want to make sure that you understand all the key concepts and topics.

    Get Answers To Your Questions

    If you are having difficulty understanding a topic or have unanswered questions, discuss them with your teacher. You don’t want to go into an exam with gaps in your knowledge.

    Get together with a friend or classmate and have a study session. Take turns asking and answering questions. Write your answers down in complete sentences to help you organize and express your thoughts.

    If your teacher holds a review session, be sure to attend. This will help to identify specific topics that will be covered, as well as fill in any gaps in knowledge. Help sessions are also an ideal place to get answers to your questions.

    Quiz Yourself

    To help prepare yourself for the exam and find out how much you know, give yourself a quiz. You can do this by using prepared flash cards or taking a sample test. You can also use online biology games and quiz resources. If your teacher holds a review session, be sure to attend. This will help to identify specific topics that will be covered, as well as fill in any gaps in knowledge. Help sessions are also an ideal place to get answers to your questions.


    Now that you have followed the previous steps, it’s time to rest and relax. You should be well prepared for your biology exam. It’s a good idea to make sure you get plenty of sleep the night before your exam. You have nothing to worry about because you are well prepared.

    Take An AP Biology Course

    Those who wish to gain credit for introductory college level biology courses should consider taking an Advanced Placement Biology course. Students enrolled in the AP Biology course must take the AP Biology exam to gain credit. Most colleges will give credit for entry-level biology courses for students who earn a score of 3 or better on the exam.

    Use Good Study Aids

    Biology flash cards are excellent tools for studying and memorizing key biology terms and information. AP Biology Flash Cards are a wonderful resource, not only for those taking AP Biology but also for biology students in general. If taking the AP Biology exam, these Top Five AP Biology Books contain extremely useful information that is sure to help you score high on the AP Biology exam.

    How to cram for a test

    Test Tactics: Mental Preparation

    Because tests tend to have a high degree of importance in how well you score in a class, it is understandable that taking tests can create a great deal of anxiety for many students. Even students who know they have learned all of the required material for the test find their minds going blank as they stare at the test. One of the easiest ways to overcome that anxiety is to prepare mentally for the test.

    Audio Version of this Post

    Mental Preparation Techniques

    Mentally preparing for an exam is not as difficult as it may sound. There are simple techniques that any student can use to ensure they are ready for the test when it is time to take it.

    Do not procrastinate.

    Study the material for the test when it becomes available, and continue to review the material up until the test day. By waiting until the last minute and trying to cram for the test the night before, you actually increase the amount of anxiety you feel. This leads to an increase in negative self-talk, such as I can’t learn this. I’m going to fail, which decreases your performance on the test. How to handle Procrastination

    Stay Positive

    The use of positive self-talk serves both to drown out negative self-talk and to increase your confidence in your abilities. Whenever you begin feeling overwhelmed or anxious about the test, tell yourself that you know the material and that you can pass the test. Use only positive words. Examples: I am smart. I will do well on this test. I have studied. I know the material. The thing to remember about negative self talk is, 1) we all have it, and 2) Why listen? It’s your fantasy, so if you can’t be a winner and positive in your own fantasy, what are you doing?

    Don’t Compare

    Do not compare yourself to other students, or compare your performance to theirs. Rather than worrying about how others will do or whether they think it is difficult, focus on your worries and your abilities. Regardless of how others perform, your performance is the only one that matters for your grade. Comparing yourself to others increase your anxiety and your level of negative self-talk before the test.


    Picture yourself taking the test and knowing the answers. Visualize yourself doing well on the test and having no problems with the material. Visualizations of you succeeding will increase your confidence in your abilities, which decreases the anxiety you feel before the test. Instead of thinking of this as a test, think of it as an opportunity to show what you know and what you have learned.

    Avoid negative classmates.

    Worry is contagious. Even if you are relaxed and confident, being around anxious, worried classmates will cause you to start feeling anxious. Before the test, avoid listening to the fears of friends and classmates.

    Feeling anxious and worried before an exam is normal, and every student experiences those feelings at some point. The problem with anxiety arises when it interferes with your ability to take the exam and perform well. Practicing mental preparation techniques and remembering that the test is not the only measure of your academic performance will ease your anxiety and ensure that you perform at your best.

    • Course Info
      • –Supplemental Course Schedule
      • –Other Courses
        • HE 1115
        • MATH 1101
    • Tutoring Info
      • –About Tutoring
      • –Office Hours and Tutoring Schedule
      • –LSC Tutoring Opportunities
    • Studying Together
      • –Student Guide for Studying Together
      • –Motivation Stations!
      • –Find Study Partners
      • –Accountability Buddies
    • How to Study
        • –Effective Study Strategies
        • –Concept Mapping
        • –Guidelines for Creating a Study Schedule
        • –Five-Day Study Plan
        • –What To Do With Practice Exams
        • –Consider Exam Logistics
        • –Online Exam Checklist
        • –Open-Book Exams
        • –How to Tackle Exam Questions
        • –What To Do When You Get Your Graded Test (or Essay) Back
        • –The Cornell Note Taking System
        • –3 P’s for Effective Reading
        • –Textbook Reading Systems
        • –Online Learning Checklist
        • –Things to Keep in Mind as you Participate in Online Classes
        • –Learning from Online Lectures and Discussions
        • –Online Group Work
        • –Learning Online Resource Videos
    • Managing Time and Stress
      • –Managing Time
      • –Managing Stress
      • –The Perils of Multitasking
      • –Break the Cycle of Procrastination!
    • Support and Resources
      • –Start Strong!
      • –LSC Scholarship
      • –Study Skills Workshops and Group Consults
      • –Private Consultations
      • –Non-LSC Academic Resources
      • –Campus Resources and Support
      • –Resources for Advisors and Faculty
      • –Presentation Support (aka Practice Your Talk on a Dog)
    • Our Office
      • –About LSC
      • –Meet The Staff
      • –Contact Us

    Don’t Cram, Use a Five-Day Study Plan!

    How to cram for a testThe simple keys to a five-day study plan:

    1. Figure out what you need to know in (“prepare”).
    2. Make sure you know it (“review”).
    3. Start in advance & switch things up.

    1. Preparing study material for an exam is an active process. This is where you identify, organize, and consolidate your material. You want to end up with a study guide, flash cards, quizlets, concept maps, practice test questions that you made up, etc. (Don’t just passively re-write your notes or re-read a chapter–instead make something new.) Staring this five days before your exam helps solidify the material, plus it gives you time to identify what you still don’t understand so you can get your questions answered.

    2. Reviewing the material you prepared should also be active-this is where you figure out how much you actually know and what you still need to work on. Try “blank page testing,” quizzing yourself or a friend, and/or taking practice exams.

    Some Examples of Preparation and Review Strategies

    3. Switch up preparation and review

    People learn faster and perform better if they work in brief blocks of time spread out over longer periods of time, rather than in a few lengthy “cram” sessions. For example:

    • You will perform better on an exam if you spend one hour studying each day for 20 days than if you spend 10 hours studying each day for two days before the test.
    • It is easier to learn to shoot a 3-pointer better if you practice a little bit each day for a month rather than have one marathon session in an afternoon.
    • You will learn the tuba best if you practice a little each day (though your roommate may disagree about anything regarding you learning the tuba–fair enough).

    Put that principle to work by mixing up preparation and review. Don’t do all of your preparation, then stop that and do all of your review. Mix them up to learn best! (Use this principle to your advantage when you need to prepare for multiple exams/projects simultaneously–it can be a great silver lining in those stressful times to know that going back and forth to work on multiple subjects helps you learn each one better.)

    How to Make a Five-Day Study Plan

    1. Break the material on the exam into chunks or groups of material. (By chapter? Topic? Lecture? You decide what makes sense depending on your class.) For the example below, we will use 4 chunks or groups of material (A, B, C, and D). For example, Chunk A might be chapters 1-2, Chunk B is chapter 3, Chunk C is chapters 4-5, and Chunk D is chapter 6.
    2. Plan to spend about 2 hours studying on each of the five days.
    3. Work with the material in 2 ways: preparation and review.
    4. Decide what preparation and review strategies will work best for you, and include those on your five-day study plan chart. Click here for a downloadable word document of a Five-Day Study Plan.

    Sample Five-Day Study Plan Chart

    Click here for a downloadable word document of A Five-Day Study Plan.

    Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4 Day 5
    Prepare Chunk A: 2hrs Prepare Chunk B: 2 hrs;
    Review Chunk A: 30 min
    Prepare Chunk C: 1.5 hrs;
    Review Chunk B: 30 min;
    Review Chunk A: 15 min
    Prepare Chunk D: 1 hr;
    Review Chunk C: 30 min;
    Review Chunk B: 15 min;
    Review Chunk A: 15 min
    Review Chunk D: 25 min;
    Review Chunk C: 15 min;
    Review Chunk B: 10 min;
    Review Chunk A: 10 min
    Self-test on A, B, C, D: 1 hr

    You will have to get creative with your plan for those times when you have two or three prelims or other big assignments in the same week.

    During the five days you are studying for your exam be kind to your future self and don’t neglect your other courses!

    Find Your Dream School

    COVID-19 Update: To help students through this crisis, The Princeton Review will continue our “Enroll with Confidence” refund policies. For full details, please click here.

    $25 Off

    Enter your email to unlock an extra $25 off an SAT or ACT program!

    By submitting my email address. I certify that I am 13 years of age or older, agree to recieve marketing email messages from The Princeton Review, and agree to Terms of Use.

    You have a test on the horizon. It’s a big one, and you know you need to hit the books. Not sure where or how to begin? Don’t panic! Learn how to study for a test, step-by-step.

    How to cram for a test

    1. Ask the right questions

    You don’t want to walk in on test day unprepared for what you’re about to face. Try to get the answers to these crucial questions before you start studying.

    Questions to ask before a test

    • What material will the test cover?
    • Will there be an exam review session during class?
    • Will there be after-school opportunities for more review?
    • What is the format of the exam? Multiple-choice? Short answer? Will there be essays to write?
    • How many points is the exam worth?
    • Do you have specific study tips to help me prepare? (After all, your teacher knows your work the best!).

    2. Sort out your schedule

    You can actually spend less time studying for your exam if you start with a great game plan. Make a list of what topics you need to cover and when you’re going to cover them. Start your study schedule as early as possible (usually a few weeks before your test), and figure out how much time you’ll need to study each day to stay on track.

    3. Grab your gear

    Gather up all your class notes, quizzes, handouts and worksheets. Your previous homework will help you see what your teacher thinks is important. (Plus, you can learn from your past quiz mistakes).

    Study for exams in this order: 1.) definitely 2.) probably 3.) might be on the test.

    4. Study smarter

    Instead of memorizing all your notes, prioritize what you’ll study. Start with what will definitely be on the the test, then what will probably be on the test, and finally what might be on the test. That way, if you run out of time, you know you at least have the essentials covered. By starting with the toughest material first, you have time to ask your teacher questions or get help from our tutors.

    5. Mix it up

    Now that you know WHAT you need to study, figure out the best way to review and internalize what you predict will be on the exam. Make flashcards for history class, outline your biology notes, record yourself practicing your French accent—whatever you need to do to get ready. Check out our favorite “outside of the box” study methods.

    6. What keeps you motivated?

    Study groups can help you study more efficiently for exams. Make a plan with friends to review the class material together, share and compare notes, or work through tricky concepts. Or, reward yourself for each study session with something small (even if it’s just a TV break) to help you stay focused.

    7. Sleep still matters

    An all-nighter might sound like a good idea, but a restful night’s sleep is actually the key to your success. Start a healthy sleep routine in the weeks leading up to your exam, so you’ll be fresh and ready for test day. (But if you do happen to need some midnight study help, our on-demand tutors are there for you.)

    8. Bring what you’re supposed to bring

    Find out what you’re allowed to bring to the exam, and make sure you don’t leave anything essential at home. Many teachers will let you bring a calculator to math or science exams. Some classes may even hold open textbook or open notes exams. Stash pens, papers, and extra paper in your bag, so you’re ready for anything.

    Stuck on how to study for exams?

    Try an online tutoring session with one of our experts, and get help in 40+ subjects.

    Find Your Dream School

    COVID-19 Update: To help students through this crisis, The Princeton Review will continue our “Enroll with Confidence” refund policies. For full details, please click here.

    $25 Off

    Enter your email to unlock an extra $25 off an SAT or ACT program!

    By submitting my email address. I certify that I am 13 years of age or older, agree to recieve marketing email messages from The Princeton Review, and agree to Terms of Use.

    Final exams aren’t just any tests. They draw upon your knowledge from the entire semester, and you have to take a whole bunch of them at once. Depending on how your finals are weighted, your final exam grade could even mean the difference between an A and a C on your transcript!

    Follow our ultimate studying guide, and earn a top grade on your final exams.

    How to cram for a test

    1. Make a finals game plan.

    If you plan out your study sessions (for ALL your exams), you’ll get a better handle on how much work you’re facing. Use the calendar on your phone to set alerts and reminders for yourself so you stick to your plan.

    2. Start early.

    Start studying for finals a few weeks before the first exam, and figure out how much time to set aside each day for each subject. Be realistic about how long it will take to, say, memorize the dates for all the Civil War battles. You need to fit in brain breaks, too!

    3. Study in this order: a) definitely b) probably c) might be on the final

    Don’t just start from the beginning of your notes and try to cram everything in: Think about what you know for sure will be on each test and review that material first. Then move on to studying what will probably be on the test, then what might be covered. That way, if you run out of time, you know you at least have the basics nailed. Ask your teachers if they’ll share copies of previous finals so you can see what might be covered or how questions will be phrased.

    4. Give yourself more time to study for your toughest classes.

    If chemistry gave you trouble all semester, devote more time to that subject—even if it’s your last final. Look over your previous tests for the year, if you scored poorly on one unit in Spanish, chances are you didn’t absorb it all the first time. Take extra time now to review what you missed. By starting with the toughest stuff first, you have time to ask your teacher questions or get help from our tutors.

    5. Form a study group.

    There’s nothing like peer pressure to keep you motivated to study. Make a plan with friends to review the class material, compare notes, or work through tricky concepts. You’ll benefit from the good study habits and notes of the other members in your study group. if you’re trying to solve a tough math problem, two heads are better than one.

    6. Talk it out.

    Not only is it more fun to study with your friends than studying by yourself, you’ll also learn more. By talking through the facts and formulas with a study partner, you’re thinking about the material more deeply, which means you’ll remember it better later.

    7. Get creative with study aids.

    Now that you know what key concepts from each subject you need to prioritize, find the best way to review and internalize what you predict will be on the final exam. Make flash cards to help you memorize dates and equations. Or come up with a mnemonic device—a system of memorizing facts using a phrase or acronym you’ll definitely remember. For example, using the name Roy G. Biv helps to remember the order of colors in a rainbow.

    8. Study your notes.

    Outline your class notes for daily review. Notes and flashcards are also great for last-minute review the morning of your exam.

    9. Quiz yourself.

    If you’re studying at home, have your mom or dad quiz you on the information you’ve already studied. Students tend to remember the information they’ve been quizzed on better than the information they simply review.

    10. Make sleep a priority.

    While it may be tempting to pull an all-nighter and cram everything in at the last minute, it’s a bad idea. You just add stress, and you won’t retain the information for very long by studying that way. You may even forget some of it by the time the test begins.

    11. Take five.

    Take breaks to improve your concentration when you return to studying: Veg out with an episode of your favorite TV show or play a couple rounds of Wii tennis.

    12. Brain food is real.

    Eat healthy and drink plenty of water to keep your brain firing on all cylinders.

    Still stuck on how to study for finals?

    We can help! Try a session with one of our online tutors. We can walk you through tricky concepts or study strategies—whatever you need, 24/7.

    How to cram for a test

    It’s finals week, and you’re trying to make the most of your study time. You probably know by now that cramming isn’t the best way to learn (or live), but even the best students usually have to hustle at the end of the semester to prepare for a busy line-up of exams.

    Before you hit the books, review these study secrets, which will maximize your cramming efforts and help you stay sane, too.

    Plan Your Attack

    At the beginning of any study session, review exactly what you need to accomplish and set your priorities. How much time do you have? What do you need to study? How and where will you work best? Taking a few minutes to devise a plan will keep you from feeling overwhelmed, plus make sure you won’t forget an essential task or prioritize inappropriately.

    When I sit down for a study session, I make a list of the topics I need to review and how much time each will require. I then create a schedule with 30-minute time slots, which I fill first with the topics that are giving me the most trouble.

    Review Readings

    You won’t be able to re-read your assignments for the semester, but you should go over all of your reading notes. If you didn’t keep good reading notes, find book reviews or secondary sources with summaries of themes and important points.

    Next, if you have time, read the introduction and conclusion of the articles or books you’ll be tested on. It can also be helpful to work with a classmate to review the most important passages and talk through the main arguments.

    When I review readings, I rely on annotations that I made the first time I read to help me skim later. Obviously, annotating is something you have to do before you cram, so it may not help you this week. But, if you didn’t use an annotation method this semester, you should next semester. Careful annotation will help you identity key arguments and supporting points without having to reread the entire text. Here’s a short tutorial on one method for annotating a text.

    Space Out Repetitions

    If you have a lot of information you need to memorize, you’re probably planning to rely on repetition. It’s widely known that repetition aids memory, but what most of us don’t realize is that how we space those repetitions is important, too. We learn better when we space out study repetitions over time, rather than bunching them together.

    What’s more, intervals—or leaving time in between repetitions—are not the most efficient use of study time. Instead, try interleaving. Leave one subject of study, review another, and then come back. You’ll find the best results if you block your study repetitions in a randomized order. For example, if you have three subjects to review, start with the first, then move on to the third, back to the first, on to the second, back to the third, then second. Try not to repeat the pattern so that your brain has to guess what comes next.

    Study in a Similar Context

    Have you ever walked into a familiar room and had an old memory pop up? That happens because contextual information—sights, sounds, smells, and feelings—can affect our ability to recall. In other words, our surroundings often cue memories.

    I like to study in a library or an empty lecture hall since the temperature, sounds, and smells are similar to the exam setting. I begin by taking five minutes to sit quietly and clear my head in order to get into an exam-like state of focus before studying.

    Don’t Skip on Sleep

    Studying is the key to testing success, but what many students fail to appreciate is that sleep is also essential. Sleep deprivation hinders your ability to perform complex cognitive tasks, so, sacrificing a few hours sleep for extra cramming time can actually be counterproductive.

    Even if it means less time spent with your material, make sure you sleep well the night before an exam. Stay away from caffeine, limit naps to 30 minutes, and turn of your mobile devices.

    What other study strategies work for you? Tell us your tips!

    How to cram for a test

    The night before a big test can be stressful for students. Many students wonder how they should be preparing for tomorrow’s test.

    First things first—preparing for a test the night before doesn’t mean waiting until then to start studying. It’s important to make sure you start studying early! Cramming the night before will only leave you stressed and frustrated.

    Knowing how to properly prepare for your test can reduce test anxiety and help you get a better grade. Keep reading to find out what to do the night before a test or exam (and what mistakes to avoid) so you can do your best.

    9 Things To Do The Night Before A Test

    1. Review your study notes

    Use the night before the test for simple revision. You shouldn’t be tackling anything brand new the night before your test. Instead, review the study notes you have created during your study sessions over the past few days.

    Revise topics one by one

    Work your way through your study notes, covering topics one by one. Once you have revised a topic, take a minute to make sure you remember and understand the material. If the answer is no, go back and revise the areas that need an extra refresher.

    Don’t study too late

    Late night cram sessions aren’t a very effective way to study. It may seem like you’re making the most of your time by studying until the last minute, but by not giving your brain a chance to rest you’ll have a harder time remembering the information you studied.

    Eat a good meal

    Giving your mind the brain power it needs is important if you want to do well on your test. That means eating a good meal the night before while you’re doing your final revision of the material. Take time to sit down for a family dinner while you take a break from studying to refuel your brain.

    Prepare for the morning

    Gather all the materials you’ll need for your test the next day. Make sure you have extra pens, pencils, erasers, and any tools you need (like a ruler or calculator). Pack everything into your backpack the night before so you can avoid last minute searching and panic the next morning.

    Give your brain a break

    Take some time before bed to put away your study notes and relax. Read a book, write in a journal, or talk to your family. This will help you wind down before bed, making it easier to get a good night’s sleep so your brain can process the information you spent the evening reviewing.

    Get some exercise

    After spending time reviewing for your test, get some exercise by going outside for a short walk. Getting a little bit of exercise will help reduce any stress you are feeling and recharge your brain.

    Set your alarm so you don’t oversleep the morning of your test. Give yourself some extra time in the morning to eat a good breakfast and get ready for the day without feeling rushed.

    Get a good sleep

    One of the most important things the night before a test is to get a full night’s sleep so your brain can remember what you’ve studied. Make sure you go to bed at a set time so you can wake up on test day feeling refreshed and well-rested.

    Still struggling with study skills? Learn how our study skills tutoring program can help!

    How to cram for a test

    Kendra Cherry, MS, is an author and educational consultant focused on helping students learn about psychology.

    How to cram for a test

    James Lacy, MLS, is a fact-checker and researcher.

    Psychology exams can be stress-inducing, but there is no need to panic as test day approaches. While there are no sure-fire shortcuts when studying for a psychology test, there are things that you can do to get the most out of your study time.

    Preparation is always the key to doing well on any exam, so by starting early and making the most of the time and resources that are available, you will feel better able to tackle the test and less likely to experience test anxiety. By following these relatively simple strategies, you can be sure that you’ll be ready when test day arrives.

    Start Studying Early

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Hero Images / Getty Images

    Don’t wait until the night before an exam to start hitting the books. From the very first day of class, establish a regular study schedule.   Plan to spend at least one hour studying for every hour that you spend in class, but be prepared to set aside more time as you delve deeper into the subject.

    It is also important to consider your own abilities, weaknesses, and the subject-matter at hand when creating a study schedule. There might be certain areas where you excel that require less focused attention, while other areas might be much more of a struggle.

    Devise a study schedule that allows you to review all of the information covered in class and still spend extra time on those particularly difficult concepts.

    Become an Active Listener

    ” data-caption=”” data-expand=”300″ data-tracking-container=”true” />

    Kristian Sekulic / Getty Images

    Class lectures are not a time to kick back and let the instructor drone on. Instead, focus on becoming an active listener and participant in psychology lectures and discussions. Read the assigned textbook material before each class session and make note of any questions you may have.

    During the lecture, take quality psychology notes that you can review later.   Don’t worry about writing down everything that the instructor says, but do try to outline major topics, ideas, and questions.

    Also remember, if the lecturer feels that something is important enough to write down on the board or overhead slide, then you should definitely include it in your lecture notes.

    There is a very strong probability that the information will end up appearing on your next test.

    The average pre-dental student may spend over 200 hours preparing for the DAT across several months, but what happens if you realize that your test date is a month away and you haven’t started your study plan yet? Studying for the DAT in one month is a challenging task, but if you already have a very strong science and math foundation and are able to devote a significant amount of study time per week, then you may still be able to earn the score you need by following this week-by-week plan.
    Before you get started, you’ll need to gather together your study materials. Here is our recommended list:

    ADA’s DAT Program Guide

    Reviewing the official guide is a required step before registering for the DAT, but it’s full of helpful information about test logistics, content, and timing so is a great place to start regardless

    ADA’s DAT Sample Test Items

    This PDF from the ADA contains released questions from previous DAT administrations. These items were taken from older, pencil-and-paper-based DAT tests, and the formatting and specific content tested have been updated since then, but this is still a great resource for getting familiar with the test and the way questions are asked.

    ADA’s DAT Practice Test (Web-based format)

    The ADA offers one online practice test for purchase through Prometric. Like the Sample Items, this test is composed of questions released from previous administrations of the DAT. However, this test is only accessible once and cannot be reviewed later. Additionally, your results will only include raw scores (numbers correct) and not scaled scores or percentiles.

    Kaplan’s DAT 2021-2022 Strategies, Practice, and Review

    With Kaplan’s DAT book, you not only get the printed resources that cover the subject matter from all the test sections but also access to two full-length practice tests online. It’s worth getting the book for these tests alone since they provide realistic practice that includes scaled scores and percentiles for each section as well as detailed explanations for every question.

    Online calendar

    An online calendar can be a great tool for keeping track of and accessing your personal study plan from almost any location. Plus, you can share your calendar with others so they know your schedule and can help you stay on track.

    Online DAT flashcards

    When you only have a few minutes to study, a set of flashcards can be a great tool. You can make your cards or use an existing set made by a fellow test taker. Additionally, if you purchase the Kaplan book above, you’ll also be able to use the tear-out study sheets from the back that contain all the most important equations and facts for studying on the go.

    DAT Study Schedule: Week 1

    • Start by taking a practice test or question set that covers all the topics from the DAT to familiarize yourself with the test and establish your baseline performance. The DAT Sample Test Items from the ADA is a great resource for this.
    • Use your initial test results to determine which content areas you need to work on both. Modifying the study plan below accordingly. For example, if you did well on all molecular biology questions, you might only study those topics briefly and spend more time on a Biology subject you didn’t do as well with, such as anatomy and physiology.
    • Fill in your calendar with study blocks, planning to study at minimum for three hours per day, six days per week. Leave one day off from studying per week so you have time to recharge.
    • Devote one full day this week to each of Perceptual Ability, Biology, General Chemistry, Organic Chemistry, and Quantitative Reasoning.
      • PAT: learn the rules of each subtest and the strategies you will use for each
      • Bio: cell and molecular biology
      • Gen Chem: atomic and molecular structure, periodic trends, and stoichiometry. Use stoichiometry questions to practice Quant. strategies as well.
      • Orgo: nomenclature, stereochemistry, and aromaticity and bonding
      • Quant: numerical calculations, algebra, and conversions

    How to cram for a test

    Is Longer Better?

    Let’s consider two typical college students. Mary feels passionate about getting an “A” on the next economics test. So for one week solid, she studies in three hour increments. She scarcely takes a break during these marathon study sessions. Yet, to her exasperation, she still only manages to get a C+.

    Rodney is in the same economics class. He has spent the past four weeks studying class material, about 45 minutes a day, in 20 minute chunks, separated by a five minute break. To some people’s amazement, he gets A-Pluses regularly, and he did so on the economics test.

    So what made the difference? Shouldn’t that A-Plus belong to Mary? Not at all. Because Rodney learned to master his study time better than Mary did. He learned that: a) Effective time management (studying over a long period of time instead of just a night or two before the test) is better than cramming; and b) the brain is not as effective in retaining knowledge after a certain amount of time–usually 20 to 50 minutes at a time. With all of that said, here are four time management tips that will make you a more effective and efficient studier.

    Audio Version of this Post

    Tips for Managing your Time and Study Sessions

    How to cram for a test

    Start by understanding how much you should be studying each week.

    If you’re in junior high or high school, or studying for a high school entrance exam like the HSPT, there’s a good rule thumb that goes like this: Study the same number of hours per week as your current grade level. Seventh-graders study seven hours a week; 10th graders study 10 hours, and so on. Once you know this, you can divide these hours by the number of days you plan to study. If you’re a 10th grader and you only want to study five days a week, that means you should plan two hours of study each day.

    If you’re in college, the rule of thumb is a bit different.

    The traditional rule says that you should study two hours for every hour that your class meets. In reality, every student has easy courses that require much less study time. Still, for the difficult classes, the two-for-one ratio is a good idea.

    Here’s a familiar scenario. It’s the day before a big calculus exam, and you haven’t studied for whatever reason (short on time, too many other exams packed into the same day, etc.). Around 10 p.m., you finally sit down to review the calculus materials. Six hours later, you catch a short “nap” before rushing to school. You take the exam, and it seems to go fine. Although it wasn’t your best effort, you pass and promise not to repeat the cycle when it’s time for your next one.

    This is what’s known as cramming. And while students, parents and educators have long known it’s not ideal, in desperate circumstances, it works to some degree. And by some degree, we mean it might save your GPA. But cramming doesn’t provide long-term learning, according to Dr. Robert A. Bjork, distinguished research professor in the department of psychology at UCLA where he focuses on how we learn versus how we think we learn. (Spoiler: We are usually wrong.)

    “[Cramming] can have pretty dramatic effects on the exam,” Bjork says. “It will work in the sense of performance on an exam administered right at the end of cramming. [Students] get an impression that it really works, but it just works on the short term. It’s accompanied with a dramatic forgetting rate after that.” This is especially problematic when one lesson provides foundational information for the next, like in a math or language class.

    Forgetting most of what you learned is not the only downside to cramming. Researchers have found that losing sleep while pulling an all-nighter also leads to residual academic problems for days after the cramming session. You can imagine the negative effects of an ongoing cycle of procrastination and cramming.

    Spaced-out Learning

    More than a century of research shows that if you study something twice, retention goes up, Bjork explains. Studying and then waiting before you study more produces even better long-term memory. This is called the spacing effect.

    “It’s often something students don’t understand,” Bjork says. Rather than reviewing material right away, students benefit from spacing out their study sessions. There are many arguments about why spacing works better for long-term retention. One relates to encoding.

    When a student studies something from a book and reviews it immediately, the student will encode the information in the same way, Bjork explains. However, the more ways students can encode information, the better they will understand it and the longer they will know it. This means that even studying the same material in two locations can help them encode it in different ways; therefore they learn it more successfully.

    Another idea is that the harder it is for our brain to recall something, the more powerful the effects of that recall will be for long-term learning. For example, if you are at a meeting and encounter someone new, you might recall their name immediately, which probably won’t help you remember it the next day. However, if you need to recall the person’s name an hour into the meeting and do so, you’ll have a better chance of remembering it a day or a week later because you had to put in effort to recall it.

    A third reason why spacing works is that people pay less attention to the second presentation of material they have just seen because the information is already familiar. When the material is spaced out, it’s no longer as familiar, so people pay more attention.

    Dr. Will Thalheimer, founder of Work-Learning Research, which focuses on research-based innovations in learning evaluations, explains that when it comes to learning, presenting material more than once is beneficial, but doing it over time is even better and “facilitates long-term remembering.” And while spacing may slow the learning process because you’ll be studying for more than one evening, it significantly reduces forgetting.

    However, many students continue to opt for cramming and believe in its efficacy.

    A 2009 study by UCLA’s Dr. Nate Kornell found that spacing was more effective than cramming for 90 percent of the participants; just 6 percent of those who crammed learned more than those who studied using the spacing effect. In three experiments, researchers tested spacing against cramming, yet despite the findings in favor of spacing, participants believed that the cramming style was more effective.

    Mixing It Up

    If the spacing effect sounds like a lot of waiting around to review material, recent studies have shown the positive effects of mixing up different material while studying. This concept, called interleaving, consists of working on or studying one skill for a short period of time, then switching to another one, then maybe a third, then back to the first.

    A 2015 study tested interleaving in nine middle school classrooms teaching algebra and geometry. A day after the lesson for the unit was complete, the students trained with interleaving scored 25 percent better than students who received standard instruction. A month later, the interleaving group was up 76 percent.

    This is great news. Studying for an exam or completing a big project doesn’t need to feel so daunting, and interleaving has benefits for writing, too. Rather than trying to block out two hours to study for a math test, study math for 30 minutes before you move to French and then work on an essay. Go back to math later.

    “That produces substantially longer and better retention,” Bjork says. “It has a lot of implications that we are exploring.”

    There is a message here for teachers as well as students. Instead of teaching a topic in a block and going to the next topic, teachers can spend a short time on a topic, go on to others then return to the earlier topics.

    “There is a lot to learn about how to learn,” says Bjork. “People’s intuitions are not the best guide.”

    A 2012 UCLA study from professor of psychiatry Andrew J. Fuligni and UCLA graduate student Cari Gillen-O’Neel found that staying up and foregoing sleep to study is actually counterproductive. No matter how much a student studies daily, if they sacrifice sleep in order to study more, they’re likely to have more academic problems — not less — the next day.

    Find Your Dream School

    COVID-19 Update: To help students through this crisis, The Princeton Review will continue our “Enroll with Confidence” refund policies. For full details, please click here.

    You can’t cram for the GRE test. By and large, the exam is a test of patterns, not facts, so if you want to raise your GRE score, you will need sufficient time to practice. We suggest you devote between 4 and 12 weeks to GRE preparation.

    How to cram for a test

    1. Find your baseline

    Your baseline score is the score you would receive if you took the GRE today. Before you make a study plan, take a full-length GRE practice test under the same testing environment as the real thing. The results will guide your prep by showing you which content areas you need to focus on the most.

    2. Determine your target GRE score

    You’ve probably started making a list of the graduate programs that interest you. Compare your practice test score against the average GRE scores of the most recent incoming class to each program (find this information on the school website or in our grad school profiles). Your target score is one that would put you at or above the average for the schools on your wishlist.

    3. Make a plan to close the gap

    Whether you choose a prep course, online program, or a test prep book, you need a smart prep plan that will hold you accountable and give you the results you need. With a little research you’ll find the right environment for you.

    4. Practice for technique

    Focus on how you approach each question while taking practice tests and drills. If you focus on just the results, you do nothing more than reinforce the way you are taking the test right now. The techniques you use and the way you solve a problem are what help you get better at taking the GRE.

    5. Mimic real GRE conditions

    Paper-and-pencil tests can help you practice concepts and test-taking strategies, but they do not adapt to your performance like the real GRE. Make sure you budget online practice into your study schedule to help prepare you for the computer-based test experience.

    6. Review your results

    Always review your performance after taking GRE practice exams. What kinds of questions do you consistently miss? What question types do you tend to ace, and which ones slow you down?

    This is where access to a GRE tutor can really give you a leg up. Test prep is only partly about mastering content—it’s also about your pacing and test-taking skills. To be completely prepared, sit down with a coach to review your performance on practice exams and make a smart plan to meet your GRE score goal.

    7. Build up your GRE vocabulary

    Vocab is still an important part of the GRE Verbal sections. You can absorb many of the words that will show up on the GRE by reading respected publications such as academic journals or some of the more highbrow newspapers and magazines. When you come across new words on practice tests or practice problems, add them to your list. They have been used before on the GRE and they may very well be used again. Check out our GRE Power Vocab book for lists and drills.

    8. Practice with and without a calculator

    A calculator is provided for you on the GRE as part of the on-screen display, and can be a huge advantage if used correctly! But the calculator can also be a liability. Figure out when using a calculator makes you more accurate, and when you’re better off learning the rules of a key math concept.

    How will you score?

    Take a GRE practice test with us under realistic testing conditions. You’ll get a personalized score report highlighting your strengths and areas of improvement.

    One of the first questions our students often ask when starting to plan for Test Day is, “How long should I study for the GRE?” We usually see the anticipation in their eyes, as they’re perhaps hoping for an answer like, “Well, are you busy right now? The next fifteen minutes or so ought to do it.”

    Stay on Top of Testing Updates

    ETS has made testing updates in response to concerns about the spread of COVID-19. Learn more.

    Scheduling time to study for the GRE

    Everybody’s prep needs are different

    5 Tips for More Productive GRE Studying

    Study to ambient music.

    Like movie scores or video game soundtracks. They’re designed to set the mood but not distract from the task at hand. Listening to your favorite tunes, on the other hand, releases dopamine, which can distract you.

    Take frequent short breaks and intermittent longer breaks.

    You should know by now that you can’t cram for the GRE and that the, “I will study for 12 hours a day, seven days a week” strategy is not what we consider a “good” GRE hack for a great GRE score. Avoid fatigue, frustration, and that dreaded moment when you realize you’ve read the same passage six times … and not retained a thing.

    Take a nap.

    It’s true: there is real science behind this GRE hack. Giving your brain a break can enhance retention and productivity. Relax, breathe, and give in to the sandman. Then, back to work.

    Know your productivity black holes and how to avoid them.

    Are you harboring the best of intentions, but simply can’t boot yourself off Facebook? There are apps and browser extensions that will allow you block access to certain websites or the Internet completely if you’re having trouble staying focused. Disable push notifications on your phone or set it on airplane mode.

    Find a way to make test content relate to something you enjoy

    Such as working on probabilities while playing blackjack or learning your GRE vocabulary from Sherlock Holmes or Game of Thrones. You’ll be more inclined to remember these concepts if you can relate them to vivid experiences, and learning them won’t seem like such a chore.

    How to cram for a testMemorising textbooks is an outdated form of study. You could spend days on end trying to cram it all in but the results will not be very promising.

    Thankfully, there are much more fun and rewarding study techniques that can help you learn how to study well and improve your exam results. Here are some of those study techniques:

    10 Study Tips to Improve Your Learning

    Study Tip 1: Underlining

    Underlining is one of the simplest and best known study tips. It’s easy to highlight the most significant parts of what you’re reading. Ideally you should do a comprehensive read of a text before you even consider underlining anything. Only on the second reading should you proceed to underline the most notable aspects.

    The act of underlining something means you are engaging with certain key aspects of the text. There is no need to go crazy and highlight entire blocks of text. You should highlight one key sentence per paragraph and a few important phrases here and there. You can only retain a certain amount so it’s best to retain the most important information.

    Study Tip 2: Make Your Own Study Notes

    Taking Notes is one of the most widespread study skills out there. Essentially the aim of note-taking is to summarise lectures or articles in your own words so you can easily remember the ideas. In most cases, the key is to be able to summarise the content as quickly as possible while not leaving out any key info.

    When creating Notes, you can do it the traditional way with the good ol’ pen and paper or you can utilise online tools, such as GoConqr’s Notes feature.

    Study Tip 3: Mind Mapping

    A good Mind Map can save you many hours of study and further consolidate your knowledge for your exams. Mind Maps are an extremely versatile tools. They can be used for brainstorming, outlining essays or study topics and for general exam preparation.

    GoConqr offers the ability to create Mind Maps quickly and easily which makes them the ideal tool when it comes to exams.

    Study Tip 4: Flashcards

    Using Flashcards is a particularly effective method of learning when trying to assimilate different facts, dates, formulas or vocabulary. Subjects such as History, Physics, Maths, Chemistry, Geography or any language are made much easier if you incorporate Flashcards in to your study.

    Using Flashcards for memorising can become a fun process unlike a lot of other study tools. On top of this, online Flashcards allow you to save a lot of work and time in actually creating your Flashcard decks. What’s more is that they are always readily available online so you have access to them 24/7.

    Study Tip 5: Case Studies

    Sometimes it can be difficult to grasp the implications of some theories. This is where studying case studies can be a big help. Case studies can help you visualise a theory and place it in a more familiar and realistic context. This is especially useful in business or law subjects.

    It’s always of great benefit to examine practical cases studies to accompany your study of pure theory. In this way you can better understand the application of the theory and what it’s thesis actually states.

    Study Tip 6: Quizzes

    Quizzes are an excellent way to review study notes in the weeks and days before an exam. Quizzes can show where your strengths and weaknesses are, so it allows you to focus your efforts more precisely. Moreover, if you share your Study Quiz with your classmates and test each other as much as possible you can discover even more details and areas you may have overlooked. So before any exam, make sure you create and share a bunch of different Quizzes with your Friends.

    Study Tip 7: Brainstorming

    This is another study technique that is ideal for studying with friends and/or classmates. Brainstorming is a great way to expand every possible idea out of any topic. Just get a bunch of friends together and shoot the breeze, there are no wrong answers when brainstorming – just talk and capture the ideas, you can review afterward.

    Some ideas that sounded great before will be ruled out straight away afterwards while others that sounded crazy before will be seen to have great promise. Using Mind Maps is an ideal way of capturing all this info as it mirrors the explosive nature of your thought processes.

    Study Tip 8: Mnemonic Rules

    Mnemonics are especially useful when memorising lists and sets. Mnemonics rules basically work by associating certain concepts with other concepts that are more familiar to us. There are many different ways to make mnemonics and these can be individual to the person.

    A classic example is ‘Richard of York Gave Battle In Vain’. This Mnemonic rule is for remember the primary colours : Red, Orange, Yellow, Green, Blue, Indigo and Violet.

    Study Tip 9: Organising Your Study

    One of the most effective study skills is also one of the most often overlooked; this is organising your study. Creating a study timetable gives you goals and a time in which to achieve them. Having a study timetable as you study is greatly motivational. GoConqr has a free Study Planner tool which makes organising your study extremely easy.

    How to cram for a test

    Study Tip 10: Drawing

    Many people find it easier to recall images rather than text, that is why they are better able to memorise concepts if they associate them with pictures or drawings. That is why GoConqr’s tools allow you to add images. GoConqr’s tools are geared towards helping different types of learners as visual learning is often overlooked in classrooms, which are more text or aural based.

    Many of these study tips & techniques are not new but are well known to students. However, what is new is the way in which you can now utilise them . Today new technologies have changed how we can interact with these study techniques. So it makes sense to reassess how you use these techniques and see what new tools and techniques you can incorporate into your study.

    About the GoConqr Blog

    Our blog is part of GoConqr, a Free Learning Platform for Creating, Sharing & Discovering Learning Resources that help students and teachers achieve their learning objectives. Click here to start creating Mind Maps, Flashcards, Notes, Quizzes, Slides Flowcharts & Courses now!

    How to cram for a test

    How to Pass a CLEP Test

    SpeedyPrep has become an industry leader for CLEP study guides and test prep materials—we’re passionate about giving people the tools they need to learn more effectively, save time and money, and graduate faster.

    In the next two blogs, we’ll break down everything you need to pass a CLEP test—it’s easier than you might think. Follow this advice, and you could save thousands of dollars and shave semesters off of your college career!

    Take a CLEP practice test.

    Sometimes, the best way to set yourself up for test success is to gain an understanding the test format. That’s why taking CLEP practice tests is an effective way to prepare for the real thing. You’ll get a better idea of the thought processes and methods behind CLEP questions, and you’ll gain perspective on how prepared you really are for the CLEP test ahead of you. It’s great to learn what you know—but it’s discovering what you don’t know that will improve your CLEP exam scores. If you’re going to be successful in the academic world, you must have an awareness and understanding of your weaknesses and lapses in knowledge, and there’s no better way to find what those weaknesses are than by getting a bunch of questions wrong on a practice test.

    How to cram for a testRemember that C’s (and D’s) get degrees.

    CLEP exams have no effect on your grade point average—all they do is allow you to receive course credit. That means any passing grade on a CLEP test earns you the same amount of college credit—no matter if you get a “C” or an “A” on the exam. (There’s one exception to this rule, as certain foreign language CLEP tests will offer more credit for higher scores.)

    Don’t get too excited here—we didn’t just hand you a get-out-of-studying card. You will need to check with your school to see if they have a minimum score requirement for your exam. 50 is considered a passing score, but your school might require, say, a 54. If there is a higher requirement, you can plan your preparation accordingly. If you get the standard passing score, or the score required by your school, you will get college credit. The score itself will not affect your GPA—which will probably make you feel a little less stressed when test time comes around.

    Check out the CLEP exam outline.

    When taking any test, it’s important to figure out what kinds of concepts will be covered so you can study efficiently and be adequately equipped to pass the test. This is easier for some tests than others—but with CLEP, it’s fairly simple. All concepts in CLEP exams are the same as what would be covered in a normal college course—so flipping through the textbook of the course that coincides with your CLEP exam would be a good place to figure out what will be covered on the test. The College Board website has outlines for each exam which you can review and you will see how the content of textbooks correlates to the outline.

    CLEP prep guides from SpeedyPrep are another great way to get a basic outline of your CLEP exam. SpeedyPrep study guides are designed to help you learn information that will be on the exam, and are tailored to your learning needs so you can learn faster and more effectively than ever before. Get started with SpeedyPrep today!

    Stay tuned for part 2 of our blog on passing CLEP tests, and until then, check out our other educational blogs!


    I would like to know how to get a study guide for algebra 1 and take the text.

    Just go to and purchase a subscription. Then schedule your exam at a local college. This link will help you find colleges near you:

    I need to excel been out of nursing school for sometime and need to take clep exams to get me back on track since can’t use all of my courses.

    Studying for the SAT in a month is possible, though it’s recommended that you spend 10 to 20 hours per week over the course of two or three months prepping for the SAT. But if you only have 30 days, here’s how you can get it done.

    SAT Study Calendar

    Before you actually start, you’ll want to get organized. With just one month until your SAT test date, create a study calendar. You should be realistic when planning your studying, taking into account all of your other obligations, including homework, extracurricular activities, travel time, etc.

    A study calendar will make the daunting task of prepping for the SAT more manageable. Building an entire calendar before you start your prep will help keep you accountable. You’ll be able to make space for your SAT prep ahead of time, and you’ll know exactly what to study each day.

    There are four sections on the SAT: reading , writing , math without a calculator . There is also an optional essay (most students choose to complete it).

    You’ll want to make sure that you budget time in your study calendar to prep for each section of the SAT every week, and also to take and review a practice test.

    SAT Sample 1 Week Study Schedule

    There is flexibility in how you lay out your personal study calendar, especially if you want to spread your studying over 6 days (taking at least one day off a week is a good idea to give your brain some time to rest, process, and recharge). You should always take your practice tests in a single sitting—that’ll probably be your longest day of studying each week (3 hours).

    If you want to fit in a week’s work of studying in 4 days, you might consider reviewing your practice test and working on Writing & Language Prep in the same day. However you decide to use your time, build out your entire month’s calendar at the onset. Once your study calendar is done, you’re ready to begin.

    SAT 1 Month Study Plan: Week 1

    Use the results of your first practice test to identify where your greatest areas of opportunity are. For example, if you got most Math questions with Exponents wrong, you’ll want to flag that topic for a foundational concept review. On the other hand, if you got most Geometry questions correct, you shouldn’t spend too much time reviewing concepts, but focus instead on studying test-taking strategies to make you more efficient on those question types.

    What To Study During Week 1

    • Step 1: Take and score a full-length SAT practice test in a single sitting.
    • Step 2 : Review your practice test, identifying your areas of opportunity. Reviewing the test should take at least as long as it took to take it. Start with the questions you got wrong first to identify where you went wrong (Do you need to brush up on the concept? Did you make a calculation error in your scratchwork?). Then, review the questions that you got right. Compare how you got the answer to the explanation provided to see if there was room for you to be more efficient in getting to the right answer.
    • Step 3: Study for each section of the test, reviewing/learning foundational concepts as needed, doing practice sets, and reviewing each question.

    SAT 1 Month Study Plan: Week 2

    What To Study During Week 2

    • Step 1: Take and score a full-length SAT practice test in a single setting.
    • Step 2: Review your practice test.
    • Step 3 : Study for each section of the test following your study calendar.

    SAT 1 Month Study Plan: Week 3

    What To Study During Week 3

    • Step 1: Take and score a full-length SAT practice test in a single setting.
    • Step 2: Review your practice test.
    • Step 3 : Study for each section of the test following your study calendar.

    Practice SAT Vocabulary Words

    SAT 1 Month Study Plan: Week 4

    If your practice test results show broad concepts that you are still missing (e.g., you get nearly all Functions questions wrong on the Math section, this isn’t the time to learn how functions work. You’re unlikely to master the concept in such a short amount of time so you’re better off working to perfect a concept in which you are more firm (question types you are getting right at least 50% of the time).

    What To Study During Week 4

    • Step 1: Take and score a full-length SAT practice test in a single sitting.
    • Step 2: Review your practice test.
    • Step 3: Study for each section of the test, focusing on topics that you have not yet mastered, but are getting right at least 50% of the time. Spend time reviewing any test-taking methods or strategies you’ve learned over the course of the past month for each section.
    • Step 4: Give yourself some downtime. Make sure to block off the day or two before Test Day and to resist all urges to study more. For the day of the test, don’t change up your routine—go to bed when you usually would to wake up in time for the test, eat the breakfast you usually eat, etc.
    • Step 5: Crush the SAT!

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    Puppy Cries & Cries When Being Potty Trained in a Crate

    When the idea of crate training first become popular, trainers were hard pressed to convince dog owners it was a good thing, because many protested that it seemed cruel to cage their dog all day. However, too much of a good thing is a bad thing, like abusing crate time.

    Crate Theory

    Wolves in the wild have a natural instinct to build a den in which to sleep, eat, raise their young, hide from other predators, and feel safe and secure. Modern day domesticated dogs don’t need dens, as they fit very nicely in homes, RV’s condos, apartments, houseboats and just about anywhere else they can live in harmony with people. However, crates afford dogs a place to call their own. A crate offers today’s busy dog-about-town relief from the stresses of the day and place to go when they don’t want to be bothered. Crate training is a great tool for housebreaking puppies and teaching them other manners, such as not eating the couch or that chic little black dress you adore. However, too much of a good thing is not good for anyone; all things in moderation, after all. There are limits to how long a dog can stay in the crate before it becomes a prison. Wolves in the wild come and go from their den. The crate is supposed to simulate the den experience, so dogs should be able to come and go as well.

    Crate Training

    Since dogs will not soil their den, the crate provides a substitute den where you can put your dog and be fairly confident he won’t eliminate until you are ready to take him out and allow him to do so appropriately. When using crate training for this purpose, it is important not to leave the dog in the crate too long or you will defeat the purpose. If he is in there so long that he cannot hold his bowel or bladder any longer and he lets loose with the urine, or worse, you will be in a position to have to break him of what could become a habit. There are rules as to how long a dog can stay in a crate during housebreaking. A young puppy, aged 8 to 10 weeks, should be taken out every half hour and allowed to try to go potty. Once the puppy goes potty, he should be allowed to be out of the crate unless you cannot watch him or everyone is going to bed. Little puppies cannot hold their bladder any longer than 30 minutes or so, so you can’t expect your puppy to do what his body won’t allow. As puppies age, they can stay in the crate a little longer with each passing week. Howeven, even older dogs should never be kept in the crate for more than four to five hours at a time. This means, if you work, you should come home mid-day, or pay someone to go in and let the dog out.

    Crate Abuses

    Leaving a dog in a crate for 8, 10, or 12 hours a day is cruel and tantamount to abuse. Dogs are social animals and seek out the pleasure of the company of other dogs or people to feel secure. Being locked away in a quiet home in a crate for long periods of time is not conducive to building a good bond with your best friend, who eyes you suspiciously every time you make a move to put him in his crate. The crate always should be a place where the dog goes voluntarily, unless it is being used for a specific purpose. It should never be used to punish your dog and you should never put him in there in anger. The golden rule should apply here, if you wouldn’t want to be so confined for long periods of a time all day, you shouldn’t inflict such a situation on your dog. Some may argue that dogs are left in a crate for eight hours at night while the household is asleep, so why is it bad to leave him in there all day? The body shuts down a little during sleep and the need to eliminate is not pressing. During the day, when your dog should be active, his body must be able to respond to normal functions.

    Crate Uses

    Crates can be used for a lot of different occasions other than just housebreaking. They can be pressed into service as a place for a dog to recuperate post-surgery, or to rehabilitate a sore limb. Crates are great for isolating dogs when they are given chew bones or treats. They offer a place where they can enjoy their treat without the fear or threat of having to resource guard if other dogs are around. They are a source of comfort for some dogs during thunderstorms, or when noisy children come into a normally quiet home, or if there is strife in the air. Crates are great for transporting dogs safely in a car.

    Not all dogs like crates, however. Some dogs have phobias or anxieties that are exacerbated by being in a crate. Placing such a dog in a crate for even a few minutes is inhumane and should be avoided. You will know from your dog’s affect if he is one of those who hates the crate. He will tremble, yawn, cry or vomit when placed in the crate. It’s bad to leave any dog in a crate all day, but especially heinous to do so with dogs who fear the crate and worry about being separated from their pack, the family.

    Laura Day

    March 12, 2019

    How to crate train a puppy during the dayThe first couple months of bringing your new pup home may not involve a lot of sleep—and there’s very little you can do to avoid it. The reality of bringing home a new furry bundle of joy is that he will have an incredibly small bladder and need to go all the time. One minute he is playing or running and the next, you are facing a little yellow puddle on your favorite rug with one guilty-looking pup standing over it. Therefore, you have to train him.

    You may have heard that the number of hours a puppy can hold his bladder is in direct correlation to the number of months old he is. I would say, from personal experience, that theory is rather accurate. Therefore, if you’re not getting up with your pup every couple of hours, you’re probably going to be welcomed by a few accidents when you wake up each morning, especially when training your puppy. However, there are definitely steps you can take in order to minimize the number of accidents that you’re having to clean up, and ways to potty train him. If you’re going to crate your dog, here are some tips for keeping your home as pee-free as possible overnight.

    Stop all eating and drinking a few hours before bed

    Have you ever drunk a large glass of water just before bed only to wake up in the middle of the night desperate for a pee? Well, it is just the same for your little pup when you place him in a dog crate. By stopping him from eating and drinking late at night is a great way to crate train your pup and will definitely help curb overnight accidents; however, you are going to need to make absolutely sure that, before doing so, your pup has had his fill—you don’t want a hungry or thirsty pup on your hands. When you stop your pup from eating and drinking a few hours before bed, he will have had the opportunity to go potty at least once or twice during that period of time. Hopefully, he will empty out everything, making it far less likely that he will need to go to the bathroom in the next few hours—even if he is a very young pup!

    Make sure your pup is ready for sleep

    If your pup is exhausted from playtime and running around before putting him in his puppy crate, this will make him less likely to wake up every hour or so, and immediately relieve his small bladder. When training a puppy, try and make sure that he is ready for a good, long snooze, and really tire him out before bedtime. He will be so pooped that he’ll be more likely to sleep right through the night, making a more fulfilling day for him, and a pee-free night for you! According to the Humane Society of the United States, most puppies can actually sleep for up to seven hours without relieving themselves—so it definitely is possible.

    Take him out before bedtime

    How to crate train a puppy during the dayYour pup will most likely have fallen asleep before you—he’s only a baby after all! However, you are going to want to make sure that you take your pup out to relieve himself right before you go to bed. Yes, you’re probably going to wake up your pup (which nobody particularly likes to do when he’s quietly sleeping and adorable), but it’s necessary if you don’t want to get up in the next few hours.

    Night time is not play time

    If you do take your pup out to the potty during the night, you’re going to want to make it known that you strictly mean business. Do not get overly excited or start playing with your puppy during the night as it will just get him all excited. He needs to know that, just because he’s out of his crate, it does not mean it is time to get up and play. If it’s dark out, then it means that it’s straight to the potty, and back into the crate. As sad as it may be, do not even speak to your pup beside to signal him to go potty. Again, this needs to be a strictly business transaction—but it is a great way to crate train your dog.

    Wake your pup before they wake you

    What I mean by this, is that you do not want your pup to associate you getting up and giving him attention with him making a fuss by whining or scratching his crate. You want to get to your pup before he starts engaging in this behavior. For the first month or two, as much as you may not want to, you may want to set an alarm during the night to get up and let your puppy out in the middle of the night. As much as this may be a pain, nobody said that owning a puppy was going to be easy! It will be far more disruptive to your sleep if you have to listen to a crying pup all night, not knowing if he’s crying because he has to go pee, or he is a little bored and wants attention! Go ahead and wake up your pup and take him outside to relieve himself.

    Crate training a puppy is never easy and separation anxiety can quickly set in with young puppies if not carried out properly. Although it could potentially be a long time before your home is pee-free, especially at night, there are certainly many ways to minimize the number of accidents. If you are alert to your pup’s needs and have set his crate in a place where you can easily hear him, it is not that likely that he will want to relieve himself in his crate, if he associates going to pee with being outside. After all, even puppies do not want to pee where they sleep, especially if he is a confined space. Just be patient and remember that your pup does not want to relieve himself in his crate. Once he is used to being crated and knows you will be coming back, that separation anxiety will disappear quite quickly. Just be consistent with your night-time potty training methods and you will be well on your way to a pee-free nighttime routine for you and your pup.

    Bringing a new family addition into the home is extremely exciting! Becoming a new puppy parent comes with a ton of new joys, challenges and responsibilities. PupBox was created to help new puppy parents like yourself, by providing all of the toys, treats, accessories and training information you need, when you need it. CLICK HERE to learn more about PupBox.

    How to crate train a puppy during the day
    And remember, puppyhood is fast and is gone before you know it. Make sure to savor the time when your pup is young, and take lots of pictures along the way!

    If you have ever asked the question, “Is it cruel to crate a dog at night?” then you are probably wondering why some people would consider this to be an answer. Crating dogs at night is certainly not cruel in and of itself, but it is done for various reasons. The main reason that crate training dogs at night is to prevent them from being disturbed when their owners go to sleep. It is thought that dogs do not have sleeping patterns of their own and tend to wake up during the course of the night, either because they are checking out the world or because they are looking for something. For this reason, keeping them in a crate at night makes sense.

    Another reason that crate training a dog at night may make sense is if your dog is a “scrounger”. In other words, he may want to get out of the crate in the middle of the night to see what’s going on in his owners’ world. He may be whining and crying or he may just be a little mischievous. At nighttime, dogs are much harder to keep track of, so it is much more likely that your dog will get out of the crate and get into trouble. Even though the puppy may have some behavior problems, if he is whining at night it is probably because he is unhappy about something.

    Some dogs seem to need a nap in the middle of the night, but then whining and crying will usually keep them quiet until morning. If your dog is one of these dogs, crate training him at night can mean that he doesn’t get to go anywhere when the other dogs are sleeping. This is especially good if you have more than one dog because then you don’t have to take him out all the time. However, he will probably have a better sleep if he can go out during the day when other dogs are awake.

    Sometimes, dogs end up getting into their crate during the night because they are just tired. Try to give them a reward right before they decide to go to bed. You could also run a strip of cable behind their bed to simulate an outside environment for them. Just be sure to make it short so they can’t take advantage of it.

    Many dogs who have been crate training for a while will whine and cry during the night, but this is normal. They are probably feeling lonely and just want a place of their own to feel safe. It is very hard to turn down a new dog and crate training them at night is one way that you can establish a closer relationship with your new dog.

    Of course, you should never punish your dog for whining or crying at night. The best thing you can do is simply ignore it. If they start to whine, take them out to a location where there are other dogs so they won’t feel so isolated. Even if you don’t feel like bringing them out, leaving them in their crate at night could get annoying. Eventually, you will probably wish you had taken them out sooner!

    When it comes to crate training your dog, it is best to leave him alone for the night once you get home. This way he will go to sleep more quickly. Take him to his crate when you are both ready and take him out to the designated area. It is not good to be interrupted while he is trying to go to sleep.

    Finally, you must remember that your dog may sleep much longer than you do. If your dog sleeps well when you leave him alone, he probably won’t need the extra five hours of sleep that dogs need to function properly. When it comes to crate training your dog at night, you may want to consider buying a crate bed. These dog crates let your dog stay in bed throughout the night, allowing him to go to sleep much quicker!

    By: Victoria Schade Updated: May 9, 2022

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    New Pet > New Dog > How to Crate Train a Dog: A Step-by-Step Guide From an Expert

    How to Crate Train a Dog: A Step-by-Step Guide From an Expert

    I f you’ve just brought home a new dog, potty training is probably high on your list of priorities. What if we told you there’s a way to simplify the housetraining process and help your pup feel calm and secure at the same time? It’s true—and it’s all about crate training.

    What is crate training? It’s the process of helping your dog learn to spend time in their crate—and ultimately, to adopt it as their own personal space in your home. Crate training taps into your pup’s natural inclination to keep their sleeping space clean—they’re less likely to go potty where they hang out and sleep. Using a crate has benefits beyond just potty training, too; it also helps to keep your dog safe and out of mischief when you’re not around to supervise them, plus it provides a comfy retreat when household hubbub gets overwhelming and your pup wants to relax.

    But there’s more to crate training a dog than simply putting them in the crate and closing the door. Dogs need to gradually adjust to spending time in their crates, with lots of positive encouragement from you. Rush the process, and you’ll risk causing your pup stress and anxiety, which can create negative associations with the crate that can be difficult to overcome.

    So how do you crate train a dog, and what do you need to know to get started? We’ve got your complete guide to crate training a dog.

    The Benefits of Crate Training a Dog

    Your dog’s crate might look like a basic enclosure to you, but if you use it correctly, it’ll become one of your pup’s favorite places to be—aside from your lap, of course. Here’s how crates can help both you and your dog:

    • Giving your dog a space of their own: Picking an appropriately sized crate and taking time to gradually introduce your dog to it will help them consider the space a comfy refuge. Dogs typically prefer protected areas when bedding down, so a crate can tap into that natural inclination to rest in a safe space.
    • Encouraging potty training: One of the biggest benefits to crate training is that it helps streamline the housetraining process, since most pups won’t soil where they sleep. When you learn how to crate train a puppy, for example, you’re also learning a key step in their potty training process—two birds, one stone.
    • Keeping your pup (and your stuff) safe: Successful dog raising is all about supervision, especially when they’re puppies. But the reality is that most pet parents can’t watch their pup full-time. Once again, crate training saves the day! Left to their own devices, most puppies will chew anything they can get their teeth on, but a crate helps to keep your curious pup safely apart from your things (and vice versa) when you’re not able to keep an eye on them.
    • Providing a Recovery Zone: At some point in your dog’s life, you may need to restrict their movement due to an injury or medical procedure. Making sure that they’re happy in their crate will make that job much easier.

    Some pet parents worry that “locking their dog up” in a crate could be cruel, but the reality is far different. Yes, it’s true that one benefit of crates is that they keep your dog contained (and out of mischief). But when used properly, your dog’s crate won’t feel like a cage. In fact, it’ll feel just like home! The trick is to introduce the crate gradually, without rushing your dog to adjust to it before you leave them in it alone. Let them settle into the crate on their own terms, and your pup will repay you with calm and happy crate time for years to come.

    Supplies Needed for Crate Training a Dog

    If you want your dog’s crate to become their happy place, you’ve got to make sure it’s just right for them. Here’s what you’ll need:

    The Right Crate

    Once you start to look at crates you will find there are lots of options. Choosing the right crate for your own pup isn’t difficult once you consider a couple things:

    • Type
    • Size

    First up is the type of crate, which can fall into two categories: either hard plastic airline-style crates, like the Frisco Two Door Top Load Plastic Dog & Cat Kennel, or wire crates like the Frisco Heavy Duty Fold & Carry Single Door Collapsible Wire Dog Crate. Most pups can learn to be comfortable in either type, but wire crates have more versatility when it comes to door placement and customizing the size of the interior with a divider.

    Next, you’ll need to pick the correct size—one of the most important considerations when figuring out how to crate train a dog. Your dog crate should be large enough so that your dog can stand up, turn around and lie down comfortably, but not much bigger. Although it’s tempting to purchase an oversized crate to give your pup more room, doing so can derail the potty-training process by giving your pup the space to go to the bathroom at one end while staying dry in the other.

    Pet parents of puppies, especially large breed puppies, can anticipate their dog’s growth by purchasing the largest sized crate their dog will need when they’re fully grown and using an adjustable crate divider to keep the available space inside the right size. The Frisco Fold & Carry Double Door Collapsible Wire Dog Crate comes with a divider and is available in sizes up to XL, so your crate can grow right along with your puppy.

    Other Crate Training Supplies

    There’s more to crate training than just a crate. Here’s what else you’ll need:

    • Bedding: You’ll need bedding to keep your dog comfortable, but if you’re crate training a puppy or an older dog who still needs housetraining, avoid extra-plush dog beds. The extra cushioning might absorb urine and make it difficult to tell if your dog has had an accident inside. Some puppies may be tempted to chew up or destroy overstuffed bedding when left in the crate, too. A simple crate mat like the Frisco Micro Terry Dog Crate Mat is a good choice for pups still acclimating to the crate.
    • Treats: Tasty snacks are an important part of the crate introduction process (and any other type of training you want to do with your pup). Small savory treats, like Wellness Soft Puppy Bites Lamb & Salmon Recipe Grain-Free Dog Treats, help reinforce the idea that good things happen inside the crate.
    • Toys: For dogs with tons of energy, like puppies, helping them chill out in the crate can be a challenge. That’s where busy toys come into the picture. Giving your pup something to do when left alone inside can help keep them focused and happy until they drift off to sleep. Treat-stuffable toys like the KONG Classic or a West Paw Zogoflex Small Tux Tough Treat Dispensing Dog Chew Toy are tough enough to stand up to most dogs’ powerful teeth and can be filled according to your pup’s level of toy unpacking expertise. (Some pups can get frustrated if the treat toy is too jam-packed.) Always test the durability of any toy before leaving your dog alone with it to make sure they can’t bite pieces of it off that could be a choking hazard.
    • sleep
    • potty training
    • crate training

    AKC is a participant in affiliate advertising programs designed to provide a means for sites to earn advertising fees by advertising and linking to If you purchase a product through this article, we may receive a portion of the sale.

    We all want a well-behaved dog that doesn’t tear things up and goes to the bathroom outside — and dog crate training is an important part of that. A crate creates a safe environment for your dog and a space that belongs to them.

    While many people view crates through the human lens of being “caged up,” dogs are naturally den animals and most enjoy being in small, enclosed places. A crate provides them with a feeling of security, and when trained to use them from an early age, crates can help calm anxiety.

    We talked to Anna Flayton, senior dog trainer for PUPS Pet Club in Chicago, for her advice on how to crate train your dog.

    Step 1: Choose the Right Crate for Your Dog

    “You want to get one that’s durable, comfortable, and flexible with whatever training you’re doing,” says Flayton. For dogs that prefer to sleep in the dark, she recommends kennel or airline crates (which are more enclosed), while wire crates work best for other dogs. It’s important, she notes, that you don’t buy a crate that is too big for your dog. “Depending on how big your dog is going to get, buy the right crate for their adult size,” she advises. “Then get a divider so you can build the space and grant them more and more space.”

    Step 2: Establish the Proper Mindset

    “The more the dogs associate the crate with a relaxed mindset, the more they’ll ultimately enjoy hanging out in there,” says Flayton. If you put the dog in the crate when they’re playing, then they’ll want to come back out and continue to play. But if you bring them in it when they’re calm, they will likely view it as a place of rest. Start by bringing them in for 10 minutes at a time and work your way up from there.

    Step 3: Determine How Your Dog Will Be Most Comfortable

    Some people use dog beds or towels to create a comfy environment, but that may not always be the best option. Once again, it’s trial and error. “Depending on the dog you have, they may tear a dog bed apart or they may use it to pee on,” she warns. “It’s not a bad thing for them to just sleep on the crate mat itself. Dogs actually do prefer hard surfaces.”

    Step 4: Give the Dog a Treat After They Go Into the Crate

    Once again, positive association rules. One of Flayton’s favorite tricks is giving the dog a KONG toy filled with peanut butter that she’s put in the freezer. “When they’re hanging out in the crate, they have something that stimulates them, but they have to work down the frozen peanut butter,” she says. It gets the dog used to being in the crate for a longer period of time, while also associating it with an enjoyable activity.

    Step 5: Keep an Eye on the Time

    Your dog needs time outside the crate to play, eat, and use the bathroom. Dogs don’t want to soil where they sleep, but if there’s too long of a stretch without a walk, they might end up doing so.

    Step 6: Play Crate Games

    The dog shouldn’t see the crate as a negative place. To ensure this, incorporate the crate into fun games where the pup goes in and out of the open crate at their own will. Flayton likes to throw the ball in the crate when playing fetch or hide treats inside for the dog to find.

    Step 7: Keep Your Dog “Naked”

    “Dogs should never, ever have collars or tags or anything on when they’re in the crate,” warns Flayton. If the tag gets caught in the crate the dog could strangle.

    Step 8: Set Your Dog Up for Success

    Once you are ready to give your dog more time inside the crate, do it in small steps. “You don’t want to go out to dinner for six hours,” cautions Flayton. “Maybe just go get a cup of coffee and come back.” She also advises using a recording device to determine what your dog does while you’re gone. “Are they anxious? Are they pacing? Or are they calm?” she says. “Then you know — and when you come back, you can reward them.”

    Step 9: Be Patient

    Prepare yourself for at least six months of training. There will be ups and downs since dogs aren’t linear learners, but success will come, says Flayton. “Even when it feels like you’re banging your head against a wall, as long as you stay calm and consistent in your methodology, your dog will eventually look for the reward and you’ll have the opportunity to reward them.”

    Selecting the Best Dog Crate

    For almost any dog — Wire Dog Crate

    Get in-depth reviews of the best wire dog crates for your dog.

    For the Dog who loves a little privacy — Plastic Dog Crate

    Get in-depth reviews of the best plastic dog crates for your dog.

    For a travel-loving dog — Soft Dog Crate

    Get in-depth reviews of the best soft-side dog crates for your dog.

    Laura Day

    May 15, 2019

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    Puppies truly are often the most loyal and loving pets that a person could have. Because of this, no one ever wants to leave them! Unfortunately, it’s just unrealistic to think that you can be there with your furry friend every moment of the day. You’ve got work to do so you can buy him more treats, after all.

    Young puppies do not need to be left in the whole house alone all day. To crate train a puppy, you must start with a confined, safe space like a crate for them to go when you can’t be there. It can be frustrating at first – puppies don’t especially like to be contained. However, this is for his safety, and it needs to be done.

    Don’t give up hope. Crate training your puppy is easier than it seems! Follow this four-step guide, and you can get the job done quickly and efficiently.

    Step 1: Introduce the puppy to his new space

    You want your puppy to associate his crate with relaxation and happiness instead of dread; it should be a safe place. He will be more apt to go there without fussing or whining if you slowly introduce him to the environment without making him feel like he is being punished.

    • Place the dog crate wherever your family is most often together. This is usually the living room. This way, he feels included and safe because he knows you are there to protect him.
    • Put something soft, warm, and comforting in the crate like a blanket or pillow.
    • Bring the puppy near the crate, speaking to him in soothing tones all the while.
    • Put the pup’s treats or food in the opening of the crate. This will encourage him to go inside and eat. If he doesn’t like treats, try a favorite toy instead.
    • If he doesn’t go at first, try placing the treats near the opening instead of inside. Be patient until he goes all the way in for the food. Never try and force him out of frustration; this creates fear.

    Step 2: Feeding inside the crate

    Puppies love to eat just like all babies do! This is why you should start regularly feeding yours inside of the crate. Food is associated with happiness and satisfaction. Link that feeling to his crate, and he will not be so apprehensive anymore.

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    • Only place the food bowl as far in as the puppy is comfortable with. Over time, you can start placing it further and further back.
    • Once he is fully inside the crate and eating, close the door gently.
    • After feeding time is done, immediately open the crate door and let your pup out. Do not let him think that he’s been tricked.
    • Gradually increase the time you leave the door closed. Go slow and steady; too fast and your puppy will begin to panic.

    Step 3: Teach him to stay

    After the puppy has become acclimated to the crate through feeding times and will stay in without panicking, you can start to condition him to stay for a while.

    • Call your puppy over to the crate. Give him a treat and say a command word like “kennel.”
    • Once he gets in, give him another treat and shut the door.
    • Stay in the room with the pup at first. Try to be quiet, so he stays calm.
    • Leave the room after spending some time relaxing with him and come back after a few minutes. Let him out when you get back.
    • Start with small increments of 10 minutes and gradually increase the time that your pup is in his crate. Do not let him out when he whines. If you do this, your devious little fur baby will start to think that whining lets him get out of the situation he does not like. This sets a bad precedent.
    • Once he can stay for around a half hour without being too upset, you can start leaving him in the crate while you go out on short errands.

    Step 4: Leave your puppy alone

    Crate training a dog is a scary and emotional step for many dog owners, but it is one that is necessary for letting a puppy adapt to being in his crate alone.

    • Put your dog or puppy in his crate with your usual training method shortly before you leave. This should be between 5 and 20 minutes before you head out.
    • When you shut the door and say goodbye, do not get too emotional or stay for too long. You are working him up by doing this, making the time apart harder than it needs to be. Reward him for being good and go.
    • When you come back from your errand, let him out without making a big fuss.
    • Repeat the process when you go places and when you don’t. This will let your pup know that being in a crate does not necessarily mean that he will be alone, creating less fear and resistance when you do leave. It may even help avoid separation anxiety.

    Things to Remember

    You need to know a few things about crate training puppies that others may not tell you. Following these simple rules will make all the difference between a sad and lonely puppy and a happy one.

    • Never use force to put a puppy in a crate. These aggressive actions will do nothing but scare him, and this will make training much harder. If you want to get it done effectively, be patient and gentle.
    • If you have a full-time job and are away for longer periods, you can’t expect your puppy to be in a crate for 8 hours per day. After a certain period of time, it becomes cruel to do this. Puppies can’t hold their bladders or bowels for very long. The maximum time they should be in their crate is 4 hours. You need to either take him out on your lunch break or find a pet sitter who will come by and help and let them have a potty break.
    • Keep the crate clean. You would not want to be stuck in a filthy, stinky room for any length of time. Why should a puppy have to be?
    • Don’t rush the training. It can take several weeks for your pup to get used to a crate, and that is perfectly normal. Rushing him is counterproductive because again, you are only instilling fear in him.

    Be kind, patient, consistent, and gentle. In good time, your puppy will learn that his crate is a safe haven instead of a jail, and he will stop giving you those heartbreaking puppy dog eyes when you leave. Stay strong and don’t give in to the whining, no matter how sad it makes you. Be a super pet parent and crate train as soon as you can!


    Bringing a new family addition into the home is extremely exciting! Becoming a new puppy parent comes with a ton of new joys, challenges and responsibilities. PupBox was created to help new puppy parents like yourself, by providing all of the toys, treats, accessories and training information you need, when you need it. CLICK HERE to learn more about PupBox.

    How to crate train a puppy during the day
    And remember, puppyhood is fast and is gone before you know it. Make sure to savor the time when your pup is young, and take lots of pictures along the way!

    • sleep
    • potty training
    • crate training

    AKC is a participant in affiliate advertising programs designed to provide a means for sites to earn advertising fees by advertising and linking to If you purchase a product through this article, we may receive a portion of the sale.

    We all want a well-behaved dog that doesn’t tear things up and goes to the bathroom outside — and dog crate training is an important part of that. A crate creates a safe environment for your dog and a space that belongs to them.

    While many people view crates through the human lens of being “caged up,” dogs are naturally den animals and most enjoy being in small, enclosed places. A crate provides them with a feeling of security, and when trained to use them from an early age, crates can help calm anxiety.

    We talked to Anna Flayton, senior dog trainer for PUPS Pet Club in Chicago, for her advice on how to crate train your dog.

    Step 1: Choose the Right Crate for Your Dog

    “You want to get one that’s durable, comfortable, and flexible with whatever training you’re doing,” says Flayton. For dogs that prefer to sleep in the dark, she recommends kennel or airline crates (which are more enclosed), while wire crates work best for other dogs. It’s important, she notes, that you don’t buy a crate that is too big for your dog. “Depending on how big your dog is going to get, buy the right crate for their adult size,” she advises. “Then get a divider so you can build the space and grant them more and more space.”

    Step 2: Establish the Proper Mindset

    “The more the dogs associate the crate with a relaxed mindset, the more they’ll ultimately enjoy hanging out in there,” says Flayton. If you put the dog in the crate when they’re playing, then they’ll want to come back out and continue to play. But if you bring them in it when they’re calm, they will likely view it as a place of rest. Start by bringing them in for 10 minutes at a time and work your way up from there.

    Step 3: Determine How Your Dog Will Be Most Comfortable

    Some people use dog beds or towels to create a comfy environment, but that may not always be the best option. Once again, it’s trial and error. “Depending on the dog you have, they may tear a dog bed apart or they may use it to pee on,” she warns. “It’s not a bad thing for them to just sleep on the crate mat itself. Dogs actually do prefer hard surfaces.”

    Step 4: Give the Dog a Treat After They Go Into the Crate

    Once again, positive association rules. One of Flayton’s favorite tricks is giving the dog a KONG toy filled with peanut butter that she’s put in the freezer. “When they’re hanging out in the crate, they have something that stimulates them, but they have to work down the frozen peanut butter,” she says. It gets the dog used to being in the crate for a longer period of time, while also associating it with an enjoyable activity.

    Step 5: Keep an Eye on the Time

    Your dog needs time outside the crate to play, eat, and use the bathroom. Dogs don’t want to soil where they sleep, but if there’s too long of a stretch without a walk, they might end up doing so.

    Step 6: Play Crate Games

    The dog shouldn’t see the crate as a negative place. To ensure this, incorporate the crate into fun games where the pup goes in and out of the open crate at their own will. Flayton likes to throw the ball in the crate when playing fetch or hide treats inside for the dog to find.

    Step 7: Keep Your Dog “Naked”

    “Dogs should never, ever have collars or tags or anything on when they’re in the crate,” warns Flayton. If the tag gets caught in the crate the dog could strangle.

    Step 8: Set Your Dog Up for Success

    Once you are ready to give your dog more time inside the crate, do it in small steps. “You don’t want to go out to dinner for six hours,” cautions Flayton. “Maybe just go get a cup of coffee and come back.” She also advises using a recording device to determine what your dog does while you’re gone. “Are they anxious? Are they pacing? Or are they calm?” she says. “Then you know — and when you come back, you can reward them.”

    Step 9: Be Patient

    Prepare yourself for at least six months of training. There will be ups and downs since dogs aren’t linear learners, but success will come, says Flayton. “Even when it feels like you’re banging your head against a wall, as long as you stay calm and consistent in your methodology, your dog will eventually look for the reward and you’ll have the opportunity to reward them.”

    Selecting the Best Dog Crate

    For almost any dog — Wire Dog Crate

    Get in-depth reviews of the best wire dog crates for your dog.

    For the Dog who loves a little privacy — Plastic Dog Crate

    Get in-depth reviews of the best plastic dog crates for your dog.

    For a travel-loving dog — Soft Dog Crate

    Get in-depth reviews of the best soft-side dog crates for your dog.

    Make crate training your dog run smoothly with a weekday or weekend training schedule designed to suit your lifestyle. Here are some sample training schedules, along with expert advice from a vet.

    • Share on Facebook
    • Share on Twitter
    • Share on Pinterest
    • Share on Email

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    Putting your new puppy or dog on a crate training schedule can help him adjust to his new surroundings and will give him a head start on learning the house rules right out of the gate. Using a crate helps limit unwanted behavior, such as a dog who starts to rip apart furniture because of separation anxiety or if you have a dog who eats everything he can get his mouth on. Crate training can also help you to house-train a new puppy so she will understand where she can go and — more importantly — where she can’t go to the bathroom.

    The benefit of crate training, according to veterinarian Dr. Melissa Webster, the owner of Tampa Veterinary Hospital in Tampa, Florida, “is that when you’re starting with a puppy, you can control destructive behavior. But don’t just put a dog in the crate and walk out of the house. Use positive reinforcement with treats and encourage him with his favorite toy.”

    She also stresses making sure to get the right-sized crate. Many people mistakenly purchase a crate that’s too small for their dog, she notes. Use a crate that allows the dog to stand up and stretch out without pressing up against the sides or top.

    Crate Training Steps

    Follow these three tips, as recommended by Dr. Webster, to ensure that your dog enjoys and actually wants to use the crate:

    1. Feed All Meals and Treats Inside the Crate
      Encourage your dog to want to go into the crate by feeding all of his treats and meals inside it. When your dog stands outside the crate, simply toss in a handful of dry food. He will automatically climb into the crate to eat the food.
    2. Create a Verbal Cue
      Now that your dog enjoys the crate, select a word that will help your dog identify when to go into the crate. For example, if you select the word “crate,” put in the treat and call “crate” as your dog steps in. Once your dog is inside, give her the treat.
    3. Make a Schedule
      Decide how and when you want to use the crate and devise a training schedule. For example, if you’re housebreaking a puppy, your pup will stay in the crate until you let her out to use the bathroom. However, don’t start too young. The American Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals (ASPCA) suggests that puppies younger than 12 weeks of age will not have enough bowel control to start housebreaking.

    Crate Training Schedules
    How often you use the crate will depend on your lifestyle. For example, a weekday crate scheduling might revolve around your work or school hours, while the weekend schedule could offer more flexibility. If you have a full-time job that takes you away from the home throughout the day, attempting to crate train a smaller puppy that requires more frequent potty breaks may present a challenge. However, you can still work on crate training a puppy on weekends when you can spend more time at home.

    Here are examples of weekday and weekend training schedules that you can adjust to suit your lifestyle:

    Sample Weekday Schedule

    • 12 to 16 weeks of age
      Crate your dog for two hours during the day and six hours during the night.
    • 4 to 5 months of age
      Crate your dog for three hours during the day and eight hours during the night.
    • 6 to 7 months of age
      Crate your dog for four hours during the day and eight hours during the night.
    • 8 to 11 months of age
      Crate your dog for six hours during the day and eight hours during the night.
    • Over 12 months of age
      Crate your dog for eight hours during the day and 10 hours during the night.

    Sample Weekend Schedule

    • Friday
      On Fridays when you’re home, leave the crate door open. Toss treats into the crate randomly, and if your dog happens to go near the crate on his own, reward him. You should also feed your dog his dinner inside of the crate.
    • Saturday
      Start using verbal cues with your dog on Saturday, beginning with a practice exercise where you will say the cue, such as “crate,” and then toss in a treat. Repeat the exercise about 10 times and then take a break. Throughout the day and evening, repeat this exercise at least three times.
    • Sunday
      On Sunday your dog will begin to learn how to stay in the crate for longer periods of time. Starting in the morning, give your dog the usual cue to get him to go into the crate, then leave him in the crate for at least 30 minutes. Make sure to put in a chew toy or bone so that he has something to occupy him. After the 30 minutes has passed, let him out of the crate but don’t reward him with any treats.

    Keep in mind that if your dog exhibits vomiting or diarrhea, the ASPCA does not recommend using a crate until he recovers. Once your dog gets used to being on a crate training schedule, he will not only get in the crate when you leave the house or serve dinner, he will actually get excited to use it.

    Kelly Sundstrom is an award-winning journalist, author and artist. As the caretaker of two dogs, five cats and a bearded dragon, Sundstrom understands the importance of training a pet consistently. Follow her on Twitter.

    Laura Day

    May 15, 2019

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    Puppies truly are often the most loyal and loving pets that a person could have. Because of this, no one ever wants to leave them! Unfortunately, it’s just unrealistic to think that you can be there with your furry friend every moment of the day. You’ve got work to do so you can buy him more treats, after all.

    Young puppies do not need to be left in the whole house alone all day. To crate train a puppy, you must start with a confined, safe space like a crate for them to go when you can’t be there. It can be frustrating at first – puppies don’t especially like to be contained. However, this is for his safety, and it needs to be done.

    Don’t give up hope. Crate training your puppy is easier than it seems! Follow this four-step guide, and you can get the job done quickly and efficiently.

    Step 1: Introduce the puppy to his new space

    You want your puppy to associate his crate with relaxation and happiness instead of dread; it should be a safe place. He will be more apt to go there without fussing or whining if you slowly introduce him to the environment without making him feel like he is being punished.

    • Place the dog crate wherever your family is most often together. This is usually the living room. This way, he feels included and safe because he knows you are there to protect him.
    • Put something soft, warm, and comforting in the crate like a blanket or pillow.
    • Bring the puppy near the crate, speaking to him in soothing tones all the while.
    • Put the pup’s treats or food in the opening of the crate. This will encourage him to go inside and eat. If he doesn’t like treats, try a favorite toy instead.
    • If he doesn’t go at first, try placing the treats near the opening instead of inside. Be patient until he goes all the way in for the food. Never try and force him out of frustration; this creates fear.

    Step 2: Feeding inside the crate

    Puppies love to eat just like all babies do! This is why you should start regularly feeding yours inside of the crate. Food is associated with happiness and satisfaction. Link that feeling to his crate, and he will not be so apprehensive anymore.

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    • Only place the food bowl as far in as the puppy is comfortable with. Over time, you can start placing it further and further back.
    • Once he is fully inside the crate and eating, close the door gently.
    • After feeding time is done, immediately open the crate door and let your pup out. Do not let him think that he’s been tricked.
    • Gradually increase the time you leave the door closed. Go slow and steady; too fast and your puppy will begin to panic.

    Step 3: Teach him to stay

    After the puppy has become acclimated to the crate through feeding times and will stay in without panicking, you can start to condition him to stay for a while.

    • Call your puppy over to the crate. Give him a treat and say a command word like “kennel.”
    • Once he gets in, give him another treat and shut the door.
    • Stay in the room with the pup at first. Try to be quiet, so he stays calm.
    • Leave the room after spending some time relaxing with him and come back after a few minutes. Let him out when you get back.
    • Start with small increments of 10 minutes and gradually increase the time that your pup is in his crate. Do not let him out when he whines. If you do this, your devious little fur baby will start to think that whining lets him get out of the situation he does not like. This sets a bad precedent.
    • Once he can stay for around a half hour without being too upset, you can start leaving him in the crate while you go out on short errands.

    Step 4: Leave your puppy alone

    Crate training a dog is a scary and emotional step for many dog owners, but it is one that is necessary for letting a puppy adapt to being in his crate alone.

    • Put your dog or puppy in his crate with your usual training method shortly before you leave. This should be between 5 and 20 minutes before you head out.
    • When you shut the door and say goodbye, do not get too emotional or stay for too long. You are working him up by doing this, making the time apart harder than it needs to be. Reward him for being good and go.
    • When you come back from your errand, let him out without making a big fuss.
    • Repeat the process when you go places and when you don’t. This will let your pup know that being in a crate does not necessarily mean that he will be alone, creating less fear and resistance when you do leave. It may even help avoid separation anxiety.

    Things to Remember

    You need to know a few things about crate training puppies that others may not tell you. Following these simple rules will make all the difference between a sad and lonely puppy and a happy one.

    • Never use force to put a puppy in a crate. These aggressive actions will do nothing but scare him, and this will make training much harder. If you want to get it done effectively, be patient and gentle.
    • If you have a full-time job and are away for longer periods, you can’t expect your puppy to be in a crate for 8 hours per day. After a certain period of time, it becomes cruel to do this. Puppies can’t hold their bladders or bowels for very long. The maximum time they should be in their crate is 4 hours. You need to either take him out on your lunch break or find a pet sitter who will come by and help and let them have a potty break.
    • Keep the crate clean. You would not want to be stuck in a filthy, stinky room for any length of time. Why should a puppy have to be?
    • Don’t rush the training. It can take several weeks for your pup to get used to a crate, and that is perfectly normal. Rushing him is counterproductive because again, you are only instilling fear in him.

    Be kind, patient, consistent, and gentle. In good time, your puppy will learn that his crate is a safe haven instead of a jail, and he will stop giving you those heartbreaking puppy dog eyes when you leave. Stay strong and don’t give in to the whining, no matter how sad it makes you. Be a super pet parent and crate train as soon as you can!


    Bringing a new family addition into the home is extremely exciting! Becoming a new puppy parent comes with a ton of new joys, challenges and responsibilities. PupBox was created to help new puppy parents like yourself, by providing all of the toys, treats, accessories and training information you need, when you need it. CLICK HERE to learn more about PupBox.

    How to crate train a puppy during the day
    And remember, puppyhood is fast and is gone before you know it. Make sure to savor the time when your pup is young, and take lots of pictures along the way!

    Sharing is caring!

    Leaving a puppy alone during the day is doable, but you have to do it right.

    Puppies need much more supervision than adult dogs, which limits you when it comes to leaving them alone.

    In fact, young puppies shouldn’t be left alone for longer than two hours at a time!

    So remember to take that into consideration. Unfortunately, many of us have to work outside the home.

    As much as we’d love to stay home cuddling our puppies all day, someone has to keep food on the table (and dog food in the bowls)!

    Today, we’ll talk about leaving a puppy alone during the day, and what you need to do to make it safe and successful!

    Leaving a Puppy Alone – Considerations

    One of the most important things to remember about puppies is that they aren’t just miniature dogs.

    They require extra supervision, time, and potty breaks.

    They can also be destructive little buggers when they’re bored or scared, so you have to have a game plan.

    Let’s check out a few tips that will make it a little easier to leave your puppy home alone during the day.

    Heads up: This post contains affiliate links. We earn a commission if you make a purchase at no extra cost to you.

    1. Crate training

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    One of the best things you can do with any dog is crate training, but it’s especially important if you’re leaving puppy alone all day!

    It allows you to safely leave your pup home for period of time during the day.

    Understand that you can’t just toss your puppy in the crate and walk out the door, though.

    You need to make the crate a safe place that your puppy loves to be in. That way when you’re gone, he will still feel safe and secure.

    Crate training also cuts down on destructive behavior as well as preventing potty messes throughout the house, both while you’re home and away.

    Make sure to add some items in their crate to make them feel comfortable, such as toys, blankets, etc.

    2. Time Limits

    You can only leave a puppy alone for so long.

    Leaving a puppy alone for 4 hours is doable. Leaving a puppy alone for 8 hours straight, though? Definitely not the best idea!

    Those little guys have smaller bladders and less control over those bladders than adult dogs.

    When leaving a puppy alone during the day, you’ll need to either have a friend stop over every 2 to 3 hours to check in on your pup and take him for a walk or hire someone to do it.

    Otherwise, your puppy either gets very uncomfortable, makes a potty mess all in his crate, or both.

    If you do need to hire a dog walker, you’ll want to make sure they’re trustworthy.

    Handing over your house keys and your dog can be a little terrifying.

    I suggest talking to your vet, family, and friends for recommendations.

    Before you hand over those keys, ask for references (and actually check them).

    You can also go through a service that runs background checks. It may sound extreme to get a background check for a dog walker, but remember, they’ll have access to your home.

    By the way, if you’re planning on leaving a puppy alone at night, you absolutely want to hire a pet-sitter.

    That is, unless you work night shifts and get your pup used to that type of schedule, in which case the other rules apply.

    Sharing is caring!

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    How long can you leave a dog in a crate during the day? If you’re crate training, it’s an incredibly important question! Crate training is one of the best training methods for dogs. I’ve talked about this method and its benefits before. With crate training, you give your dog a safe place when he’s scared, an excellent way to reinforce potty training, an area to put him when things are too crazy in the rest of the house. It also helps give your dog a real sense of routine and security that’s hard to get with other training methods.

    One question that I always read is how long a dog can stay in a crate. This is usually posed by people who have to work or whose dogs tend to freak out when they’re left alone. And while crate training is great and gives us some leeway on protecting our houses from our dogs and our dogs from themselves, we can’t rely on it solely.

    How Long Can You Leave A Dog In A Crate

    That depends on how old the dog is and what time of day it is. Regardless of his age, a dog can generally stay in his crate all night. Just like us, when a dog sleeps, his body slows down. He doesn’t eat or drink, so he usually won’t need to get up in the night to eliminate. “Usually” is the key phrase, here. In puppies or older dogs, this may not always be the case.

    During the day, the time varies quite a big based on your dog’s age. Puppies can only be left in their crates for a short period of time due to their need for frequent potty breaks. Older dogs shouldn’t be left in their crates for an overly long period either due to the stiff joints and arthritis that come with age. Here’s a breakdown of the time frame during the day for dogs of different ages.

    • Puppies 8 to 10 Weeks Old – 30 to 60 minutes.
    • Puppies 11 to 14 Weeks Old – 1 to 3 hours.
    • Puppies 15 to 16 Weeks Old – 3 to 4 hours.
    • Puppies over 17 Weeks and Adult Dogs – 4 to 5 hours.

    You’ll notice that the list stopped with 4 to 5 hours. That is the maximum that any dog should be left in their crate. Crate training is one of the best methods out there, but it’s not the answer to everything. Most of us have to work, and that’s where crate training logistics come in.

    Crate Training and Being Away

    During the day, you’ll have to think a bit more about crate training and leaving the dog alone. If you have a puppy, you’ll want to be sure that you really run him in the morning. Play with him until he’s absolutely zonked. A tired puppy is a good, content puppy. If you’re lucky, he’ll sleep until you can get home on your lunch break or the dog walker comes.

    For dogs of all ages, a good walk before you head off to work is key. Also, because no dog should be left in his crate for longer than 4 to 5 hours, you’ll want to either come home on your work break or hire that dog walker I just mentioned.

    Leaving your dog in his crate for too long can actually lead to physical and behavioral issues, so it’s vitally important to have a way to get him out of the crate mid-day. Otherwise, you could be looking at tendon issues related to being confined or behavioral issues like hyper excitement or fear – also due to being confined for too long.

    Crate Training is Great, It Just Takes Some Tweaking

    Crate training is one of the best training methods out there. You just have to keep time limits in mind. If your dog is thoroughly potty trained and without any separation anxiety issues, I actually recommend that you do not crate him at all. Just let him chill in the house. If he’s not destructive, you’ll have no problem. If you’re worried about accidents, you can even keep him in a tiled area of the house.

    If your dog does need to be in the crate, remember the time frames associated with crate training and plan accordingly. With just a bit of tweaking, you’ll be able to protect your home, your pooch, and your sanity when you’re at work or out for the day.

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    Crate training at night feels like a very different process to doing so during the day.

    For a start, you want to be asleep while it happens!

    But as long as you lay the right groundwork during the day, you’ll soon find that everything clicks into place.

    Crate training at night starts on night three…

    When you bring your puppy home at eight weeks old, he’ll feel very worried.

    Even the most confident pup will have a bit of a wobble upon being torn from his home, siblings and mother.

    During the day he’ll probably be okay, because he’s with you. But leaving him alone at night straight away can be very upsetting.

    That’s why we recommend putting the puppy in your bedroom for the first two nights.

    A box by the bed

    You don’t need a grand set up for this temporary stage.

    Grab a sturdy, high sided box. Line it with veterinary bedding and pop it by the side of your bed.

    Let your puppy see you climb into bed next to him, so he knows he’s not alone.

    Then any fussing he makes when settling to sleep, you’ll know is just grumbling rather than actual fear.

    Most puppies will sleep happily beside the bed from around 11pm until they need a pee at 2 or 3am.

    When you hear them stir, scoop them straight up into your arms, and carry them to their outdoor pee place.

    Stay boring, calm and quiet. Don’t play or chat.

    When they’re done, bring them back and pop them into their box again.

    If you’re lucky, you’ll then make it until 6am for morning!

    Laying the foundations for crate training at night

    During those first two days, when your puppy will sleep in your room at night, you can lay the foundations for crate training at night.

    To do this you need to introduce the crate to your puppy, as a wonderful place to be.

    How quickly you can do this will depend a lot on your puppy.

    Very curious and confident puppies will scope out the crate straight away.

    I’ve even had one that settled immediately down for a nap!

    Others will regard it with great suspicion and take some encouragement.

    We’ll assume here that your puppy is of the more reluctant disposition, and you can move quickly through the stages if they aren’t.

    Toys and treats!

    Your new puppy’s crate should be a constant source of rewards.

    Every time they aren’t looking in it’s direction, drop a few pieces of kibble onto the bedding for them to find.

    Leave puppy safe toys, like a puppy Kong or Kong Wubba, for them to find when they go scouting about.

    It should be a snug and safe area for them. Where no one bothers them, and there are ways to relax and things to occupy them.

    Shutting the door

    Once your puppy is comfortable going in and out of their crate, you can start shutting the door.

    Just shut it and open it again immediately to begin with.

    The point at which you can do this will depend upon how relaxed your pup is in the crate.

    Don’t start shutting the door if they are worried. Wait until they have a positive association with the crate.

    Increasing the duration

    Once your puppy can be happily inside the crate while you open and close the door, you can start to build up time with it closed.

    Begin with just a count of five, then ten, and work up to 30 seconds.

    Do this in small sessions, throughout the course of the day.

    Over the period of a few days you will be able to build up to the point that the crate can be closed for the duration of one of their naps.

    Napping in the crate

    Puppies sleep a lot, and when they get tired it’s a great time to get them used to spending a longer period in the crate.

    When they are showing clear signs of tiredness, pop them into the crate with a handful of kibble and a nice chew toy or two.

    Close the door, but remain in the room.

    When they have gone to sleep and woken up again a while later, go straight to the crate before they can get upset.

    Pick the puppy up and carry them into the backyard for a pee break.

    Crate training at night

    Once your puppy is happy in the crate during the day, you will be able to settle them into the crate at night safe in the knowledge that they are not afraid.

    Your puppy might still complain when you first turn the lights off, but you need to stay strong and ignore their fussing.

    Remember, they’ve been with you for two nights and had time to get used to the crate during the day.

    They aren’t scared, they are probably just frustrated at not being together.

    Most puppies settle down after just a few minutes, provided that they’ve been slowly acclimatized to the crate during the day.

    The crate training at night back up plan!

    If your puppy is not ready to be shut in the crate during the day for a nap after the first couple of nights, then you’ll need a short term solution.

    This comes in the form of a puppy play pen and some puppy pads.

    Set up the play pen around your pup’s crate, and cover the floor in puppy pads.

    This will give your puppy the option of leaving the crate and relieving themselves without making a mess, but give you a safe place to leave them overnight without the door shut.

    Still struggling?

    If you’re learning to crate train a rescue dog rather than a puppy, this article may be of more help to you.

    Bad nights with a puppy can really start to get you down.

    Sign up and get access to our incredibly helpful, members only forum.

    We can’t wait to meet you there, and take those first steps through puppyhood together.

    Crate training an older dog might be something you find yourself doing from scratch. Whether you’ve rescued an adult dog that was never trained to go in a crate or you simply never got around to crate training your pooch when he was a young pup, this lack of training can make things stressful for the both of you when you’re suddenly faced with a need to keep your dog in one place for an hour or so. If you find yourself in this boat, read on to learn how to crate train an older dog.

    Reasons for Crate Training an Older Dog

    How to crate train a puppy during the dayWhile some pet parents see crate training in a positive light, others may have reservations about crating their dogs. No matter which dog crate camp you belong to, there are a number of good reasons to crate train an older dog, says Here are just a few:

    • Safety and preparedness for emergencies and natural disasters
    • Safe transportation and easier travel with your pooch
    • Easier and safer trips to the veterinarian
    • Confinement during illness or injury recovery
    • To provide a safe space in stressful situations

    However you may personally feel about dog crates, the fact is that in an emergency your dog is often safer in a crate than he would be in a harness or simply left on his own. It’s important to remember that, while there may be exceptions for dogs with traumatic backgrounds, generally dogs don’t share the negative associations we humans attach to crates. And for those that do, those negative associations can be turned into positive ones.

    Challenges of Training Older Dogs

    The phrase “you can’t teach a old dog new tricks” is patently untrue. Older dogs are most certainly capable of learning new things, but training them can be more challenging than crate training a puppy! For puppies, everything is new and exciting, and they haven’t become attached to routines. Older dogs, on the other hand, are creatures of habit, and sometimes it’s necessary to help them unlearn old habits before they can learn new ones. The key is to be patient. It might take a lot of repetition and practice, but eventually your older pooch will rise to the occasion.

    On the other hand, a calmer, older dog might appreciate the cozy hideaway of a crate more than a puppy would. Choose a low-traffic, quiet location for the crate so he can escape to it for a nap during your next holiday party or loud day with the kids.

    How to Crate Train an Older Dog

    Follow these steps to turn the crate into a positive experience for your older pup:

    1. Prepare the crate. Select a crate that’s large enough for your dog to comfortably lie down, stand up,and turn around in, says Rover. Place a comfy blanket inside to make it more enticing, and leave it sitting with the door open in a spot where your dog can see it and check it out, allowing him to get used to it before you begin.
    2. Prepare yourself. Set aside any negative feelings you have about placing your dog in a crate. Dogs are extremely sensitive to our emotions, and if you’re stressed about crating your dog, he will be too. Don’t begin training until you can do it from a calm, relaxed and happy place.
    3. Prepare your dog.Preventive Vet recommends giving your dog some exercise before a training session, both to burn off excess energy so he’ll be relaxed and to allow him a chance to relieve himself so he won’t be distracted by the need for a bathroom break.
    4. Build positive associations. Begin by placing treats and maybe a favorite toy or two near the opening of the crate. Praise your dog when he goes near the opening to retrieve an object or treat.
    5. Entice your dog inside. Once he’s comfortable with getting close to the crate’s opening, begin placing treats and toys inside. You might even try placing his food and water bowls inside the crate. Start by placing them at the front of the crate, and gradually move them toward the back until your dog completely enters the crate on his own.
    6. Try closing the door. Start by closing it just for a second before opening it and letting him out again. This will show your dog that he can trust you to let him out again. Repeat this until he remains calm when the door is closed, and then increase the time by a few seconds. Keep repeating, gradually adding on a few seconds at a time. Once he starts making himself comfortable inside the crate, practice leaving the door closed for a few minutes at a time, gradually working up to an hour or more.

    If your dog panics or becomes agitated, stop, let him out, and take a break. Don’t be surprised if you have setbacks and need to start over from an earlier step or even from the beginning. Once your dog is willing to remain in the crate, unless he needs to stay in it overnight, don’t leave him in it for more than a few hours at a time. Tiny dogs and senior dogs with small or weak bladders shouldn’t remain crated for longer than they’re able to hold the urge to use the bathroom.

    Regardless of whether you plan to crate your dog regularly, crate training your older dog and reinforcing that training with regular practice will prepare him for those times when a crate is necessary. With proper training, the right attitude,= and a lot of patience, a dog crate can be a positive and even soothing experience for your pet.

    How to crate train a puppy during the day


    Crate training is an essential element to ensuring your puppy is safe and secure. Keep reading to find out how to crate train your puppy.

    Some puppies take to it very easily and find safety and security in there crates, while others can be a bit more challenging.

    You can decide whether to only use the crate until your puppy is potty trained or if your puppy loved it as much as mine did, then let them use it for there whole lives.

    Carry on reading below to find out how to make sure your puppy is happy and content using her crate.

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    Let’s delve into crate training your puppy

    Let me be upfront and say that most puppies do not like crates and a good portion of these puppies will test your patience to the limit.

    So, if this is the case, then why should you train your puppy to be happy in a crate?

    • A crate can be very useful when potty training your puppy.
    • Your dog can see the crate as his den and will then feel safe and secure.
    • Crating your puppy stops it from destroying items while unsupervised.
    • The crate also allows your puppy to have some down time when she is tired.
    • It is a safe place for your puppy when you have visitors or workmen in your home
    • You can take it with you when you go on holiday for them to sleep in at night
    • A crate is a safe way of transporting your puppy in the car
    • You can sleep soundly at night knowing your puppy is safe

    As you can see there are lots of advantages to crate training your puppy.

    How to crate train your puppy?

    Your Cavapoo puppy should already sleep in its crate from the first night.

    The best way to start is to place the crate in your bedroom so that she can hear and see you. Cover the crate with a sheet or towel, leaving only the front section open.

    Place a small dog bed or basket in the crate. The size of the crate should just be big enough to allow her to stand, stretch and turn around.

    Make sure she has gone outside to potty right before bedtime.

    Place her in the crate and use a specific word or phrase. Eg – ‘bedtime’, ‘sleep tight’. Use the exact same phrase or word every night.

    If she has fallen asleep elsewhere then pick her up and place her inside the crate and quietly close the door.

    Try to use the crate during the day as well and even when you are at home to get her used to being inside it. Do it for very short periods of time and make it a fun event.

    Give her some treats or even her meals inside the crate so that she has a pleasant experience while being in there.

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    Below is a list that will hopefully be of help to you if your puppy barks, whines, cries or yelps at night while in there crate:

    • Before bringing your puppy home from the breeder, take either a toy or blanket and rub it all over her litter mates and mother to pick up their scent. Place the toy or blanket in the crate. This will hopefully help your puppy to sleep better surrounded by familiar smells.
    • Crying in the middle of the night might be because she needs to go potty. Take her out to the designated potty area and once she is done, place her straight back into her crate. Do not initiate or allow any play time and be totally quiet.
    • Puppy’s last meal should be at least an hour and a half to two hours before bedtime.
    • Also, cut off access to water at least an hour and a half before bedtime so that she will not need to pee too often.
    • Make sure she is tired. Have an extended playtime just before bedtime makes sure that she is exhausted and wanting to sleep.
    • Always cover the crate at night, leaving only the front section open. This makes her crate feel more cozy and protected.
    • Place the crate close to your bed so that she can see you. If she starts to cry then hang your arm down so she can smell your scent or else try to sleep on the floor next to her crate for the first few nights.
    • Place some snugly toys in her crate. No toys with squeakers or else you will not sleep.
    • When she falls asleep during the day then gently move her from the floor and place her in her crate. For the first few times, leave the door open. Once she is comfortable with her crate then you can close the door.
    • Try lying down in front of the open door of her crate and blocking the doorway. Hopefully she will think you are napping with her.
    • Try the toy that simulates the mother’s heartbeat.
    • You will need to take your Cavapoo puppy out to wee a few times during the night until she is a little older. This should only be for the first month to 6 weeks. After that, only take her out once a night and see how she copes.

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    What NOT to do when crate training:

    Never ever use the crate for punishment. She needs to see it as a place of protection and safety and not as a place where she is banished if she is naughty.

    Do not bang the sides of the crate to try and shut her up. I know that it can be trying listening to a crying pup but this will just make things worse.

    Do not leave her in the crate during the day for more than 3 hours at a time. Her bladder is still too small to hold her wee for such an extended period of time.

    If you need to leave her alone for long periods then rather leave her in a cordoned off area of the house or make use of a playpen so that she can move around.

    Click Here for reviews of wire crates that you can consider for your pup.

    This post contains affiliate links. Sites like Amazon and Chewy give us a small amount of $ if you purchase something using a link from us (at no extra cost to you).

    We also run advertisements on the site. Please understand that the ads are randomly generated and we do not control which ads you see when.

    Crate training is a common first step for new puppy owners in the United States. But what if your puppy truly hates the crate and doesn’t seem to get into trouble outside the crate? Is it worth the hassle of crate training?

    In today’s Ask a Behavior Consultant, we tackle the case of the well-behaved but crate-hating puppy:

    My puppy does not like being in her crate and often finds ways to escape; however, when outside crate doesn’t destroy anything and often just plays with toys or sleep. I have tried treats, slowly increasing times in crates. Should I force the issue?

    The Great Crate Debate

    Outside of the US, crate training is a lot less common. In fact, there are laws regulating crate training in some Scandinavian countries that make crate training outside of sport and working dog contexts almost obsolete.

    I think that’s probably a move in the right direction – while crates are incredibly useful, some Americans really overuse them. It’s pretty common for dogs to spend 8+ hour workdays in the crate, then go back in at night – that’s 16 hours in a cage that’s just barely big enough to turn around and stand up in! Yikes.

    Again, that’s fine as a temporary management or training tool. I think that in the United States, we’re far too used to leaving our dogs inside of crates for more than half the day.

    This article from The Guardian outlines the “Great Crate Debate” – a fascinating read!

    If My Puppy Hates the Crate, Should I Make it a Priority?

    Here’s my “hot take” on this problem:

    If your puppy truly is well-behaved outside of the crate and you’re not planning on a crate being part of her regular adult life (like being crated at agility trials), why force the issue?

    I personally prefer to use baby gates or exercise pens to contain dogs whenever possible, rather than putting them inside a crate.

    Most people use crate training as “a means to an end.” The point of the crate is to be a management tool. Crates help keep puppies from chewing on cords, chasing the cat, or peeing on the floor.

    But if your puppy (or adult dog) already doesn’t chew, chase, or have accidents, you might not really need the crate!

    That said, there are some benefits to teaching your dog to be comfortable in the crate.

    For example, teaching your dog to be comfy in the crate means that travel or vet visits that require a crate will be a bit less stressful – because your pup is already used to the crate.

    How To Teach Your Puppy to Love His Crate

    Good crate training can take a long time. So if you really want your puppy to love the crate, be prepared to be patient.

    I don’t recommend using the “cry-it-out” training method. That just strengthens your pup’s lungs, so to speak. It also teaches your puppy that you won’t come rescue him when he needs you!

    Instead, I recommend taking your puppy outside for a quiet, boring bathroom break if he fusses. Puppy whining = 2 minutes on leash outdoors, no playtime, no treats, no baby talk. Then back in the crate.

    Ideally, though, you’re only going to leave your puppy in the crate for as long as he can handle. Here’s an example of how that would look:

    1. Hide treats and toys inside the crate with the door open throughout the day.
    2. Intermittently call your puppy to the crate. Gently lure him inside.
    3. Feed him a few pieces of his breakfast or dinner while he’s in the crate with the door open.
    4. Once he’s great at that, start feeding him through a closed door. Practice latching and unlatching the door.
    5. Once he’s succeeding with that, start using puzzle toys and long-lasting chews (the link shows off some of our favorites). Leave him in the crate for longer and longer, adding mere seconds to each practice round.

    Once your puppy is able to calmly tolerate being in the crate for a few minutes while you’re next to the crate, you can start some of the exercises below.

    These are not in a specific order – one may be easy for one dog, and hard for the next!

    • Start standing up and walking away while your pup is in the crate.
    • Practice crate training while your puppy is sleepy and while you’d like him out from underfoot anyway, like while you’re cleaning the house. Drop treats into the crate every few minutes while you work.
    • Leave your pup in the crate while you watch TV. Drop treats into the crate every so often to preempt fussing and crying.
      • The goal is NOT to reward the crying – but to avoid it by keeping your pup comfy. If your pup starts to fuss, do the 2-minute bathroom break!
    • Leave your puppy in the crate while you shower or go get the mail.

    If you know you have to leave your puppy for longer than he can handle, use the exercise pen, baby gate, or other setup. Leaving your puppy alone to panic in the crate just teaches him that the crate is a scary place!

    Kayla grew up in northern Wisconsin and studied ecology and animal behavior at Colorado College. She founded Journey Dog Training in 2013 to provide high-quality and affordable dog behavior advice. She’s an avid adventurer and has driven much of the Pan-American Highway with her border collie Barley. She now travels the US in a 2006 Sprinter with her two border collies, Barley and Niffler. Aside from running Journey Dog Training, Kayla also runs the nonprofit K9 Conservationists, where she and the dogs work as conservation detection dog teams.

    Puppies are constantly learning, whether it’s from their environment, from socializing with people or other animals, or from direct training.

    This creates a critical foundation that will set the stage for their adulthood. Providing puppies with the appropriate socialization and basic puppy training allows them to grow into confident adult dogs.

    Follow this step-by-step puppy training guide to set you and your puppy up for success!

    When Can You Start Training Your Puppy?

    Training a puppy starts as soon as you bring them home, which is typically about 8 weeks of age. At this young age, they can learn basic puppy training cues such as sit, stay, and come.

    Tips for Training Your Puppy

    Here are some basic puppy training tips to get you started.

    Use Positive Reinforcement

    There are many different methods of training your puppy that you might have heard about or even seen in person with a dog trainer. However, there is only one acceptable and scientifically backed method of training, and that’s the use of positive reinforcement.

    Positive reinforcement is the process of giving a reward to encourage a behavior you want. The use of punishment—including harsh corrections; correcting devices such as shock, choke, and prong collars; and dominance-based handling techniques—should be avoided, because these can produce long-term consequences that result in various forms of fear and anxiety for your dog as an adult dog.

    To apply this, first find out which rewards work best for your puppy. Some puppies might find something as simple as a piece of their normal kibble exciting enough to train with, while others might need something tastier, like a special training treat.

    Then there are the puppies that are not motivated by food at all! For those puppies, try to find a toy they enjoy that they can get when they do a good job. Praise is also a way to positively reinforce a puppy. Petting or showing excitement and saying, “good job!” may be all you need for basic puppy training.

    Keep Training Sessions Short

    When training a basic cue, keep the sessions short, about 5 minutes each, and try to average a total of 15 minutes per day. Puppies have short attention spans, so end your session on a positive note so that they are excited for the next session!

    Use Consistency When Training Your Puppy

    It is important to be consistent in your approach to cues and training. Use the same word and/or hand signal when you teach your puppy basic cues such as sit, stay, and come.

    It is also important to reinforce desired behaviors consistently, even when it’s not convenient. So if your puppy is at the door needing to go outside to go to the bathroom, stop what you are doing, let them out, and reward them for going to the bathroom outside.

    Practice in Different Environments

    Taking a puppy to a new environment like a park or the beach and asking for a cue is vastly different than training at your house. This is due to the variety of new sights and smells they will encounter outside the home.

    Make attempts to practice in different settings to set your dog up to be confident no matter what their situation. Please keep in mind that puppies should not go to areas where there are a lot of dogs until they have finished their puppy vaccination series!

    Be Patient

    Puppies are growing and learning, just like young children. They will make mistakes and may not always understand what you are asking.

    All puppies learn at different speeds, so stick with it and don’t get frustrated. Maintaining a consistent routine with feeding, potty breaks, naps, and playtime will make your puppy feel secure—and a secure puppy is ready and able to learn!

    Basic Puppy Training Timeline

    So when do you teach your dog the different cues? When does house-training start? Here’s a puppy training timeline that you can use.

    7-8 Weeks Old

    Basic Cues (Sit, Stay, Come)

    You can start with basic cues as early as 7 weeks old:

    Say a cue such as “sit” once.

    Use a treat to position your dog into a sitting position.

    Once sitting, give your puppy the treat and some praise.

    Leash Training

    You can start leash training indoors at this age. Because puppies don’t have their full vaccinations at this point, it is unsafe for them to be walking around where other dogs walk.

    Start by letting them wear the collar/harness for short amounts of time while providing treats. Increase this duration slowly. Once your puppy knows how to come to you, you can walk around inside on the leash with no distractions. You can move the training outside once your puppy has all their vaccinations.

    General Handling

    Get your puppy used to being touched. Gently rub their ears and paws while rewarding them. This will get them used to having those areas touched and will make veterinary visits and nail trims less stressful when they are older!

    8-10 Weeks Old

    Crate Training

    Your puppy should see their crate as a safe and calm place. Start by bringing them to their crate for 10- minute intervals while they are nice and calm. Reward them for going in their crate. You can even feed them in their crate to create a positive environment.

    10-12 Weeks Old

    Learning Not to Bite

    Puppies become mouthy at this age. Putting things in their mouths is how they explore their world, but it is important to teach them not to bite your hands or ankles. When they start biting at you, redirect them to a more appropriate object to bite, such as a toy.

    12-16 Weeks Old

    Potty Training

    Maintaining a schedule is important for potty training. Make sure to take your puppy out first thing in the morning, after eating, and after playtime and naps throughout the day. At this point they should start having enough bladder control to learn to hold it. Reward your puppy with a treat every time they go to the bathroom outside.

    6 Months Old

    Puppies are entering the adolescence stage by this point, and it is the most difficult stage to start training at. That is why it is important to start training them as young as possible! At this stage you will continue training to solidify and strengthen their skills in more public and distracting settings such as dog parks.

    How to Help Prevent Puppy Accidents

    A new puppy that is weaned, around 8 weeks old, is too young to avoid crate training. A crate is a personal space for the puppy that can provide security and comfort when it no longer has its mother. In addition, it can prevent accidents. Crate training can play a vital part in adjusting a new puppy to its home environment, making the puppy feel secure, and giving it a small area of personal space.

    Place a blanket or towel in the crate so that the bottom of the crate is soft and comfortable and the fabric can be easily cleaned if the puppy has an accident. Ensure that the crate is large enough for the puppy to easily lie down, stand, sit up, and move around. Since the puppy will grow quickly, a larger crate is typically a good option, especially for large breeds. Place a few dog toys in the crate for the puppy to play with.

    Place the puppy in the crate at regular intervals, such as at the puppy’s nap time. The puppy should spend about 1 to 2 hours in the crate during the day. This gets it used to the crate quickly. Remove the puppy’s collar whenever it is placed in the crate to avoid its catching on anything and choking him.

    Leave the crate open when the puppy is not in the crate to allow it free access. Wandering in and out of the crate will not only get the puppy accustomed to it but will also make the crate a den or room for it.

    Avoid putting food and water in the crate with the puppy, which may be knocked over and have to be cleaned up, which is unpleasant for both the puppy and the owner. If the puppy is in the crate for an extended period, put up a water bottle instead. The bottle is hung so that the puppy can have a drink when thirsty but is not in the way if it moves around.

    Take the puppy outside immediately after removing it from the crate. An 8-week-old puppy should be taken outside for a potty break every 1 to 2 hours. The puppy is not yet old enough to control the need for constant bathroom breaks. Owners should put the puppy in the crate for a few minutes every hour or so until the puppy is accustomed to the crate and place the puppy in the crate when they are at work or unable to watch the puppy. If leaving the puppy in the crate for extended hours, place the crate in a bathroom or small room with newspapers or similar items on the floor and leave the crate door open. The puppy will have a space for using the bathroom without making a mess of the crate.

    Never scare the puppy into the crate or put it in the crate for punishment. Negative actions should be avoided during crate training or the puppy will become reluctant to enter the crate.

    You should begin crate training puppy shortly after you bring him home. Introducing your puppy to a crate from the beginning makes house training easier, provides a safe place to keep him when he can’t be supervised, and serves as an ideal way to travel with him. The sooner the crate training process gets underway, the sooner your puppy will have a den to call his own.

    Four easy steps

    Place the crate in a high traffic area

    If you have a wire-style crate, first cover it on three sides with a sheet or blanket to create a more den-like, protective atmosphere. Put your puppy’s crate in a room you’re often in such as the kitchen or family room. He should be able to see what’s going on around him while he’s crated so he feels like he’s part of the pack.

    Let puppy investigate at his own pace

    Put your puppy next to the crate with the door open. Set a treat or some kibble in the crate to encourage him to go inside and then praise him. Repeat this process of luring and praising for several minutes. Never force your puppy to go in the crate, which can be scary for him. The best results come by crate training puppy to enter the crate voluntarily.

    Feed puppy in his crate

    To begin feeding your puppy inside the crate, draw him inside with his food bowl and gently close the door behind him. Open the crate door just before he finishes eating. If your puppy wants out shortly after you close the door, let him come out but keep his food bowl inside the crate and close the door. Wait for him to “ask” to be let in again. Repeat this until mealtime is over. Then take him outside to use the bathroom.

    Close the door when he’s ready

    Once your puppy seems comfortable going in and out of the crate, place a food-stuffed chew toy inside. If he goes into the crate to play with the toy, gently shut the door for a minute or so then open it and call your puppy. Give him lots of praise when he comes to you. Make sure the chew toy remains inside the crate when your puppy comes out. Repeat the process several times leaving the door shut for longer periods.

    If your puppy whines or barks in his crate, do NOT open it right away! He’ll quickly learn that whining and barking opens the door, which can hamper the crate training process. Wait until puppy settles down and is quiet for 10 seconds, then open the door and let him out. Be sure the stuffed chew toy stays in the crate and close the door. Note how long your puppy was in the crate before he started to whine and next time keep the door closed for a shorter period.

    Tips for crate training puppy

    Keep experiences with the crate positive

    Feed your puppy in his crate, gently place him inside when he falls
    asleep elsewhere, and give him super-yummy, food-stuffed toys each time he’s in the crate. Also, keep comfortable bedding in the crate and make it the only soft surface in the room or playpen. All of these will encourage your pup to play,
    eat, and sleep in the crate.

    Only use a crate for time-outs when your puppy is comfortable in it

    It is fine to use the crate as a time-out location when your puppy gets out of control as long as he’s trained to relax in the crate FIRST. Never crate-confine an untrained puppy as a punishment. When your puppy is misbehaving, first give him a warning like “uh oh”. Then if he persists in the naughty behavior, say “time out” to let him know he has made a mistake and crate him for twenty to thirty seconds, just long enough for him to calm down. Then let him out and try to interact with him. If he persists in the behavior, crate him again for twenty to thirty seconds. Repeat the process until your puppy stays calm when you let him out.

    Use the crate both when you leave AND when you’re home

    Your puppy will associate the crate with your absence if you put him in it only when you leave, which can cause problems. Be sure to crate your puppy for short periods while you’re home with him as well as when you’re away.

    You can crate your pup in your bedroom overnight as long as you stay alert to any fussing. If it occurs, silently take your pup to his potty area. Remember, nighttime is not playtime so keep activity to a minimum.

    Use the crate, but don’t abuse it

    Only crate puppy for one hour during the day, and be sure to alternate crate time with playtime. If you need to leave your puppy alone for longer than one hour, use a long-term confinement area instead. Prepare a puppy-safe room or playpen that contains his crate along with bedding, chew toys, water, and a potty area. (Place wee-wee pads diagonally across the room from the crate.) Be sure your pup gets plenty of exercise before he goes in.

    If you have to leave your puppy in long-term confinement for more than a few hours during the day, you should consider doggy day care or hire a pet sitter.

    Learning how to crate train a puppy can be a simple process if you’re patient. And, in the end, your puppy will have a new den to call home.


    • home
    • adopting a dog
      • before adopting
      • choosing a puppy
      • where to adopt
      • bringing puppy home
    • dog training
      • training basics
      • crate training
      • house training
      • obedience training
      • behavior problems
    • health care
      • grooming
      • health care articles
      • nutrition and feeding
    • disclaimer

    The RaisingSpot Report

    It’s the best doggone free newsletter around with exclusive tips, tricks, recipes, product reviews and more!

    How to crate train a puppy during the day

    **Special Bonus**

    Get instant access to this ebook when you sign up…

    Your privacy is safe. We will never share your address.

    Does your puppy keep you up all night?

    Sleepless nights take the fun out of having a new puppy. We’ve all been there!

    It takes a bit of patience to teach your puppy to love their crate, but you’ll settle into a bedtime routine before you know it. Our force free methods help you get there sooner, with less stress.

    These methods also work for adult dogs who have never been crate trained.

    Why You Should NEVER Punish Your Dog For Barking In The Crate

    When it’s 3AM and your puppy is barking and whining in their crate, you’re bound to be a bit annoyed. It’s tempting to yell at your puppy or turn to aversive training methods, but that’s always a bad idea.

    The problem with punishments is that they deceptively create a “quick fix”. Your puppy might quiet down for a few minutes – but they’ll still feel scared and alone, yet unable to express that. This also means the puppy may continue to bark when nobody is home to punish them.

    You want your puppy to feel safe and secure so they don’t even want to bark. When the crate is a part of their nighttime routine, they’ll start to fall asleep within minutes of going inside for the night. If they love their crate, they’ll happily nap when you’re not home, instead of barking the whole time.

    Force-free crate training means your puppy will not be afraid to bark if they have to go potty, if someone breaks into your home, or if there’s otherwise something wrong. Your puppy will sleep peacefully in their crate because they feel safe and secure, and they have learned that they can trust you to be there when they really need you.

    Preparing Your Puppy-Friendly Crate

    Your puppy’s crate will be their safe haven.

    Line it with a bed that is thick enough to keep your puppy from sinking to the bottom. Furnish it with enough blankets for your puppy to burrow. You may want to use old towels if you’re concerned about chewing or potty accidents.

    Crates are valuable tools for potty training because puppies typically do not go potty in them – if the crate is set up correctly. The crate should be large enough for your puppy to stand, turn around, and stretch out, but not so big that they will use one side as a restroom. Most crates come with dividers to make the interior space smaller, then you can make it larger as your puppy grows.

    You can use a crate cover or blanket to block out light and sound. That way, your puppy will be able to sleep peacefully inside, even during the day.

    Crate Training During The Day

    An 8-week old puppy will need to sleep up to 20 hours per day, broken up into naps. So, you’ll have lots of opportunities to create positive crate experiences before bedtime.

    The crate should be open most of the time when you are home. You can hide little treats inside for your puppy to find on their own.

    Whenever you play with your puppy, you’ll notice that they get very sleepy after about 30 minutes. Encourage your puppy to go into the crate on their own for naps. If it’s comfy enough, your puppy will seek it out without being placed inside.

    You can practice locking your puppy in the crate for 15 to 30 minute sessions during the day. Do this while you are in the room, perhaps watching television or washing dishes.

    Try putting your puppy in the crate with a Kong or similar fillable food toy. Puppies have sensitive tummies, so go easy on rich treats like peanut butter. You can fill it with their canned or raw food, or kibble that has been soaked in water.

    The goal is to crate your puppy for short periods of time so they do not experience separation anxiety. Realistically, though, your puppy may need to be crated for a few hours at a time when you are not home. This will be stressful for them in the beginning, but most dogs adjust quickly.

    Crate Training When You Go To Work

    If you work at a full-time job every day, you’ll need to speed up your puppy’s crate training. There are plenty of ways to make it easier.

    Before you leave, make sure your puppy has pottied, eaten, and had water to drink. Play with your puppy and/or go for a walk so that they are sleepy. Tuck your puppy in. Within a few weeks, your puppy’s sleeping schedule will be synchronized with your work schedule.

    At 8-10 weeks old, your puppy will need to go potty at least once every three hours. Smaller puppies may need up to 4 potty breaks during an 8-hour workday. You can hire a dog walker or pet sitter to let your puppy out or take them on walks.

    Puppy Potty Camp from Healthy Houndz is excellent for people who work. Not only will your puppy be on the fast-track to going accident-free, they’ll also learn foundational cues and social skills, while spending time with other dogs who act as role models for your puppy.

    To prevent barking when you are not around, try putting some music on. Music has been shown in studies to have a calming effect on dogs , particularly reggae and classical tunes. The music can also help drown out the sounds of passersby, which can keep your dog on alert.

    The First Few Nights

    A bedtime routine will make adjusting to night-time crating so much easier.

    Make sure your puppy goes potty one last time. Play until they get tired. Many puppies get wound up at night and tend to nip. Make sure they run out of steam before even attempting to crate them.

    You can use a lavender-based essential oil scent to lull your puppy to sleep. Some essential oils are harmful to dogs, so it’s best to use a calming spray that is made for pets.

    What To Do If Your Dog Starts Barking In The Crate

    A little bit of barking and whining is to be expected at first.

    Your first response to crying should be to take your puppy out and give them a chance to go potty. Regardless of whether they “go” or not, they will need to wind down again once they go back in the crate. Tuck them in again. Wait for those little eyes to close.

    If you’re certain that your puppy is “empty,” they might be lonely. Place the crate right next to your bed, if possible. Your pup might settle down if they can cuddle with an unlaundered t-shirt that carries your scent.

    You could also try emulating the warmth and sounds of sleeping with littermates. A ticking clock and a heat source like a microwaved sock full of rice can help.

    Sometimes, puppies bark because they’re bored. If your puppy is awake with the late night puppy zoomies, they may need more exercise during the day. An overstimulated puppy is the hardest to put to bed; it’s better to spend a few extra minutes playing than to let them bark and bark for hours.

    Help For Sleep Deprived Puppy Parents

    Crate training is one of the hardest parts of having a puppy. If you stick through those first few weeks, though, it’ll be so worth it. And you don’t have to go at it alone.

    At Healthy Houndz, we’ve overcome every imaginable puppy problem without using force, pain or fear. Get in touch today to hop on the fast-track to a happy, well-rounded dog.

    by Madonna Holko

    Your breeder may have accustomed your puppy to sleeping and eating in its crate. If so, the crate is already its “den,” a safe, quiet place to relax. It is not a good idea to allow the puppy to have the run of the house unless someone is watching it. It will take several weeks for it to become accustomed to its new home and learn where the papers or the door to the outside is. We have found that most dogs are not completely reliable (they cannot be left unattended for many hours) until they are about eight to ten months old. Because puppies are naturally clean, they do not want to soil the crate and learn to “hold it” until released. This makes the crate a huge aid in housetraining, provided you do not confine the puppy for more than a few hours at a time. It is good to use a water bottle attached to the crate for drinking, to keep a water bowl from being tipped over or water from dripping off your Shih Tzu’s moustache and beard all over its chest and the floor. Feeding in the crate also makes it a highly desirable place to be. When bedtime is announced, encourage your puppy to go into its crate by itself by giving it a “cookie.” Puppies are usually eager to jump in the crate once they learn the system.

    The puppy must be given an opportunity to relieve itself immediately when it wakes up in the morning, followed by breakfast and an hour of supervised playtime. Usually the puppy is then tired, and it will want to take a nap. If you can, put the crate in an out of the traffic spot. Playing a radio or nearby television should help settle the puppy when it must be left alone. (The intercom/television plays all day in the dog room here—all the different stations, from hard rock to country to easy listening/all sorts of programs from Disney, to sitcoms, to QVC, to football games, to get the dogs used to strange voices and sounds.) It also helps cover up odd noises that might frighten the puppy.

    When the puppy is comfortable in the house and knows where to go when it needs to eliminate, it will probably be very happy sleeping in someone’s room/bed. However, there will still be times that it is better to crate the puppy—naptime, dinnertime, bedtime, or when there are workmen or visitors present. If you put the puppy in the crate and it makes a big fuss that doesn’t end within a few minutes, drape a sheet or large towel over the crate to block the puppy’s view of the world. Usually, this will settle it down. If this doesn’t work, close the door to the room if you can. Do not respond by taking the puppy out. It is not afraid; it simply wants its way and it is trying to find out if it can get it. If it is really persistent, don’t shout or bang on the crate. Open the door, use one hand to hold the puppy in place, and with the other hand take hold of its beard to force it to look at you and very firmly tell it, “Quiet!” Then, close the door and walk away. The puppy will probably be quiet for a minute or two and then may start again. Give it a minute and then repeat the command. If you find that the puppy is driving you up the wall put the puppy, in its crate, somewhere else for the time being. A favorite toy or two can also make the crate more interesting.

    Crate training is worth the effort. Whatever its age, a well crate trained dog is a pleasure to live with, a great travel companion, and a welcome guest.

    Nick Jones

    Dog Behaviourist and
    Dog Expert Witness
    Share the article
    Share the article

    Crate training can often divide opinion among dog owners. Some feel worried about persuading their puppy to sleep in a crate as they think of it as a ‘cage’. For others, a dog crate is a useful aid for toilet training and offers a secure retreat for their pet.

    Quick Links

    • What are the benefits of using a crate?
    • How do I choose the right crate?
    • Where should I put the crate?
    • When should I use the crate?
    • How should I crate train my puppy?
    • What if my puppy gets anxious?
    • How can I make the crate comfortable?
    • When should I stop using a crate?

    What are the benefits of using a crate?

    When introduced properly, a crate can be a safe place for any puppy, particularly if they’re feeling tired or nervous. It gives them somewhere to retreat to when they’re not being supervised and can help settle a pup into a new environment. It can make travelling with a puppy a lot easier too.

    In my experience, a dog crate can be a brilliant aid for toilet training puppies as it takes advantage of their den instinct. Most dogs won’t soil in their sleeping quarters, so using a crate can help form a distinction between where they should and shouldn’t go to the toilet.

    But it’s important to note that crate training isn’t essential for any dog owner, it’s a choice. Decide what’s best for you, your dog and your home.

    How do I choose the right crate?

    I always recommend that a crate should be big enough for your puppy to comfortably sit and stand at full height, turn around, stretch out and lay in a natural position.

    Depending on the breed, you may need to replace the crate with a larger size as your puppy grows.

    Where should I put the crate?

    Always position your puppy’s crate in a quiet part of the house well away from areas of passing people.

    When should I use the crate?

    The crate should only be used for short periods of time – when direct supervision isn’t possible or during the night. Make sure you let your pup out regularly if you’re using the crate at night.

    As part of your puppy’s toilet training routine, whenever you let your pup out of the crate, take them to their designated toilet spot immediately to maintain consistency.

    How should I crate train my puppy?

    For me, crate training a puppy should always be a gradual process. Don’t rush, never force your pup to stay in the crate and introduce it in a positive sequence of events.

    Here are the steps I recommend you follow…

      Step 1: Start by fixing the door open so it can’t swing shut and scare your pup. Place treats or toys in the crate and allow your puppy to explore at their leisure.

    Once they’re happy taking treats in the crate, throw the treats inside until your puppy is happy to walk all the way inside the crate to retrieve them. Be patient – this can take 10 minutes or several days!
    Step 2: To help your pup get more familiar and comfortable with their crate, start increasing the amount of time they spend in the crate by feeding them in it. If they happily enter, close the door and put the latch over for a short time to familiarise your pet with the sound of the door closing. Once the door is shut, give your pup a treat before bringing them out.

    Gradually increase the amount of time they stay in the crate after they’ve finished their food. If they’re reluctant to enter, feed them near the crate and eventually put the bowl inside as they grow more confident. If your puppy shows any sign of distress – such as whining or barking – you may have increased the time in the crate too quickly and you’ll need to reduce the time your puppy spends in the crate or leave the door open.

  • Step 3: Start leaving your pup in the crate for longer periods of time – beginning with five minutes. Alternate between you being in the room and being out of sight. Repeat several times during the day while gradually increasing the time intervals. Giving them toys or treats will help to distract and calm them.
  • Step 4: Once your pup is happy to be left for half an hour, you can start to leave them for short periods of time.
  • If you follow these steps carefully and patiently, your pup will soon become fully crate trained.

    What if my puppy gets anxious?

    I sometimes see pups that struggle with feeling enclosed in the crate, so it’s important to combine the time in the crate with a positive experience.

    Try filling an empty toy with food that will keep your puppy occupied for around 15 minutes. Allow them to play without interaction but stand close by. Placing food and water bowls in the crate will help your dog associate it with meal times. It’s important to never use the crate as a form of punishment – this will only reinforce it as a negative experience.

    If you feel that your puppy isn’t getting on with their crate then remember that crate training is a choice not a must so it’s up to you whether you want to continue.

    How can I make the crate comfortable?

    Put comfortable bedding inside the crate and place it in a draught free area out of direct sunlight. You could also put a blanket over the top to make it feel cosier.

    When should I stop using a crate?

    This can depend on your dog, your home and your preference. Once your puppy is trained and no longer likely to make a mess when left out of their crate, you can look at phasing out its use. This would normally be expected from around the age of 9 months old. Some dogs do it sooner, but I’m not usually in a rush to stop using a crate.

    For many people, the space taken up by a crate can be an issue and owners are often keen to see it go. But there’s nothing stopping you from keeping a crate in use as a bed or a secure rest space for your pet, something that can be particularly useful if you have children around the home.

    Bell’s crate training story

    Find out more about crate training your puppy by watching this short video.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Mortgage Payment Loan Calculator in Excel

    Mortgage Calculator in excel is not a built-in feature in excel but we can make our own mortgage calculator using some formulas, to make a mortgage calculator and calculate the amortization schedule we need to create our categories column for all the categories and data to be inserted and then we can use the formula for mortgage calculation in one cell, now for future, we can change the values and we have our mortgage calculator in excel.

    Formula to Calculate Mortgage Payment in Excel

    PMT function includes 3 mandatory and 2 optional parameters.

    All the above three parameters are good enough to calculate the monthly EMI, but on top of this, we have two other optional parameters as well.

    • [FV]: This is the future valueFuture ValueThe Future Value (FV) formula is a financial terminology used to calculate cash flow value at a futuristic date compared to the original receipt. The objective of the FV equation is to determine the future value of a prospective investment and whether the returns yield sufficient returns to factor in the time value of more of the loan. If you ignore this default value will be zero.
    • [Type]: This is nothing but whether the loan repayment is at the start of the month or at the end of the month. If it is at the start, then the argument is 1, and if the payment is at the end of the month, then the argument will be zero (0). By default, the argument will be zero.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    You are free to use this image on your website, templates etc, Please provide us with an attribution link How to Provide Attribution? Article Link to be Hyperlinked
    For eg:
    Source: Mortgage Calculator in Excel (


    Mr. A wants to buy a car, and the cost of the car is Rs 600,000. He approached the bank, and the bank agreed to sanction the loan based on the below conditions.

    • Down Payment: Rs 150,000
    • Loan Tenure: 3 years and above
    • Interest Rate: 15% PA.

    Now Mr. A wants to evaluate his monthly savings and decide on the loan taking possibilities. In excel, using the PMT function, we can calculate the EMI.

      Enter all this information in Excel.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Open PMT function in the B7 cell.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    The first thing is the rate, so interest rate select B6 cell. Since the interest rate is per annum, we need to convert it to month by dividing the same by 12.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    PV is nothing but the loan amount Mr. A taking from the bank. Since this amount is a credit given by the bank, we need to mention this amount is negative.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Close the bracket and hit enter. We have an EMI payment per month.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    So, in order to clear the loan of Rs 450,000 in 3 years at an interest rate of 15%, Mr. A has to pay Rs15,599 per month.

    Things to Remember

    • You need to fill the only orange colored cell.
    • The loan amortization tableLoan Amortization TableLoan amortization schedule refers to the schedule of repayment of the loan. Every installment comprises of principal amount and interest component till the end of the loan term or up to which full amount of loan is paid more will show the breakup of the Principal Amount and Interest Amount each month.
    • It will also show you the extra amount you are paying as a percentage.

    Recommended Articles

    This has been a guide to Mortgage Calculator in Excel. Here we discuss how to prepare a mortgage loan payment calculator using PMT Formula along with practical examples and a downloadable excel template. You may learn more about excel from the following articles –

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    If you are planning to purchase a home to live in or a building to start a business, it is important for you to know how much you can afford to pay every month in mortgage payments. A monthly mortgage payment basically consists of two parts, an amount that goes towards the principal of the loan and a second amount that goes towards the interest agreed between the two parties. The second part is actually the cost of borrowing money. You can easily calculate monthly mortgage payments using the Excel software from the Microsoft Office suite.

    Others are Reading

    • How to Print Business Cards In Microsoft Word
    • How To Create Boxes In Word


      font-size: 13px !important;color: #474747;text-align: justify;line-height: 21px;” >

    Gather potential loan information

    Gather information about your existing or potential loan. This information includes the interest rate, loan terms and the loan amount. If it is a hypothetical loan, you would need to estimate the interest rate.

    Launch MS Excel

    Launch Microsoft Excel on your computer and open up a blank workbook.

    Define Mortgage rate or interest rate

    Click cell “A3” in the upper left corner of your workbook and enter the interest rate or the rate of your mortgage as a percentage. For example, if you are looking at a four and a half percent loan, type “4.50” in the cell and press the “Enter” key on the keyboard.

    Define your Mortgage period or loan length

    Scroll right to the cell B3 and enter the amortization period of your mortgage, also known as loan term, as a number of years. 15 or 30 years are usually used as standard loan terms, but you can also use 20 or 25 years as your loan term. If you want to calculate mortgage payment for a typical 30-year loan term, type 30 in B3 and hit Enter.

    Define loan amount

    Again scroll right to cell C3 and enter the loan amount in it as a negative number. For example, if you want to look at the cost of a $450000 mortgage, enter “-450000” in the cell and press “Enter”.

    Calculate the payment

    Navigate to cell D3 and copy this formula =PMT(A3/12,B3*12,C3) and hit “Enter” on the key board. As soon as you press the Enter key, a payment amount will show up in the cell in parenthesis and red. The amount is in red colour because it is showing the amount of money owed. For a realistic estimate of the mortgage payment you will have to pay ever month, add property tax, insurance and other necessary fees to this amount.

    For most of modern people, to calculate monthly mortgage payment has become a common job. In this article, I introduce the trick to calculating monthly mortgage payment in Excel for you.

    Calculate monthly mortgage payment with formula

    To calculate monthly mortgage payment, you need to list some information and data as below screenshot shown:

    Then in the cell next to Payment per month ($), B5 for instance, enter this formula =PMT(B2/B4,B5,B1,0) , press Enter key, the monthly mortgage payments has been displayed. See screenshot:


    1. In the formula, B2 is the annual interest rate, B4 is the number of payments per year, B5 is the total payments months, B1 is the loan amount, and you can change them as you need.

    2. If you want to calculate the total loancost, you can use this formula =B6*B5 , B6 is the payment per month, B5 is the total number of payments months, you can change as you need. See screenshot:

    In Excel, you can easily create a mortgage calculator with the PMT function

    Explanation of the PMT function

    PMT calculates the PayMenT for a loan for a constant interest rate.

    The arguments of the function are:

    • Rate The interest rate on the loan.
    • Nper The total number of payment periods for the loan.
    • Pv The Present Value, the value of the mortgage or loan.
    • Fv The future value. It’s optional and the value = 0 most of the time.
    • Type Whether the payment calculation is done at the beginning of the period (1) or at the end (0)

    Example to calculate the mortgage payments

    The amount of your mortgage is 50,000$ for a period of 15 years and the interest rate is 4%.

    =PMT(4%;15;50000) => -4 497,06 €

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    This result is the annual refund (1 payment for the whole year). But usually you refund a mortgage monthly and the value for the arguments of the function is different.

    Mortgage calculator by month

    To return the value to refund by month, you must convert the value of the interest rate and the period in month

    Convert the period in month

    This conversion is very easy to do. You just have to multiply the number of years by 12.

    =Number of years*12

    Convert the annual interest rate in month

    This is the hardest part of the calculation. In fact there is 2 situations

    • The interests are calculated at the end of the period
    • The interests are running over the period

    If the interest are calculated at the end of the period, the conversion is really easy

    =annual interest rate/12

    If the interests are calculated over the period (common situation) the formula is more complex.

    =(1+annual interest rate)^(1/12)-1

    Result for the monthly value

    By replacing the previous formulas in the arguments of the function

    When creating a mortgage calculator, it is important to consider everything that would make the mortgage profitable for your company. We are going to create a mortgage calculator together in a step-by-step format. We will not just create it, but also calculate it.

    Data preparation

    Prepare the components of the calculator.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Display the data you already have. How much is being loaned (loan amount) (1), the interest rate per year (interest rate/year) (2), and the length of time it will take to repay the loan (loan length) (3). How many times will the client pay per year (4).

    You could right-click on empty cells before stating the values, choose Format Cells, choose Currency, and Percent if you have any issues creating the mortgage calculator.

    Preparing the mortgage formula

    Click on the empty cell beside the total number of payments (1), and type in =b6*b7 (2), and then press enter.

    Click on the empty cell beside payment/period (1), and type in =PMT(interest rate/year, total number of payment, -loan amount) (2).

    If you do not add a minus in front of the loan amount, you will get negative numbers as a result.

    Click on the empty cell beside the total cost of the loan (1), and multiply payment/period with the total number of payments (=b9*b8) (2).

    Click on the empty cell beside interest cost, and subtract the total cost of the loan from the loan amount (=b10-b4).

    In conclusion, we now know how much profit we will make if we borrow this amount of money from the client and how much the client would pay every month.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Mortgage calculator is an automated tool that helps the users to determine the financial suggestions of change in different variables in a mortgage financial schedule. To use the Excel Mortgage Calculator, you simply need to enter your mortgage details into the user input fields. The input fields would ask for your loan amount, the interest rate (%), number of years over which your loan has been withdrawn and the number of payments per year.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    How To Make A Mortgage Calculator With Excel

    Once you complete the above process, the summary table at the right-top of the spreadsheet will directly display the summary of your mortgage payment details. Along with this, the amortization arrangement will be displayed in the bottom line of the spreadsheet.

    Secondly, if you want the spreadsheet to display the dates of your schedule payments, you need to enter the initial loan start date into the column box of the user-input fields. Once the date has been entered, on the top left of the spreadsheet a summary box will be displayed, where you can enter the final payment. Moreover, each of the schedule payment dates will be displayed in spreadsheet’s bottom half.

    Do you know the functions used in the Excel mortgage calculator?

    PMT function

    The Excel PMT function has been used to calculate the monthly payments on a loan ($50,000), the total amount is supposed to be paid after 5 years. The interest is charged at a 5% rate per year. Finally, the payment of the loan will be made by the end of each month. Thus, to calculate the PMT function you need to use the formula, =pmt (5%/12,60,50000), calculating the formula, you will get the result as -943.56.

    PPMT function

    The PPMT function majorly calculates the Interest part of your regular scheduled payment. For example, the Excel PMT function will help you to calculate your payment on the principal amount in months 1 and 2 on the loan of ($50,000). The entire amount needs to be paid off after 5 years. Your interest will be charged at the rate of 5% per year and your payment over the loan requires being made by the end of each month. To understand the entire process, you need to use the formula, month 1: =ppmt(5%/12,1,6,50000) and for month 2: =PPMT(5%/12,2,60,50000)

    Calculating the formula, you will get a sum total of -$735.23 for month 1 and -$738.29 for month 2.

    IPMT Function

    The IPMT function would help you to calculate the interest part of your regular scheduled payment in month 1 and month 2. In case your principle loan amount is $50,000, you need to pay off the entire amount by the end of 5 years. Just like the previous process, the charge rate of the interest would be 5% per year. To get the interest amount, you need to use the formula:

    Month 1: =IPMT (5%/12, 1, 60, 50000) which comes to -$208.33

    Month 2: =IPMT (5%/12, 2, 60, 50000) which come to -$205.27

    Calculating a mortgage payment in Microsoft Excel is really easy to do. This article will walk thru the steps needed to set up the calculation of the monthly loan payment. In the end, you will learn how to calculate a mortgage payment with Excel.

    Excel has a number of financial functions built in. Namely, a function called PMT() that used to calculate the payment for a loan for a fixed amount of time with a constant or fixed interest rate.

    Just a Few Steps

    In the next few steps we’ll set up the basic template to calculate a mortgage payment with Excel.

    Start Microsoft Excel and get to a blank workbook to begin. This example will assume that you started in the very upper left corner of the workbook in cell A1.

    Start Microsoft Excel

    This can be any desktop version or the online version.

    Start Microsoft Excel and get to a blank workbook to begin. This example will assume that you started in the very upper left corner of the workbook in cell A1.

    Starting in cell A1, enter the text into the first set of cells. Adjust the width of column A so that the labels fit.

    Set up Your Fields

    We’ll use these few fields to run the mortgage payment calculator. Use the labels below.

    Loan Amount
    Interest Rate
    Loan Duration
    Loan Payment

    Starting in cell A1, enter the text into the first set of cells. Adjust the width of column A so that the labels fit.

    You can choose the different value types for each of the cells by clicking in the cell, and then clicking the button in the ribbon that matches the type.

    For currency, look for the “$” button. For percentage, look for the “%” button.

    To increase the number of decimals, look for the button with the “.00” and an arrow pointing to the LEFT.

    Set the Formatting for Each Cell

    For cell B1, choose currency.

    For cell B2, choose percentage. AND increase the number of decimals showing.

    For cell B3, there’s no need to change anything.

    For cell B4, choose currency.

    You can choose the different value types for each of the cells by clicking in the cell, and then clicking the button in the ribbon that matches the type.

    For currency, look for the “$” button. For percentage, look for the “%” button.

    To increase the number of decimals, look for the button with the “.00” and an arrow pointing to the LEFT.

    The colors you see in the image above will appear as you type in the formula.

    You’ll see #NUM! in the cell at first after you press Enter. It’s OK. That will all change in the final step.

    Enter the Formula to Calculate a Mortgage Payment

    The formula here needs to go into cell B4, right next to the Loan Payment label you entered.

    The colors you see in the image above will appear as you type in the formula.

    You’ll see #NUM! in the cell at first after you press Enter. It’s OK. That will all change in the final step.

    In this example, the monthly principal plus interest payment for a $450,000 mortgage at 4.5% over 30 years is $2,280.

    Add Your Info

    The Loan Amount is the amount you would finance. Or to make it simple let’s just say it’s the cost of the home.

    The Interest Rate is the annual interest rate. The formula you entered above divides it by 12 to get to a monthly cost.

    The Loan Duration is the number of years for the loan. The formula you entered above multiplies the number by 12 to get to the number of months for the loan.

    In this example, the monthly principal plus interest payment for a $450,000 mortgage at 4.5% over 30 years is $2,280.

    After you have gone thru the above you have the basic mortgage payment calculation for a fixed interest rate loan.

    Other Considerations for How to Calculate a Mortgage Payment in Excel

    It Really Needs to be PITI

    So far, the calculator you have set up is calculating the monthly principal plus interest payment. This is the “PI” of “PITI“. Most mortgage payments consist of the principal and interest, plus property taxes and homeowner’s insurance. These last two items are the “TI” of “PITI”: taxes and insurance.

    Most often, the principal and interest payments are the majority of the overall monthly payment. But say you’re getting a smaller loan on a home that has a high value. In that case you may find that your property taxes and homeowner’s insurance are a much larger part of your mortgage payment.

    Look Out for PMI

    Another acronym! PMI stands for Private Mortgage Insurance. Basically, PMI comes into the picture if the amount of your loan is going to be more than 80% of the value of the home you are buying. From the example above if the home’s value was $450,000, any loan for more than $360,000 would require PMI. The PMI component is in addition to any PITI part of your mortgage payment. If you start out with a mortgage that includes PMI in the payment, and the home you bought appreciates in value over time enough you may be able to remove the PMI part of your mortgage payment.

    Part II

    In an upcoming post we’ll extend how to calculate a mortgage payment with Excel to factor in your guestimate of the annual property taxes as well as homeowner’s insurance. We’ll add in PMI too.

    Managing personal finances can be a challenge, especially when trying to plan your payments and savings. Excel formulas and budgeting templates can help you calculate the future value of your debts and investments, making it easier to figure out how long it will take for you to reach your goals. Use the following functions:

    PMT calculates the payment for a loan based on constant payments and a constant interest rate.

    NPER calculates the number of payment periods for an investment based on regular, constant payments and a constant interest rate.

    PV returns the present value of an investment. The present value is the total amount that a series of future payments is worth now.

    FV returns the future value of an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.

    Figure out the monthly payments to pay off a credit card debt

    Assume that the balance due is $5,400 at a 17% annual interest rate. Nothing else will be purchased on the card while the debt is being paid off.

    Using the function PMT(rate,NPER,PV)

    the result is a monthly payment of $266.99 to pay the debt off in two years.

    The rate argument is the interest rate per period for the loan. For example, in this formula the 17% annual interest rate is divided by 12, the number of months in a year.

    The NPER argument of 2*12 is the total number of payment periods for the loan.

    The PV or present value argument is 5400.

    Figure out monthly mortgage payments

    Imagine a $180,000 home at 5% interest, with a 30-year mortgage.

    Using the function PMT(rate,NPER,PV)

    the result is a monthly payment (not including insurance and taxes) of $966.28.

    The rate argument is 5% divided by the 12 months in a year.

    The NPER argument is 30*12 for a 30 year mortgage with 12 monthly payments made each year.

    The PV argument is 180000 (the present value of the loan).

    Find out how to save each month for a dream vacation

    You’d like to save for a vacation three years from now that will cost $8,500. The annual interest rate for saving is 1.5%.

    Using the function PMT(rate,NPER,PV,FV)

    to save $8,500 in three years would require a savings of $230.99 each month for three years.

    The rate argument is 1.5% divided by 12, the number of months in a year.

    The NPER argument is 3*12 for twelve monthly payments over three years.

    The PV (present value) is 0 because the account is starting from zero.

    The FV (future value) that you want to save is $8,500.

    Now imagine that you are saving for an $8,500 vacation over three years, and wonder how much you would need to deposit in your account to keep monthly savings at $175.00 per month. The PV function will calculate how much of a starting deposit will yield a future value.

    Using the function PV(rate,NPER,PMT,FV)

    an initial deposit of $1,969.62 would be required in order to be able to pay $175.00 per month and end up with $8500 in three years.

    The rate argument is 1.5%/12.

    The NPER argument is 3*12 (or twelve monthly payments for three years).

    The PMT is -175 (you would pay $175 per month).

    The FV (future value) is 8500.

    Find out how long it will take to pay off a personal loan

    Imagine that you have a $2,500 personal loan, and have agreed to pay $150 a month at 3% annual interest.

    Using the function NPER(rate,PMT,PV)

    it would take 17 months and some days to pay off the loan.

    The rate argument is 3%/12 monthly payments per year.

    The PMT argument is -150.

    The PV (present value) argument is 2500.

    Figure out a down payment

    Say that you’d like to buy a $19,000 car at a 2.9% interest rate over three years. You want to keep the monthly payments at $350 a month, so you need to figure out your down payment. In this formula the result of the PV function is the loan amount, which is then subtracted from the purchase price to get the down payment.

    Using the function PV(rate,NPER,PMT)

    the down payment required would be $6,946.48

    The $19,000 purchase price is listed first in the formula. The result of the PV function will be subtracted from the purchase price.

    The rate argument is 2.9% divided by 12.

    The NPER argument is 3*12 (or twelve monthly payments over three years).

    The PMT is -350 (you would pay $350 per month).

    See how much your savings will add up to over time

    Starting with $500 in your account, how much will you have in 10 months if you deposit $200 a month at 1.5% interest?

    Using the function FV(rate,NPER,PMT,PV)

    in 10 months you would have $2,517.57 in savings.

    Graphic skills

    A mortgage calculator is commonly used to estimate monthly mortgage payments. It would be time-consuming to create a mortgage calculator from scratch. For convenience, WPS Office provides you with professional and practical mortgage calculator templates. Without further ado, let ’ s get started!

    · Steps to create a mortgage calculator with templates in WPS Office.

    1. Go to the homepage of WPS Office, and click Apps > Templates .

    2. Input “Mortgage Calculator” in the search box on the top and press the Enter key.

    3. Choose the desired template from the searching results, and click Use Now to apply it.

    4. Then you can edit the template as needed and save it as a normal document.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    · Recommended mortgage templates provided by WPS Office.

    Tips: You can click the following pictures to use these templates quickly.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel Home Mortgage Calculator

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel Extra Payment Mortgage Calculator

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel Mortgage Payoff Calculator

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel Fresh Mortgage Calculator Chart

    The templates provided by WPS Office go far beyond mortgage calculator charts, and you are welcome to visit WPS Templates to use more elegant and professional templates. Click the following links to view more templates quickly:

    · What is WPS Templates?

    WPS Templates offers you its massive number of free templates to work with. It not only simplifies your document creation but also saves time and money. Moreover, it gives you consistency and clarity. It ensures that your document has a standard layout, look and feel.

    Check out these tips and tricks to master WPS Office. Whether you need to create a report, write a letter, update your resume, create a cover page or add a cross reference, free WPS Office is ready and waiting. Learn how to take your Word, PPT, Excel and PDF from plain to exceptional. Find out the tips and tricks you need to know so that you can use Writer, Presentation, Spreadsheet and PDF like a pro!

    283 results for mortgage calculator excel spreadsheet

    • All Tutorials
    • Video Tutorials
    • Quick Tutorials
    • All
    • Spreadsheet
    • Presentation
    • Writer
    • PDF

    How to create mortgage calculator in WPS Office Excel

    A mortgage calculator is commonly used to estimate monthly mortgage payments. It would be time-consuming to create a mortgage calculator from scratch. For convenience, WPS Office provides you with professional and practical mortgage calculator templates. Without further ado, let’s get started! · Steps to create a mortgage calculator with templates in WPS Office.1. Go to the homepage of WPS Office, and click Apps > Templates.2. Input “Mortgage Calculator” in the search box on the top an.

    A quick way to calculate sum, average, count, max, and min

    A quick way to calculate sum, average, count, max, and min

    Here we have received a sheet on the Masks Sales in Single-Day Sheet from a supermarket. How can we quickly calculate the sum, average, maximum, and daily sales volume during the period from August 19th to 31st?We can use the AutoSum feature of the WPS Spreadsheet, rather than calculating all data one by one with a calculator, which would be a waste of time. Follow these step.1. Select the data area, click the AutoSum drop-down button in the Formulas tab.2. Find the Sum button and clic.

    How to unlock excel sheet in WPS Spreadsheet

    · Option 1If we have set up password protection:1. Use WPS Office to open the spreadsheet.2. Click the Review tab.3. Click the Unprotect Sheet button.4. In the pop-up Unprotect Sheet dialog box, enter the password you set before, and then click OK. · Option 2 If there is no password protection:1. Use WPS Office to open the spreadsheet.2. Click the Review tab.3. Click the Unprotect Sheet button. Then we can unlock excel sheet in WPS Spreadsheet. To be office excel advanced, you could le.

    More features in picture inserting

    More features in picture inserting

    WPS Spreadsheet could be an alternative to Microsoft Office Excel. It includes 100’s of built-in formulas, pivot tables, and more. WPS Spreadsheet and Microsoft Excel both have the function of inserting pictures. Compared with Microsoft Excel, WPS spreadsheet has an added advantage-Embed to cell. In Microsoft Excel, we usually need to manually adjust the size of the pictures after inserting them. If the position of the table changes, the inserted pictures will not fit in the new ce.

    More features in Picture to Text

    More features in Picture to Text

    Both WPS Spreadsheets and Microsoft Excel have the function of Converting pictures to text. What are the differences between them? Microsoft Excel itself does not support the OCR function. If you want to convert Picture to Text, you need to open another application, OneNote. 1. Copy the picture and paste it into OneNote.2. Click Copy Text from Picture with the right mouse button3. Paste the text into Excel as needed. In WPS Spreadsheet, the OCR function allows us to convert pictures to.

    How to view two sheets side by side

    How to view two sheets side by side

    When checking data in WPS Spreadsheet, we frequently need to check and edit multiple sheets at the same time. We’ll learn how to see two pages on the same screen today.· Step one: Create and view two sheets side by sideFirst, let’s open an Excel file containing multiple worksheets. Click New window in the View tab. At this time, another identical Excel document window will appear. These two windows are presenting the same file. No matter which one is edited, the changes can be.

    How to create a Form in spreadsheet

    How to create a Form in spreadsheet

    WPS Spreadsheet could be an alternative to Microsoft Office Excel. It includes 100’s of built-in formulas, pivot tables, and more. Today, we will learn how to create a Form in WPS spreadsheet, which allows us to input, search and modify the data. Note: If the table contains merged cells, the Form function will be unavailable. · 1. Data inputFirst, click the Data tab and click the Form button. In the pop-up window, the system will automatically take the title row as the field name. .

    How to create a table with one click

    How to create a table with one click

    Did you know that, when you are using WPS Spreadsheet, you can directly create a table in the original datasheet? The generated table comes with functions such as sorting, filtering, and setting styles, which can save us a lot of time for subsequent operations. For all, easy our work with WPS Spreadsheet like Microsoft Excel. Here are the steps to create a table. Take the sales table in this article as an example. 1. Click the Table button in the Insert tab. (Notes: You can also use th.

    Providing an online calculator on your website makes people come back. Design your online calculation in Microsoft Excel, then convert it into a calculating and interactive web page that can be published on yourВ website.

    Help your visitors do a better job, and they will return to your site for more. At last you can create online calculators for your website without the help of a programmer. All you need is Microsoft Excel.

    • Price calculation: Online pricing calculators help your customers get the total price including options, maintenance etc.
    • Financial calculation: provide online mortgage calculators, interest calculation, loan calculators or online lease calculation.
    • Calculators for governments and counties: online income tax calculation, online social benefits, online payroll calculators.
    • ROI: OnlineВ return on investment calculation to better show the benefits of your product, or calculate Internal Rate of Return (IRR).
    • Technical and engineering calculators: online dimensioning tools, online HVAC calculations, load calculators, concrete calculation, torque calculation, area calculators, volume calculation, electrical calculation, power calculation.
    • Health calculators: online body mass index calculator, online calorie calculation, online body fat calculator.

    You can use any feature of Excel on the web, including formulas and functions, to validate data entry, select intelligent default values or show customized images or maps.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Online calculators boost sales

    Online calculators turn passive browsers into active visitors. If you make them start using your price calculator for a quote, or to check how much they can save by changing a mortgage, research shows a drastic increase in sales.

    Online calculation is valuable also on websites that don’t sell anything. If you can supply anВ online calculator that solves problems that your visitors have, they will come back to use your calculator, and they will tell friends and colleagues about your site and theВ online servicesВ it offers.

    Online spreadsheetsВ make your web professional

    A time-saving calculator makes your web site stand out from the competition. It’s so easy to put any existing form or calculator on the web: expense reports, surveys, quote generators, order forms, reservation forms, employment applications, financial calculators, engineering tools – the list is endless.

    We’re not only talking simple plus-and-minusВ spreadsheets here.

    • Create mobile-friendly, responsive forms that automatically adapt to different screen widths, portrait/landscape orientation etc.
    • To make it easier to understand a large form, split it into two or more separate steps and let users navigate between the sections using tabs, next/previous buttons or sliding panels.
    • Use graphical widgets like menus and calendars to make the form easier to use.
    • Hide rows or complete sections of a form until you know they are applicable.
    • Allow file attachments with submitted web forms.
    • You can have mandatory responses.
    • Use hidden fields to discretely include supplemental information in the form.
    • With Real-time Sync, two or more persons can share a web form and collaborate in real-time.
    • Fetch live data from corporate databases when run on ASP.Net or Node.js servers.
    • Build forms-based web apps for iPhone and Android devices that can submit smart forms directlyВ – even when the phone is offline.
    • Use live, interactive charts that invite users to point-and-click, and the charts automatically update when values are changed.

    The free form-to-Inbox service requires no installation, no programming skills and no configuration. Once you upload your first web form to your server, submitted forms start arriving at your Inbox. You are up and running within minutes. For a small monthly fee, we can store submitted forms in a cloud database for you until you visit our server to pick them up.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Home Equity calculator with live interactive chart

    This is one of our favorite examples because it shows the advantage of live charts. Change any cell in the spreadsheet and the chart immediately reflects the new values.

    In this example, you can also see a useful implementation of a slider. To change the years remaining on a loan, we could just have used a standard numeric field. Using a slider allows for much easier visualization of how the equity varies over the lifetime of the loan.

    Features and benefits

    SpreadsheetConverter is the perfect tool for creating calculating web forms and web pages that attract attention.

    This example teaches you how to create a loan amortization schedule in Excel.

    1. We use the PMT function to calculate the monthly payment on a loan with an annual interest rate of 5%, a 2-year duration and a present value (amount borrowed) of $20,000. We use named ranges for the input cells.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    2. Use the PPMT function to calculate the principal part of the payment. The second argument specifies the payment number.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    3. Use the IPMT function to calculate the interest part of the payment. The second argument specifies the payment number.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    4. Update the balance.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    5. Select the range A7:E7 (first payment) and drag it down one row. Change the balance formula.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    6. Select the range A8:E8 (second payment) and drag it down to row 30.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    It takes 24 months to pay off this loan. See how the principal part increases and the interest part decreases with each payment.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Related Articles

    • How to Pay Off a 30-Year Mortgage in 15 Years
    • How to Work Out Real Estate Salesperson Commissions
    • Can We Get a Mortgage if We Are Both Working Part Time?
    • How Do I Create a Loan Amortization Table in Excel?
    • How do I Calculate a Mortgage Payment Using Excel?

    When you take out a fixed-rate mortgage to buy or refinance a home, your lender takes three numbers and plugs them into a formula to calculate your monthly payment. Those three numbers are your principal, or the amount of money you’re borrowing; your interest rate; and the number of months in your loan term. You can quickly create a spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel to perform the calculation for you–and, in the process, gain a greater understanding of just how a mortgage loan works.

    Launch Microsoft Excel. Open a new workbook by pressing “Ctrl” and “N.”

    Type “Principal” into cell A1 on the Excel worksheet. Type “Rate” into cell A2. Type “Months” into cell A3.

    Enter the amount of the mortgage principal in cell B1.

    Enter the interest rate in cell B2. Just enter the number; don’t use the percent sign. So, if your rate is 7 percent, just enter 7. If it’s 5.75 percent, enter 5.75.

    Enter the number of months in the loan term in cell B3. Most mortgages are for either 15 or 30 years. Enter 180 for a 15-year mortgage or 360 for a 30-year loan. If your loan is for some other number of years, simply multiply that number by 12 and enter the result in cell B3.

    Enter the following formula in cell A4, beginning with the “equals” sign:

    This converts your annual interest rate to a decimal figure by dividing it by 100, then breaks it down into a monthly rate by dividing it by 12.

    Enter the following formula in cell A5, beginning with the “equals” sign:

    This step takes into account the compounding of the interest over the life of the loan.

    Enter the following formula in cell A6, beginning with the “equals” sign:

    This takes all the data and boils it down to a multiplier that’s applied to your principal to determine your monthly payment.

    Enter the following formula in cell A7, beginning with the “equals” sign:

    This applies the multiplier to your loan principal.

    Right-click on cell A7 and select “Format Cells.” Set the formatting to “Currency.” Set “Decimal Places” to 2. Set the “Currency Symbol” to the dollar sign. Click “OK.” This cell now gives you the amount of your mortgage payment based on your principal, interest rate and loan term.

    Experiment with different principal amounts, interest rates and loan terms just by changing the values in cells B1, B2 and B3. The total payment in cell A7 will change to reflect the new figures.


    Most lenders require that you pay your property taxes and homeowners’ insurance premiums on a monthly basis, with 1/12 of the total tacked on to each mortgage payment. Those amounts are not included in this calculation. The result in cell A7 includes only the amount that goes to your lender–the total principal and interest due each month.

    • Amortization Formula
    • Bank Rate: Mortgage Amortization Calculator

    Cam Merritt is a writer and editor specializing in business, personal finance and home design. He has contributed to USA Today, The Des Moines Register and Better Homes and Gardens”publications. Merritt has a journalism degree from Drake University and is pursuing an MBA from the University of Iowa.

    Want to Calculate Loan Payments Offline?

    We have offered a downloadable Windows application for calculating mortgages for many years, but we have recently had a number of people request an Excel spreadsheet which shows loan amortization tables.

    Our Simple Excel loan calculator spreadsheet offers the following features:

    • works offline
    • easily savable
    • allows extra payments to be added monthly
    • shows total interest paid & a month-by-month amortization schedule

    Microsoft Excel Loan Calculator Spreadsheet Usage Instructions

    The calculator updates results automatically when you change any input.

    loan amount – the amount borrowed, or the value of the home after your down payment.

    interest rate – the loan’s stated APR. For your convenience, we publish local Los Angeles mortgage rates below to help you see currently available rates.

    loan term in years – most fixed-rate home loans across the United States are scheduled to amortize over 30 years. Other common domestic loan periods include 10, 15 & 20 years. Some foreign countries like Canada or the United Kingdom have loans which amortize over 25, 35 or even 40 years.

    payments per year – defaults to 12 to calculate the monthly loan payment which amortizes over the specified period of years. If you would like to pay twice monthly enter 24, or if you would like to pay biweekly enter 26.

    loan start date – the date which loan repayments began, typically a month to the day after the loan was originated.

    optional extra payment – if you want to add an extra amount to each monthly payment then add that amount here & your loan will amortize quicker. If you add an extra payment the calculator will show how many payments you saved off the original loan term and how many years that saved.

    Enable Your Worksheet to Calculate Your Loan Payments

    How to Enable Your Mortgage Calculation Spreadsheet

    When you download Excel spreadsheets from the web they download in PROTECTED VIEW.

    You need to click on [Enable Editing] in the yellow banner at the top of the spreadsheet to change variable amounts.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Right click on any of the above images to save a copy of our Excel loan calculator spreadsheet, or click on them to directly open it.

    By default this calculator is selected for monthly payments and a 10-year loan term.

    Some of Our Software Innovation Awards!

    Since its founding in 2007, our website has been recognized by 10,000’s of other websites. A few of our software innovation awards are listed below:

    Current Mortgage Rates

    The following table shows locally available mortgage rates which you can use to help calculate your monthly home loan payments.

    Homeowners May Want to Refinance While Rates Are Low

    The Federal Reserve has hinted they are likely to taper their bond buying program later this year. Lock in today’s low rates and save on your loan.

    Are you paying too much for your mortgage?

    Find Out What You Qualify For

    Check your refinance options with a trusted local lender.

    Answer a few questions below and connect with a lender who can help you refinance and save today!

    Saturday, 23 April 2016

    How to build a Mortgage Amortization Table in EXCEL

    A mortgage amortization table splits monthly mortgage repayments into two elements, the principal paid and also the interest paid. Amortization details the process of separating mortgage repayments over the duration of the mortgage loan between interest paid and principal payment.

    Home loans are usually front-loaded with interest. What this means is at the start of the mortgage you are paying out much more in interest than you are repaying on the original balance. This operates to your benefit at the end of the mortgage loan since the interest is computed on the outstanding balance. The smaller the outstanding balance, the much less you’ll pay out in interest.

    The mortgage amortization table provides you with a comprehensive picture of the home loan over its whole term. So you can see exactly how payments are applied, what remains when it comes to principle and interest payments as well as the bottom line on the amount of money you’re paying to borrow money for your house. Needless to say, a mortgage amortization calculator will certainly cause you to think about shorter term mortgages with reduced rates of interest. Understanding how much money you’re ultimately spending to have reduced repayments every month will actually help you think about the smarter long-term alternatives.

    Typically with each monthly payment, you only pay back part of the amount of money initially borrowed plus interest on the decreasing balance of the principal. How much your monthly payments are is dependent, in part, on the principal, the rate of interest and the amount of time permitted for repayment. Amortization term is the amount of time necessary to amortize the home loan. The amortization period is the amount of time, generally, twenty-five years which it takes to totally repay a mortgage loan by means of repayment of the initial debt or principal and also the accrued interest.

    To create a mortgage amortization table for your home loan use one of the many online amortization schedule calculators available. Amortization schedules can be calculated immediately online at one of these sites. One such site is Yahoo and see also Karl’s Mortgage Calculator.

    Another option for creating a mortgage amortization table is Microsoft Excel. If you have the program installed on you computer you can download an amortization template from the Microsoft site here.

    A mortgage amortization table using Excel will give you a good idea of the monthly payments on a loan or mortgage and how much in interest you will pay over the term of the mortgage. Setting up this in Excel or any other spreadsheet application is quiet easy.

    Now you can setup the formulas yourself or you can do what I do and download a simple template for Excel. With a template, it is just a matter of filling in the required information and you get an instant amortization table. The information you need to hand includes the loan amount, the interest rate and the term of the loan in months.

    Another option for creating a mortgage amortization table is Microsoft Excel. If you have the program installed on you computer you can download an amortization template from the Microsoft site here.

    You need to keep in mind that a loan amortization table will only be accurate up to a point. You will need to get a detailed amortization table from your lenders like personalloansny or a major bank.

    It is also advisable to get a quotation from a number of banks before taking up any loan offer.

    If you are about to buy your next new home or are thinking of remortgaging Excel provides a great way to work out what your monthly repayments will be. Using the PMT function we can work out what your repayments will be – all you need to do is enter your mortgage amount, term of loan and borrowing interest rate – Excel does the rest for you.

    Start by entering the data as shown below. You can enter you own mortgage amount, loan term and interest rate. Note that the loan amount has been entered as a negative figure. It will work if you don’t enter a negative but the resulting repayment figure will be negative if you don’t. The term or length of the loan has been entered in months to get a monthly repayment figure: 300 months is 25 years.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    In cell B7 type =PMT and then use the shortcut keyboard combination CTRL A to open the Functions Arguments dialog.

    In the Rate argument type B5/12 (you are dividing the annual interest rate by 12 to the month equivalent)

    The Nper argument needs to know the number of payments – the answer to that is in B4

    Fv (future value) is omitted and can stay that way if you plan to pay the mortgage off by the end of the loan term

    Type is omitted as we are making our repayments at the end of each month. If you plan to make payments at the beginning of the month enter 1 in this argument. This makes very little difference to the formula result.

    Click OK to confirm.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Flexible Mortgage Calculator

    If you have a flexible mortgage you can make huge savings by making regular overpayments or making lump sum overpayments. Our flexible mortgage calculator allows you to calculate the savings you can make. Download it now for free – it’s an Excel spreadsheet.
    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Watch the video below to see how to use the Excel PMT function…

    Written by co-founder Kasper Langmann, Microsoft Office Specialist.

    A loan payment calculator is a must-have tool if you’re planning on taking out a loan.

    It’s a good way to determine how the loan amount, its interest, and the loan term affect the total amount you’ll be paying.

    If you want to make your own, the ‘PMT’ function in Excel , coupled with other functions, can be used to create a loan payment calculator.

    But if you like the easier and quicker way, you can download and use existing loan calculator templates online.

    Today, we’ll be showing you how to use Microsoft’s free simple loan calculator to create an amortization table and payment schedule for any type of loan.

    *This tutorial was written in Microsoft Excel 2019 for Windows. Got a different version? No problem, you can still follow the exact same steps.

    Table of Content

    Microsoft’s free loan calculator template

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Not only is this a free loan calculator, but it also lists out your payment schedule on it. You can see details like balance , principal , interest , and ending balance .

    To download this template, simply head over to this link and click the ‘Download’ button .

    Once you got the file, open it up and you’ll see the calculator.

    How to use the loan calculator

    The first thing to do after you downloaded the file is to enable editing.

    You can’t input your own figures without doing this.

    Click ‘Enable Editing’ at the top just below the Ribbon.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Now that you can edit the file, you have to know first the appropriate cells you should edit.

    In this calculator template, there are lots of information you can see:

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    • Loan amount – the amount you’ll be borrowing
    • Annual interest rate – the interest rate of the loan annually
    • Loan period in years – the term of the loan in years
    • Start date of loan – the day when the payments for the loan will begin
    • Monthly payment – the total amount you’ll be paying monthly for the duration of the loan
    • Number of payments – total number of payments/installments
    • Total interest – the total interest you’ll be paying
    • Total cost of loan – the total amount you’ll be paying

    In addition to that, there’s an amortization table and chart showing you the principal paid, interest paid, and the loan balance.

    Using the calculator is really easy. Once you change a value, the result gets automatically updated.

    However, you should only change the loan details:

    • Loan amount
    • Annual interest rate
    • Loan period in years
    • Start date of loan

    Here’s what would happen if you change a single detail:

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    The ‘Number of payments’ is automatically calculated (multiplied by 12 ) given that you would have to pay monthly for the duration of the loan.

    But if your loan’s payment period isn’t monthly ( weekly , quarterly , semi-quarterly ), editing this calculator would prove to be a bit of a hassle.

    As most loan calculator templates, this one is currently set up to calculate and show the payments you’ll be doing monthly.

    If you really need an Excel loan calculator where you can adjust the payment periods, you can actually create your own advanced PMT calculator in under a minute . Just download the file on that guide and copy-paste the formulas from the article to complete the calculator.

    by Adam | Aug 21, 2015 | Blog

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Many businesses use custom calculators externally and internally in finance, real estate, insurance, return investment, energy industry and several others. What if a bank could save you hundreds of dollars every year by choosing another mortgage plan? You would certainly listen to what they have to say. Online calculators provide quick results and are a great source for proving valuable information to customers.

    It makes perfect sense to develop these calculators in Excel. Built-in worksheet formulas make it very easy to implement even the most sophisticated calculators. Here in this example, we are going to be using a spreadsheet for calculating how much you could save, using LED bulbs instead of conventional bulbs. The break-even point and return time are calculated for different scenarios.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    This calculator works great in Excel. But it is not very efficient to ask customers to download the document and fill it out. First, they may not have Excel on their computers and we all know of compatibility issues in different operating systems. Moreover, clients might be on a tablet or a mobile device that has limited accessibility. There may be proprietary information in the file that business owners may not want others to see. These are only a fraction of reasons why businesses prefer a different delivery instrument for these calculators, and not distribute Excel files.

    This is where SpreadsheetWEB comes handy in converting these Excel based calculators into web applications. End users don’t need Excel. They can access it from any device with a browser. Business owners protect their proprietary data and algorithms. They can update underlying data and algorithms whenever they want. It will become a live tool and will keep up with the latest data. In an organic, evolving economy, keeping abreast with the latest information is paramount.

    Most companies provide online calculators for free and ask users enter their email address in return. In this application, we would also like to add a “Send” button (the gray box on the bottom is suitable for this), to send the results to the email address provided. This mechanic will also deter users from entering fake emails. The email is stored in the database, widening the company’s marketing network.

    Here, the end users don’t even have to have any kind of software installed. All that is needed is a web browser. This aspect prevents issues with version incompatibilities and lets you reach a wider customer base with less trouble, while making the calculator available for almost any device.

    The spreadsheet first needs to be converted into an appropriate form. Thanks to SpreadsheetWEB Conversion Wizard, this process is quite straightforward and can be done in a matter of minutes. Once the conversion is complete, it is uploaded to the SpreadsheetWEB Cloud or your servers. In our case, the final product will look like this:

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    This application can now be made public by sharing the corresponding link. Users enter their data into the designated input fields and receive a PDF document in their email, on how much they could save on electricity bills every year.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    The report compares possible scenarios side by side, and includes details like the payback time and total savings per year. The user realizes that a lot is wasted in their household and the company gains a potential customer. SpreadsheetWEB also features visual reporting capabilities; you can track every entry on assorted visualizations and set company goals accordingly.

    Business specific online calculators are a great way to convince a doubtful customer, because claims are backed up with numbers and few can argue with that. Among several advantages in using a web application are; secure sharing, ease of use, enhanced customer base tracking and a unified network. SpreadsheetWEB allows you to create fancy calculators using Excel and then distribute them to whoever you want.

    By: Waseem Patwegar

    The PMT Function in Excel returns the periodic repayment amount for a loan. You will find below the steps to use Excel PMT Function to calculate monthly mortgage payments.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Excel PMT Formula

    You can get the exact Syntax of the PMT Function in Microsoft Excel by typing =PMT in any cell of an Excel worksheet.

    Syntax of PMT Function = PMT(Rate, NPER, PV, [FV], [Type])

    • Rate: Interest Rate
    • NPER: The number of periods required to pay the loan
    • PV: The present value of the loan
    • [FV]: [Optional] – The future value or cash balance that you want after the last payment is made. Excel assumes a default value of 0 in case you do not specify anything
    • [Type]: [Optional] – Excel assumes a default value of “0” which means the payments are due on the last day of the month. You can specify the value “1” in case the payments are due on the first day of the month.

    1. Find Monthly Mortgage Payments Using Excel PMT Formula

    In this example, let us try to find monthly mortgage payments required to pay back a loan of $260,000 obtained at fixed interest rate of 3.69% per annum.

    Similar to housing loans from a bank, the borrowed amount is to be fully paid back in 25 years using fixed monthly payments.

    1. The first step is to organize the available data ( Loan Amount , Period of loan, Interest Rate ) in an Excel Worksheet and convert the data into monthly values.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    As you can see in above image, the Period of Loan ( Amortization period ) and Interest Rate have been converted into their equivalent monthly values.

    2. Next, place curser in Cell C8 (where you want the result) and type =PMT – This will make Excel provide the Syntax of PMT Function that you can follow in the next steps.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    3. Going by the Syntax, select Cell C6 (0.31%) as the Rate .

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    4. Select, Cell C5 (300) as nper or the number of payments required.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    5. Select, Cell B4 ($260,000) as the present value of the loan.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    6. Enter or Type 0 (zero) as the Future Value of the loan (to be fully paid back at the end of term).

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    7. Select 0 (zero) as Type (Paid by End of period).

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    8. Finally, close the bracket and hit the enter key on the keyboard of your computer to get your monthly mortgage payments.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    As you can see from above steps, all that is required to use the PMT Formula in Excel is to follow the Syntax of the function.

    2. Quick Way to Use PMT Formula

    Here is an alternate and a quick way to use the Excel PMT formula to calculate monthly mortgage payments.

    1. Open Microsoft Excel Worksheet.

    2. Click on Formulas tab in the top Menu bar > select Financial from ‘Function Library’ section and double-click on PMT in the drop-down menu.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    2. In Function arguments box, you can directly enter Rate , Nper and Pv values to calculate monthly mortgage payments.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Tip: Instead of typing values, you can also point directly to Cells in the worksheet where the values for rate, Nper and Pv are located.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    To calculate an estimated mortgage payment in Excel with a formula, you can use the PMT function. In the example shown, the formula in F4 is:

    When assumptions in column C are changed, the estimated payment will recalculate automatically.

    The PMT function calculates the required payment for an annuity based on fixed periodic payments and a constant interest rate. An annuity is a series of equal cash flows, spaced equally in time. A mortgage is an example of an annuity.

    To calculate the monthly payment with PMT, you must provide an interest rate, the number of periods, and a present value, which is the loan amount. In the example shown, the PMT function is configured like this:

    • rate = C5/12
    • nper = C6*12
    • pv = -C9

    Because mortgage rates are annual, and terms are stated in years, the arguments for rate and periods are adjusted in this example. The rate is divided by 12 to get a monthly rate, and the term in years is multiplied by 12 to get the total number of monthly payments (nper). The present value (pv) comes from C9 which holds the loan amount. We use a minus operator to make this value negative, since a loan represents money owed, and is a cash outflow.

    Note: When using PMT, always be consistent with the units provided for rate and periods.

    Other formulas

    The down payment amount in C8 is calculated with:

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Related Articles

    • How Do I Read an Amortization Table?
    • How to Decorate a Table for a Fancy Breakfast
    • How do I Figure Out Mortgage Interest Savings?
    • How to Make a Beautiful Tablescape
    • How to Saw a Table in Half for Decorating

    A mortgage table, also called an amortization table or schedule, is a simple chart that shows how a mortgage balance changes with time after a series of consistent payments. The table also calculates the monthly payment amount based on the total mortgage value, the interest rate and the duration of the loan. You can create mortgage tables in Excel easily. The program offers financial functions to calculate payments, and the columnar grid allow for easy arrangement of a payment series. While you could program Excel to create a mortgage table from scratch, many free tables are available online.

    Download the “Amortization Schedule for Excel” by Vertex 42 and distributed by CNET. This free Excel spreadsheet offers pre-programmed formulas and a formatted table structure to complete any mortgage table. You do not need Excel programming knowledge to make your table. Since the program already includes all the financial functions to calculate your mortgage scenario, you don’t need to fully comprehend the details of the mathematics, either, since they are all taken care of for you. To use the “Amortization Schedule for Excel,” you simply type in the total value of the mortgage, the interest rate and the term or duration of the loan. The program takes care of the rest by showing due dates, payment amounts and the effect your payments and interest have on the remaining mortgage balance over time.

    Install official Microsoft templates for Excel that cover loan and mortgage amortization schedules and charts. Microsoft provides templates of many kinds, free of charge, to Office users. The “Loan amortization schedule template” provides all the basic components of a mortgage table: the amount of each payment, the portion of each payment that reflects interest paid, and the amount of each payment that contributes to paying down the mortgage balance. The template takes advantage of built-in financial functions in Excel to complete all the calculations for you. Microsoft also provides the “Loan analysis worksheet,” which displays a table for comparing different mortgage terms. You can see how monthly payments change based on small differences in interest rates.

    Download the “Loan and Mortgage Calculator Template for Excel” by Spreadsheets 123. This Excel spreadsheet contains several columns of information so that you can control even the most flexible of payment plans on your mortgage. The mortgage table includes options for occasional extra payments. It keeps track of your total payments to date, and also calculates the interest you save by paying more than the required amount each month. In addition to these features, it calculates all the standard mortgage table formulas, and shows how each payment contributes to the balance due.

    The Home Mortgage Tracker Spreadsheet allows you to track and analyze your current loan agreement to easily consider the total cost of the mortgage. Use the interactive dashboard to understand when your loan will be paid off, how much interest you are paying the bank, and what happens if you increase your monthly payments.

    Current Version: Version 1.3
    Compatibility: PC Only | Excel 2007 or later | Works on 32-bit or 64-bit
    License: Each template purchased equates to one single-user license

    Your home mortgage is most likely the largest debt you will take on during your lifetime (it certainly was for me). One major problem I ran into after purchasing my new home and getting my mortgage setup, was knowing how to plan out my payments. Do I go with the minimum and just pay what the bank tells me to do? Do I overpay? How much should I overpay? These were all questions that ran through my head and inspired me to put together a spreadsheet that helped me track my loan and understand exactly how much interest I was paying to the bank.

    After putting this spreadsheet together, I was able to easily see how I could save over $10,000 if I just increased my monthly payment by a few hundred dollars. It also served as motivation to try to control my expenses and put more money towards my loan as I could easily see how increases of an extra $25, $50, and $100 made a huge impact to the amount of interest I would be paying over the life of my mortgage loan.

    I saw how valuable this spreadsheet was for my personal finance and put a ton of effort into it to make it efficient enough to work for everyone. So go ahead and check out what I’ve put together and determine if one of the two offerings is something that would be useful for you!

    Founder, (and proud homeowner)

    “>,”hSize”:5,”floatDir”:”right”,”html”:” \n “,”url”:”″,”height”:480,”thumbnailUrl”:””,”resolvedBy”:”youtube”>” data-block-type=”32″ >

    The Dashboard is where you will spend most of your time. This single tab will consolidate all the important information about how you are tackling paying off your home mortgage. You can see when your loan is projected to be paid off, what your average payment has been, and track how much interest expense your have prevented.

    There is also a section that will allow you to quickly perform a scenario analysis on your monthly payments. Just enter in how much extra per month you believe you could put towards paying off your loan and see how that impacts your projects.

    To use this template, you will need to provide just a few things about your loan agreement:

    Which Currency do you want your numbers in (Dollars, Euros, Yen, or Pounds)?

    Interest Rate.

    The amount of money that was loaned to you.

    How long you have to pay off the loan (typically 15 or 30 years)?

    The start date of your loan.

    Your current Escrow payment.

    Are you making payments Monthly, Bi-Weekly, or Weekly?

    What was your down payment for your home?

    How much have you spent on home improvements (ie new furnace, finished basement, etc…)?

    After you have entered in those key data points, just click the Refresh Loan Table button and the spreadsheet will do the rest!

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    After you have entered in your loan information, you will immediately see some calculated information about your loan. For example, you will learn what month/year you will be paying off your loan and also how much interest you will be paying the bank. You can then continue to the Amortization table and enter in any changes to your planned payments (see next section).

    Unless you are an accountant, you are probably cringing (or completely terrified) after seeing the word: Amortization! Don’t worry, I’ve gone ahead and done all the hard work and created all the formulas that will track the interest, principal, and current balance of your loan. Instead of an “Amortization Table”, let’s just call it your “Loan Table”. This table is going to perform the same calculations your bank will be using to track the progress of how you are paying back your loan.

    All you need to do is go into this table each month and enter your loan payment amount, Escrow payment (if applicable), and interest rate (if you don’t have a variable interest rate, it will remain the same no matter what). That’s all there is to it! You can then proceed to your awesome Dashboard tab and get an nice visual update on how you are doing with your loan.

    I know not everyone has the money to buy a fancy spreadsheet, so I went ahead and created a simple & clean Loan Amortization Table spreadsheet that will help you track your monthly payments and keep track of how much interest you will be paying over the course of the loan. This single tab Excel file is easy to maintain and does a great job at helping you track your loan.

    There are two versions of this template available to download. Skim down through the Feature Grid below, so you can determine which version is right for you!

    Free Future Updates

    As with all purchased products sold by TheSpreadsheetGuru, you don’t have to worry about purchasing too early! After you purchase this template, you will be placed on an exclusive email list where you will directly receive any update made to this product.

    30-Day Money Back Guarantee

    I’m so confident you will love this Excel spreadsheet, I’m willing to give you 30 days from your purchase date to decide if this is the tool for you. If you come to the conclusion that this Excel spreadsheet was not what you were expecting, just shoot me an email and I’ll refund you your money back.

    So what’s there to lose? Now is your opportunity to pick up this revolutionary Excel spreadsheet that will bring clarity to your home loan and hopefully give you the confidence to save some money on interest.

    Click the Buy Now button below to quickly get your hands on this amazingly powerful Excel spreadsheet!

    You now have the ability to track and analyze how you have been paying off your home mortgage. Knowing the amount of interest you could potentially end up paying versus how much you can afford to prevent is tremendously powerful and using this spreadsheet is going to make the process so much easier for you. Pickup a copy of the Home Mortgage Tracker Excel spreadsheet today!

    The use of a “mortgage calculator” can be very helpful when trying to figure out monthly housing payments, how much one can afford, and how one should structure a mortgage. You really should use these one (or two or three) before you consider buying real estate.

    Check Out My Web-Based Mortgage Calculators

    • Mortgage payment calculator
    • How much house can I afford calculator
    • Refinance calculator
    • Early mortgage payoff calculator
    • Rent vs. buy calculator

    There are a number of different mortgage calculators available that serve all types of different purposes. Some are very simple, while others are very involved, including things like property taxes, homeowners insurance, HOA dues, and so forth.

    There’s also the question of accuracy, as some may underestimate the true cost of homeownership. I’d say they more often underestimate rather than overestimate, which is an obvious problem for would-be home buyers, especially first-timers who may also downplay the many hidden costs involved.

    Anyway, let’s stop worrying and start calculating, shall we?

    You may want to start with the classic mortgage payment calculator, which as the name implies, allows you to calculate a monthly mortgage payment. This is ultra-basic, but also a good first step in determining how much a given loan amount will set you back. And this is before we even factor in insurance, taxes, and utilities. It can really add up.

    You can use it to calculate a 30-year fixed mortgage, a 15-year fixed, or any other loan term of your choosing. It’s very simple to use and is a good starting point on your mortgage journey.

    If you’re a first-time home buyer or a seasoned pro looking to buy a second or third home, the how much house can I afford calculator might be just the ticket to narrow down your real estate search.

    If you’re already a homeowner and have an existing mortgage, you can check out my refinance calculator, which will factor in your current home loan and proposed refinance loan to determine if it’s more or less a good deal.

    It doesn’t always make sense to refinance, depending on your unique situation, so taking the time to run the numbers might be a good idea before you dive in.

    Once you do find that forever home, you might be interested in paying off your mortgage once and for all, and perhaps even early.

    If that’s your goal, check out the early mortgage payoff calculator, which allows you to plug in extra payments in a variety of different ways to see how quickly you can pay off your mortgage, and more importantly, how much you can save on interest over the life of the loan.

    Excel-Based Mortgage Calculators

    • If you prefer an offline mortgage calculator
    • To a web-based one
    • I also have some free Excel-based calculators available
    • Including a DTI calculator, a blended rate calculator, and a neg-am calculator

    Back in the day, I created a few mortgage calculators using Microsoft Excel. Unfortunately, I’m not able to integrate the calculators into my blog, so you’ll have to download the Excel spreadsheets below. They are safe. Use a virus checker if you are at all concerned or simply stick to the web-based mortgage calculators above instead.

    If you’re thinking about buying a piece of property you’ll need to know your debt-to-income ratio. Use this handy mortgage calculator to tally up your monthly debts and proposed housing payment and then compare the sum to your monthly income. It’s much better than simply ballparking those figures.

    Another crucial mortgage calculator is the interest-only payment mortgage rate calculator. It calculates your monthly mortgage payment if you just pay the interest portion of your mortgage payment. Many borrowers choose interest-only home loans to save money, but it won’t pay off any of the principal of your home.

    If you want to know the total principal and interest payment each month, try my 30 year mortgage calculator. It calculates your monthly payment based on a 30-year fixed-rate, assuming you pay the full principal and interest payment each month. This payment is always higher than an interest-only payment, but some of the monthly payment actually goes towards the ownership of your home.

    If you’re considering a combo, that is, a first and second mortgage, use my “blended rate mortgage calculator” below to decide if two loans are better than one. This calculator generates a single interest rate based on both proposed loan balances and their corresponding interest rates. First learn more about how to figure out blended rates, then download the calculator!

    Here is my personal favorite, the negative amortization mortgage calculator. Businessweek magazine featured this type on mortgage as their cover story no more than a couple months ago. For anyone thinking about an option-arm/neg-am, this calculator is a must!

    Here is a new calculator I have been using for my own finances for the last few months. It allows me to manage all my credit cards, including their balances, minimum payment, due date, APR, and total credit line. It also allows me to see my aggregate credit line and total available credit percentage. It’s a handy tool that will keep you up-to-date and also give you a good idea of how your credit appears to possible creditors.

    Bookmark this page!

    1 thought on “Mortgage Calculators”

    Hey Colin, I need to create a spreadsheet for an amortized loan that has the ability to accept input for any payment along the way (from 0-payoff) and re-amortize accordingly. Kind of a combination of the old ‘extra-payment’ loan amort template that was and is widely available and a neg am version.

    do you have anything like this already so I don’t have recreate it?

    Model loan amortization with easy-to-use templates

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Spreadsheets are powerful tools that help you understand how a loan works. They make it easy to see important details about your loan, and the calculations are more or less automated. You can even use pre-built loan amortization templates that allow you to simply enter a few details about your loan.

    Spreadsheets are available from several popular providers, and the instructions here will work with Microsoft Excel, Google Sheets, Apple Numbers, Apache OpenOffice, and many others.

    DIY vs. Calculator Templates

    There’s no need to do it all yourself—unless you really want to. Templates allow you to plug in a few details about your loan and be done with it, and those pre-built templates are easy to use.

    To use a loan template in Excel, open the program and if “Loan Amortization” is not an immediate option, type those words into the search box.  

    Once you’re in the template, fill in information related to your loan:

    • Loan amount: Enter the amount you are borrowing.
    • Annual interest rate: Use the interest rate on your loan (you can either use APR or a stated interest rate, if available). You should not need to convert to decimal format, but make sure the rate is displayed correctly.
    • The number of payments per year: How frequently do you pay? For monthly payments, for example, enter 12.
    • Start date of loan: This might be helpful for planning, but is not essential for accurate calculations.
    • Optional extra payments: If you’ll pay extra—or if you want to know how helpful it would be to pay extra—use this field. Pay attention to how much you save on cumulative interest, and how much more quickly the loan gets paid off when you pay extra.

    How to Build an Excel Loan Model

    Doing it yourself takes more time, but you’ll develop financial knowledge and spreadsheet skills you can’t get from a template. Plus, you can customize to your heart’s content. That said, after you’ve done this a few times, you might find it faster to use a template to start the process, then “unprotect” the template and make your modifications.

    Let’s say you want a model that shows you every yearly or monthly payment. Start at the top row of your spreadsheet and add the following section titles to each row (where you’ll enter information about your loan):

    • Loan amount
    • Interest rate
    • Number of periods (or loan term)

    Give those cells a green fill color, which tells you that you can change those values as you compare loans and run what-if scenarios.

    Now you’re ready to make your data table. Create a row with these column names:

    • Period number
    • Starting loan balance
    • Payment
    • Amount applied to interest
    • Amount applied to the principal
    • Remaining loan balance

    You can also add additional columns (such as cumulative interest paid). It’s up to you.

    Run Your Calculations

    Next, you’ll need a row for each payment as part of your data table. In the far left column of your spreadsheet (below the “Period number” column described above), add one number on each row: The first row is “1,” then move down a row for “2,” and so on. Each row is one payment. For a 30-year loan, you’d have 360 monthly payments—for large numbers like that it’s easiest to fill in the first few periods and use Excel’s “fill handle” to fill in all of the remaining rows.

    Now, have Excel fill in and calculate values for you. Remember to use the “$” before any row number in a formula in your calculations except the Period—otherwise, Excel will look in the wrong row.

    1. Use the PMT function to calculate your monthly payment (using information from your “input area”). This payment generally does not change over the life of the loan, so this function would be the same all the way down. (The Excel function is: “=PMT(‘Loan amount,’ ‘Interest Rate,’ ‘Periods’)”)
    2. Use the IPMT function to show the amount of each payment that goes to interest. (Same formula as above, just with IPMT at the beginning)
    3. Subtract the interest amount from the total payment to calculate how much the principal you paid in that month.
    4. Subtract the principal you paid from your loan balance to arrive at your new loan balance.
    5. Repeat for each period (or month).

    Note that after the first row of your data table, you’ll refer to the previous row to get your loan balance.

    If your loan uses monthly payments, make sure you set up each period correctly in the formulas. For example, a 30-year loan has 360 total periods (or monthly payments). Likewise, if you’re paying an annual rate of 6% (0.06), you should make the periodic interest rate of 0.5% (or 6% divided by 12 months).

    If you don’t want to do all the work of working in spreadsheets, there’s an easier way. Use an online Loan Amortization Calculator. These are also helpful for double-checking your spreadsheet’s output.

    What You Can Do With Your Spreadsheet

    Once you’ve got your loan modeled, you can learn a lot about your loan:

    Amortization table: Your spreadsheet shows an amortization table, which you can use to create a variety of line charts. See how your loan gets paid off over time, or how much you’ll owe on your loan at any given date in the future.

    Principal and interest: The spreadsheet also shows how each payment is broken into principal and interest. You’ll understand how much it costs to borrow, and how those costs change over time. Your payment stays the same, but you’ll pay less interest with each monthly payment.

    Monthly payment: Your spreadsheet will perform simple calculations as well. For example, you’ll need to calculate the monthly payment. Changing the loan amount (if you consider buying something less expensive, for example) will affect your required monthly payment.

    “What if” scenarios: The benefit of using spreadsheets is that you have the computing power to make as many changes to the model as you want. Check to see what would happen if you make additional payments on your loan. Then see what happens if you borrow less (or more). With a spreadsheet, you can update the inputs and get instant answers.

    Keeping up with one’s financial calculations can get messy, especially when it comes to interest rates and other banking matters. You can always hire an expert consultant to explain everything and run your matters, but sometimes, especially when it comes to simpler loan calculations, it pays off to learn how it works and use some tools to streamline the job.

    In this week’s free MS Excel template, we intend to show you how easily Excel manages to handle these calculations with its intrinsic formulas.

    The Simple Loan Calculator for Microsoft Excel uses built-in financial formulas to calculate either the interest rate (using the RATE formula), the loan amount (using the PV formula), the payment (using the PMT formula), or the number of payments (using the NPER formula).

    Have a peek at the Simple Loan Calculator Excel Template:

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    How to use the Simple Loan Calculator Excel Template

    You can calculate 4 different types of loans with this free Excel template. A quick description of these types of loan calculations is provided below:

    Please note that Periods Per Year is the number of payments per year. Enter 12 for Monthly, 52 for Weekly or 1 for Annual payments.

    1- Loan Amount: This is the amount that you have borrowed. You can also enter your current balance if you also adjust the Term of Loan to be the number of years left to pay off the loan.

    2- Annual Interest Rate: This calculator assumes a fixed interest rate, and the interest is compounded each period.

    3- Payment (Per Period): This is the amount that is paid each period, including both principal and interest (PI).

    4- Term of Loan (in Years): Mortgage loans usually have 15 or 30-year terms. Auto loans are usually between 2 and 5 years. For a 6-month term, enter =6/12 or 0.5. If you entered your current balance in the Loan Amount, then for the Term enter the number of years you have left until your loan is paid off.

    As you can see, this Excel template is quite useful and easy to learn.

    Download your free Excel template “Simple Loan Calculator” here

    • Simple Loan Calculator in Excel Document format (xlsx)
    • Simple Loan Calculator Excel Document in zip file format (zip)

    More interest rate calculator Excel templates online:

    I made a quick search for interest rate calculators and found some helpful URLs. Hope you find them useful too:

    We’ve got some good news for you!

    Recently we just released a new version of our Compound Interest Loan Calculator in Excel.

    It’s often called “Amortization Schedule with Principal and Interest Amounts” which is basically the same thing as simply “Loan Calculator”.

    The enhancements are:

    1. Added Compounding Interest Frequency (daily, weekly, fortnightly and monthly)
    2. Possibility to change Repayment Dates
    3. Option to update Repayment Amount
    4. Password unprotected worksheet (Paid version only)

    The above changes make this Excel Calculator even better and far more flexible!

    To download Demo version: click here or on the Excel icon.

    To buy Full version: click here.

    Now we would like to tell you a bit more about what these enhancements will mean for you.

    1. Interest Compounding Frequency (daily, weekly, fortnightly and monthly)

    As you probably know, Payment Frequency and Interest Compounding frequency are not the same things.

    Payment Frequency means how often you make your repayments.

    Interest Compounding Frequency means how often your Bank calculates and ads Interest to your Loan Balance. It’s not the same thing if they do it let’s say monthly or daily. With mortgages the difference can be few thousands of dollars over many years.

    Here is the logic:

    Let’s say your Loan interest is 6% per year (p.a.). If you make monthly repayments and also your Interest is compounded monthly then the total interest paid per year will be slightly higher than 6%.

    Because the banks like to make money and they do so even by not disclosing the whole story (or disclosing it only in the small print).

    Let’s have a look how it works.

    If your yearly Interest rate is 6.00% then your monthly rate is 6/12 = 0.5%

    The first month the bank will calculate Interest as 0.5% of your outstanding Loan Balance and add it to your Loan Balance. The second month the bank will do the same. But this time it will also be the interest on top of interest from the previous month.

    Are you beginning to see the picture?

    If they do it every month then your effective interest rate per year will be like this:

    Effective Interest rate = (1 + 0.06/12)^12 – 1 = 0.0617 = 6.1679%

    So in fact you are not paying 6% interest rate but 6.17%. That’s why the banks make so much money!

    And what’s the worst part?

    Well, the true is that most banks don’t compound the interest monthly. They push it even more. They do it daily! Buggers…

    So, if they compound it daily, let’s have a look what the result is now:

    Effective Interest Rate = (1 + 0.06/365)^365 – 1 = 6.1831%

    You see, the difference between monthly and daily compounding may not look big, but if your loan is couple of hundred thousand dollars then over time the amount can be significant.

    The problem is even more apparent with let’s say credit cards because the base interest rate is usually much higher than mortgages.

    If your credit card yearly interest rate is 20% then daily compounding will push it to 22.13%.

    The moral of the story:

    Be aware of the compounding interest and ask your bank upfront how they calculate it.

    If the bank employee plays dumb or pretend he or she doesn’t know what you are talking about, ask their manager. Don’t sign up for any loan before you know exactly what method they use.

    To help you calculate the exact Interest Amount for each method we added an option to choose monthly, fortnightly, weekly and daily interest compounding rate or frequency.

    Now, let’s have a look at other adjustments we made to our Loan Amortization Schedule Calculator.

    2. Possibility to change Repayment Dates

    It’s nice to calculate ideal Amortization Schedule and assume that you pay your repayments exactly on due day, every time. The reality is that it’s often not the case.

    Sometime you miss payment for just couple of days because you forgot about it or had insufficient funds in your bank account.

    As you probably know, the banks are unforgiving. If that happens, the bank will simply add Interest to your Loan Balance for every single day overdue.

    After some time the actual Loan balance will differ significantly from the original amortization schedule.

    To help you modelling your loan based on real life scenarios, we added possibility to adjust or change actual Repayment Date. This way you will be able to predict actual Loan Balance more accurately.

    One thing to remember:

    Once you change the Repayment Date, the next Repayment will also be adjusted to align with your Repayment Frequency. To get it back to your original schedule, adjust the next Payment Date back to what it ought to be.

    3. Option to update Repayment Amount

    Similarly as missing your repayments or paying a bit late, you can also experience paying different amount.

    If this happens, simply overwrite the Repayment amount for that particular period.

    You can also use the field Extra Payment for that purpose. It’s possible to add both positive and negative amounts into this field.

    4. Password unprotected worksheet (Premium version only)

    Our previous version of the calculator was password protected. The main reason was to avoid accidentally deleting or changing formulas. This can make the calculator to work incorrectly.

    However, we found out that this safeguard put in place was restricting some of you. We have therefore decided to remove all protection.

    You can now freely change everything in the calculator. As a safety measure we recommend following:

    After downloading the calculator; save the original file somewhere on your PC. Then create a copy of the calculator and work with the copy. If you accidentally screw something, simply make a new fresh copy from the original file and start again.

    We hope you will enjoy the new version of our Loan Amortization Schedule Calculator!

    If you have any questions or suggestions to improve it even further, we would love to hear from you! Send us an email or leave comment under this article.

    This is a mortgage payment calculator that will easily give you an estimation about your monthly mortgage payments and find out how much you can afford before you borrow. This calculator is created using calc built-in PMT function. This function become a built-in financial function because this is a basic formula that financial people should know when they learn basic finance. You can modify the formula to calculate other mortgage information. For example, You have to modify the formula if you want to know how many years you can pay your mortgage if your monthly budget is limited. But, if you just want to know the amount of money you have to pay monthly within your loan period, you can use this tool directly. Just type mortgage amount, interest rate and loan period in corresponding cells, and the formula will give you the results.

    Leave a Reply Cancel reply



    • Calc
    • Description
    • Writer

    Recent Templates

    • 2017 Calendar Template
    • 2016 Calendar Templates
    • 2015 Calendar Templates
    • Grocery List Template
    • Net Present Value Calculator
    • Periodic Table of Elements
    • Bowling Scoresheet
    • Biorhythm Chart
    • Issue Log
    • Warehouse Inventory List

    Excel is an indispensable productivity tool. Users across all industries and job functions embrace it as a tool for storing, tracking, and manipulating all kinds of data. It’s used for everything from simple task tracking and data management, to complex calculations and professional reporting. You can use the Excel REST API in Microsoft Graph to extend the value of your data, calculations, reporting, and dashboards.

    Why integrate with Excel?

    You can use Microsoft Graph to allow web and mobile applications to read and modify Excel workbooks stored in OneDrive, SharePoint, or other supported storage platforms.

    Perform calculations

    Users love the ease with which they can perform deep and complex calculations within Excel. You can now access Excel’s powerful calculation engine with instant results. For example, a mortgage calculator can take advantage of the PMT function from Excel by making a simple API call that includes principal, rate and number of payments. Excel does all the difficult work and returns the monthly payment instantly. With more than 300 Excel worksheet functions currently available, you have full access to the breadth of formulas supported by Excel today. Complex business models don’t need to be rebuilt repeatedly. Developers can program Excel to perform those calculations instantly and retrieve the results with simple API calls.

    Generate reports and analyze results

    Excel is a flexible reporting and analysis tool, from simple data tables to complex professional dashboards. Today, we give you full access to all of Excel’s reporting features, making Excel an online reporting service within Microsoft 365. Imagine any of the reporting scenarios users create and rely on today pulled into a custom app to create professional charts or analyze large sets of data intelligently, seamlessly blending Excel into those customized experiences.

    Store and track data

    Excel is also a great tool to store and track data. If your information is stored in a workbook, that data is available to any app that integrates with Microsoft 365. Its contents are available to read from custom solutions, and those solutions can use Excel for data storage.

    Note: The Excel REST API supports only Office Open XML file formatted workbooks (files with the .xlsx extension). The .xls extension workbooks are not supported.

    Using the Excel REST API

    You can use Microsoft Graph to allow web and mobile applications to read and modify Excel workbooks stored in OneDrive, SharePoint, or other supported storage platforms. The Workbook (or Excel file) resource contains all the other Excel resources through relationships. You can access a workbook through the Drive API by identifying the location of the file in the URL. For example:

    You can access a set of Excel objects (such as Table, Range, or Chart) by using standard REST APIs to perform create, read, update, and delete (CRUD) operations on the workbook.

    API reference

    Looking for the API reference for this service?

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Overview of How to Create an Excel Spreadsheet

    If you are a fresher, then it is important to know how you can create and start the spreadsheet with Excel. Over the years, spreadsheets are playing a vital role in maintaining a large database with excel. Data Analysis and Number Crunching are the main purposes we are using spreadsheet day in day out. In fact, many people use this spreadsheet to maintain their business needs and personal things as well.

    Using spreadsheets, I have seen many people manage their family budgets, mortgage loans, and various other things for their fitting needs on a daily basis. In this article, we will show you how to create an excel spreadsheet, tools available with the spreadsheet, and many other things.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    You are free to use this image on your website, templates etc, Please provide us with an attribution link How to Provide Attribution? Article Link to be Hyperlinked
    For eg:
    Source: How to Create an Excel Spreadsheet? (

    Understanding Excel Workbook Screen

    When we open the excel screen, we could see the below features in front of us.

    #1 – Ribbon

    These menu options are called “ribbon” in excel. In the ribbon, we have several tabs to work with. Going forward, we will explore each one of them in detail.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    #2 – Formula Bar

    The formula bar in excel is the platform to view the formula or the value of the selected cell or active cell. For example, if we have 5 in the cell A1, if the A1 cell is selected, we can see the same value in the formula bar.

    #3 – Column Header

    As you can see, each column has its own heading with alphabet characters representing each column separately.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    #4 – Row Header

    Column headers are represented by alphabets, and similarly, row headers Row Headers Excel Row Header is the grey column on the left side of column 1 in the worksheet that contains the numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.). To hide or reveal row and column headers, press ALT + W + V + H. read more are represented by numbers starting from 1. In recent versions of Excel, we have more than 1 million rows.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    #5 – Spreadsheet Area

    This is where we do the work. As you can see in the above overview image, we have small rectangular boxes, which are plenty. The combination of column and row forms a cell, i.e., a rectangular box. Each cell was identified by a unique cell address consisting of a column header followed by a row header. For the first cell, the column header is A, and the row header is 1, so the first cell address is A1.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    This is the general overview of the excel spreadsheet. Now we will see how to work with this spreadsheet.

    How to Work with Excel Spreadsheet?

    Let’s look at the example given below.

    1. To work with a spreadsheet, first, we need to select the cell we are looking to work with. For example, if you want the word “Name” in the cell A1, then select the cell and type “Name” in the cell.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Select the cell B1 and type Price.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Now come back to cell A2 and type some fruit names.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    In the associated column, enter the price of each fruit.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    This is the simple table we have created with excel.

    Steps to Format Excel Spreadsheet

    Step #1

    Select the header and make the font, Bold. The excel shortcut key Excel Shortcut Key An Excel shortcut is a technique of performing a manual task in a quicker way. read more to apply bold formatting is Ctrl + B.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Step #2

    Make center alignment.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Step #3

    Now fill the background color for the selected cells.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Step #4

    Change the font color to white.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Step #5

    Now apply borders to the data. Select the entire data range to apply borders.

    How to create a mortgage calculator with microsoft excel

    Now the data looks like an organized one. Like this, we can create a spreadsheet and work with it.

    This is the basic level introduction to excel spreadsheet. Excel has a wide variety of tools to work with. We will see each of the tool explanation in separate dedicated articles which expose you to the advanced features.

    Recommended Articles

    This has been a guide to Create an Excel Spreadsheet. Here we will show you how to create a spreadsheet through excel, general overview tools available along with examples, and a downloadable excel template. You may learn more about excel from the following articles –

    How to create a corporate identity

    December 17, 2019 By Hitesh Bhasin Tagged With: Branding

    The corporate identity or in other terms, corporate image is the way a firm presents itself to internal or external stakeholders which may include employees, their customers or the shareholders of the company or the general public.

    Generally, the corporate image or identity would mean a symbol or a picture or in a few cases, a popular product of the company for the general public, but it is much more than that. Along with these things, the corporate identity includes the communications of the company and is visualized by the trademark or logo of the company.

    The important point here to consider is the homogeneity of the communications of the company will produce a consistent corporate identity.

    Table of Contents

    Importance of Corporate identity

    An identity of the company is like the identification card of any person or a social profile of the person. It helps others to acknowledge and maintain the image of the company and it is expected of a company to proactively build a corporate identity.

    Following is the importance of building corporate identity:

    1. A homogeneity of corporate communications and will establish consistency of the company
    2. Establish a USP of the company with respect to the brand value
    3. Help differentiate from the rest of the competitors
    4. Efficiently help to engage with the internal as well as external stakeholders to build a long-term association in terms of customer loyalty

    Building Corporate Identity

    Building a long-term corporate identity is essential for success in any kind of business. Here are a few steps to build a corporate identity:

    1) Origin :

    Consider the reason for the inception of the business. Answer few questions like vision and mission the business, way ahead for the business and motivation for continuing it. Having a clear vision and outline of the business will give a firm foundation on which you can build the business and it will become the business one always dreamed about.

    2) Current Status :

    Know the existing status of the company like what is the competition and its activities, feedback of existing as well as new customers, sustainability of the business in the market. These will help to know the current status of the company and help to find the areas of improvement. The company can use both positive and negative feedbacks to improve and maintain its image or identity in the market.

    3) Outward analysis :

    The company has not only to introspect but also to examine the outer conditions of the market like the competitor activities, tastes, and preferences of customers, trends in the industry, factors contributing to the success of the one company and failure of others etc. This will help the company to prepare against external challenges that may threaten the existing image and improve further in future.

    4) Future of the company :

    A company must always answer “What next and how to go about it” to sustain in long run. Developing an image with the thoughts of today would be extremely short-sighted and hence the company must look into the long run and think and plan the corporate identity accordingly.

    Planning on the new product lines, five-year planning, changes in existing products etc are the points to be considered while deciding on the future of the company and in turn the future of the corporate identity.

    5) Build a corporate identity :

    Considering all the above factors like why did you start, where you are today, where do you want to go and how do you want to proceed, a company can draft and formulate its own strategy for developing, modifying and maintaining Corporate identity.

    Creating a brand strategy by positioning, brand personality with the products, development of effective and eye-catching logos, creating a brand style and brand identity etc are the ways to build a corporate identity.

    Branding is an essential key to building a corporate identity. Choosing a catchy visual identity is a primary step for ex the wavy font of Coca-cola or the clean and neat logo of Apple Inc. Choosing right corporate color also makes a difference and goes a long way like it has shown that Red color in food brands stimulates hunger and most food brands have red color in their logos and brands like in KFC, McDonald’s etc. Elements like these go a long way and help develop brand images like the Big M of McDonald’s or the swoosh of Nike.

    Advantages of Corporate Identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    Whether it’s about having an identity or developing one, both has its own advantages.

    1) Official look :

    Having a corporate identity will help in crafting an official look for the company and it will help in making the company look bigger. When the consistent image or the logo is seen everywhere as the official sites, visiting cards or social media, the company has an official look and can demand a premium for its products and services.

    2) Consumer loyalty :

    Corporate identity helps to build a long-term consumer loyalty and establish not only a feeling of customer wellbeing but also builds an emotional connect with the customers.

    3) Trust :

    The ultimate goal of the corporate identity is developing the trust of the consumers and stakeholders. A consistent identity will help achieve it and will always help in developing as well as sustaining the business.

    4) Brand Recall :

    the Corporate identity that is imparted on minds of the customer via advertising, social media etc will help in recalling the brand identity and help customers in recalling the brand thereby ensuring the success of the brand in the market. Ex: the swoosh will remind the customers of Nike or a half-eaten apple will remind of Apple iPhones and iPad.

    5) Stability :

    A corporate identity shows the stability of the company as opposed to no-brand or self-developed brand. The association with a well-crafted brand shows long-term association and says that the company is here to stay.

    Disadvantages of Corporate identity

    1) Designing costs :

    Designing a corporate identity is costly for the company as well as time-consuming. Either internal team is used or the company outsources it. In either case, the cost factor rises considerably.

    2) Complexity :

    Corporate identity development is a long, laborious and complex process which not every company can do. The extensive research like audits, market research, customer analysis, market analysis is not only time consuming but also complex and to relate all of this, is not the job of a single person.

    3) New companies :

    The corporate identity can be developed easily by multinationals giants but it cannot be developed by startups and medium scale companies since they do not have sufficient funds to meet the requirements.

    B uilding a corporate identity may sound a bit “corporate” when you’re first starting out as an entrepreneur or startup. However, creating an identity for your organization is extremely important regardless of your company’s size, mission or purpose. In reality, your corporate identity defines who you are. It defines the quality of your products or services and what you can do for your customers, partners and public.

    We recently published a post titled Five ways Brand Marketing will benefit your Business. In that post, we discussed what a business brand is and five ways it could benefit your business. You can check out the post using the link above.

    Today, we discuss actual steps you can take to create a corporate identity for your business. After all, if defining your brand is so important, there must be definite steps one can take to create that all important brand.

    On that note, let’s get right to it.

    Ten steps to Building a Corporate Identity for your Business
    1. Review your Company’s History, Mission and Methods: Before establishing a corporate identity, you must first define who you are as a corporate entity. This typically involves examining your business plans, mission statement, company values, strategic plans and any other corporate documents that might define why you exist and what distinguishes you from your competitors.
    2. Figure out what others think about your company:The image you wish to portray about your company and the way it is actually perceived can sometimes be very different. Consequently, when building your brand, you must also understand what your customers think about your company. To do this, one must conduct surveys, ask questions, set up interviews and have general discussions to gain an understanding of how stakeholders view your organization. With the advent of technology today, one can easily do this through social media or directly on your website. Once that perception is understood, you must then decide if you wish to change that perception or not. If your customers are not getting the right message, building your corporate identity can help correct those misgivings.
    3. Look outside the Company: Next, take a look at your competitors. This means identifying businesses that sell similar products or provide the same services you do. Once identified, find out what their customers are saying about them; visit their website and social media pages to see how they run things. The purpose of this exercise is to identify things they are doing right, their weak points and things you can do better so you can get an edge.
    4. Build a Vision for the Future: While building your corporate identity, take some time to define long term goals for the company. By this, we mean goals and targets you intend to reach in ten or twenty years. Such goals should include your employees, leaders and partners. Having a singular objective you intend to reach in the future has a way of pushing everyone to strive to achieve it.
    5. Design a Logo, Website and Office Stationery: Once you’ve created that vision, share it with your staff, customers and the public. One of the best ways to do so is through a logo, company website and through your office stationery. The best way to let people know your values, who you are and what you do is to detail it clearly through a website. At Innovate Design Studios Ltd, we create custom designed websites for our Clients. Feel free to contact us to get a free, no obligation web design proposal from us. You can also go through our past Innovate Today posts on the subject here: A beginners Guide to launching a Website and Does your Company need a Website.
    6. Ensure Quality in your Products and Service: It’s a fact that companies that offer quality products and services have the best chance of repeat customers. This quality should be reflected throughout your corporate identity, including your products and services.
    7. Build a Healthy Work Environment: Part of building a corporate identity means creating a work environment that encourages creativity and problem solving. As a matter of fact, most Fortune 500 companies are known for having excellent work environments for their employees. This usually includes bonuses and benefits, health and insurance packages, cutting edge tools to work and a relaxed, friendly atmosphere.
    8. Pursue and Protect Customer Satisfaction: The best corporate structures include customer safeguards. Keeping your customers in mind when major corporate decisions are made will guarantee that you have loyal customers.
    9. Hire a talented Communications Specialist: Choosing how you communicate with your customers can dictate whether your company will succeed or fail. This is because even if you have the best product on the market, it won’t mean much if no one knows about it.
    10. Test your Corporate Identity: Once you have created what you believe to be a solid corporate identity, test it in your market. To do that, talk with customers and use focus groups to find out what potential clients think of your company. Remember that perception changes so check and re-check your public image.

    Have you built a successful corporate image for your company? What steps did you take and what challenges did you face? As usually, feel free to leave us a comment below. We would love to hear from you.

    Today’s Funny Quote

    How to create a corporate identity

    We end today’s post with a funny quote by Charles Wadsworth, the Classical Pianist and Musical Promoter

    By the time a man realizes that his father was right, he has a son who thinks he’s wrong.

    Remember to subscribe to our electronic mailing list to get new post notifications by email. If you have not subscribed yet, you can do so using the subscribe section below:

    Steps to Establishing Your Image and Putting It Into the World

    How to create a corporate identity

    Before you can open your doors for business, you need not only to put your legal house in order but also, make decisions about the words and visuals that will represent your business and mold its identity. As you get ready to create your business image, there are few tasks you need to have already taken care of such as:

    • Determine how your business will be positioned in the market and your business’ place in the field.
    • Know your target market; who they are, where they can be found, and the best way to entice them to your business.
    • Decide how you want your business to be perceived and experienced in the marketplace. It is your brand. While you decide what you’re brand will be, how successful you are at creating the brand depends on your client and customers experience of your business.
    • Complete a business plan.
    • Consider the benefits and disadvantages of the available legal structure of your business entity could operate under and select the form of business that is best for you. Your options include sole proprietorship; partnership; limited liability corporation (LLC); C Corporation; or S Corporation. Most home business entrepreneurs start out as a sole proprietorship, but you need to know what the risks are before you do so.
    • Obtain licenses, permits and zoning waivers as required by your city or county.

    Establishing Your Business Identity

    Once you’ve put in the foundation of your business, here are eight tasks to put your business into the world:

    1. Create a tagline or slogan for your business. You should have already created a business name. Now you want to come up with something catchy that tells of your brand promise or identify. For example, “Just Do It,” is a slogan for Nike.
    2. Obtain address and phone numbers for your home business. If you don’t want to use your home address; you can get a P.O. Box at the U.S. Post Office or a mailbox at a mailing store. You can get tax deductions on a second business phone line in your home or purchase a distinctive ring to separate business from personal calls. Having a business address and phone number gives a professional appearance.
    3. Apply for an Employer ID Number with the IRS. If you started your business under something other than a sole proprietor; you’ll need to obtain an EIN. But even if you are operating as a sole proprietor, and EIN can be helpful. First, it’s free, and it gives you a Federal number, so you don’t have to use your social security. Second, you’ll need it to open a business bank account.
    4. Open a business bank account. The IRS prefers that you keep your business expenses separate from your personal account.
    5. Create your business logo. A good logo goes a long way in establishing your brand and business identity. Your logo should reflect what your business does. It should be unique, eye-catching and easy to identify. You can use a free or low-cost logo maker, or hire a professional graphic designer.
    6. Order business cards. Many entrepreneurs are stingy with their business cards, but they’re so affordable and easy to share. You should have a large stash and hand them out to anyone and everyone who is or knows a potential client. While you can print them at home, you don’t want to use DIY if it can jeopardize your professional image.
    7. Create and order your business stationery. Depending on your business; you may not need stationery. Still, it doesn’t hurt to have some for faxing or other correspondence. Your business card resource probably has an option for stationary, envelopes and return mail stickers or stamps.
    8. Establish an online presence for your business. It doesn’t matter what business you’re in, you should have an online presence. Today, most people go online and not the Yellow Pages to find businesses. Further, they use the Internet to learn about you and your products or services. Websites serve as a useful form of inexpensive advertising for most businesses. Even the most basic of websites can work well as your online brochure. You may also decide to set up a blog for your home business, either in conjunction with or instead of, a home business website. Also, consider a brand ambassador program.

    You Have Your Business Identity, Now What?

    Once you’ve taken care of the above tasks, you have tools and materials to share your business with the world. At this point, it’s time to put them to use. Be sure to monitor how well they work because they’re part of building your reputation and brand. Like you, your business is a living, breathing thing, and requires care and nurturing to ensure its success.

    Corporate identity (abbreviated ‘identity’) is the face of a company or image that is formed by a set of graphic elements, united by one visual style and complementing each other (logo, fonts, icons, and so on).

    What is it used for

    Company logo, colors, corporate elements, fonts – all these are visual attributes that are used on corporate-style media (leaflets, letterheads, badges – whatever you like). Development of corporate identity should be given special attention. As a result of this work, you can create a tool that will really help business development.

    Why does the company need a corporate identity

    First of all, it is necessary in order to make the company more recognizable. Secondly, your company will look more presentable for partners and clients. Corporate identity enhances public confidence.

    Increasing the awareness of the company and its products

    Currently, the market for goods and services is very saturated and in order not to get lost in the general flow, you need to create a recognizable style. To do this, take as a basis the logo and primary colors that are used and implemented in all visual materials.

    Improve public trust of the brand

    When we see logos, brand stores, websites, advertisements with the same brand, we understand that this company has been operating successfully for a long time. It causes trust and desire to address or to get something from her.

    Improving the image of the company

    Image is like a status to which any company aspires. The image consists of good and high-quality work, but it should be known in person.

    Promotion of the company among competitors

    If a person is offered to choose a company only in appearance, then subconsciously he will choose the one that he likes most from a visual point of view.

    Increase the effectiveness of advertising and facilitate its creation

    To solve this task consider creating a brand book. This is a package of documents created for a particular company. It describes the rules for the use of corporate colors, fonts, graphic elements and the logo itself.

    Simplify new product launches

    If a company has a corporate identity and it actively uses it, then the task of releasing a new product is greatly simplified. The product will be produced under the well-known brand, in a proprietary and recognizable package.

    The corporate identity of the company creates a general mood, image and translates it to the masses using the media of your logo, branded elements and fonts. The consumer creates a steady portrait of your company. Successful and long-term work involves the continued use of proprietary graphics elements. That is why the creation of a solid image – is a good investment in your company.

    The main elements of corporate identity

    Company name

    This can be a single word, phrase or abbreviation. The main thing is to be easy to hear and to be well remembered. Registered name is one of the key elements in the promotion of the brand – it helps the customer to distinguish the product of one company from another.

    Logo development is a key link in the whole identity. On its basis, the style is formed for other design elements of the company. We recommend creating a vector logo . This will help it scale to any media without loss of quality.

    Color scheme

    It can cause different associations with consumers, so it is very important to choose a harmonious combination of colors that correctly conveys the company’s message. A lot of brands can be found on the color palette, as it helps to stand out in any space. It is also important not to overdo it with the brightness of colors and their combination. Otherwise, the logo will only alienate potential customers, and not attract.

    Style graphics

    These are business cards, letterheads, brochures, envelopes and more. With the help of graphic products you can create and promote the corporate style of the company in any field. The presence of attributes has a positive effect on the brand image. When you come to the company, hotel, cafe and see the stylish decoration of the hall, brochures, signs, This creates a feeling of a stable company that respects its customers.

    How to create a corporate identity and logo with Turbologo

    Lots of templates and an easy-to-use interface. Create an outstanding brand image right here and now.

    Turbologo is the online logo maker tool. You can create your own logo in few minutes and only pay if you’re pleased satisfied. Our online logo creator helps business owners, start-ups, and freelancers make a logo design that’s both professional and high quality.
    © 2022 Turbologo

    Recreate STORIES between WEB DEVELOPMENT & YOU

    • News
    • Categories
      • Design
      • JavaScript
      • Laravel
      • Magento
      • TimberWP
      • PHP
      • Python
      • SEO
      • WordPress
    • Tooling
    • Snippets
    • Jobs
    • Reviews

    How to create a corporate identity

    When it comes to brand strategy development, owners relate this to the logo, color schemes, fonts, and packaging for their products and services, and website.

    Today we are all packed up with different companies and organizations. There are around 6 million small business organizations in the UK competing for market shares.

    Here arises the question: does your business raise its voice with noise? The easy solution to the question is A corporate brand strategy from agencies. Every task here is allocated to freelance graphic designers or media companies to develop a corporate brand strategy.

    Apart from creating a branding strategy, you also need to understand the importance of creating an online presence for your company.

    However, we are not aiming to provide information about the importance of branding strategy; you might already be aware of that. We will introduce you to steps to develop a branding strategy to attract loyal and dedicated customers.

    Here is a complete tour from bland to brand.

    Creating A Corporate Branding Strategy

    Before diving into creating a corporate branding strategy, let’s get the straight concept that people no longer are keen to make purchases from a business that holds a corporate image in mind. The people in the current scenario are looking forward to corporate brands that showcase the human side of your business. A brand development agency here helps you meet the goals of your business and who are your target consumers.

    Your brand logo, graphics, and color schemes represent the visual aspect, brand voice and convey your company’s message to the consumers. Your brand identity reflects your clear aims and puts out the sound to make up for your company.

    Conveying a remarkable consumer experience can do wonders for you. More than 80% of buyers feel comfortable paying for better customer services.

    Here are steps to create a corporate branding strategy:

    • Corporate branding requires planning: before planning, you need to evaluate your current position. From the time your company emerged, you started your journey to creating a brand. The very first step while creating a brand is to ask yourself, “what is the aim of your business?”. The reason for your company’s existence, the positive strategy that you want to convey to your society. You are even supposed to note how your company interacts with consumers on online and social media platforms. Conduct surveys on what message your brand logo gives. Look for what customers feel when they do business with your company.
    • Develops buyer’s image: buyers’ image is an identification of targeted customers. It represents the real consumers apart from the graphs and charts—likes and dislikes of your consumers, what social media platform they use, etc. Using a buyer’s image helps create a strong brand identity that easily connects your consumers. Some essential things you should have in your buyer’s image list are
    1. How old is your consumer?
    2. Is your consumer a man or woman?
    3. Where do they live?
    4. What are the Causes for your consumers’ support?
    5. Why will a consumer buy your product?
    6. How would you communicate with your consumers?
    7. What is the household income of your consumer?

    Developing a consumer image consists of studying your consumers closely. This is a kind of market data research about the products and services you provide. Using this data will help you target your consumers and make the best use of your company.

    • Missions and visions of your company: you already know what your company is about. But do your employees know the same? In the very initial stage, your employees need to determine what your company is all about. Missions and visions help you choose the present state of your business and where it aims to be. It’sIt’s a guide that takes your company towards your goals and activities in the right direction. Keeping your mission and vision clear helps portray a consistent image of your brand and allows the sales and consumers teams to communicate. This short statement enables you to achieve your long-term goals.
    • Identify your competitors: competitors are the ones who can fulfill your consumer’s demands. Competitors can be classified into three: primary, secondary, and tertiary. Primary competitors sell the same products and services as you. Hence the consumers can choose one or another to fulfill their needs and requirements. Secondary competitors do not provide the same product but a similar product that satisfies the demand of your consumers. Territory competitors are the ones who sell products that are almost related to your brand. It’sIt’s essential to analyze these competitors while developing your business strategy. The foremost thing to keep in mind here is how your consumers represent their brand and how consumers recognize them. Following the best development strategy will help you develop a base for a long-lasting and effective brand strategy.
    • Differentiation point: using a unique selling point is beneficial in keeping your brand stand out from the crowd from the sea of competitors. Your team needs to promote your brand in an advantageous position to attract the targeted consumers. To get sure about uniqueness in your business, make a list of your strengths and weaknesses, and pair them with your competitors’ analysis and buyer’s image to come up with your unique selling point.
    • Examine your brand voice and media campaigns: it is an essential aspect of your corporate branding strategy. This helps in developing a strong image for your company and makes your brand memorable. This not only helps in targeting consumers but also helps to get consumers attracted to your brand. Find words that fit best into your brand voice traits. Create a chart with do’s and don’ts. Do not forget to mention the website, blogs, advertisements, emails, social media marketing, printing materials, consumers and sales services, storefront and employee documents, etc., while creating your brand voice.
    • Develop brand identity: a clear brand identity gives a special message to your consumer’s mind. A brand identity comprises logo, brand name, tone, tagline, and everything else that is visible to your consumers. Having a solid identity is enough to make the consumers think about your brand. Creating a universal brand identity helps in gaining love and trust from the consumers.


    With the corporate branding strategy, you can build a strong brand identity. This helps the success of your business. Take the steps mentioned above to create a good branding strategy, to get a unique hold and identity among your competitors.

    Businesses convey their brand identity design to customers using many elements like logos, company culture and messaging. Corporate identity is a comprehensive brand message that defines how you want customers perceive your brand in the market.

    How We Create Corporate Identities:

    Corporate Identity creation is done by our team in cooperation with our clients to help them pass the coherent message that links customers with the corporate values. Logos, Business Cards, Uniforms, Slogans and other messages are planned and created by our team in order to differentiate your company from other competitors in the market. In order to create a corporate identity, we follow certain steps which include:

    We Define The Target Customers:

    Listening to our clients is our main tool to identify the directions they are going to, we help summarize the following info:

    • Gender
    • Age group and life status
    • Occupation
    • Place of living
    • Income level

    And there are many other questions we might need to get answers for according to the service or products provided by the company, all need to be clarified when we start to define the audience of our clients.

    How to create a corporate identity

    We Define Value Proposition:

    It is the clear statement that communicates what your product or service why it matters to your ideal consumer. You might have many services and products, you can have your Value Proposition for each one.

    How to create a corporate identity

    We Define Brand Colours:

    There are many cultural differences regarding colours, but there are general trends that we can refer to in terms of meanings of colors:

    • Red: Danger, passion, love and urgency
    • Yellow: Happiness, warmth and optimism
    • Blue: Peace, trust and security
    • Orange: Excitement, caution and confidence
    • Green: Health, nature and growth
    • Purple: Royalty, beauty and wisdom
    • Pink: Romantic, feminine and tenderness
    • Black: Luxury, secrecy and concealment
    • White: Purity, openness and transparency

    Based on understanding the target audience and customers we can fine-tune the best colour of your brand.

    How to create a corporate identity

    We Design Your Logo:

    Developing logo is one of the important things that you need to take care of, thus we make sure that we get as much information about the company as we can.

    We Design Brand Fonts:

    Whatever your company’s field is, interior design, news, or a restaurant, our team can take care of the fonts that are needed in conveying your messages to your customers. Fonts play a crucial part in how recognizable your brand is and the style that you wish to convey.

    How to create a corporate identity

    We Deliver A Corporate Style Guide:

    A corporate style guide a PDF file. It is the brand manual, that you can share with your employees and other involved people who might be working with you in one of your projects. In the Corporate Style Guide our team will include the following:

    • Business cards
    • Letterhead and envelopes
    • Website
    • Packaging

    Reflect Who You Are Through Your Corporate Identity

    We help you stand out from others.

    Corporate identity is used to employ the strategies and tools which create image of your brand and company. It is the way of visualizing the unique value of a business in order to represent that to the target market. Also, it communicates the vision, purpose and objectives of the business and brand by using various visual/communication elements, techniques and tools. Biztech Point is well experienced in identification and creation of corporate identity for all types of brands. At Biztech Point, we develop a strong and meaningful corporate identity for your company. Therefore, it creates intended impression of your business and brand.

    We employ rigorous branding strategy and impressive brand identity to reach our ultimate goals. Through the powerful corporate identity, your business is not just able to win its market share but also win the mind share. Because the feel, image, association and impression of your brand is what catches the sights. And that is how the minds of the potential customers are influenced in favor of choosing your brand.

    Why Corporate Identity

    Building up perception of brand in the mind of people got paramount importance. However, to create a unique differentiation is not as easy a task to manage. It calls for lining up those tools which can differentiate your products, services and brand from the competitors. Biztech Point creates a solid and well-defined corporate identity which conveys a coherent and vivid image of the brand and establishes distinguishable identity. Our strong corporate identity services create unique perception of your brands. It helps to bring memory association through visual elements like colors, fonts, layout and design. As a result, you present and communicate your brand to the masses in a unique way.

    A powerful corporate identity can take your brand to top of the ladder in terms of impression and image. Also, to update and revise existing identity to something more inspiring is more like a revival process. If your company seeks to influence the target audience in a whole new way, then you are at the right place. Biztech Point brings a new life to your existing branding through infusion of innovation and inspiration. We put novelty and vitality in our ideas which reinforces the core philosophy, vision and purposes of your business.

    For a business to grow and succeed, it’s essential to have Unique Corporate Identity in the market. Exclusive logo designs do the same thing. Tons of companies can offer you logo services to help you achieve this goal you have in mind. Through creating a good looking and attractive logo, you can give your viewers some ideas about the nature of your services or products.

    You may consider the assistance of a reputable logo design company that will do the job as per your business requirements. If you like your business to reach the top position in the market, it’s crucial to have corporate identity. To establish your reputation, you must start with online logo designs for your brand.

    Logos are considered as the primary identity of any business.

    That is the reason why it’s highly recommended to pay attention and effort and create Unique Corporate Identity. There are lots of companies that will charge high prices to their customers, yet a tough competition has provided a cost-effective solution to seekers.

    When trying to consider exclusive logo designs, try making you business trademark simple. Making simple logos will help the viewers to remember this for a long period of time. Choose a simple design that will help the audience to remember it for many years to come. Simplicity is the best policy, which will let you attract a lot of people towards your business.

    Once you’ve chosen the best design for your logo, the next thing you need to do is to look for the right combination of image and colors. Colors play an important role in creating a website design. Your website’s design must match with the colors you’ve chosen.

    Business owners may even take suggestions from the logo designer about which kind of color will best suit for your website. However, try making less use of colors as your logo will look a bit sober and choose the ones that are attractive and lively.

    Never settle for less for your business.

    Pick a company that will give you options of online logo designs that will help you achieve your goals to establish your corporate identity. With this, you won’t run out of any ideas for your preferred logo.

    A good provider of online logo designs should also be known for good reputation. Dealing with a reputable company will offer you peace of mind as you can be assured that it will give you nothing but the results you deserve.

    Exclusive logo designs may vary from one another. Although you can pick any logo design available, you need to keep your business goals in mind when shopping around. Of course, you need something that will help you be recognized by your targeted audience, yet it must be something that will set you apart from your competitors. You can always for suggestions or recommendations from professionals out there. But, at the end of the day, it’s your decision that will matter. So, pick wisely your Unique Corporate Identity and expect only the best.

    We Love Questions

    Is Your Company Reaching its Full Potential?

    Turning Plans into Reality

    We ensure that our strategy is implemented effectively and accurately across the entire company.

    Strengthening the Relationship Between Your Brand and People

    We bring creativity and Google Ads technologies together to capture the attention of your target audience with our creative assets.

    Bringing Identity to
    Real Life

    Excellent design allows a brand’s personality to shine. It gives it presence, uniqueness and distinction. A brand’s design quality, uniqueness and clarity derive directly from its strategy. But design also provides valuable clues much earlier in the brand development process. It plays an important role in elaborating the mission because it makes the hypothetical visible.

    Creating Value and Improving Results for Success

    We always align our approach to brand management with your individual business goals. To do this, we define the necessary investments and a roadmap. We also work with you to define the parameters for evaluating all activities.

    How We Create Your Corporate Identity?

    We believe that an organization is judged as much by its corporate identity as anything else. We believe that a consistent ‘look and feel’ is just as important for an .org as it is for a .com. We don’t draw a line between the two. We have no no-go areas or preconceived notions. We create corporate identities that cover all topics. In every industry. Whether you’re a tech startup or a nonprofit, distinctiveness and usability are second nature to us. And while we’re a busy bunch, we never skirt the basics just to be fast. Rather, we create reasons for people to buy into your brand, and then provide access to it 24/7. Whether you’re a business or not.

    At Mochatouch, our commitment to being corporate identity designers is deeply rooted. This specialization reflects a fundamental truth of creativity. Using our insight and strategy, we achieve interesting creative results. It’s been our experience that an organization’s corporate identity often creates the first impression. That’s why we work hard to understand your offering, and then make your brand easier to navigate. We add distinctive images and messaging that engage and encourage your audience. And we create user guidelines to ensure your brand communications stay on track. And the message. And even if your corporate identity is aging, it’s never too late to be the kind of brand you’ve always wanted to be. Mochatouch can reinforce (or reinvent) your brand positioning. We bring it to life through a new or refreshed corporate identity while establishing a consistent vocabulary. A vocabulary that is shared by your employees and ensures that you always look (and sound) good. Because that’s the kind of corporate identity that lives and lasts.



    What are the hospital’s strategies from the top management?

    Which group of employees damages the hospital deliberately?

    What do employees need to be dedicated to a hospital?

    How can Porter’s value chain be applied to creating a corporate identity for the hospital?

    In this chapter we differentiate among corporate identity, corporate design and corporate image. This leads to the question: how can you motivate your co-workers and subordinates? The entire chapter gives you the competence to achieve a competitive advantage.


    • Five forces model
    • Business process
    • Competitive advantage
    • Core competencies
    • Core process
    • Corporate design
    • Corporate identity
    • Corporate image
    • Mission
    • Porter’s value chain
    • Process
    • Success of a hospital
    • Value creation
    • Work motivation

    This is a preview of subscription content, access via your institution.

    Buying options

    eBook EUR 85.59 Price includes VAT (Russian Federation)

    Softcover Book EUR 99.99 Price excludes VAT (Russian Federation)

    Hardcover Book EUR 139.99 Price excludes VAT (Russian Federation)

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    References and Further Reading

    Andreassen TW, Lindestad B (1998) Customer loyalty and complex services: The impact of corporate image on quality, customer satisfaction and loyalty for customers with varying degrees of service expertise. Int J Ser Ind Manage 9(1):7–23

    Balmer JMT, Greyser SA (2006) Corporate marketing: integrating corporate identity, corporate branding, corporate communications, corporate image and corporate reputation. Eur J Market 40(7/8):730–741

    Gallup Poll (2014) Employee satisfaction and engagement.

    Gotsi M, Wilson AM (2001) Corporate reputation: seeking a definition. Corp Commun Int J 6(1):24–30

    Hines P, Rich N, Bicheno J, Brunt D, Taylor D, Butterworth C, Sullivan J (1998) Value stream management. Int J Logist Manage 9(1):25–42

    Porter NE (1985) Competitive advantage: creating and sustaining superior performance. The Free Press, New York

    Stuart H (1999) Towards a definitive model of the corporate identity management process. Cor Comm Int J 4(4):200–207

    WHO (2008) The World Health Report 2008 – primary health care (Now more than ever).

    Author information


    Commerce Faculty Department of Information Systems, University of Cape Town, Private Bag X3, Rondebosch, 7701, Cape Town, South Africa

    Prof. Edda Weimann MD, MPH & Prof. Peter Weimann MSci, PhD

    Groote Schuur Hospital Academic Hospital, University of Cape Town, Cape Town, South Africa

    Prof. Edda Weimann MD, MPH

    Beuth University, Luxemburger Strasse 10, 13353, Berlin, Germany

    Prof. Peter Weimann MSci, PhD

    You can also search for this author in PubMed Google Scholar

    You can also search for this author in PubMed Google Scholar

    Identity represents many things: personality, uniqueness, reputation, and look to name a few. A business’s corporate identity must be able to successfully represent all of these things and more. Every piece of your business, whether it be a sign, store interior, letter, receipt or even a handout pen represents your corporate identity in some way. This article will discuss the importance of a corporate identity, and how signage is able to create effective corporate identity in an efficient manner. Click here to contact Westmount Signs today.

    What is a Corporate Identity?

    A corporate identity is the persona that a business portrays with their materials, stores, staff and marketing. An effective corporate identity can differentiate a business from its competitors and propel it into a market leading position. This is accomplished through the visual impact that a cohesive corporate identity presents.

    How to create a corporate identityExample of Corporate Identity Changes

    Starbucks Coffee Company is a great example of a corporate identity that has changed over the years. Their identity has moved from a complicated brown logo to a simple green one. Note how the newest logo does not have any words. This is the ideal scenario for a corporate identity as it transcends languages and geography.

    What Impact Does Signage Have?

    Signage is the initial point of contact with the customer and it is what the customer will be on the look out for when they are trying to find information about you either in person or on the web. Great signage should be easily translated between physical and virtual forms.

    How to create a corporate identityHow Quickly Can Signage Change a Business Corporate Identity?

    Marketing is the means by which a business gets information to the consumer, and signs are one of the most effective forms of marketing in both cost efficiency and effectiveness.

    A recent study by the University of Cincinnati concluded that indoor signage is the 2nd most effective way to get new-product information to customers (beaten only by television ads). Exterior signs took the 3rd place spot behind interior signs.

    When it comes to efficiency of relaying new information to consumers, interior and exterior signage form an extremely effective marketing strategy that does not require monthly costs or contracts.

    Westmount Signs and Digital Printing

    Westmount Signs and Printing is an industry leader in Southern Ontario for interior and exterior signage, as well as digital printed materials. We also offer consulting and graphics design services to give your business the visual boost it needs. Contact Westmount Signs today to start shaping your corporate identity.

    We believe that a corporate identity has all the unique traits and engaging attributes of a personality. It will set a distinctive tone for your brand or business that will resonate amidst your target audience.

    How to create a corporate identity

    Putting the Pieces Together

    Crafting a corporate identity entails putting together everything that is unique about your business. It is almost like the pieces of a puzzle, each one is different but when you join them, it will convey a clear and crisp message about your product or service.

    The Impact of Corporate Identity

    Did you know that first impressions are incredibly important for brand loyalty? In fact, almost half (48%) of consumers indicate that they become attached to a brand during their first purchase or experience.

    How We Create Corporate Identity

    We believe that everything matters when it comes to creating or refreshing a corporate identity. We keep that in mind as we create a corporate identity that is a character of its own, one that can connect with your consumers.

    Our creative team brings together all of the separate elements of a business:

    • Company name
    • Logo
    • Vision
    • Business cards
    • Color palette
    • Letterhead
    • Stationary material
    • Social media presence

    We take these elements and shape them into an identity that leaves a lasting impact on the industry and your audience.

    Interact With Us

    Our goal is to create a corporate identity tailored to your business’ vision, culture, core values & distinction. We employ a strategic approach that produces unique corporate identities.

    …and Why is it Important?

    The concept of corporate identity is akin to what we refer to when we talk about our own identity, the specifics that differentiate us from others. It is our personality and character that maintains our individuality, which we express through how we behave, speak, and even what we wear.

    Similarly, a business makes itself distinct through the image that it presents to the world, through collateral like business cards, letterheads, brochures and other options. It is a physical expression of the company’s brand, an extension of the culture that is already expressed through communication style and behaviour exhibited to maintain the image of the business.

    Corporate Identity expresses your business’s brand personality and sets you apart from the competition.

    The Importance of Corporate Identity

    In a fast-paced and competitive world where the consumer has innumerable options available to them, a company needs a strategy to establish a solid presence in the marketplace. There are strong reasons to believe that the right corporate identity helps achieve this business objective.

    Building Corporate Persona: When we meet a person, it is the first impression that has the most impact. We tend to gather cues from what we see and feel, interpreting our observations to form our opinion about the person. This is also how we treat products and companies. To stand out from their competitors, every company needs to have a good brand image, to create a niche in the client’s mind by having a unique, pleasing appearance and identity.

    Consumer Loyalty: The consistent design of a corporate identity, in accordance with objectives set for the business, uphold and reflect the ethos, culture, principles, future ambitions, or visionary goals of the business. Customers who find this to be in accordance with their philosophy and liking feel connected to this image and are more likely to develop loyalty to the business.

    Business Enhancement: Personal experiences with a corporate identity influence consumers and their purchasing decisions. A corporate identity with a strong and positive impact creates a favorable mental image of the business in a consumer’s mind. A strategically planned identity gives a good return in terms of referrals and repeat business.

    Businesses may occasionally need to update their corporate identity, if there is an ideological change in the target audience over time and as the world changes. Design professionals can help with attention grabbing logos, impressive business cards, elegant letterheads, inviting envelopes, stunning brochures and other identity elements. Invest in your corporate identity to develop trust, a sense of value, and a lasting connection with your customer base.

    Your Corporate Identity is the mirror of your brand/business image.

    Your business card (Visiting Card), Letterhead and Envelop are no ordinary pieces of paper. Your stationery reflects who you are and what your business stands for… A unique and appealing corporate identity design can create goodwill and bring you more business repetitively.

    The master key is to get creative solutions

    Perfect way to create a strong corporate identity is to use your logo on your personalized premium business card, letterhead, envelop and other stationery items. Also, the importance of exclusive business cards with emboss-uv logo or metal logo, engraved logo and letterpress cannot be undermined in the digital world…

    Once you have an amazing Business Card Design, it’s time to make an impact with Creative Stationery!

    We have mastered the art of incorporating the thematic logo elements to create custom business stationery designs that will keep enduring in the minds of your customers and boost your brand image always. With professionally created letter head, envelop and post card design, you can be rest assured that your business name will always be in the attention of your audience.

    In the present day of competitive world, you need to make every effort to be on the minds of your clients with a strongest brand identity design. Corporate stationery design is the best way to create a psychological impact on your clients which you shouldn’t miss at any chance. Stay with us and get the most out of your business!

    We create Corporate Identity Design that fortifies your corporate image.

    We have vast expertise in corporate identity design services by making effective use of the thematic elements of a logo. We create wonderful designs that help to make a favourable impact on the minds of your prospects, clients and everyone associated with your brand or business.

    “Get the right business card and half the battle is won…”

    View our portfolio for most recent samples of business cards and finest corporate identity designs that suit your requirements!

    Brand Identity

    Identity development for new emerging brands and start-ups – as well as identity redevelopment for established existing brands.

    Identity design integrates brand value propositions with user research, and is geared towards developing flexible, modular, iterative identities that can be applied to marketing, advertising, collateral and brand-building.

    Our branding packages include time spent in a discovery and development stage, learning about you and getting under the skin of your business. We’ll help establish your unique differentiators and key benefits. We’ll identify your ideal target audience and help craft your message, vision and brand values. We’ll craft effective sales messages from there which are key to the success of your brand. The consistent approach will help position your brand in the marketplace while boosting brand awareness.

    As part of the project we’ll also create a cohesive and powerful approach to the look and feel of all your corporate communications, including your website, and also any supporting literature.

    A corporate identity or brand identity is a visual design that creates your company identity by showing a connection between your culture, values, and product communication. Corporate identity is the first step in building your organization’s presence visually. A great corporate identity can recall your brand easily and helps you strengthen your company image.

    Corporate Identity is anything that shows your brand visually. In a graphic designing world, corporate identity refers to logo designing, letterhead, envelopes, and visiting cards. Corporate Identity is a very important requirement for any company to complete the legality of a country, bank, or forming a company.

    How can I build a Corporate Identity?

    As a leading graphic designing company in Pakistan, we can help you design corporate identity from our top brand designers in Pakistan.

    We build your visual identity that contains many different design elements. Corporate Identity’s first process is the logo design, its concept design, color choices, and fonts / Typography make up just a part of it. Other parts include your corporate design website, social media presence, company letterhead, and business cards. Basically, anything that carries your business name makes up part of your corporate identity.

    This is why it is so important to make sure every detail, no matter how small you are in the end it all comes together to make a cohesive corporate identity that accurately reflects your business, with our experience in providing logo designing services, We have built over 2000 corporate brands and helping clients in Pakistan and globally. Webnet is capable of providing you brand Identity kit to display over different platforms that allow every segment to represent your brand in the best way possible.

    What is Corporate Design?

    The company’s corporate design is a reflection of its mission. Envelopes, business cards, documentation and logo, decorated equally, make the brand more respectable, enhance its confidence and awareness. Therefore, developing a logo and corporate design is an important task that requires a thoughtful and unhasting approach.

    Why it is profitable to make the logo by yourself:

    • you choose the drawing, fonts and colors;
    • you are not limited by time or budget;
    • the price is several times lower when compared to a web studio;
    • development takes a minimum of time;

    These are the obvious advantages. The logo, created by yourself, will be 100% consistent with your expectations. You can work together with your colleagues and employees – nothing restricts you, except for your own imagination. And most significantly – you do not need to have a professional art education and be skillful in working with graphic editors. Online service will do everything for you.

    Creating a logo is easy!

    Take the first step!

    First, create a logo using our service and save it to your personal account. Then you can create a corporate design, enter the required data and get the instant result.

    The options for developing a logo and corporate design:

    • to make an order in the famous design studio;
    • to make an order from a graphics professional;
    • to develop by yourself.

    The cost of an order in the design studio starts from 300 $, and this is the price only for the logo. Usually its development takes from several weeks to several months; the best designers will not make your logo in less than 10 days’ term. And at that you do not get any guarantees. Everyone works against prepayment, and it is not necessarily true that you will like the final version of the project. For that reason, today companies are increasingly choosing the online design tools.

    Basic design criteria of your own logo and company design:

    • Minimize the scale of colors. Remember the corporate designs of Beeline, Nike or AXE. They attract attention not by the brightness and variety of colors, but by their synergy.
    • Logo and corporate design should be two sides of the same coin. A logo as a company emblem must be unique, and a corporate design (envelopes, business cards, forms) must have credibility to the client.
    • Use all the features. Combine the drawings, fonts and color schemes, do not restrict yourself to typical solutions. Be individual, but without fanaticism.
    • Take into account the activity area of your company. For example, woodgrain stylization and a natural green colors should be optimal for the production of eco-products.
    • Feel free to analyze competitors. This will give a clear understanding of what really resonates with the target audience, and which solutions carry little credibility.

    The corporate design of the company must be unique and authentic. If you copy someone’s else design – potential customers will not distinguish you from a number of competitors. If you focus on the frankly “freakish” style – you can frighten the customers and spoil the positive company image. It is better to choose something moderately snazzy, stylistically neutral and clearly capturing the essence of your work.

    Why the use of the Genlogo service is more profitable?

    Hundreds of stylistically diverse images drawn by our designers. Manually selected fonts and a variety of color schemes. All this makes it possible for you to develop logos and corporate design elements for any task and without any restrictions.

    Service operation algorithm:

    • selection of logo;
    • selection of font;
    • color scheme definition;
    • sign up;
    • selection of tariff;
    • payment for the project;
    • getting the logo.

    You get the logo in the required graphical formats. All proprietary rights for use of the logo and corporate design are transferred to you after the purchase.

    The possibility of self-development of all graphical elements guarantees that the final result will meet your requirements completely. This is an effective saving of time and budgeting funds that can be used in some other more necessary sphere. All provided images are uniquely designed, therefore you get a unique logo.

    Genlogo makes creating a corporate logo to be a pleasant and exciting experience, and not a boring work on the stream. That is why a growing number of companies prefer to turn to us, and we have not received any negative reviews yet.

    A good logo is important for your corporate identity; a great logo is ideal. But how do you create corporate logos that will set your corporation apart in its niche and cause others to set up and take notice of your business? By hiring a professional logo designer, of course! Your logo is one of the most important aspects when it comes to creating brand identity, brand awareness, and brand recognition. So in others words, branding your corporation without an effectively designed logo is not going to happen. Where would McDonald’s be without its golden arches? Where would Wal-Mart be without its easily recognizable logo? You can just imagine that neither of these corporate giants would have gone far without an effective and easily recognizable logo that their customer base (and potential, would-be customers and clients) can look at and instantly affirm that it belongs to that company. The golden arches, for example, rise high in the sky along interstates throughout the country, beckoning hungry travelers to something familiar in an unfamiliar place – and the golden arches work so well that McDonald’s is the number one fast food restaurant in the world.

    Logos for Your Corporation

    A professional logo designer will work with you to unearth your business’ philosophy, taking a look at your customer base and your market niche to create corporate logos that make your business stand out. While you probably aren’t the size of McDonald’s, everyone has to start somewhere and having a good logo and identity in place for your corporation as soon as possible during the corporation’s formation will allow you to take your logo along for your successful ride to the top of your game. By having a familiar logo in place, existing and potential customers and clients can easily relate the logo back to you – and you can reinforce that relation through branding efforts such as using your logo appropriately. This includes on all letterhead (or anything printed that comes out of your office). As a side note, the most effective placement of any logo is in the left hand corner of an item (whether it be a screen or a piece of paper) because the eye is “drawn” to the left corner automatically – so why not have your logo there for easier exposure. Other places to use your corporate logo include:

    On your corporate website. Having your corporate logo on your corporate website – including every page of the website – is a great way for those who are interested in your services and products to get to know your logo better.

    On your place of business. Use your logo prominently at your physical location, whether it is on the doors or displayed boldly in the lobby or reception area.

    In print ads. Use your logo in any print ads that you place in newspapers, magazines, and journals. A great logo should look good in black and white as well as in color.

    On billboards. When you create your corporate logo, make sure that it is scalable – which means that it looks just as good when enlarged as it does when shrunk down to less than a ½ inch in size.

    Once you create your corporate logo, you’ll find other uses for it as well, including using it on promotional pens, hats, mugs, tee shirts and more.


    My God you people are amazing! I’m going to have to get some help on this. I can’t decide because they’re all so great. I’ll let you know.

    Thanks so much Lilian. Wow.

    JD – Greenergy2030 Certified Business

    But first, what do we mean by corporate image?

    The term brand image refers to the way our target audience interprets the signals we send out through our brand’s products, services, and campaigns. These associations work to either foster a positive or negative bond towards the brand. We could also say that an entity’s corporate image is the meaning that weighs the most on the minds of a consumer.

    As a result, branding’s importance is non-negotiable for any brand looking to forge a bond with its customers and sell its products. Branding is a working method to use to tackle any branding project from any context. It’s a universal, underlying tool that will bring sense to everything we do.

    Why is an organization’s corporate image important?

    Having an effective brand image is crucial for us to be in the recall of our target audience more easily and to transmit, increase, and preserve our company’s spirit and prestige. How can we do so successfully? We must be aware of the need to not skimp on any necessary resources since the investment in your firm’s corporate identity can result in multiple benefits. It opens the way to:

    More consumer purchases (User Experience).

    Maintaining brand identity through establishing unified communication across all touchpoints, ensuring consumers receive a clear message about the business’s focus.

    Creating brand equity through increasing brand recall in our target audience while cultivating brand awareness and loyalty that lets us be more competitive.

    If you think your brand image does not satisfy these aims, perhaps it’s time for you to consider going through the rebranding process. These uses corroborate the direct correlation between your strategy and brand image.

    Three phases for creating a successful brand strategy

    When creating a brand strategy, your process should have at least three distinct phases: analysis, strategy, and activation. All of these stages are fundamental so your corporate image can stand out from your competitors.

    1. Analysis: get to know your territory

    We use this first phase to examine our surroundings to create our corporate image. We’ll try to explain:

    The meanings our competitors use

    Industry best practices

    Parallel categories to find the brand territory or competitive space we’ll use for our communications

    The best way to make all this information tangible is by creating a benchmarking document that gathers all the findings from our brand study. The material includes both intangible aspects such as brand positioning and values, as well as physical components such as our analysis of font and color usage.

    2. Strategy: Give your corporate image a direction

    Your strategy will be the action plan you work on for your brand and to give your brand’s corporate image structure. This communication system offers structure and guidance for every single touchpoint within your organization, both internal and external, while always gearing it towards meeting business objectives.

    An effective brand strategy ensures there is a central idea that serves as the basis for defining a company’s behaviors, actions, and corporate communications. The brand strategy will also give way to other essential brand identity components such as brand positioning, brand values and attributes, brand personality, or its value proposition.

    The way of transmitting this essence to the world is through a communications platform. This timeless document serves as a basis for all communications by bringing together our brand DNA and letting other departments rely on it as a resource to differentiate what practices are aligned with our strategy or not.

    3. Activation: Give your brand image wings

    Let’s not forget that we design all our brand components in some way and that means the designer is part of every step in the process. Despite that, this is where they have the spotlight: it will be time to craft (or rethink) a brand image or brand identity that comes from a concept and encompass both its verbal identity and visual identity.

    Our brand identity should be easy for anyone who is going to use it to activate. That means it’s imperative we create a manual where we develop basic guidelines for using and implementing the system. Ideally, we should count on an interactive, digital, dynamic tool that keeps us updated on the latest needs and applications for our visual, verbal, and strategic system.

    In this phase, we also look at elements like fonts, use of color, illustrations, network of lines, logos, brand name, slogan, or tone of voice. They should all give off the same essence that we previously defined in our brand platform to create a cohesive unit that our target audience can easily decode.

    How to create a corporate identityThis whole process culminates in achieving our goal of a corporate image that appeals and generates recall in the minds of our consumers.

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    Kwork Overview

    Welcome to my Brand Style Guide KWORK!

    This is Kanak I am a Graphic designer with 4 years of expertise, if you need a creative modern, unique, minimalist, and professional logo design and brand style guide for your company, business, brand, website, or project then you are in right place. I can help you design your dream logo and brand style.

    High-Quality RAW Files (JPEG, PNG, AI, PSD)

    Revisions Until Satisfaction

    100% Customer Satisfaction

    Fast and Friendly Communication

    Creative & Unique Professional Designs


    I also design logo, banners, business card, flyers, and any creations based on your requirement(Full Package)

    Minimalist | Brand| Professional | Unique | Package | Flat | Minimal | Luxury | Creative | Design Service

    If you have any Questions INBOX ME. I am here to assist you.

    Please give me your business details so that I can make a corporate brand identity for you. Such as:

    How to create a corporate identity

    A corporate identity manual defines the rules for applying the graphic elements of a brand in order to maintain its visual and communicative coherence. In short, without a manual your brand is lost.

    The identity of your brand is the personality of your company. This is what makes it stand out in the mind of the consumer and differentiates it from the competition. A corporate identity manual is responsible for aligning all the rules of graphic applications of your brand, from fonts and colors to logos, applications and images. It is a reference tool that explains how a company presents itself to the world through design. Creating a visual guide has two main advantages: it guarantees coherence and saves time.

    Consistency is the key to creating a seamless brand image. Every business needs to create communication pieces, such as newsletters, images for social media or online ads. A reference manual allows to gather all the information so that anyone can have access to it at any time and can follow the same criteria when it comes to creating a design.

    Here are the basic elements that your corporate identity manual should have:

    1. Definition and philosophy

    Before creating a style guide you must be well aware of the brand. The first section should explain the basic concepts, such as mission, vision, personality and fundamental values. It is about capturing the essence of the brand in a few lines of text.

    How to create a corporate identity

    A collage of inspiring images helps visualize the concepts behind the brand creation.

    How to create a corporate identity

    The logo is the most recognizable element of a brand. This part of the manual guarantees the correct use of your logo in any medium. It is necessary to detail here how and when its different versions can be used. In order to prevent erroneous applications that could convey the wrong message, it is important to specify the following basic elements:

    • Anagram or symbol: a graphic element that forms part of the logo and represents one or more concepts.
    • Brand: a distinctive sign whose main function is to differentiate and distinguish the company’s services from other competitors.
    • Tagline: a brief phrase specifically designed to express the brand’s proposal in an ingenious and intelligent way.
    • Grid and protection zone: a guide that helps to reproduce the logo in any dimension and medium. It establishes a proportional empty space around the logo to ensure its legibility.
    • Application sizes: the minimum recommended size to use a logo without losing its readability in offset, silkscreen and digital printing.
    • Positive and negative space logos: white on black background and black on white background, to indicate which color variant should be used on light and dark backgrounds.
    • Logo placement: a sample of how the brand should be presented on different corporate colours and images.
    • Improper use: details of how the graphic elements of the mark should not be applied, including deformations, colour changes or incorrect sizes.

    How to create a corporate identity

    4. Corporate Colors

    The choice of primary and secondary corporate colors is one of the most important elements of branding. The manual should specify a sample of colours, using references for both printing and digital media.

    For printing, two different codes are used:

    • Pantone: the most widely used color catalog in the world. The use of Pantone references ensures that the printed colour will always be the same as the one chosen in the sample.
    • CMYK: four digits indicating the combination of four colors: Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Key. The equivalent of a Pantone colour will not always be exactly the same in CMYK.

    Two other references are used for digital displays:

    • RGB: a combination of three primary colors (red, green and blue). Pantone and CMYK colour equivalents must be specified in order to display them well on digital formats.
    • HTML: a hexadecimal code formed by a hash and 6 digits and letters. It is used to identify the colors in the web design..

    Remember that all these colors can vary a little in each medium. The best strategy is to first choose a print color and look for its digital equivalents.

    How to create a corporate identity

    5. Typographic system

    Any brand has its own combination of corporate typographies: a main one of the logo and another one, secondary, for the body of the texts. An identity manual specifies the font family (whether regular, bold, or italicized) and sizes (h1, h2, h3). It shows typographies using all of the characters: the letters of the alphabet in upper and lower case and the numbers from 0 to 9. It also includes examples of the application of each one of them in headlines, in secondary texts and the CTA buttons on the web.

    How to create a corporate identity

    6. Photographs and graphic elements

    This section is essential for any business that often uses elements such as photographs, icons or illustrations as a resource in their communication. It specifies the style of images that can be used and gives examples that match the tone of the brand. It also defines the sizes and the correct and incorrect use of:

    • Corporate photographs: their style and messages to be conveyed
    • Icons and illustrations: sets that fit the style of the brand
    • Patterns: images used to create backgrounds

    How to create a corporate identity

    A section with the applications of all the previously specified elements in different publications is what completes an identity manual. Depending on the style of each business, designs can be included on stationery, such as business cards, brochures and envelopes, on promotional material, such as t-shirts and pens, or on different packaging formats. Examples of digital formats are also presented here: ad banners, social media creativities and web elements. All this explains the use of the brand, typographies and corporate colours in visual examples of different on- and offline applications.

    How to create a corporate identity

    The length of an identity manual depends on the needs of each company. The main objective is to create a guide that details a consistent visual identity and can become a reference point for any future design project.

    If you want to improve the image of your business and need experts to create a branding strategy, do not hesitate to contact us. We will be happy to help you with your brand, contact us!

    With FlexClip’s free corporate video maker, you can easily exhibit your brand’s personality and highlighted services and products. Simply pick a corporate video template and upload your video clips and photos to customize your videos. It’s free and easy-to-use for everyone.

    • Handy video editor
    • Rich video templates
    • Extensive media library
    • Dynamic text animations

    Select Corporate Video Templates

    Learn to make a professional company overview and attract more members to your team!

    Create a car dealer video to help you get more orders than competitors.

    Want to make your realtor recruitment ad stand out? Create a video to post your job offers now!

    Goodbye Team Member

    Create a video to say goodbye to the team member who is going to leave.

    House with Pool

    Create a video to show more details of the house and attract more people to buy.

    Make a video to show your smart work system!

    A professional video will show your service clearly and attract people’s eyes.

    Online Fitness Classes

    This video template will give you new ideas to make an introduction video of your online fitness classes.

    Improve Customer Experience

    Make a video to share your tips on how to improve customer experience.

    5th Company Anniversary

    Marketing your company’s milestone anniversary with a video can be a fun way to celebrate the business’s birthday of your company.

    Company Logo Collection

    The video shows some stunning animated company logo designs, customize your own one right now.

    New Year Video for Customers

    Give thanks to your customers for their support this year and wish them a happy new year with a video.

    Make a Professional Corporate Video to Boost Company’s Market Share

    A company needs to establish its culture and identity. Making a professional corporate video is a practical way to go. Whether you want to show a big vision of your company or gather your people, our corporate video maker will help you render such a video accomplishing exactly what you want.

    Powerful to Create Corporate Video

    Professional Corporate Video Templates

    Have no skilled experience for video editing? Have no idea where to start? You can try exploring the corporate video templates from expert designers. There are charts, business visuals, and corporate footage that will help enrich video contents and express something great.

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    Background Music for Company & Business

    Music sets the tone of a video. No exception, a piece of aspiring music will take your corporate video to next level. Find a large number of awesome music, and check if one fits your corporate video easily. Nothing can be easier than this to find perfect background music.

    A Wide Variety of Corporate Info Overlays

    It’s easy to add corporate information to video as long as you try one of the provided corporate overlays. Select a corporate overlay, enter your information, and it’s done. Also, you can adjust the look of your corporate overlays, i.e., sizes, colors and animations.

    How to create a corporate identity

    Why You Need to Make a Corporate Video

    Boost Sales

    A compelling video can absolutely influence buying behavior, leading directly to sales.

    Increase Traffic

    Nothing can compare to the power of video content when it comes to driving traffic to your site.

    Encourage Social Shares

    Videos on social media platforms generate more likes and shares than images and text combined.

    Alle Institutionen möchten sich vorstellen, ihre Projekte den Kunden bestmöglich präsentieren und ihre Leistungen zeigen. Aus diesem Grund ist es für die Institution notwendig, durch die Gestaltung einer Unternehmensidentität eine einzigartige Identität zu schaffen. Das Design der Unternehmensidentität, das das Image der Institution zeigt, kann je nach Leistungsangebot und Zweck der Institution auf unterschiedliche Weise erfolgen.

    Als Unternehmensidentität werden alle Dienstleistungen einer Institution bezeichnet. Da alle Arbeiten unter dem Namen Unternehmensidentität erfolgen, sollte die Gestaltung sehr sorgfältig vorbereitet werden. Da es am Anfang der Marketingaktivitäten steht, spielt es eine wichtige Rolle, damit die Institution ein breiteres Publikum erreicht.

    Unternehmensidentität ist ein Design, dem Bedeutung beigemessen werden muss, denn es zeigt die Haltung und das Verhalten eines Unternehmens ebenso wie die Identität einer Person. Beim Design der Unternehmensidentität von stehen die Wünsche der Unternehmensinhaber im Vordergrund. Dank bemerkenswerter Designs mit Emblemen und Logos wird es einfacher, ein großes Publikum zu erreichen.

    Die Bedeutung des Desings der Unternehmensidentität

    Die Unternehmensidentität, die die Persönlichkeit des Unternehmens widerspiegelt, ist bei der Demonstration und Vermarktung der Aktivitäten sehr wichtig. Gewöhnliche und einfache Identitäten erschweren es Unternehmen, den Wert zu erfassen, den sie verdienen. Es kann dazu führen, dass Sie zwischen anderen Institutionen verloren gehen, indem Sie daran gehindert werden, die richtige Zielgruppe zu erreichen.

    Korrekt gemachte Unternehmensidentitäten harmonieren mit Originalartikeln und grafischen Designs. Aus diesem Grund sorgt es dafür, den Verbraucher sowohl schriftlich als auch visuell zu erreichen und zu beeinflussen. Es ist sehr wichtig für die Institution, sich nicht falsch darzustellen, Dienstleistungen in klaren Grenzen zu erbringen und den Markenbildungs-Prozess zu beschleunigen.

    Desings der Unternehmensidentität mit

    Es ist sehr wichtig, dass eine Institution bei der Gestaltung ihrer eigenen Identität Hilfe von Fachleuten erhält. unterstützt mit seinen Designs für Unternehmensidentität, Marken und Organisationen dabei, sich bestmöglich auszudrücken. Es ist effektiv, um die Aktivitäten der Institution zu maximieren, indem es einprägsame Slogans für die Verbraucher präsentiert.

    Was ist Unternehmensidentität?

    Unternehmensidentität ist eine Identität, die zeigt, wie das Unternehmen innerhalb oder außerhalb des Unternehmens aussieht. Unternehmensidentität ist im Wesentlichen die gesamte Arbeit, die geleistet wird, um Kunden das Unternehmen bekannt zu machen. Bei der Erstellung einer Unternehmensidentität sollten die Vision und Mission des Unternehmens festgelegt werden. Die Identität kann durch die Erstellung eines Logos und Emblems geschaffen werden. Die Bekanntheit der Unternehmensidentität bei den Kunden ist wichtig für die Zuverlässigkeit. Es gibt Experten, bei denen Unternehmen Dienstleistungen zur Schaffung einer Unternehmensidentität erhalten können. Um an vorderster Front zu sein, ist es notwendig, sich Hilfe von Experten zu holen.

    Welche Beispiele gibt es für die Unternehmensidentität?

    Beispiele für Unternehmensidentität finden Sie im Abschnitt Projekte.

    Wie hoch sind die Preise für Unternehmensidentität?

    Die Preise für Unternehmensidentität variieren. Es ist notwendig, einen Blick auf die Antragsformulare für die Unternehmensidentität zu werfen.

    Was sind die Phasen der Erstellung einer Unternehmensidentität?

    Man kann sagen, dass Unternehmensidentität in fünf Phasen stattfindet. Den ersten Schritt können wir als die Festlegung und Planung aller Arbeiten sehen. Bei der Festlegung dieser Werke sollte die Gestaltung zeitgemäß und der Zeit entsprechend originell sein. Ähnliche Designs und Identitäten mit anderen Unternehmen können zu Verwirrung führen. Als dritte Stufe können die Präsentationen von Experten gezählt werden. Die vierte Phase ist die redaktionelle Phase, die in der Präsentation gezeigten Informationen werden von den den Zuständigen überprüft und finalisiert. Der letzte Schritt ist der Druck und die Veröffentlichung des genehmigten Designs. Die letzte Stufe ist sehr wichtig, da das Timing richtig gewählt werden muss. Andernfalls kann das Ansehen des Unternehmens sinken und die Unternehmensidentität wird nutzlos.

    Welche Arten von Unternehmensidentität gibt es?

    Unternehmensidentität wird als wichtiger Faktor für Unternehmen akzeptiert, da sie die Wahrnehmung stärkt und lenkt. Um ein Image zu erstellen, ist es notwendig, eine Unternehmensidentität zu erstellen. Um eine Bindung zur Zielgruppe aufzubauen, ist es notwendig, eine Unternehmensidentität zu schaffen. Die genaue Abbildung des Unternehmens spielt sowohl für das Unternehmen als auch für die Kunden eine wichtige Rolle. Insofern ist es auch für Unternehmen wichtig, Dienstleistungen von Profis zu erhalten und gleichzeitig eine Unternehmensidentität zu schaffen. Um eine unverwechselbare und einzigartige Unternehmensidentität zu schaffen, ist die Hilfe von Expertenteams unbedingt erforderlich. Somit wird sowohl die Zielgruppe richtig bestimmt und man ist verschiedenen Unternehmen in der Branche einen Schritt voraus.

    Whether your organization has ten devices or ten thousand, Apple fits easily into your existing infrastructure. Zero-touch deployment allows IT to configure and manage remotely, and IT can tailor the setup process to any team. So every Mac, iPad, iPhone, and Apple TV is ready to go from the start.

    You’re in control
    with Apple
    Business Manager.

    Apple Business Manager is a web-based portal that helps you deploy iPhone, iPad, Mac, and Apple TV. And you can easily provide employees with access to Apple services, set up device enrollment, and distribute apps, books, and software — all from one place.


    Enroll devices to be set up automatically with mobile device management (MDM). Streamline and customize the setup process for employees.


    Easily buy apps and books for employees. And distribute custom apps within your organization.


    Create Managed Apple IDs for employees and assign privileges for additional users on your IT team.

    Integrate with any environment.

    Wi-Fi and Networking. Apple devices have secure wireless network connectivity built in. iOS, iPadOS, and macOS all provide the built-in security to access those wireless networks, including industry-standard WPA3-Enterprise and 802.1X. When an Apple device is used on a Cisco network, Fast Lane prioritizes the most critical business apps so that employees have uninterrupted access. And enhanced roaming capabilities ensure that iPhone and iPad remain connected as they travel across access points.

    VPN. Easily configure Apple devices for secure access to your corporate network through built-in support for VPN. Out of the box, iOS, iPadOS, and macOS support the industry-standard networks IKEv2, Cisco IPsec, and L2TP over IPsec. Apple devices also support VPN On Demand, Always On VPN, and Per App VPN for facilitating connections on a much more granular basis for managed apps or specific domains. Whatever method your business chooses, data in transit is protected.

    Email. iPhone, iPad, and Mac work with Microsoft Exchange, Office 365, and other popular email services, like G Suite, for instant access to push email, calendar, contacts, and tasks over an encrypted SSL connection. And Exchange support is built right into the Mail, Calendar, Contacts, and Reminders apps on iPhone and iPad — making it intuitive for employees to perform common tasks such as accepting meeting invitations and finding contacts in the Global Address List.

    File Providers. The Files app in iOS and iPadOS and the Finder in macOS let employees instantly access their third-party cloud services — like Box, Dropbox, OneDrive, Adobe Creative Cloud, and Google Drive — so they have all of their files on all of their devices. The Files app and the Finder also have built-in support for file sharing with SMB and WebDAV, ensuring that employees can access the corporate file servers seamlessly on all their Apple devices.

    Directory Services. Apple devices can access directory services for managing identity and other user data, including Active Directory, LDAP, and Open Directory. Some MDM vendors provide tools to integrate their management solutions with Active Directory and LDAP directories — right out of the box. And for organizations using on-premise Active Directory, a first-party Kerberos extension provides password management and Kerberos ticket management for signing in to internal apps and websites.

    Identity Providers. The latest versions of iOS, iPadOS, and macOS support a new single sign-on (SSO) extension framework, allowing users to sign in to a corporate application once without being asked again for other apps or websites. This feature enables advanced multifactor authentication, supported by participating identity providers, whenever users sign in to a corporate resource. IT teams can also now configure authentication from cloud identity providers during initial enrollment and device setup.

    Make a Great First Impression with Your Brand’s Corporate Identity Designs

    Custom Business Stationery Design and Printing

    A strong, visual identity is fundamental for the success of any company including yours. We create corporate identity designs that are original, eye-catching and professional. Designed to work in print and on-screen at any size, our identities are specifically designed around your business needs.

    Business Cards

    Your business card is often the first impression people take away from your business. When your business card reflects a professional design and great quality, it lets potential clients and sales leads know that your organization pays attention to even the smallest details. With business card design and printing from DIGITALPOiNTUSA, you get quality cardstock and digital printing options that leave a lasting impression.


    Make sure your company stands out to customers and looks professional with custom, high-quality letterhead. We can design and print letterhead that incorporates your personal or company identity. These can range in format from basic black & white to impressive, colorful designs. Your letterhead design is just as important as your brand. It visually represents your company and, once seen, should appeal to your audience. Your design must look professional, as it plays a significant role in the molding of your corporate image.

    Business Envelopes

    Brand your business envelopes for for maximum exposure. Before your customers or prospects view your letters and announcements they first notice the envelope that hold these documents. Make a great first impression with our high quality envelope design and printing services. Your custom envelopes provide another opportunity for you to showcase and brand your company’s commitment to quality. We offer a variety of envelope sizes, options and paper stock to meet your needs.


    Your brochure is an important tool for promoting your business and connecting with prospective customers. That’s why we’re here to help you every step of the way on your brochure project. We use top-grade text and heavyweight cover stocks for our brochures in your choice of finishes that show off your design in a great way. We offer standard sizes (letter, tri-fold, etc) as well as custom sizes and shapes. Design and submit your own piece or let our specialists do the creative work for you.

    Your corporate identity should be a direct reflection of your brand positioning. Treefrog takes your branding strategy and designs your corporate collateral to reflect that strategy. From business cards and stationary to tradeshow booths, digital presentations, and so much more, Treefrog can help you create corporate identity materials that support your brand with consistency and style.

    Everything, from your door mats to your logo, says something about your company (though, as an added thought, we don’t suggest you wipe your feet on your logo). Your company’s identity should make it easier to achieve your business objectives by creating a visual presence in the marketplace, using your brand and trademarks as cornerstones. Treefrog applies your brand strategy and logo to design collateral that represents the essence of your company, professionally and consistently.

    Let us help you create a compelling and enduring corporate identity!

    How to create a corporate identity

    Understanding Digital Marketing Tactics For Your SMB

    You’ve built a great product or service and you’re ready to tell the world. You may be asking yourself one of the most difficult questions in marketing, especially for small […]

    How to create a corporate identity

    2022 is the Year of Digital Transformation

    According to the Chinese, 2022 is the Year of the Tiger. It is definitely a stripe of a different colour! Volkswagen has proclaimed 2022 the Year of the ID Buzz. […]

    How to create a corporate identity

    SEO Copywriting in 2022: How To Write Articles That Rank

    In the history of Treefrog, and indeed of the Internet, there was a time when you might have asked: “Should you hire a website pro or do it yourself?” For […]

    Unlock Your
    Online Potential

    We want to hear your idea! Get in touch
    to get started on your project today.

    Corporate design is associated with a company’s visual identity. It refers to designing a company’s logo, tagline, colors, fonts, etc. It is often confused with corporate identity design, which refers to developing a company’s entire identity, including a company’s work culture, values, internal and external communications, along with designing a company’s visual identity. Characteristics of an excellent corporate design are its flexibility, recognizability, and authenticity. A brand needs to have a sustainable and consistent corporate design to increase brand recall and recognition. Our services range from designing logos for a brand to designing other assets such as business cards, marketing material, posters, letterheads, apparel, and more. Our logo designs are easy on the eyes, stand the test of time, communicate who you are as a brand, create a lasting impact on the audience.

    A good corporate design is essential for proper branding. It acts as a blueprint as to how you want your brand to be perceived by the customers. Brands must get their visual identity right. We help our clients translate the idea of their brands into a strong visual identity that connects with their customers. We perform several iterations to get each of the elements of the corporate design right. We also help our clients in rebranding and redefining their brand’s corporate design. At creative Orion, we ensure that each aspect of our client’s visual identity communicates a clear and consistent message so that their customers can have the same pleasant experience, which can build and strengthen their associations with the brand.

    Our customer-centric approach ensures an end-to-end implementation of corporate design projects. We create corporate designs which are relatable, relevant, and consistent with your brand’s mission, vision, and nature. We have an in-house team of experienced and passionate designers who work relentlessly to create superior value for our clients. Our design experts follow corporate design best practices to ensure utmost customer satisfaction. We believe in open communication and focus on developing strong relations with our clients by delighting them through our services.

    Learn how to use the Managed Apple ID that your company assigns to you.

    This article is for users who have Managed Apple IDs. If you’re an IT administrator, learn more about how to create and use Managed Apple IDs with Apple Business Manager or Apple Business Essentials.

    Your company can create Managed Apple IDs for employees to use for business purposes. Managed Apple IDs are unique to your company and separate from Apple IDs that you can create for yourself. You can associate your Managed Apple ID with the same email address and phone number as your personal Apple ID. Unlike with personal Apple IDs, IT administrators manage the services that your Managed Apple ID can access.

    Check feature availability

    Your employees can use Apple services including iCloud and collaboration with iWork and Notes, but because Managed Apple IDs are for business purposes only, certain features are disabled to protect each organization. Managed Apple IDs also include 5GB of iCloud storage. Apple Business Essentials employee subscription plans offer additional organization storage options for your users.

    Because Managed Apple IDs can’t make purchases, administrators may assign content to your Managed Apple ID or assigned devices.

    Not all services are available in all countries or regions. Apple Business Essentials is available only in the United States.

    About your username and password

    After your company creates your account, you can use your Managed Apple ID. Your Managed Apple ID might include your company’s name or “appleid.” For example, your ID might look like [email protected]

    Your company’s Apple Business Manager or Apple Business Essentials administrator sets up your account name. If there’s a mistake in your username, or if you need to change your account information, contact your company’s administrator.

    Create your password

    When you sign in to your Managed Apple ID for the first time, use the temporary password that your administrator provides you. After you sign in, you’ll be prompted to set up a new password. You must finish setting up your password before you can sign in to some Apple services.

    If you’re a People Manager, Device Manager, Content Manager, or other staff member, sign in to on your Mac or iOS device to set up your password. You must use a standard password that includes eight or more numbers and letters.

    Reset your password

    Unlike with personal Apple IDs, your administrator resets your password. Follow these steps to create a new password:

    1. Contact your administrator to get a temporary password.
    2. Use your temporary password to sign in to Shared iPad or sign in to iCloud on your device. Or, if your role has access, sign in to Apple Business Manager or Apple Business Essentials with your temporary password.
    3. Create a new password.

    Managed Apple ID passwords can’t be reset from the Apple ID account page or

    Sign in with your Managed Apple ID

    To sign in to devices that are set up with Apple Business Manager or Apple Business Essentials, use your Managed Apple ID and password with two-factor authentication.

    Administrator access to your account

    The company that issues your Managed Apple ID owns your account. Your IT administrators can access your account at any time and make the following changes:

    • Restrict access to your account
    • Remove your account
    • Update your account information

    Check the policy that your People Managers, Device Managers, and Content Managers have for the personal use of Managed Apple IDs.

    Update your account information

    If you’re a People Manager, Device Manager, or Content Manager, use the Apple ID account page to manage and update your account information. To change your trusted devices, you must be a People Manager, Device Manager, or Content Manager.

    If you’re a staff member, check with an administrator to update your account information.

    Sign Up To
    High Country Casino

    Play And Enjoy 250+
    Casino Games

    • Coupon code: BFD500 • This offer is valid only for first-time depositors at High Country Casino and only applies by redeeming the correspondent Code in the cashier prior to completing the deposit. Any winnings from this Promotion, will be void if the account does not have at least one valid deposit. The Finance Team reserves the right to request a valid proof of the fully debited transactions. • The offer is limited to one player per household and/or computer. • The coupon can only be redeemed once by the player to a maximum of $2,500.00 bonus. • Minimum deposit to qualify for this bonus is $25. • Play through required to cash out: 45 times the deposit plus the bonus amount in valid games. Wagers in Black Jack, 21 Games, Multi hand Video Poker, Video Poker or any type of Poker Games (including Slots Poker): every $1 bet contributes $0.5. Wagers in Live Dealer Games, Craps, Vegas Three Card Rummy, Tri Card Poker, Caribbean Draw, Caribbean Hold’em, Caribbean Stud, Baccarat, Roulette or SicBo or Progressives games do not apply. • Maximum cash out is 20 times the deposit amount linked to the promotional code, up to $10,000, based on a deposit amount of $500, but it in no case can exceed the maximum $10,000 payout. • Once the wagering requirement is met, all balances exceeding the maximum cash out allowed will be void and automatically deducted from the account. At this point the player may request the funds. If chooses to continue playing instead, any additional winnings exceeding the maximum cash out allowed will be voided and forfeited. • The Bonus Amount is non cashable and will be removed from the associated cash out.

    • 50% Cash Back: Credited upon request, & only once per account. • 50% Cash Back of the deposit amount linked to the promotional code: BFD500, up to a maximum amount of: $250.00. • Maximum cash out: $1,000. Rollover: 45 times in valid wagers. Every $1 bet contributes $0.50 in some games. Not valid for Progressive, some RSVS, Live Dealers games, Craps, Caribbean Hold’em, Baccarat, Tri Card Poker, Roulette, Three Card Rummy and Sic Bo. • Once the wagering requirement is met, all balances exceeding the maximum cash out allowed will be void and automatically deducted from the account. At this point the player may request the funds. If chooses to continue playing instead, any additional winnings exceeding the maximum cash out allowed will be voided and forfeited. The Bonus Amount is non cashable and will be removed from the associated cash out. GENERAL NOTE: General Terms, Rules & Regulations for all Promotions and Bonuses also apply. Information available in the Promotions tab of the main casino site (download and instant play) or in main Menu in the mobile version (Bonus General Rules).

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    How to create a corporate identity

    I can develop a full Brand Identity for you, in any Style.

    I offer the following Assets:

    • Logo Design
    • Typography
    • Color Palette
    • Graphic Design Kit
    • Stationary
    • Style Guide
    • Social Media Kit
    • Custom Designs

    Average Delivery Time: 10 Days

    Revisions: 3

    How to create a corporate identity

    Prisma is Finland’s largest hypermarket chain, a part of one of the oldest Finnish holdings, the S-Group. In Russia, the brand’s assortment is made up of imported (mainly Finnish) goods and locally-produced goods. Most of the Russian stores are located in St. Petersburg; by 2022, their number is going to reach 33.

    The existing style of a “Finnish discounter” is not suitable for the Russian market; here, Prisma focuses rather on middle-class customers and offers goods of sufficiently high quality. We were to develop a new corporate identity for this retail brand. It had to be understandable for Russian shoppers and easily usable on any media, by preserving the spirit of Finland.

    The first step is to bring all communications inside and outside the store to a single layout system; to unify them. We intentionally created a minimalist system without excessive graphics, since the main image in the store should be the product itself. A thoughtful grid design and strict layout rules make the style universal, mobile, easily adaptable to any format, while maintaining the integrity of the entire template.

    The main colour palette grows out of the logo – yellow, orange, hot pink and green. Muted shades derived from the basic tones make an addition. These are the pastel colors that make a strong connection with Scandinavian design.

    The new style system fits flexibly on any media. Even the simplest ad printed by any store employee in black and white will match the brand image.

    Maintaining the image of a European company, Prisma strives to show: we think about every customer regardless of their preferences. Therefore, colored markers on price tags become an important element of style; they help to find the right product easily – gluten-free, lactose-free, sugar-free, vegan, Finnish.

    A striking feature of the brand is Finnish product names and sales pitches in the Finnish language. This is how we emphasize the origin of the brand, supporting its positioning – “the Finnish mentality and service right in the heart of the Northern capital.”

    The entire corporate identity is easily adaptable for standard forms, business cards, Christmas and New Year merchandise or branded cars.

    The new style is convenient to work with for any employee: a marketer, a PR specialist, a store administrator. In addition, the visual image is now fully consistent with the brand positioning in Russia. Every customer knows for sure that they will find the real Finnish spirit and high-quality Finnish products here.

    How to create a google profile

    Google Chrome is the most popular browser in the world right now. Despite being infamous for slowing down your computer, Google has created a strong ecosystem around Chrome using the extensions market and Google apps. One often overlooked feature is the Profiles option. You can create multiple profiles in Google Chrome but most users don’t fully realize its potential.

    In this guide, we will look into how to create new profiles in the Google Chrome browser on PC or Mac.

    Why Create New Profile in Chrome

    The first reason is troubleshooting. Sometimes, Chrome doesn’t function the way it should and one of the popular troubleshooting steps involves creating a new Chrome profile and transferring all your data and files over.

    Another reason to create new profiles is to keep browsing and download history of kids and SO separate if you are using a single machine for surfing the web. You can also apply parental restrictions on these profiles in case you have kids in the house.

    You can create multiple profiles to separate your work and personal lives separate. So many users have accidentally shared NSFW content in the wrong chat window over the years.

    Do you install and use too many extensions? We have all been guilty of this at one point or another in our lives. Extensions are the primary reason why Chrome gets slow. You can create a dedicated profile for installing extensions. Just switch to this profile when you need to use all those extensions and keep a neat profile sans extensions when you are just browsing or watching YouTube videos, for example.

    You share switch to the guest user profile before giving control of your laptop to a friend or colleague. Keep your privacy in check.

    There are so many more reasons behind why you should consider creating Google Chrome profiles. They are easy to create and manage and even easier to switch to and from on the fly.

    How to Create New Profile in Google Chrome

    You can assign a photo to each profile in Google Chrome. This helps in identifying the profile that you are using currently easily. The profile photo should be visible in the top-right corner of the screen. Clicking on it once will reveal more details like email ID.

    To create a new Chrome profile, click on the current Google Chrome profile photo and select Add.

    Choose a name for your new profile and a profile photo from the given option. For now, there is no way to choose a custom photo. You may, however, choose to create a desktop shortcut for the newly created profile in case you are going to use it very often. Click on Add to continue.

    You will be met with a new window where you will be asked to set up your new Chrome profile. You can sign in with a different Google account if you have one or even create one. Otherwise, you can also use it in guest mode.

    To make sure that you are easily able to identify and switch between different profiles, each browser window will now display your profile photo in the Taskbar area.

    Click on the profile photo inside the Chrome window to manage profile-specific settings like sync, bookmarks, and more.

    You can now create multiple profiles in Google and set things up as per your needs.

    How to Remove Google Chrome Profile

    Removing or deleting Google Chrome profile will also delete all associated data like bookmarks, browsing history, cookies, saved passwords, and so on.

    Removing a profile is as easy as adding is. Click on the profile icon and select the gear icon next to the Other people heading where you will see active profiles listed.

    Click on the three-dot menu icon over the profile photo and then select Remove this person. Notice how Chrome says person and not profile. Nice touch.

    You will be met with a pop-up where Chrome will share details about the profile you are about to delete such as passwords, bookmarks, and other counts.

    Each profile has separate settings that you can change just like you would do in the main profile.

    Wrap Up: Create Google Chrome Profile

    There are a few things to keep in mind. The secondary profiles that you create in the Chrome browser are still tied to your primary Google account. You can enable the sync feature to sync data like bookmarks, browsing history, and passwords on other devices. There is also the option of adding a Google account or assigning a Gmail ID to the profile. Either way, your data will sync.

    Google Chrome adds a unique profile icon to each profile as we noted earlier but that may not be enough. In order to make the distinction more clear and pronounce, you can consider adding a unique wallpaper or theme to each browser. That way, when you launch the window or open a new tab, you will know which profile you are in. This will save you a lot of headache in the long run.

    Well, this is everything you need to know about creating and managing profiles on Chrome browser. Don’t forget to have fun with them.

    Disclosure: Mashtips is supported by its audience. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    How to create a google profile

    Imagine: You have been working all day without a break.

    You finally get off work and realize that you’re so hungry, you’re angry; it’s called hangry.

    Those hangry rumblings make you want to find the nearest restaurant, so you can fill yourself up.

    Where do you turn?

    Most likely you’ll turn to Google, and subsequently a Google Business Profile, on your smartphone to find a close restaurant with good reviews and some appetizing photos.

    Now imagine you own that restaurant. You just scored a new customer!

    According to Google, every month there are over five billion searches for restaurants, three billion searches for hotels, one billion searches for clothing stores, and another 600 million searches for hair and beauty salons.

    As a marketer, it’s your job to turn those searches into new customers. When prospects are looking for a specific product, service or type of business, Google Business Profile helps them easily connect on both Google Search and Maps.

    What is ‘Google Business Profile’?

    Google Business Profile (formerly Google My Business) is a free tool that allows small business owners (and nonprofits) to promote their business information on Google Search and Maps. With Google Business Profile, you can connect with your customers, post updates to your business profile, and see how customers are interacting with your business on Google.

    Consider Google Business Profile like your own piece of property on Google local. When customers find themselves in a moment of need (also known as a micro-moment) they turn to Google search to fulfill that need as quickly as possible.

    If you have a Google Business Profile, then the potential customer may very well find and contact your business to satisfy that need.

    It’s important to note that Google Business Profile does not replace your website; instead, it’s a complementary marketing profile to help drive more eyes on your website.

    Google Business Profile features help you to attract, engage, and convert customers. With a verified Google Business Profile, you can:

    • Connect with customers through phone calls, messaging, or responding to reviews
    • See how customers interact and connect with your brand on Google
    • Feature products, photos, or menu items right on Google

    Before you can do anything, you need to create a Google Business Profile, so let’s walk through the process. Note: This is the same process you’d follow if a listing already exists for your business and you clicked on the “Own this business?” link within the listing.

    How to create a Google Business Profile

    Now you understand the marketing potential that Google Business Profile provides, but how do you create a new profile? Below are nine steps to creating a Google Business Profile. If you’re a visual learner, I’ve created this handy video to guide you along the way.

    For those who like to read instructions, follow the process below to build out your business profile.

    Step 1: Start by going to

    Be sure to bookmark this address, as you’ll need it to access your Google Business Profile listing in the future.

    Step 2: Log in with your Google account

    If you don’t have a Google account, visit You’ll be able to create a free account with any email address.

    Step 3: Enter your business name

    Be sure you spell your name correctly and use Title Case (where you capitalize the first letter of each word.) This is the first impression for a customer, and you want to make sure it’s a positive experience.

    Step 4: Enter your business address

    This screen is where you’ll enter your business address, so Google can verify that your business exists. This cannot be a post office box or mailbox in a storefront like Postal Annex or UPS Store. You can also only have one business per residence.

    Step 5: Choose whether you’re a storefront or a service provider

    Here’s where you choose whether you want customers to visit your storefront or if you work from home or would prefer your customers don’t visit your office, you can choose a mile radius around your business, a specific city or state, or a group of zip codes.

    Step 6: Choose your Primary business category

    Choosing your primary category is very important because it dictates where and when you will show up on Google searches. Google is all about relevance, so if a potential customer searches for “Italian Restaurant” but you’re a pizza place, then you may not show up. If the customer searches for “Best pizza near me,” then you’d have a much better chance of your business profile showing up in the search results.

    Step 7: Add your phone number and website

    Both phone calls and website clicks are tracked by Google Business Profile, so make sure your information is correct here.

    Step 8: Verify your local listing (most likely with a postcard)

    According to Google, to manage your business information in Search, Maps, and other Google properties, you must verify your business listing. The verification process helps Google make sure your business information is accurate and that only you, the business owner or manager, has access to it.

    Step 9: Finish populating your Google Business Profile listing

    I’ll talk more about optimizing your Google Business Profile in the next installment of our Google My Business series.

    Putting it all together

    Imagine a new customer coming into your store and telling you they found you on Google. They found YOU. Now, stop imagining because it’s all possible with Google Business Profile. Take advantage of this free tool brought to you by Google, so you can start attracting, engaging, and converting new customers right away.

    Google’s website builder is free and promises to allow small businesses to create and edit websites in minutes on either desktop or mobile.

    How to create a google profile

    Google has a free, single-page website builder designed for small businesses.

    Anyone with a Google Business Profile can use this tool to create and edit websites in minutes on either desktop or mobile.

    With Google’s website builder being an extension of Google Business Profile, you will need to have a complete listing in order to make use of it.

    Information and photos from your Google Business Profile are pulled in automatically to create a basic site, which you can customize with themes, images, and text.

    Whenever you update your Google Business Profile the changes are applied to your website as well.

    How To Create & Publish Your Website

    You’ll have the option to create and publish an automatically generated website when claiming your Google Business Profile for the first time.

    As you claim your profile Google will prompt you to create an accompanying website.

    If you’ve already claimed your profile, follow the steps below to create a website.

    To create your website:

    1. Sign in to Business Profile Manager.
    2. Open the profile you’d like to manage.
    3. Click the Website menu to create your website.

    Follow the instructions on the screen. When you’re satisfied you can go ahead and publish it for the world to see.

    Most of the content will be pre-populated, but you can customize it to your liking.

    You can edit these elements of your site:

    • Theme: Choose from a selection of preset options.
    • Text fields: Such as headline and description.
    • CTA button: Select the main action you want customers to perform, such as request a quote.
    • Photos: Choose a cover photo.
    • Business information: Update your business name and contact information.
    • Links to external sites: Link out to other relevant URLs.
    • Menu items: Restaurants can list menu items on their website.

    You can come back and edit the above sections of your website at any time.

    How To Link Others To Your Website

    With your website published, you’ll no doubt want to share it with customers and build some links.

    By default, sites created with Google Business Profile will follow the domain structure: “”

    If you want a more shareable URL, you can purchase a custom domain can be purchased from the Settings menu in your account. Google will automatically connect your site with the domain you purchased.

    To purchase a custom domain for the website made via your Business Profile on Google, publish your site and click “Buy Domain” when prompted (or from the Settings menu in your account).

    You can then search for domain names and purchase a domain name.

    If you choose not to purchase a custom domain there is no cost associated with using Google’s website builder. There’s no cost for hosting the website, with or without a custom domain.

    After publishing your site, updating it is as simple as updating your Google Business Profile. Updates made to your business listing will be automatically applied to your website.

    Google’s website builder is limited by design, lacking many of the features you would find in a more robust content management system.

    However, that’s the trade-off you get with using a free, user-friendly tool that also comes with free hosting. It’s not a perfect solution, but it’s arguably better than having no website at all.

    For more information see Google’s help center.

    More Resources:

    Featured Image: Cameron Prins/Shutterstock

    One of Google’s Chrome’s flagship features is the ability to sign in with your Google account and sync your history, bookmarks, apps, and extensions across multiple PCs. Signing in also helps improve your Google Now suggestions, and automatically signs you in to Google services like Gmail, Drive, and Google+.

    The downside: If you share a PC at home, other family members can start searching the web as you by simply opening Chrome. Ruh-roh!

    Luckily, Chrome’s multiple profile support can help, providing an easy-peasy way for multiple people to use the same browser without worrying about imposters or having to constantly sign in and out of Google profiles.

    Getting started

    First, open Chrome’s menu—the icon with three horizontal lines in the upper right-hand corner—and open the Settings option. Towards the bottom you’ll see a “Users” section.

    How to create a google profile

    The add new user window in Chrome on Windows 8.1.

    Click the Add new user… button in that section and a pop-up window will appear with a bunch of user icons. Pick an icon and name for your profile, decide whether you want to create a desktop shortcut icon for the profile, and then tap the “Create” button. Boom! In a few seconds, a new window will open with the new user profile.

    Notice that the first time you create a new user profile, Chrome will actually create two profiles: One called “Default Profile” for the person who is currently signed in to Chrome, and one for the new profile that you just created.

    How to create a google profile

    You actually create two user profiles the first you add a new user.

    So the first time you add a new user, you are actually creating two profiles. To change the name of the default profile to something more user friendly, go back to the Chrome settings tab. Highlight the default profile in the “Users” section and the click the “Edit…” button to change the name.

    That’s pretty much it. Just follow the same process as many times as you need to create a user profile for each member of your household.

    User profiles for children

    For your kids, you can create a special kind of profile called a supervised user, a beta-grade profile type Google added to Chrome earlier in January.

    To make a supervised user, simply click the checkbox next to “This is a supervised user managed by [email address].” Parents of supervised users can block specific websites, check out the websites they’ve visited, and lock kids into Google’s “Safe search.” If you block a website that your child thinks they should be allowed to view, they can even send you a request to unblock it, and you can manage settings for your supervised users via the dashboard at

    How to create a google profile

    Supervised Chrome profiles can request that sites be unblocked.

    Keep in mind that user profiles are not password protected, however, so Chrome’s supervised users feature is far from fool proof. You will still have to keep an eye on your child’s surfing habits to make sure they are using their profile and not switching over to yours, or—if you’re really worried—create separate user accounts as the operating system level .

    Switching between users

    To switch between users, just click the user icon that appears in the upper left corner of the browser window. The other created users will appear in a drop down menu. Select the one you want to switch to and a new window will open for that user profile. If that’s too much trouble, you can also use the customized desktop shortcuts Chrome offers to make when creating a profile to open the browser as a particular user. Enjoy!

    Written by Pamela Vaughan

    How to create a google profile

    Google has announced the launch of Google+ Pages, pages specifically engineered for businesses on Google+. While Google indicated that Google+ Pages wouldn’t be immediately accessible to all, it looks like they’re actually becoming readily available. (In fact, we’ve already created HubSpot’s Google+ Page, so you can follow our updates and add HubSpot to one of your Circles by clicking here!)

    With a network of more than 40 million members, Google+ is indeed deserving of your marketing attention, so smart marketers should set up their Google+ Pages as soon as possible. But don’t worry — it’s simple! Here are 5 easy steps to create a Google+ Page for your business.

    1. Choose an Accessible Gmail Account

    If we learned anything from creating our own account, it’s that Google+ Pages’ administrative capabilities could use improvement. Avoid creating your business page through just any old account, such as a personal gmail account. Instead, choose a gmail account that is accessible to multiple members of your marketing team (e.g. [email protected]), and use that account to create your page. Because Google+ Pages’ administrative capabilities currently don’t seem to be as sophisticated as Facebook’s (which enable you to assign multiple page admins regardless of the page’s origins), you’ll want to choose a host account that makes your page as accessible to multiple contributors as possible.

    Note: Because of overwhelming user feedback, the ‘Google+ Your Business’ Google+ Page (confused yet?) has indicated that Google+ has already started working on multi-admin support and ownership transfer, which will be available in the coming weeks/months. For now, we recommend making your account as accessible to other team members as possible.

    2. Create a Page with the Desired Account

    Visit, and if you see the option to create a Google+ Page, get started! Follow the wizard (it’s much like Facebook’s Page wizard), and choose the most appropriate option to classify your business. You’ll be able to select from the following options:

    • Local Business or Place
    • Product or Brand
    • Company, Institution or Organization
    • Arts, Entertainment or Sports
    • Other

    After selecting your classification, fill in your basic information, including your page name (i.e. your company name), your business’ website URL, your category (i.e. your industry), and the classification of your page’s content (i.e. any Google+ user, 18 years of age or older, etc.).

    How to create a google profile

    3. Customize Your Public Profile

    The third step involves customizing your public profile. The profile basics include your tagline (think of it as your business’ elevator pitch) and an image (your company logo is a great option).

    How to create a google profile

    4. Promote Your Page

    At this point, you’ve created the skeleton of your page, and Google+ will now prompt you to promote your page. Our recommendation is to customize your page even further and start sharing a few updates before you begin telling the world about it. Promoting a blank page isn’t a great way to convince people that your Page is valuable enough to add to their Circles. So invest some time into optimizing your page and sharing a few links to valuable content before you start promoting it to the masses.

    How to create a google profile

    5. Get Going!

    At the most basic level, this is really all you need to do to get your page launched. But as any smart marketers know, the ‘basics’ aren’t usually enough. Intelligent marketers understand the importance of optimizing their page to make it not only more engaging, but also more valuable and effective for lead generation. In this step, follow Google+’s prompts to create an effective page, and remember — Google+ is a social network. Although every social network has its specific nuances and behaviors, many of the same best practices will still apply. Regularly share fresh content, react and respond to your fans, be engaging, and optimize for lead generation. Then measure, adapt your strategy, and optimize your presence based on your own individual results and goals.

    How to create a google profile

    Have you set up your Google+ Page yet? The network is still VERY new for businesses, so share what you’ve learned in the comments below. And be sure to add HubSpot to your Circles for our latest updates in Google+!

    How to create a google profile

    How to create a google profile

    Originally published Nov 8, 2011 9:00:00 AM, updated July 28 2017

    Lori Kaufman is a technology expert with 25 years of experience. She’s been a senior technical writer, worked as a programmer, and has even run her own multi-location business. Read more.

    How to create a google profile

    Chrome makes it very easy to switch profiles while in the browser. If other people use your computer and you want to prevent them from accessing your Chrome profile—which contains your bookmarks, history, and possibly even saved passwords—you can lock it with your Google account password.

    Update: Google has removed the Supervised Users feature from Chrome, so you can no longer do this. If you use a Chromebook, you can sign in with multiple different user accounts, locking your Chromebook when you aren’t using it. On a Windows PC or Mac, we recommend you create multiple system user accounts. Your Chrome profile will then be protected with your operating system’s login password.

    To lock your Chrome profile with your Google account password, you must add a new person to Chrome as a supervised user. We’ll show you how to do that and then how to lock your own profile.

    To do all this, we’re going to use the new profile management system in Chrome. But, first, we need to enable it in the Chrome flags. Enter the following line into the address bar and press Enter;

    NOTE: You don’t have to use this new profile, but there must be at least one supervised user so you can have access to the option that locks your profile.

    How to create a google profile

    Select “Enabled” from the drop-down list under New profile management system.

    How to create a google profile

    Chrome must be restarted for this change to take effect, so scroll to the bottom of the flags list and click “Relaunch Now”.

    How to create a google profile

    Once Chrome has reopened, click the Chrome menu button in the upper-right corner of the browser window and select “Settings” from the drop-down menu.

    How to create a google profile

    The Settings page opens on a new tab. In the People section, click “Add person”.

    How to create a google profile

    On the Add person dialog box, enter a Name for the new person and check the “Control and view the websites this person visits from [email protected]” box. If you want, you can change the picture associated with this user by clicking on a desired picture. Click “Add”.

    How to create a google profile

    The following dialog box displays telling you that the new person is now a supervised user. You can manage settings for this supervised user by clicking the link provided on the dialog box. At this time, we don’t want to switch to the new user, so click “OK, got it”.

    How to create a google profile

    You’ll see the new person in the People list, with “(Supervised)” next to their name.

    How to create a google profile

    Now, when you click the button at the top of the browser window with your profile name on it, you can select “Exit and childlock” to close Chrome and lock your profile.

    NOTE: To lock your profile, you must exit Chrome using the “Exit and childlock” option on the profile switcher menu. Exiting Chrome normally will leave your profile unlocked.

    How to create a google profile

    The Google Chrome profile dialog box automatically displays with your account selected and ready to accept your password. If you don’t want to reopen Chrome right now, click the “X” in the upper-right-corner of the dialog box to close it. Otherwise, to open Chrome using your protected profile, enter the password for your Google account and press Enter.

    How to create a google profile

    When your profile is locked, and you open Chrome using your protected profile, this dialog box displays when you open Chrome. You’ll see a lock icon on your protected profile. Click your user profile tile and enter your password to open Chrome using your protected profile.

    How to create a google profile

    You can also create a Windows shortcut for each Chrome profile to quickly open Chrome using different profiles, or learn more about Google Chrome’s profile switcher if you’re interested in seeing what it can do.

    (This page deals with establishing entirely separate data directories for running parallel instances of the Chrome browser. To create separate user accounts within the same Chrome browser instance, please read about the multiple accounts feature.)

    By creating and using multiple profiles, you can do development — creating extensions, modifying the browser, or testing the browser — while still being able to use Google Chrome as your default browser. We recommend that you use the default profile for your everyday browsing. The details of how to create and use a profile vary by platform, but here’s the basic process:

    • Create a folder to hold data for the new profile.
    • Create a shortcut or alias that launches the browser, using the –user-data-dir command-line argument to specify the profile’s location.
    • Whenever you launch the browser, use the shortcut or alias that’s associated with the profile. If the profile folder is empty, the browser creates initial data for it.

    Instructions: Windows

    To create a profile

    1. Create a folder on your computer, say C:\chrome-dev-profile. This folder will hold the data for the new profile.
    2. Make a copy of the Google Chrome shortcut on your desktop. (Right-click, then Copy.) Name the new shortcut something like Chrome Development.
    3. Right-click the Chrome Development shortcut, choose Properties, and paste –user-data-dir=C:\\chrome-dev-profile at the end of the Target field. The result might look like this: “C:\Documents and Settings\me\Local Settings\Application Data\Google\Chrome\Application\chrome.exe” –user-data-dir=C:\chrome-dev-profile
    4. Start Google Chrome by double-clicking the Chrome Development shortcut. This creates the profile data.

    To use the profile

    Just start Google Chrome by double-clicking the Chrome Development shortcut. Yep, it’s that easy.

    To clear the profile

    You might want to clear the profile if you’re testing, and you want to start from scratch. Here’s how:

    1. Close Google Chrome.
    2. Delete the contents of your profile folder — the folder you specified with –user-data-dir (for example, C:\chrome-dev-profile).

    Instructions: Mac

    To be provided. See User Data Directory for the default location.

    Instructions: Linux

    To be provided. See User Data Directory for the default location.

    How to create a google profile

    Browsers like Firefox and Chrome offer the option to create separate profiles for different users, thus making it easier when more people use the same browser on a device. Alternatively, a single user can create independent personas for their “work” and “home” needs, to keep things from getting mixed up. These profiles encompass all the data specific to a particular user, including bookmarks, add-ons, saved passwords, general settings, history, tabs, etc.

    Here we demonstrate how you can create and use multiple profiles in two popular browsers – Firefox and Chrome.

    How to Create a New User Profile in Mozilla Firefox

    In order to create a new user profile in Firefox, you’ll need to access your browser’s User Profile Manager. Note that even if you haven’t created a profile before, there’s an active default which you’ve been using up to this point.

    1. Type about:profiles in the browser’s address bar and hit Enter.

    How to create a google profile

    2. On the “About Profiles” page, click on the “Create a New Profile” button.

    How to create a google profile

    3. A new window will pop up on your screen explaining what user profiles are all about. Click Next to move to the ensuing step.

    4. Enter a name for your new profile and select the folder where all the user settings, preferences and user-related data will go (optional). Click Finish.

    How to create a google profile

    5. A new profile has been created, and you can view it by scrolling down at the bottom of “About Pages.”

    How to create a google profile

    You can go ahead and click “Launch profile in new browser,” and a new Firefox window should open up for you. Now you can start browsing.

    How to Remove a Profile from Firefox

    From “About Pages” again, you can also choose to Rename or Remove a user profile. When deleting a profile, Firefox will ask you whether you want to delete the folder containing all your data. You can opt to keep it, just in case there’s something useful in there you might need later.

    How to create a google profile

    There’s an easier way to launch your profile in Firefox. Just press Win + R on your keyboard, then run the command firefox.exe –p . A pop-up window will show up that will easily allow you to launch the profile you want to use.

    How to create a google profile

    How to Create a New User Profile in Google Chrome

    Creating a new profile in Chrome is a pretty straightforward affair. If you’ve logged in to your Gmail account while in Chrome, then you already have a profile. You can add a new one anytime, though.

    1. Look for and click on the Profile icon in the top-right corner in Chrome that displays your Google account profile picture. If you’re not signed in, the icon will show a generic greyish silhouette instead.

    How to create a google profile

    2. You’ll see an “Other People” section in the window that shows up. Click on the “+” button to add a new profile.

    How to create a google profile

    3. Input the person’s name and select a profile image.

    How to create a google profile

    4. Make sure you leave the “Create a desktop shortcut for this user” option enabled, then click on the blue “Add button.”

    5. A new Chrome window will open, inviting you to “set up your browser in a few simple ways.” Follow the steps indicated to get started.

    You’ll be able to see all the different profiles you’ve created on your desktop, so each time a certain person wants to use Chrome, they can simply double-click on their own profile icon and immediately be able to access their specific Settings and data.

    If you don’t want to clutter your desktop, you can pin those icons to your taskbar. Or you can easily switch between your profiles by clicking on the Profile icon in the top-right corner again and selecting the profile you wish to use.

    Once you have your profile set up, you can make use of these steps to protect your privacy in Google Chrome.

    How to Remove a Profile from Chrome

    When it’s time to remove a profile from Chrome, click your profile icon once more, then click the Gear icon that appears next to Other people. You’ll get a nice view of all your user profiles.

    How to create a google profile

    Select the one you want to delete and click on the three-dot menu that appears in the upper-right corner. Select “Remove this person” and you’re done.

    How to create a google profile

    This is all you have to do to create new profiles in Mozilla Firefox and Google Chrome. Repeat the steps outlined above to create as many profiles as you want for yourself and others. If you need more tips about working with browsers, read all about how to block websites on Chrome (and other browsers).

    Our latest tutorials delivered straight to your inbox

    Alexandra is passionate about mobile tech and can be often found fiddling with a smartphone from some obscure company. She kick-started her career in tech journalism in 2013, after working a few years as a middle-school teacher. Constantly driven by curiosity, Alexandra likes to know how things work and to share that knowledge with everyone.

    While Gmail is just one of the many services you get when you create a Google account, for all intents and purposes you can think of them as the same thing. When you sign up for a Google account you automatically get Gmail, and if you have a Gmail account that means you already have a Google account.

    In other words, if you have one you already have the other. Your Google or Gmail account also gives you free access to a large library of other apps and services, including Google Docs, Google Drive , Google Maps, and dozens more.

    Here’s how to set up a new Gmail account to use with all of Google’s services.

    Quick tip: If you ever need to sign in to your Google account to access a Google product, use your Gmail username and password.

    How to create a Gmail account

    You can create a Gmail account using a web browser on your computer or on the mobile app. No matter where you create your account, you’ll be able to access it from any of your web browsers or devices.

    On desktop:

    1. On your Mac or PC, go to Google’s Create your Google Account page. You can go there directly or find it by going to, clicking Sign In, and then clicking Create account.

    2. Follow the instructions to complete the first page; start by entering your first and last name. It doesn’t need to be your legal name, but it should be the way you want to be identified in Gmail.

    3. Enter the email username you’d like to use. Keep in mind that there are billions of Gmail users, so your first choice might not be available.

    4. Enter your desired password and enter it a second time in the Confirm field. For safety and security, your password should be strong — use a combination of upper- and lower-case characters, numbers, and symbols that’s at least 8 characters long (and preferably 12 characters).

    5. Click Next.

    6. Continue to follow the instructions to set up your account. Enter your mobile phone number — this is an optional step, but highly recommended, to help recover your account if there’s a problem signing in. Likewise, you should also add a secondary email address to help in account recovery. Also enter your birthday and gender.

    7. Click Next.

    8. Google may ask you to verify your phone number. Click Send to receive a code at your designated mobile phone number, and then enter the code to verify the phone number is yours.

    9. If you want to use this number with other Google services (like using it for video calls with Google Meet ) click Yes, I’m in. Otherwise, click Skip.

    10. Finally, click I agree after reviewing Google’s terms of service.

    You’re now logged into this new Google account in this browser. Once it’s set up, you can access your personal contacts in Gmail, and use your Google account to find, add, and manage those contacts.

    On the Gmail mobile app:

    1. Open the Gmail app and tap the account icon at the top-right.

    2. Tap Add another account.

    3. On the Add account screen, tap Google.

    4. On the Google Sign in screen, tap Create account and choose For myself.

    5. Enter your first and last name. It doesn’t need to be your legal name, but it should be the way you want to be identified in Gmail. Tap Next.

    6. Enter your birthday and gender, then tap Next.

    7. Choose one of the premade Gmail addresses or tap Create your own Gmail address to make your own unique address. Tap Next.

    8. Create a strong password for your new Google account and then tap Next.

    9. You can add a phone number that can be used to recover your account if you forget your password, and with other Google services (like using it for video calls with Google Meet). If you want to do this, enter a mobile phone number and then click Yes, I’m in. Otherwise, click Skip.

    10. If you added a phone number, enter the verification code that’s texted to your number.

    11. Finally, click I agree after reviewing Google’s terms of service.

    Gmail mailbox settings

    If you regularly use Gmail, you might want to change the mail app’s settings. Google gives you a lot of options for configuring Gmail. One of the first things you may want to do is change your Google profile picture; after that, you can access a wide variety of other settings from the web and your mobile device.

    On desktop:

    1. Open Gmail in a web browser and sign in if needed.

    2. Click the gear-shaped Settings icon at the top-right. You should see some quick settings that let you change the overall appearance of the inbox.

    3. Click See all Settings at the top of the menu.

    Here you’ll find the Settings page. Google tends to change the organization and content of Settings often, but you should be able to find what you need with a little browsing. There are a number of tabs at the top of the page, such as General, Labels, Accounts and Import, and others.

    Each of these tabs has its own group of settings, though you’ll probably find most of the features you need in General. Here you can configure your vacation auto-responder, for example, as well as turn on and off features like grammar checking, spell check, and autocorrect.

    On the Gmail mobile app:

    1. Open the Gmail app.

    2. Tap the three-line icon at the top-left and tap Settings.

    3. Tap the Gmail account that you want to configure. If you have several Gmail accounts, there might be more than one account in the list.

    Here you’ll find a list of all the settings you can configure. Your options will be a little different than in a web browser — the display options are very different on a mobile device, for example — and there are no tabs at the top of the page.

    Even so, it’s easy to browse, because you can scroll to see all the available settings. For example, instead of the Labels tab in the browser, you can tap Label Settings in the Settings menu to create folders in Gmail.

    • It’s easy to create a new Google Calendar at any time to keep track of meetings, holidays, and any other notable events.
    • You can only create a new Google Calendar on a web browser, not on the mobile app.
    • However, once you create a new Google Calendar on a web browser, the new calendar will appear in your mobile app.
    • Visit Business Insider’s Tech Reference library for more stories.

    Google Calendar allows you to schedule meetings and set reminders for upcoming events, as well as share those meetings and reminders with others.

    It’s one of the best services offered by Google, as it makes managing our busy lives simple, efficient, and collaborative.

    You can even have multiple calendars, all of which can be managed through a single interface.

    So how do you add a new Google Calendar? Here’s everything you need to know to do it.

    How to create a new Google Calendar

    1. Ensure you’re signed into your Google Account before navigating to the Google Calendars page.

    2. On the menu on the left-hand side of your screen, scroll down to “Other calendars” and click the + button.

    3. Select “Create new calendar.”

    4. Enter the name you want to use for your new Google Calendar, an optional description, as well as the time zone you want your calendar’s events to appear in.

    5. To configure the color label used on your calendar, hover your mouse over its name in the “My Calendars” list on the Google Calendars home page, then click the three horizontal dots that appear. From there, you can assign a different color to differentiate your calendar’s events from others.

    It should be noted that while the Google Calendar app is available for iPhone and Android, you cannot currently add new calendars via the app — this needs to be done from an actual web browser.

    Once you create a new Google Calendar on a web browser, it will appear in your mobile app.

    С помощью Google My Business API можно создавать публикации в Google Поиске, относящиеся к некоторым категориям: например, новости, мероприятия и специальные предложения.

    В этом руководстве рассматриваются следующие задачи:


    Прежде чем начинать работу с Google My Business API, необходимо зарегистрировать свое приложение и получить учетные данные OAuth 2.0.

    Подробнее о начале работы с Google My Business API рассказывается в этой статье.

    Публикации о мероприятиях

    С помощью публикаций вы можете уведомлять своих клиентов о мероприятиях, которые вы планируете провести. В таких публикациях указываются дата и время начала и окончания каждого мероприятия.

    Чтобы создать публикацию для аккаунта, связанного с пользователем, используйте accounts.locations.localPosts API.

    Чтобы создать публикацию для аутентифицированного пользователя, используйте следующий код:

    Публикации с призывами к действию

    В публикациях с призывами к действию содержится кнопка с текстом, указанным в поле actionType . Кнопка является ссылкой на заданный вами URL.

    Чтобы создать публикацию с кнопкой призыва к действию, используйте следующий код:

    Типы действий

    От типа действия, к которому призывает публикация, зависит тип самой публикации.

    Вот список поддерживаемых типов призывов к действию:

    Типы действий
    BOOK Создает публикацию, предлагающую пользователю записаться на прием, забронировать столик и т. п.
    ORDER Создает публикацию, предлагающую пользователю заказать что-то.
    SHOP Создает публикацию предлагающую пользователю посмотреть каталог товаров или услуг.
    LEARN_MORE Создает публикацию, предлагающую пользователю ознакомиться с дополнительной информацией на сайте.
    SIGN_UP Создает публикацию, предлагающую пользователю зарегистрироваться, подписаться на рассылку или присоединиться к сообществу.
    CALL Создает публикацию, предлагающую пользователю позвонить в магазин или офис компании.

    Публикации со специальными предложениями

    Чтобы создать публикацию со специальным предложением, используйте следующий код:

    Редактирование публикаций

    Если публикация уже создана, ее можно изменить с помощью запроса PATCH .

    Чтобы изменить публикацию, используйте следующий код:

    Удаление публикаций

    Если публикация уже создана, ее можно удалить с помощью запроса DELETE .

    Чтобы удалить публикацию, используйте следующий код:

    Except as otherwise noted, the content of this page is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 License, and code samples are licensed under the Apache 2.0 License. For details, see the Google Developers Site Policies. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

    By Stella | Follow | Last Updated February 19, 2021

    Summary :

    How to create a google profile

    If you set a Gmail account as the default one, you will always sign in with that account every time you open your Gmail box. But do you know how to make a Gmail account default if the current default account is not your needed one? In this post, we will show you two full guides.

    Many people have more than one Gmail account. But Gmail sets the first Google Account you have signed in as the default Gmail account. When using them, you may find that the default one is not the one you want to use or it is not the frequently used one. Then, you need to manually switch to your needed Gmail account every time you use your Gmail box.

    How to create a google profile

    How to make a Gmail account default? This becomes a common problem. Are you also bothered by this issue? If yes, you come to the right place. In this MiniTool post, I will show you how to change your default Gmail account as well as some other useful information.

    Here, you need to know that changing your default Gmail account will also change the default Google account, and vice versa. So, you can set the default google account to make a Gmail account default. Besides, you can also set a default Gmail account via your Gmail box. That is, you can also use the following two methods to change your default Google account.

    Besides, you need to make sure that the account you want to use should be a registered one. If not, you need to create a new Google account in advance.

    How to Make a Gmail Account Default?

    1. Set a Default Gmail Account in Your Gmail Box
    2. Change Default Google Account

    Method 1: Set a Default Gmail Account in Your Gmail Box

    In this part, we will show you how to change your default Gmail account in your Gmail box with some screenshots.

    1. Go to your Gmail box.

    2. Click the Sign out or Sign out of all accounts button according to your situation.

    How to create a google profile

    3. On the next page, click the Sign in again button to continue.

    How to create a google profile

    4. Click Next.

    How to create a google profile

    5. Unfold the Gmail address box.

    How to create a google profile

    6. On the next page, you need to select the account you want to set as the default Gmail account if it is in the account list. Otherwise, you need to click Use another account to add it as a new one.

    How to create a google profile

    7. Enter your password.

    8. Click Next.

    How to create a google profile

    After these steps, you needed account is set as the default Gmail account.

    How to create a google profile

    If you can’t sign into Google Account, check the causes and solutions to fix can’t log into your Google Account issue.

    If you want to add your other account, you can click your profile picture and then click Add another account. Next, you can follow the on-screen guide to sign in with your account.

    When you switch your account to another one but not the default one, you can see which one is the default Gmail account after you click your profile picture.

    How to create a google profile

    Method 2: Change Default Google Account

    In this part, we will show you how to make a Google account default to change default Gmail account.

    1. Open Google Chrome and click your profile picture.

    2. Click the Sign out or Sign out of all accounts button.

    How to create a google profile

    3. Click the Sign in again button to continue.

    How to create a google profile

    4. Click Next.

    How to create a google profile

    5. Unfold the Gmail address box.

    How to create a google profile

    6. Select the account you want to set as the default Google account from the account list. If you can’t find it, you need to click Use another account and then add it manually.

    How to create a google profile

    7. Enter your password.

    8. Click Next.

    How to create a google profile

    These are the two methods to change your default Gmail account or change your default Google account. Both of them are similar and easy. You can just select one according to your preferences.

    • Facebook
    • Twitter
    • Linkedin
    • Reddit


    How to create a google profile

    Position: Columnist

    Stella has been working in MiniTool Software as an English Editor for more than 4 years. Her articles mainly cover the fields of data recovery including storage media data recovery and phone data recovery, YouTube videos download, partition management, and video conversions.

    How to create a google profile

    When you edit a shared Google Docs document, other collaborators can easily hover over your profile icon to see your name and even access your Google Plus profile. This can be quite a problem if you are editing a public document, anyone can see who you are and contact you as well. If you are looking to go anonymous on Google Docs while editing or sharing documents, I got you covered.

    In this post, I’ll show you how you can anonymously edit Google Docs documents and also share documents anonymously.

    Edit Google Docs anonymously

    First, let’s see how you can anonymously edit a Google Docs document. Google uses your Google account information to recognize you and show your profile icon in the list of editors at the top. There is no built-in option to hide this information, but if you log out of your Google account then Google won’t be able to attribute your profile information.

    Therefore, all you need to do is log out of your Google account and open up the document link afterward. You will then appear as an anonymous animal icon instead. However, an easier way to do this is to simply use an incognito window to access the document. As the incognito window is isolated from your current browsing session and doesn’t use stored cookies, it will open the document without logging in with your Google account.

    Usually, the incognito window option is listed in the main menu of most browsers. You can also use Ctrl+Shift+N or Ctrl+Shift+P keyboard shortcuts to fire up an incognito window.

    In the below screenshot, you can see that I am showing up as an anonymous squirrel on my document when I access it from an incognito window.

    How to create a google profile

    Share Google Docs anonymously

    You can also share a Google Docs document without associating your Google account name and information with it. Here’s how to do it:

    Open up the document and click on the “Share” button at the top-right corner.

    How to create a google profile

    Here click on the “Get shareable link” button.

    How to create a google profile

    Use the drop-down menu to select documents rights, including edit, comment, and view.

    How to create a google profile

    Once done, share the below-mentioned link anywhere and the people will be able to access the document without knowing who created the document.

    How to create a google profile

    Important note: Although other people will not be able to see the document ownership details, but if you will give them editing rights then they can see the name of the person who made the last edit (which could be you). If you don’t want to share your name as well, then only allow the comment or viewing rights before sharing.

    Wrapping up

    If you need to work on public Google Docs documents or share them publicly, then anonymity is very important. You definitely wouldn’t want your Google account information available for anyone to see. If you know any other way to go anonymous on Google Docs, let us know in the comments below.

    A Google account gives you access to a host of apps, covering email, maps, cloud storage, music, movies, productivity tools and more—and you don’t have to settle for just one account. Whether you’ve been given a second account for work or want a second one for personal use, here’s how to get it set up and integrated into your life.

    Setting up a second account

    You’ll need to give Google some information, and a phone number, to set up a second account, which you can do from here . Google will give you some suggestions about an account name (which doubles as your Gmail address), based on the name you give, but you can pick something else if you prefer.

    You’ll need to provide a date of birth , your gender, and a password of course. You have the option to provide a backup email address as well, which we’d recommend (it can even be the Gmail address connected to your original Google account)—this is used if you ever have problems logging into your second account.

    Experience Next-Level Sound
    Spatial audio with dynamic head tracking provides theater-like sound that surrounds you

    The first screen you’ll see next is Gmail—a wonderfully clean, empty Gmail inbox—and from there you can take care of other housekeeping business, like adding a picture to your Google account profile, and setting up two-factor authentication , which you absolutely should do.

    Adding a second Google account to your phone

    On Android, it’s almost expected that you’ll want to use a second account. The process may vary slightly depending on the phone and version of Android you’re using, but on stock Android, open Settings then tap Accounts, Add account, and Google. You’ll be asked to sign in with the credentials associated with your new username and password.

    How this affects individual apps depends on the app. In Gmail, for example, tap your avatar (top right), then choose your newly added account from the list; in YouTube, meanwhile, you again tap your avatar (top right), then tap your current account name, then pick your second account.

    Google Drive is likely to be an app where you’re going to want to switch between accounts regularly, particularly if your second account is for work. As with Gmail and YouTube, tap your avatar icon up in the top right-hand corner, then pick your second account.

    You shouldn’t have much trouble finding the account switcher in any of your Google apps. In Google Photos, it’s at the top of the app menu (three lines, top left); in Google Maps, it’s up in the top right-hand side behind your avatar; in Play Movies & TV, you need to open the app menu (three lines, top left), then choose your second account.

    Gmail works a little differently in that it lets you merge your accounts together, something that the other Google apps don’t do—in other words, you can see all your emails on the same screen. Open the app menu (three lines, top left), then choose All inboxes. You’ve actually got a few options for merging emails from several Google accounts in Gmail, which we’ll discuss in the web section underneath.

    For those of you on iPhones, the easiest way to set up a second Google account is to install the Google app for iOS . Tap your avatar (top right), then Add another account, then follow the instructions to log in. You’ll also be asked which account you want to make the default.

    As on Android, the Google apps each have their own account switcher—behind the avatar in the top right-hand corner in Google Drive, Gmail, YouTube, and Google Maps, and on the app menu in Google Photos and Play Movies & TV. Gmail for iOS has the same All inboxes option as the Android version of the app.

    Adding a second Google account on the web

    If you’re on a laptop or desktop, it’s a good idea to start in Gmail when it comes to setting up a second Google account—this second account will then be available in all your other Google web apps too. From Gmail on the web, click your avatar (top right), then Add another account, then sign in to your second account.

    As yet there’s no ‘blended’ view for looking at emails across all your Google accounts on one screen, like there is on Android and iOS—you’ll just have to keep separate tabs open instead. However, as we mentioned above, you do have a couple of options for getting all your Google emails in the same inbox.

    One is to simply forward emails from your second account, which is handy if you don’t really use it all that much. On the Gmail screen for your second account, click the cog icon (top right), then Settings, then Forwarding and POP/IMAP. Click Add a forwarding address to send emails straight from your second account to your first one.

    That’s simple to set up, but it doesn’t let you use your original Gmail inbox to reply to emails using your secondary address. For that, you need to enable POP access to your second Google account (Enable POP for all mail on the Forwarding and POP/IMAP tab that we mentioned above). You can choose whether copies of your emails stay in your secondary Gmail inbox when accessed from the first.

    Back in the Gmail inbox for your first Google account, click the cog icon (top right), then Settings, then Accounts and Import—you need to add your second account in both the Send mail as and Check mail from other accounts sections. If you’re unsure about any of the settings, you’ll find them listed here .

    Once you’ve added your second Google account in Gmail on the web, it’ll appear in the menu if you click your avatar in any of Google’s other web apps: Google Drive, Google Maps, Google Calendar, YouTube, YouTube Music and so on. You can’t view information from two accounts together on the same screen, but you can at least run apps signed into different Google accounts simultaneously in multiple tabs.

    Google Chrome also gives you the option of configuring multiple profiles—it’s like having multiple user accounts on Windows or macOS, so all the browsing history, bookmarks, passwords and other browser data will be kept separate inside your two Google accounts.

    Click the avatar button on the Chrome toolbar, then choose Manage people, then pick Add person. You need to choose a name for the second profile, then a picture, and then sign in using the credentials for your second account—you can switch accounts by again clicking on the avatar button on the Chrome toolbar.

    In terms of the end user experience, adding a second profile isn’t a whole lot different from just opening up your second account in new tabs—but it does run Chrome in a separate instance on the taskbar or dock, and it does let you separate bookmarks, passwords, history and so on for your second account if you need to.

    The Android work profile is easily created on a work phone. We look at its main advantages.

    How to create a google profileWorking on the go is more secure and user-friendly with the Android work profile.

    What Is the Android Work Profile?

    The Android work profile is excellent way for you to integrate personal and company-owned smartphones or tablets into your workplace. Android offers a lot of flexibility on how to create them too.

    One option is a BYOD scheme (Bring Your Own Device) which makes a great company incentive. Organizations typically offer their employees a subsidy on contract costs and/or the price of a device in return for being able to be partially manage the device with the Android work profile.

    Being able to (partially!) manage the employee’s smartphone or tablet has many advantages. To name just one, sensitive corporate data is more easily protected as private data is separated from business data. This prevents personal apps, like WhatsApp, from being able to access work-based contact information.

    For more information on this, take a look at what to expect from a company BYOD project.

    The Clearest Division of Work and Personal Data

    The Android work profile marks off which apps on the employee’s device are fully managed by the company.

    Data separation on Android devices looks different to how it would on an Apple device. Users see a work profile, and this approach makes BYOD particularly attractive to end users.

    With a recognizable blue suitcase next to each managed work app, it provides the clearest form of division between work and personal information, much more so than currently possible with an iPhone, which prefers to separate data behind the scenes.

    Extra little touches, like how app recommendations on the personal app store are not altered by work app downloads, or separate work/personal notifications, further enhance this feeling of having two personas on the device.

    This is the key feature that ensures that businesses can fulfill their mobility requirements and achieve a strong ROI on BYOD, whilst end-users reap financial rewards, enjoy an organized and productivity-boosting work phone and incur no infringements on their privacy.

    Android Work Profile Privacy – New End User Improvements

    Recent updates have focussed on Android work profile privacy for the user in particular. In Android 11, Google enabled an “enhanced” version of the Android work profile. This can be set up on company-owned devices and ensures that admins cannot see which personal apps are being used by the user.

    How to Create an Android Work Profile

    The prerequisite for Android work profile setup is an MDM-solution which can leverage the Android Enterprise platform.

    Each specific Android work profile setup method may differ slightly depending on which software is being used. Essentially, IT admins use an MDM solution to create an MDM-profile which can then be downloaded on each employee’s own device.

    End users simply activate the Android work profile themselves by downloading the MDM solution’s app. This directs them to Google’s work profile setup wizard, where they simply provide their workplace credentials and scan a QR code.

    IT admins control the work profile area with the MDM software, can deploy new apps to the employee and delete all company data if the employee leaves the company or if the device is lost.

    Using this remote management tool, IT can furnish multiple devices with the correct business apps, Wi-Fi settings and email account configurations with ease.

    4 Reasons For Businesses and Users to Love the Android Work Profile and BYOD

    1. The Android work profile helps users manage their work-life balance:

    “While our phones are a big part of our work lives, it’s important to be able to disconnect”, writes James Nugent, Product Manager at Google. And thanks to the Android work profile, disconnecting is indeed easier than with an iOS device.

    The Android work profile can be toggled on or off so workers can blend out their work lives in their free time. Once done, the work profile essentially disappears, and no work notifications will be received. All work apps stop running completely and will not sync in the background.

    For employees that take work-life balance and digital wellbeing seriously (according to one study, 33% view work-life balance as their number one concern over compensation, advancement and job stability), this is a critical part of every successful Android BYOD incentive.

    Innovative Android-only updates are always on the horizon:

    A BYOD-initiative with Android means access to frequent improvements and innovations, particular with Google’s own Pixel range. For example, Android 11 introduced more enterprise features and allows both work and personal calendars to be simultaneously viewed on each user’s BYOD device, making appointment planning more straightforward. Quicker security updates are also new.

    Highest levels of security for corporate data:

    It is worth pointing out that Android itself has many built-in security measures. A Gartner study actually found that after the Android 8 Oreo update in 2017, Google’s operating system was rated more secure than iOS.

    Whilst BYOD may not be the most secure of all MDM deployment-types (fully-managed devices and dedicated devices would be more capable of meeting the highest security requirements in the enterprise) Android’s credibility cannot be placed in doubt.

    The Android ecosystem has devices for every budgetand use case

    Thanks to their attractive pricing, a lot of workers will already have Android devices in their pockets, ready for BYOD. The sheer number of Android devices out there, coupled with Android Enterprise Recommended (this portal helps customers find Android devices for every budget size or use-case), also means organizations with a specific use case in mind can easily purchase their own attractively-priced devices and distribute them workers (with or without the work profile).

    The Bottom Line: Creating an Android Work Profile Boosts Productivity and Security

    Most of the time, companies implement an MDM-solution, like Cortado MDM, not just to improve productivity, but because it is a great way to manage large amounts of devices and also make device integration within the company network smooth and secure.

    With Cortado MDM, you and your employees can quickly create an Android work profile on devices. Just try Cortado MDM for free today or watch this video to learn more.

    How to create a google profile

    Microsoft’s new Chromium-based Edge browser allows you to add multiple profiles. Here’s how to add a second profile.

    The new Chromium-based Microsoft edge allows you to add user profiles. Here’s a look at how to set up a second user profile in Edge.

    Note: You will need to sign in to your Microsoft account to link profiles to your account. This allows you to share settings or bookmarks across devices. However, you don’t have to sign in the second account if you don’t want to.

    Add User Profiles on Microsoft Edge

    To add a second profile to the account, click your account icon in the upper-right corner of the browser. Then from the menu that comes up select the Add a profile option.

    How to create a google profile

    On the Wizard screen that comes up click the Add button.

    How to create a google profile

    That will add a second user called “Profile 2” to your browser.

    How to create a google profile

    Then when you click on the second profile it will open a new browser instance for you to log in with your Microsoft account. Note that if you don’t want to sign in with the second account you can just click the Confirm button. Which I am doing here. I want to have an account that syncs my data and one that doesn’t.

    How to create a google profile

    To switch between accounts simply click the account profile icon that’s showing and switch between them. And if you didn’t already sign in to the second profile with a Microsoft account, the option is always there.

    How to create a google profile

    Having a second profile is good if you have a shared computer or simply want a separate profile for doing specific work while in the browser. Or maybe one is for personal browsing and the other for work or school.

    More on Microsoft Edge

    Remember that the new Edge is based on Chromium and is truly cross-platform. It is available for Windows 7, 8, 10, macOS, Android, and iOS with a Linux version coming soon.

    If you don’t have it yet check out our articles on how to install the new Edge. And once you get it up and running make sure to read about how to install your favorite Google Chrome extensions on Edge. And after that, for more on the new browser check out our Edge archive of tips and guides.

    How to create a google profile

    Justin Sullivan / Getty Images

    For home business owners and freelancers, LinkedIn offers a tremendous opportunity to promote your business, network with influencers, and build your professional online presence. However, when you initially join LinkedIn, you’re given a long, difficult to remember profile URL. This can be a problem when trying to share it with others you want to network with. The solution is to create a custom URL for your LinkedIn Profile that can make it more recognizable and easier to use.

    By customizing your URL, you’d change:

    (The caps are to show you what you can change. Your Linkedin Profile URL doesn’t require caps.)

    Why You Might Want a Custom LinkedIn URL

    There are several reasons to create a custom URL on LinkedIn. One is for search engine optimization (SEO). Search engines, including Google, use keywords within a URL to help it decide what web pages to deliver in search results. A URL of would have a better chance of ranking well in Google for a search using the keywords “freelance writer Ohio” than would the first URL of

    Another reason to create a custom Linkedin URL is ease of use and recognition. Having a line of numbers at the end of a URL looks messy and difficult, and it’s more likely to be ignored. Whereas, a URL with your or your business’ name at the end will be clear what it’s linking to. While LinkedIn URLs aren’t as straightforward as they could be, the custom URL is still easier to remember than the default one.

    Choosing Your Custom URL Profile Name

    You have a few options in creating your custom URL. One is to use your given name, such as Joe Smith. The other option is to use your business name. Finally, you can use a combination of the two, such as Joe Smith Freelance Writer. Some things to consider when deciding what to use include:

    • What are you branding? Do you want you or your business name to be the focus of your endeavor? How do you want to be known in the professional world?
    • How easy is it to use? While combining your name and business allows you to use both, it also creates a long URL that can be difficult to use if people have to type it in (i.e. off of a business card).
    • Will your name change? Traditionally, this is more of a problem for single women who get married and decide to take their husband’s name. However, I’ve seen many couples hyphenate both their names, in which case, it impacts men, as well. In this case, using your business name might be better.

    You are allowed to change your LinkedIn customer URL up to five times in a 180-day period; however, this is not advised. First, changing your URL means you have to update it everywhere you used the old URL. Further, people with the old URL will have difficulty finding you. Finally, after 180 days, someone else can use your old URL, which could potentially lead your clients and customers to the other person instead of you. For this reason, pick a name you know you can live with for a long time.

    How to Create a Custom URL for a LinkedIn Profile

    The instructions below work on your public profile.

    1. Log into LinkedIn.
    2. On the main menu bar at the top of the page, hover over Profile with your mouse and select Edit Profile.
    3. Hover your cursor over the current profile URL under your profile picture. The settings icon will appear next to the URL. Click it.
    4. On the right-hand side of the page, you’ll see a section that says, Your Public Profile URL. Click on the edit icon next to it.
    5. In the edit box, type the custom name you’d like in your URL. You can have five to 30 letters or numbers, but no symbols or special characters (i.e. you can’t use “*” or “!”). Your custom name is NOT case sensitive, so JoeSmith and joesmith will both work in the URL. When you’re done, click Save.
    6. If your custom URL isn’t already in use, you’re all set. If it is in use, you’ll need to submit a new custom URL. You can add your middle initial or your business name or type to create a unique URL. For example, if JoeSmith is taken, you can use, “JoeQSmith,” “JoeSmithSellingWords,” or “JoeSmithCopywriter.”

    Be sure to update your new LinkedIn URL on your website, blog, and other marketing materials.

    Profiles allow people who live together in a single household to have their own personalized Netflix experience. You can have up to 5 profiles on a single Netflix account.

    Each profile allows for its own:

    Specific viewing restrictions

    Viewing activity log

    Personalized TV show and movie suggestions

    Email (for notification emails, and only profiles with All Maturity ratings)

    *Not available on Kids profiles on computers.

    How to create a profile

    Profiles can be added on devices made after 2013.

    Go to your Manage Profiles page. Select Add Profile .

    In the Netflix mobile app for Android or iOS, tap the profile icon or More , then select Manage Profiles . Select Add Profile .

    Name the profile.

    To use the Netflix Kids experience, select Kids .

    Select Continue or Save . The new profile should show on the list of profiles on your account.

    If you can’t create a profile from your device, visit on a web browser and follow the steps above.

    For more information about the Netflix Kids experience, see How to create a profile with a specific maturity rating.

    How to delete or customize a profile

    You can customize or delete profiles on most devices.

    From a web browser, go to your Manage Profiles page.

    In the Netflix mobile app for Android or iOS, tap the profile icon or More , then select Manage Profiles .

    Choose the profile you want to change.

    Change the name, image, or language on the profile.

    Changes to maturity ratings must be made from your Account page.

    Save your changes or select Delete Profile to delete the profile entirely.

    If you can’t edit a profile from your device, visit on a web browser and follow the steps above.

    How to use profile & parental controls

    All profile users, except for those with the Netflix Kids experience , can access and edit Profile & Parental Controls for individual profiles. Your account password is required to edit Viewing Restrictions or Profile Lock .

    To edit settings for an individual profile:

    From a web browser, go to your Account page.

    Select a profile name from Profile & Parental Controls .

    Select Change for the setting you wish to edit for that profile.

    Save / Submit changes.

    How to use a different email address on each profile

    The first profile created is the primary Netflix profile and is associated with the email address on your Account.

    You can add a different email address to any secondary Adult profile to receive personalized recommendations and other communications from Netflix. Email addresses associated with secondary profiles can’t be used to sign in to your Netflix account.

    To add or change the email associated with a secondary profile:

    From a web browser, sign in to the profile you want to add an email for.

    Go to the Account page.

    Select the profile name from Profile & Parental Controls menu you want to add an email for.

    Next to Profile Email, select Add, or Change if you already added an email.

    Enter the desired email for the profile.

    Select Add Email.

    You can select Change Email or Delete Email if you are updating an existing email.

    Copy to Clipboard

    If you need to create a resume rather quickly or you’re looking to build off of a template, consider using Google Docs. The more you understand how Google Docs works, the easier it will be to create and customize your resume for your particular industry and career. In this article, we detail when it’s best to use a Google Docs resume and how to create a resume using this platform. We also provide tips for using the service effectively.

    What is a Google Docs resume?

    A Google Docs resume is a professional resume created through the Google Docs platform. Google offers a free, web-based service that provides you with several resume templates to customize to your needs. The service is available to anyone with a device that has an internet connection. The templates give you a general layout that you can use to create your own resume for your professional needs.

    When to use a Google Docs resume

    A Google Docs resume is a great choice when you need a pre-made template for your resume. The service boasts an array of professional options through its Template Gallery. A Google Docs resume is also a great service to use when you need to submit your resume and application rather quickly. This comes in handy when you need to make a quick change before sending your resume off to an employer.

    As a web-based service, Google Docs offers quick, easy and free accessibility on any device with an internet connection. Use a Google Docs resume if you have a habit of not saving your work since it has an automatic save feature that can save you time and energy.

    How to create a Google Docs resume

    If you want to create a simple resume with minimal design expertise, a Google Docs resume is a great option to consider. In order to create an effective resume using this web-based service, follow these steps:

    Access the Google home page and click on Google Docs.

    View the Template Gallery and choose a template.

    Customize your resume template.

    Rename the file and download it.

    1. Access the Google home page and click on Google Docs

    To use Google Docs, you need access to the internet. Make sure the device you’re using—whether it’s a laptop, desktop computer or mobile phone—has an internet connection. Access the Google home page and select Google Docs. If you have a Google account, sign in. If you don’t, create a new Google account.

    2. View the Template Gallery and choose a template

    Upon selecting Google Docs, the Template Gallery will be visible at the top of your screen. Select the resume template that best suits your needs. Keep in mind that you will be able to customize the template to your liking. For example, if you have fewer slots for experience than the resume template has listed, you can delete this and adjust the layout accordingly.

    3. Customize your resume template

    Next, customize your chosen resume template. Once you’ve chosen your template, you can modify colors, text styles, fonts and other design elements to your liking and preference.

    After completing your design customization, delete the sample text and input your own experience, education, skills and other qualifications. If needed, make room for additional job experience, skills and other areas. If a section on the template doesn’t apply to you, delete it and modify the resume’s design as needed to accommodate for the change. Account for any gaps and spacing issues as they arise to create a uniform layout.

    Ultimately, make sure your resume reflects your own background and aligns with the job’s qualifications. It should have a cohesive design that properly highlights your qualifications for the job you’re applying for.

    4. Rename the file and download

    Finally, rename the file name by clicking the name of the template in the top left-hand corner. Once you’ve completed the resume and renamed the file, download it to your computer or device by selecting “File” and then “Download.” Typically, a PDF document is recommended for your resume. Refer to the employer’s preference that may be listed in the job posting before downloading your Google Doc resume and submitting it.

    Tips for creating a resume on Google Docs

    Here are some helpful tips for creating a resume on Google Docs:

    Utilize the Clear Formatting feature. If you’re transferring information from another service or platform, use Google Doc’s Clear Formatting feature to make the transition quicker and easier. Copy the text from your old resume, paste it into your Google Docs template, highlight it, right-click and select Clear Formatting.

    Utilize the Copy Format feature. Use the Copy Format feature when there is a design or formatting element that you want to use on another piece of text. To use this feature, highlight the text with the format you want to copy, select the Paint Format icon and highlight the text you want to format.

    Check your revision history. Along with automatically saving your progress, Google Docs enables you to check your revision history. This lets you see previous changes you’ve made to your resume and restore previous versions if needed. To do this, select the text near the toolbar that states when the last edit was made. Your previous revisions will open in a new window.

    Utilize tab stops. If you have specific aligning in your resume, add a tab stop to align the rest of the text to it. This will give your resume a more uniform and organized look.

    Restrict access to your resume. Google allows employers to view your resume via its search results if it’s public. Make sure to restrict access to your resume to avoid others making edits to it. To do this, restrict your document’s access to “view-only” prior to making it public for others to see.

    Focus on the contents of your resume. Since Google Docs has taken care of most of the design aspects of your resume, direct your attention to the content you input. Make sure your resume is representative of your background and that it aligns with the job qualifications.

    My script I have been writing has been working great. I just added the option so it would open a profile on chrome using this code.

    When used, I get this error code.

    How can I fix this?

    How to create a google profile

    2 Answers 2

    To create and open a new Chrome Profile you need to follow the following steps :

    • Open Chrome browser, click on the Side Menu and click on Settings on which the url chrome://settings/ opens up.
    • In People section, click on Manage other people on which a popup comes up.
    • Click on ADD PERSON, provide the person name, select an icon, keep the item Create a desktop shortcut for this user checked and click on ADD button.
    • Your new profile gets created.
    • Snapshot of a new profile SeLeNiUm

    How to create a google profile

    • Now a desktop icon will be created as SeLeNiUm – Chrome
    • From the properties of the desktop icon SeLeNiUm – Chrome get the name of the profile directory. e.g. –profile-directory=”Profile 2″

    How to create a google profile

    Get the absolute path of the profile-directory in your system as follows :

    Now pass the value of profile-directory through an instance of Options with add_argument() method along with key user-data-dir as follows :

    Execute your Test

  • Observe Chrome gets initialized with the Chrome Profile as SeLeNiUm
  • Are you looking for your own profile url on your business card? Give an online identity to your past experiences and academic career.

    You are a Doctor, Designer, Architect, Teacher, Student, Model, Dancer, Musician or Air hostess any one can create his/her online profile. Doctor, Engineer, Architect, Designer, Lawyer, Scientist, Student, Business man, Model, Dancer, Singer or Air hostess, any one can create his/her online profile.–>

    Have you endured with traditional pattern of resume, get something new here. You are looking for a job! or you want to share your current profile among people. Now Get rid of typing document and no need to insist reader to read the verbose text, do some creative with graphical themes using this Web Profile tool.

    Your Profile Features

  • Suitable to any profession, anyone can create its profile.
  • Clean and attractive representation of your profile.
  • Easy and interactive CMS to update your information.
  • Choose one of featured themes and ability to easily create your own.
  • Fully Responsive- Compatible with all devices PC, Tablet and Mobile.
  • Connect with Facebook, Google accounts. No signup required
  • Print or save as pdf your online data at any time
  • Free domain and emails

    How to create a google profile

    Compatible with all devices
    Responsive Web

    Run smoothly with all major devices. Access your online profile on gadgets like Mobile, Tablet or PC.

    It’s time to go latest with technologies; your profile website is designed to run on any size of screen so that you and your friends are able to view it on any device any time.

    Perfect Template for showing Your Profile

    Simply choose a pre-defined theme, we have a showcase to have a good one for you.
    This doesn’t limit here, you can create your custom theme as well, pick color brush and create what you desire.

    • How to create a google profile
    • How to create a google profile
    • How to create a google profile
    • How to create a google profile

    This is as simple as you play with TV remote. Just select your profession, get register, choose desired theme, fill information about you and ready to launch.

    More marketers are investing in videos to share customer success stories, promote products or services, and increase their brand — most importantly, videos help sell. According to HubSpot’s 2020 Not Another State Of Marketing Report, video is the #1 form of media used in content strategy today. Here are some other fast facts:

    • Video marketers get 66% more qualified annual leads
    • Video marketing efforts can achieve a 54% increase in brand awareness
    • Marketers that use video content grow revenue 49% faster than those who don’t

    With a company profile video, manufacturers can simply engage more buyers and turn them into customers.

    How to create a google profile

    What Is A Company Profile Video

    A company profile video is usually around 2 minutes in length and showcases who you are and what you do.

    The video shares your company’s purpose, the customers you serve, the industries they’re in, and how your industrial products and services solve your customers’ problems. The main idea is for the video to grab the viewer’s attention, keep it, and engage them into being a customer.

    The style and production of the video are up to you but should follow your company’s brand. Think of the message you’re trying to convey and the customers you want to do business with.

    Why Do You Need A Company Profile Video Today

    Today, more buyers are interested in videos than any other form of content. Think about your personal online habits. How many videos have you watched on Facebook or YouTube this week? Company profile videos instill trust in your company and serve as a way for people to share that message with others easily.

    89% of viewers are likely to purchase a product after they watch a video of the product.

    If you aren’t utilizing videos in your marketing arsenal, you could be missing out on opportunities for new business. In fact, 89% of viewers are likely to purchase a product after watching a video of the product. That’s because 95% of a video message is retained versus only 10% when reading text.

    A company profile video gives your audience a feel of the type of service they could be experiencing and the genuine nature of your business and offerings. People like buying from people and videos put the human element into your business. In today’s world, videos are more than just about selling, they’re a tool for building relationships.

    Tips For Creating A Company Profile Video

    Creating any new marketing piece takes some strategy, but as always, it’s important to keep your customers at the forefront of your planning.

    “Listen to your customers,” said Chris Bryant, creative director at Empire Studios, a New York and Connecticut-based video production agency that focuses on corporate and manufacturing videos.

    “Are they having trouble with something? Is there confusion about your product or your service? Or are there some frequently asked questions they always have and you find your sales team is always answering? Maybe video content could help answer those questions. And, if you put it online publicly, now you’re a source.”

    Your goal is to create video content that engages, educates, and intrigues your audience. The first step is deciding what type of brand story you’d like to tell. For example, do you want to give a factory tour and showcase your company’s culture or do you prefer to give an overview of your company’s history and how you’ve solved your buyers’ problems?

    Prepare a script and an outline of what you’d like to film. If you’re filming employees, let them know in advance so they’re prepared. Have fun with it! There are many directions you can take with your company profile video but it should:

    • Answer what industrial services or products you offer
    • Address how your company helps buyers do their jobs
    • Have text and/or music that will give your story life
    • Show a human connection to your brand
    • A call to action at the end of the video for buyers to contact you
    • Live on your website and shared across all your marketing channels, like social media and your company profile

    Consider using professional equipment or hiring video experts to ease the planning and production process for you. Great sound and high video quality are important to capture and retain your buyers’ attention. Thomas creates company profile videos for manufacturers for free with the purchase of an advertising program — learn more here.

    Examples Of Company Profile Videos For Manufacturers

    A company profile video incorporated into your marketing strategy helps you stand out against competitors. Recent studies have shown that company profile videos on listings receive more RFQs than those that don’t — create your listing for free here, where more than one million buyers, engineers, and procurement managers are sourcing for industrial products and services.

    Here are some videos that are helping manufacturers sell their products and services:

    Enroll your personal Android device to get access to work or school email, apps, and other data. During enrollment, you’ll set up an Android work profile, which separates the personal data on your device from your work data. If this type of setup is something you’re required to do, your organization will let you know through their preferred communication channel or Intune Company Portal app.

    After your profile is set up, your organization will manage the work-side of it, which consists of only the work files and work data. Your IT administrator can configure and enforce certain device-level settings on your device, such as requiring you to set a device PIN. They can’t see any data in the apps on the personal side of your device.

    Create work profile and enroll device

    To create a work profile on your device, you must be using the primary user account on your device. Creating a work profile on a secondary user account is not supported.

    Open the Company Portal app and sign in with your work or school account. If you haven’t installed the free app, install it from Google Play.

    On the Company Access Setup screen, tap BEGIN.

    How to create a google profile

    Review what your organization can and can’t see. Then tap CONTINUE.

    How to create a google profile

    Review Google’s terms for creating a work profile. Then tap ACCEPT & CONTINUE. The appearance of this screen will vary based on your device’s Android version.

    How to create a google profile

    Wait while your work profile is set up.

    How to create a google profile

    On devices running certain Android versions, you’ll see another informational screen about the type of apps you need. Wait to be redirected and signed in to the Company Portal app.

    When you get to the Company Access Setup screen, check that your work profile is created. Then tap CONTINUE.

    How to create a google profile

    Check that your work profile is active. Then tap CONTINUE.

    How to create a google profile

    Your organization might require you to update your device settings. Tap RESOLVE to adjust a setting. When you’re done updating settings, tap CONTINUE.

    How to create a google profile

    When setup is complete, tap DONE.

    How to create a google profile

    When prompted to view your organization’s suggested apps in Google Play, select OPEN.

    If you’re not ready to install apps, you can always access them later by going directly to the badged version of the Google Play app. You can also select Get Apps from the Company Portal menu.

    How to create a google profile

    Android Enterprise availability

    Work profile setup is supported in countries and regions where Android Enterprise is available (opens Google Support website). Company Portal can’t set up a work profile on your device if you’re outside these areas. If Android Enterprise isn’t available in your country or region, ask your support person for other ways to access work resources.

    Update Google Play services

    If the version of Google Play services on your device is outdated, you may be unable to enroll your device. Open Google Play services(opens Google Play) to check for and install available updates. For more information about how to update Android apps, see Update your Android apps(opens Google Play Help).

    Next steps

    Now that your device is enrolled, you can install school or work apps on your device. Go to the managed Google Play store to find and install these apps.

    Still need help? Contact your company support. For contact information, check the Company Portal website.

    Step 1: Go to the Sign Up page.

    Do not create a shared account with anyone. Your USCIS online account is only for you. Individual accounts allow us to best serve you and protect your personal information.

    Step 2: Enter your email address and click “Sign Up.”

    You will use your email address to create and log in to your USCIS online account. We will send all email communications to this address.

    Step 3: Confirm your account.

    • We will send a confirmation message to the email address you provided.
    • Click the link in the confirmation message to go to the USCIS online account login page and continue creating your USCIS online account.
    • If you do not receive the confirmation email in your inbox within 10 minutes, check your junk mail or spam folder.
    • If your confirmation email is not in your junk mail or spam folder, select “Didn’t receive confirmation instructions?” for more information.

    Step 4: Review Terms of Use – U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services Online Electronic Immigration System and click “I Agree.”

    Step 5: Create a password and click “Submit.”

    • Create a password for your USCIS online account. Your password must:
      • Be at least eight characters in length; and
      • Contain at least one upper case letter, at least one lower case letter, and at least one special character.
    • Enter and confirm your new password, then click “Submit.”

    Step 6: Choose how you want to receive a verification code (such as text, email, or authentication app) and click “Submit.”

    Every time you log in to your USCIS online account, you must enter a one-time verification code. This provides an extra layer of security for your USCIS online account.

    • We will automatically generate the one-time password and send it to you by email or mobile phone text message, depending on how you chose to receive it.
    • We encourage you to select both email and mobile phone text message for receiving your one-time password, then click “Submit.”
    • If you select “Mobile,” you will be prompted to enter your U.S. mobile phone number. Standard text messaging rates may apply.
    • It may take a few minutes to receive your one-time verification code. (Note: If you selected the email option, make sure to check your junk mail or spam folder in addition to your inbox.)

    Step 7: Enter this verification code and click “Submit.”

    In the future, every time you log in, you will receive a one-time verification code via email or text message, depending on how you chose to receive it.

    • Enter your one-time password in the space under “Secure one-time password” and click
    • If you have not received your authentication code in 10 minutes, select “request a new one-time password.”

    Step 8: When you create an account, you will also receive a two-step verification backup code. Print or save a copy of this code and keep it in a safe place. Click “Proceed.”

    Step 9: Select password reset questions and answers.

    • Using the drop-down arrow, choose five password reset questions. If you ever forget your password, we will use these questions to confirm your identity.
    • Type the answer to each question in the space provided. You must remember these answers if you ever need to reset your password.
    • When you have finished, click “Submit.”

    Step 10: Welcome to your USCIS online account. You can choose the USCIS service you want log into. In this case, select myUSCIS.

    Step 11: Under Account Type, select “I am an applicant, petitioner, or requestor” OR “I am a legal representative” and click Submit.

    You should receive a confirmation message in the email account you provided us, confirming that you have successfully created your USCIS online account.

    Step 12: Receive confirmation that you have created a USCIS online account.

    You should receive an email confirming that you have successfully created your USCIS online account.

    Step 13: Add paper-filed applications to your account.

    Even if you file by paper, you can add paper-filed cases to your account. As an applicant, click on “My Account” and then “Add a paper-filed case” in the drop-down menu. Enter your receipt number, and you can then see your case status and history.

    If you did not file your case online but have a receipt number that begins with “IOE” and the Online Access Code you received on your USCIS Account Access Notice, you can add the case to your account and be able to see case status and history, send secure messages, view notices, upload additional evidence, and respond to Requests for Evidence.

    How to create a google profile

    If you are an attorney or representative and want to add eligible paper-filed applications, you will need to use the Online Access Code you received on your USCIS Account Access Notice when you first create your online account. For more information, visit the Online Filing for Attorneys and Accredited Representatives page.

    Step 14: File an available form online or review and sign forms that your attorney or representative prepared for you.

    Submitting your application online provides you with several benefits. Get helpful instructions and tips from USCIS as you complete your form using our secure online filing system, avoid common mistakes, and pay your fees online. To learn which forms are eligible, visit the Forms Available to File Online page.

    File a Form Online

    To start a new form, upload evidence and pay and submit online, click “File a form online” from your account homepage. To learn more, visit the Tips for Filing Forms Online page.

    Enter a Representative Passcode

    If your attorney or representative filed your form online, click “Enter a representative passcode” to access the form and the Form G-28, Notice of Entry of Appearance as Attorney or Accredited Representative, they filed for you.

    Step 15: Manage your case online.

    Use your USCIS online account to send secure messages, check the status of your case, view appointment notices, respond to Requests for Evidence (RFE), verify your identity and receive details on any decisions we make on your case.

    More Resources

    Visit myUSCIS to sign in to your USCIS online account and find additional resources.

    myUSCIS provides a personalized account to help you navigate the immigration process. On myUSCIS, you will find:

    • Up-to-date information about the application process for immigration benefits;
    • Tools to help you prepare for filing your immigration form; and
    • Help finding citizenship preparation classes.

    For technical support with your online account, you can send us a secure message. If you did not file your case online but have a receipt number that begins with “IOE,” you can create a USCIS online account to send secure messages.

    For information on how to delete an existing online account, please visit the Tips for Filing Forms Online webpage.

    Visit the Tools page to see all our self-help tools that may get you answers to common immigration questions.

  • How to create a free website for kids

    Surprise your kids with a fantastic website

    Today’s children start to explore the internet before they can actually read and write. Why not make a cozy place on the web where they can safely learn, play, and develop together with their peers?

    Make it bright and exciting

    Do you know what your kids love? Then you’ll have no problem coming up with the website design that will make your children crazy happy and encourage them to return to it time and time again.

    Create a custom social network for kids

    Communication is the cornerstone of personal development. Let your children socialize in the safe online environment you can fully control and regulate. No more worries about ill-intentioned influences from the outside web.

    Connect with other parents

    Keep in touch with other moms and dads to exchange knowledge and experience in the matters of upbringing and education. Share useful tips and advice to help others. Join forces to moderate the website collectively.

    Combine fun with education

    Should learning be all about books and exercises? Not at all! There are all sorts of digital education materials you could share on your website to sparkle children’s interest in learning: engaging articles, photos, videos, games – you name it!

    Share amazing content kids will enjoy

    Finding quality content to entertain or educate children is so hard at times. Create a website for kids and fill it up with everything they adore: breathtaking stories, amazing cartoons and movies, lovely music, and more!

    Enhance schooling experience

    Learning at school and engaging with classmates can be much easier if the school life extends further to the online space. Make a social website to connect kids from the same class or entire school.

    Make money from content

    Set out to build the best website for kids, come up with amazing content and great features to help children develop and have fun. Other parents will be happy to find it all gathered under one roof – and pay for your efforts.

    Creating a great website for children with Ning is as easy as ABC

    Simple interface

    Not a tech specialist? Not to worry. Ning makes website building simple and engaging.

    Customizable design

    Use your imagination and our easy-to-use design tools to make a website children will love!

    Start a blog to educate or entertain kids. Write on topics they find interesting.

    Content diversity

    Delight children with cool photos, exciting videos, interesting podcasts, great music, and more!

    Effective content management

    Create as many website pages as you want, add and edit content whenever you need. Allow kids to contribute their own content too.

    Multiple communication options

    Both children and parents can socialize via private or group messages, broadcast emails, and live chat.


    Organize events for kids within the online space or in real life to encourage the communication and cooperation.


    Set up a forum and let kids discuss matters relevant to them.


    Create multiple member groups to manage the community more efficiently.

    Social integration

    Even kids have social profiles nowadays. Enable them to “like” and “share” content on social media and log in using their social accounts.

    Create a free educational website for kids or monetize it and start making money on your content

    Explore NING E-commerce platform!

    Use the Paid Access feature and charge for your best content. You worked hard on it – now it’s time to reap the rewards!

    Set up Paid Membership and charge for accessing your network and its amazing resources.

    Collect Donations for an important cause or let people support you and your website.

    It’s time to create the best site for children on the web! Ning knows how.

    Готовые стили и шаблоны для вашего удобства. Никакого веб-дизайна или программирования. Конструктор сайтов SITE123 – 1, 2, 3 и готово!

    How to create a free website for kids How to create a free website for kids How to create a free website for kids

    Выбирайте любой из красивых шаблонов веб-сайтов

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    Фантастические возможности

    Что делает нас лучшим конструктором веб-сайтов

    SITE123 – самый интуитивно понятный и простой в использовании конструктор веб-сайтов на рынке. Мы обрабатываем все, начиная от структуры веб-сайта и заканчивая его дизайном, чтобы убедиться, что Вы сосредоточены только на своем контенте.

    Редактор SITE123 намного эффективнее, чем традиционные конструкторы веб-сайтов с перетаскиванием элементов.

    Создайте бесплатный веб-сайт с нашими системами управления контентом и расскажите о себе, своей услуге или товарах в Интернете. Поделитесь своим сайтом в социальных сетях и создайте сайт сегодня!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Создайте свой бизнес-сайт в 3 простых шага

    Создайте свой бизнес-сайт за 3 простых шага. Выберите тип своего веб-сайта и загрузите собственный контент. Затем опубликуйте свой сайт, чтобы вывести свой бизнес в Интернет менее чем за час.

    Все веб-сайты полностью адаптивны и подходят для любого мобильного устройства.

    Оптимизируйте SEO, чтобы улучшить свои результаты в поисковых системах и привлечь трафик на свой бизнес-сайт!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Создайте свой интернет-магазин в кратчайшие сроки

    Получите свой интернет-магазин в кратчайшие сроки! Загрузите информацию о товарах, настройте параметры и сразу начните продавать.

    Выставляйте товары для продажи в Интернете на вашем профессиональном сайте!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Круглосуточная поддержка – Мы работаем для Вас!

    Наша бесплатная круглосуточная интерактивная поддержка всегда для Вас. Поддержка Live Chat на SITE123 ответит на ваши вопросы и поможет вам создать успешный веб-сайт.

    Благодаря нашей отличной команде вы никогда не будете чувствовать себя одинокими!

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    Часто задаваемые вопросы

    Потому что это самый простой, удобный и быстрый бесплатный конструктор веб-сайтов. Нет необходимости разбираться в кодировании или владеть навыками разработки. Не нужно даже перетаскивать что-либо. Просто загрузите свой контент и создайте рабочий кросс-платформенный веб-сайт, полностью настроенный на все доступные на рынке устройства.

    Совершенно бесплатно! Наш продукт предлагается бесплатно, в том числе хостинг и веб-редактор со всеми его инструментами. Никакой оплаты, никаких обязательств. Если вы хотите подключить домен, вам нужно заплатит всего 10,8 долл. США в месяц (годовой план, оплаченный авансом). Зачем ждать? Создайте веб-сайт сейчас.

    Веб-сайт, который не может быть проиндексирован поисковыми системами, буквально бесполезен, поэтому мы в SITE123 убедились, чтобы ваш сайт был доступен всем поисковым системам, включая Google. Это одно из наших главных преимуществ, и мы гордимся тем, что можем предоставить вам профессионально сделанный сайт высокого качества.

    SITE123 предоставляет вам настраиваемый субдомен бесплатно. Ваш доменный адрес можно легко найти на панели управления вашего сайта.

    С помощью бесплатного конструктора сайтов SITE123 вы можете пользоваться бесплатным субдоменом, предоставляемым нами автоматически. SITE123 также позволяет вам подключать свой собственный домен по цене от $12,8 в месяц, если вы покупаете годовой план заранее, или $17 в месяц при оплате трехмесячного плана. Просто перенаправьте свой домен на веб-сайт SITE123 и наслаждайтесь его просмотром в Интернете.

    У вас нет ограничений – вы можете создать один или несколько веб-сайтов под одной учетной записью и управлять ими с одного профиля.

    Вопрос сегодня более важен, чем когда-либо, поскольку считается, что место хранения сайта напрямую влияет на время его загрузки, что, в свою очередь, влияет на способность бизнеса привлекать и удерживать трафик на сайт. Чтобы сократить время загрузки, веб-сайты SITE123 хранятся на серверах распространения контента (CDN), расположенных по всему миру. Посетитель будет просматривать ваш сайт самым быстрым способом при загрузке из ближайшего возможного места. Сделайте сайт с отличной производительностью.

    SITE123 – это бесплатный конструктор сайтов разработанный для каждого. Вам не нужно обладать дизайнерскими навыками или покупать дополнительное программное обеспечение для проектирования. Наш конструктор предоставляет наборы готовых стилей и макетов, которые в считанные минуты помогут вам создать полностью профессиональный веб-сайт. Все что вам остается сделать, это загрузить свое содержимое и выбрать соответствующий макет для каждого элемента на сайте. Стили и макеты страниц легко заменяются в любой момент.

    Не беспокойтесь об этом. Мы уже сделали это за вас. Каждый сайт SITE123 автоматически настраивается на смартфоны и планшеты. Создайте веб-сайт, который идеально расскажет о вашем бизнесе на любом устройстве.

    Да! Наш конструктор подключен к Библиотеке с сотнями качественных изображений, которые можно использовать без ограничений. Они помогут сделать ваш сайт более привлекательным.

    Конечно! Наш конструктор позволяет вам управлять и обновлять ваш сайт после его публикации в любое время и из любой точки мира.

    How to create a free website for kidsHow to create a free website for kids

      • MY ACCOUNT
      • MY AVATAR
      • MY IMAGES
      • MY ORDERS
      • WRITE ITT
      • WHO SAID?
      • SHARE ITT
      • LIBRARY
      • DESIGN ITT
    • PLAY ITT
      • PLAY ITT
      • MAKE-A-WORD

    NEW! Download a PDF How to create a free website for kidsversion of your book or comic for $3.99

    NEW! You can LIKE How to create a free website for kidsbooks and comics in the Scribblitt Library

    Share your creation on Social Media using #scribblittstories #scribblitt

    NEW Teacher/Student My Messages feature!






    How to create a free website for kids




    Featured Scribbler






    • PRESS
    • WRITE US


    How to create a free website for kids How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    © 2021 Mountain Stone Associates, LLC, d/b/a Scribblitt. All rights reserved.

    Welcome to Scribblitt

    For future access to this book/comic from other computers, please enter a parent/guardian’s email address.

    Welcome to Scribblitt

    Create your own free account to use this feature.
    Enter a parent/guardian email address.

    10,000+ websites created in the last 30 days alone!

    Create Your Free Site

    No credit card required

    Awesome & Easy. Try it first. Then decide.

    We’ll instantly create a perfect design

    Our intelligent builder does all the heavy lifting to create a personalized site, just for you.

    Answer a few short questions and it will choose the right layout, pull in beautiful images, and even start your content.

    Review and make it your own

    Keep what works, change what doesn’t. Put a few final finishes on it to truly make it your own. We make it simple to return and edit pages later on.

    Share your ideas. Grow your brand

    Our sites look awesome on any device. They’re super fast to help you get noticed by Google. We make it easy to update and expand without the need for specialized technical knowledge.

    Once your site is published, we provide all the tools to grow. We help you get site traffic and engage your visitors.

    Want to start selling online? We got you covered

    Create a store and start selling online

    Whether you sell songs, pet sitting or custom clothing, we can power your business. We give you all of the tools to sell, accept credit card payments, and manage your online business.

    We’ll help you handle sales tax, order fulfillment, inventory, product categories, shipping and more.

    Get your website built by

    Hire an expert to build your website offers flexible and affordable custom website design services backed by a team of experts available to support your business needs. Let our team of experienced professionals build your website and establish your online presence.

    *The promotional price is for the first term of service only and automatically renews at regular rates. For customers in regions in which VAT (Value Added Tax) or GST (Goods and Services Tax) is applicable, taxes are not included in our advertised price and will be charged separately and itemized on invoices and billing information. Qualified plans include a free domain registration for one year. If you wish to cancel, there is a non-refundable $16 domain fee. Learn more

    Budding movie makers can develop their animating and video editing skills with this suite of animation software tools that grows along with their increasing skill level.

    How to create a free website for kids

    An intuitive app for animation makers of all ages.

    Creating animations has never been easier for children, especially ones with DIY attitudes. YouTube and TikTok are platforms populated with the work of young creators. It’s not a matter of “if” kids create video projects, it’s a matter of “when.” You can kick-start their creative journey by providing them with the right tools for animation. With customizable toolbars and built-in tutorials, Adobe Animate is an ideal tool to help beginners go from a storyboard to an animation.

    Why Adobe Animate is a great animation app for kids.

    Animate combines the traditional elements of video editor software (cutting and editing clips) with powerful animation tools and makes them accessible to a beginner audience. The toolbar in Animate can be simplified for a new user and you can adapt and expand it as their skills increase, allowing young animators to work and grow in a manageable way. First, create layers and frames that storyboard an animation, and then move on to more advanced features as skills progress. And, with video tutorials and explainer videos accessible within the app, the program itself provides a track to stronger skills with each new project.

    Prep a new animation project.

    It’s simple to get started in video animation using Animate.

    Set up a new project.

    Download Adobe Animate and get started.

    Open Animate on your device.

    Create a new project.

    Load potential assets to your project by navigating to CC Libraries. From there, you’ll be able to search Animate or even Adobe Stock for some assets to play with.

    Draw your first animation.

    Create a quick flipbook animation with simple drawings.

    Go to Insert › Timeline › Frame.

    Select the line tool, and draw a line.

    Go to Edit › Timeline › Copy Frames. Then go to Edit › Timeline › Paste Frames.

    Repeat this process to do a very basic stop motion animation where the line drawing moves slightly, frame by frame. Try it with the Pencil tool or Brush tool as well.

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    Cartooning tutorials for young creatives.

    There are many tutorials to help young people get a head start on video making with Animate. Preview some how-tos to see how beginners can get started in the app.

    Create a 2D character animation.

    Go through the steps of creating a basic 2D character animation, complete with an introduction to vectors and how to use Adobe Stock.

    Learn about the Animate Timeline.

    Get to know the Timeline. It’s important to understand how to use many different Adobe programs, and Animate is no different.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Additional skills to help young animators grow.

    Learn to draw.

    Develop a foundational understanding of important principles that translate into the world of animating by mastering the basics of cartooning and drawing. Start with drawing tools like the Brush, Pen, Ellipsis, and Pencil in Adobe Illustrator and Animate to practice linework and create shapes. Then use film tools like Camera to add dynamic movement.

    Play with vectors and patterns.

    Vector and pattern art are powerful tools in an animator’s toolkit. Because it’s based on equations, rather than pixels and doodles, vector art can be resized and animated quickly and easily. Young artists who learn how to use vectors and patterns will have a more varied set of animation skills.

    Try storyboarding.

    Before a film can begin to take shape, the structure of the story has to be in place. For animators, that starts with storyboarding. Understanding composition, perspective, and the other principles of storyboarding helps young animators create a plan and form for their ideas, before they actually start animating.

    Explore stop motion.

    Rotoscoping is the animation method of tracing over live video footage to create moving pictures. Rotoscoping can increase the skill of an animator or help them capture specific movements more accurately. Animate lets users import video into their animation for easy tracing. First, make a simple GIF using a rotoscope technique. A similar frame-by-frame animation style is also the key to creating a stop motion animation.

    Creating cartoon videos or animated characters may seem challenging, but with a workflow geared toward growing skills, Animate makes animation video creation accessible. With passion, practice, and the tools to succeed, cartoon makers of all ages can unlock their creative potential.

    Posted on February 16, 2018 8 Comments

    Kids of all ages will love these fun secret codes, coding activities and free secret code printables.

    “What’s mouse code?” my seven year old asked.

    It took me a little while to figure out that he meant ‘morse code’ rather than ‘mouse code’, but from that moment on he was in love with everything about secret codes!

    How to create a free website for kids

    It didn’t take long for my kids to lose themselves in learning, deciphering and creating their own secret codes.

    Morse Code

    We started out with mouse… I mean Morse code because my 7 year old had read about it in a Horrible HIstories book (affiliate link).

    Morse code uses dots, dashes and spaces to represent letters numbers and symbols. You can write Morse code, or send it with flashes of light or sounds. Once a prisoner of war even sent a message in Morse code by blinking his eyes!

    We made a ‘cheat sheet’ and wrote some Morse code messages. We even had a go at using a flashlight to send Morse code, which was tricky but lots of fun!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Try sending Morse code messages with sounds, or actions (such as a flashing light), as well as writing it down. It’s loads of fun to send Morse code messages.

    The Pigpen Cipher

    The Pigpen cipher is a really old code that is really fun to write. I left my boys a secret message in pigpen for them to decode when they woke up one morning!

    How to create a free website for kids

    After that first message I suddenly started to get little notes written in Pigpen, so I had to keep my decoder sheet handy so I could work out what they said!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Pigpen Cipher is a super fun secret code for written messages. It’s a fabulous way to encourage a child who might not like writing, they will be so busy coding an de-coding messages that they won’t even know they are writing! Give it a try with your kids.

    Make Your Own Secret Codes

    We learned that it is important to make the symbols and drawings we used to represent each letter quite simple, and easy to reproduce accurately. If you make them too complicated it will be impossible to write a coded message that someone else can decipher!

    How to create a free website for kids

    I made up a simple sheet with letters, numbers a couple of punctuation marks and a few blank spaces so we could create as many new secret codes as we wanted!

    How to create a free website for kids

    It would be so fun to work together and create a family or class secret code, and then send a coded message to a relative or another class. Don’t forget to send a de-coder sheet to so they can work out what you are saying and write back!

    These printables are A4 sized pdf files, you will need a pdf reader such as adobe acrobat to open them. If you are printing on US ‘letter sized’ paper be sure to select ‘fit’ or ‘shrink to fit’ from your printer options.
    Please remember that the printables at are for personal or individual classroom use only, you may not sell, share, or link directly to these files.

    More Cool Secret Code for Kids

    Now that you’ve had fun with these spy decoder printables, there are lots more super cool secret code activities you can do.

    Here are a few more secret code ideas and activities to try:

    Make maths fun with this Number line secret code

    Try one of these secret message activities – our favourites are the folded ones!

    Try one of these middle grade books about puzzles and codes:

    Create a Poll in Seconds

    Polling 1 Million+ People Everyday

    How to Make a Poll

    How to Make a Poll

    Learn what people actually think in less time

    Our live Polls allow you to hear the voice of thousands without bias, vote manipulation or going down in times of high traffic. Ask your question and see answers in vibrant, live and reliable graphs. No coding, no messing about just results in real time. Since 2003 we’ve handled well over a 1 Billion votes without outage.

    Manage all your Polls, Surveys and Quizzes

    Log strait into the Dashboard to start managing your polls in one place. Set start and end dates, view IP and voter information or fix the typo you missed. You can also create your own surveys and quizzes when you need to ask more than one question.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Visualize Your Audience

    Heatmaps Show Votes by Location

    Heatmaps show where your poll generated votes by location. Zoom in to the city level or out to see poll vote traffic by country. Like all features heatmaps are provided completely free and without limitation.

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    Easy to Customize and Embed

    Create a poll on your website, facebook our website or all at once. Simply share your link or copy and paste the embed code, results from all platforms will be integrated. Tailor the look and feel of your poll with custom themes, backgrounds and more by using our simple point and click editor in the themes tab above.

    Start and End Dates, Randomize, Images and much more

    Set your own start and end dates so you can sleep in and end your Poll automatically. Just click Settings, Advanced and checkout the 10+ options for taking your poll to the next level. Add images by clicking the photo icon or allow people to add options you didn’t think of.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Frequently Asked Questions

    How do I manage my Poll?

    How do I hide my results from voters?

    Can I add pictures and video to my Polls?

    I want to add multiple questions?

    How do you stop people from manipulating/hacking my poll?

    I want the Poll to run on my website?

    I want to share my Poll on Facebook?

    How to create a free website for kids

    Live Results In Clear Concise Graphs

    Live graphs show your poll results immediately in easy to understand and read bar graph format. But final results don’t always reveal the whole picture which is why our poll creator also displays results over time. The longitudinal graph provides a visual representation of when and not just what people voted for.

    Visualize Your Audience

    Heatmaps Show Votes by Location

    Heatmaps show where your poll generated votes by location. Zoom in to the city level or out to see poll vote traffic by country. Like all features heatmaps are provided completely free and without limitation.

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    Export Results and Manage Polls

    Create your free account to manage all your polls in one place. This way you can edit existing polls, view and print reports, change options after you’ve published and download your responses to a spreadsheet. You’ll also have access to our free support.

    Create A Website

    Easily create a beautiful custom website that truly conveys the value of your products, service, or information.

    Write A Blog

    Search engines like Google love new content. Write a blog and give your content marketing a jump start.

    Start An Online Store

    Create an online store and sell products and services directly from your website. Instant payment processing makes it easy.

    So Easy Anyone Can Do It

    Select A Design

    Choose from hundreds of designs. Customize it with our easy to use drag and drop editor.

    Get A Custom Domain

    Get a free custom domain name to share your site with the rest of the world. Starts working in seconds.

    Drive Massive Traffic

    Get your site found on Google. Sites are search engine friendly.

    What Our Customers Are Saying

    Real customers giving their honest opinions.

    More Features and Apps

    WebStarts is loaded with more value than any other website builder or CMS.

    Amazing Support

    Live customer support from people who really care.

    How to create a free website for kids

    What is WebStarts?

    WebStarts is everything you need to create and maintain your very own website. Traditionally websites are written in HTML code, that code is stored on a server, and a domain is pointed to it. The process of setting up a traditional website is tedious, technical, and expensive. If you don’t know how to code you might hire a web developer. Next, you need to purchase server space. Finally, you need to register a domain. It’s a hassle to manage three different bills and three different companies. The whole process is so confusing it leaves a lot of people wondering how to make a website at all.

    With WebStarts you don’t need to know any code to create a beautiful website. Our easy to use drag and drop editor makes it a breeze to place photos, text, and other elements exactly where you’d like them to appear on your page. And when it’s time to add a domain name, you simply choose one and it’s automatically set up to work with your site. You’ll never have to worry about hiring an expensive web designer or not being able to make changes to your website in a timely manner again.

    Web hosting

    WebStarts hosts your website in the cloud. So you’ll never have to worry about configuring web servers, using an FTP program to transfer files, or configuring IP addresses again.

    Domain names

    When you create a website with Webstarts you can add a domain name to your website and it starts working instantly. There’s no fiddling around with registrars, DNS, or pointing IP addresses.

    Design tools

    You don’t need to have a web design software program installed on your computer to make changes to the look and feel of your website. Just log in and everything is drag and drop. Nothing could be easier.

    How Is WebStarts different from other website builders?

    Most website builders limit you to choosing from one of the same boring templates already being used by hundreds, if not thousands of other websites. Then their idea of customization is allowing you to swap out text and align it left, center, and right. Those type of limitations don’t give you the flexibility and control required to succeed online.

    With WebStarts the drag and drop editor provides a true ‘what you see is what you get’ experience. You’re empowered to create a unique website that conveys the value of your products and services. In addition, WebStarts is jam packed with powerful features that would cost extra with our competitors. All of this is backed up with live support, based right here in the USA. Our friendly and knowledgeable staff is happy to help bring your website to completion.

    It sounds great, so how can WebStarts be free?

    When we started WebStarts we knew everyone was going to need a website, that means everyone. Knowing the wide range of uses for a website we decided to make the basic version of WebStarts free. That way everyone from the student to the biggest corporation can create a great looking website with our free website builder. We also know people are going to love using WebStarts so much they’ll want to upgrade to a paid subscription to get even more advanced features for their business or organization.

    A website builder that helps you get found.

    At WebStarts we know the most important thing for most people who create a website is getting found. That’s why WebStarts was built from the ground up to be search engine friendly. That means websites created with WebStarts are more likely to be found on search engines like Google. So when you make a website with WebStarts rest assured people are going to be able to find the website you created online.

    A free website builder with the features you need to succeed online.

    While our competitors limit you to creating a boring static website, at WebStarts we give you the ability to build a website that includes rich, interactive features, we call them apps. Our integrated apps range from form builders, calendars, memberships, video hosting, music playlists, music stores, maps, SEO, and much more. These interactive apps are designed to help your website attract more visitors, capture more leads, and make your website more sticky.

    How to create a website with WebStarts

    Watch this short video to see how easy it is to start creating your very own website with WebStarts.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Math centers are a lot more fun when games are involved. Let your students explore the fun and educational math skills games on these 11 free websites. Each of these websites encourages practice with everything from sorting and counting to tessellations and fractions. With a variety of games and activities from which to choose, students can easily find exciting new ways to learn important math concepts.

    There are a number of ways you can incorporate these free math websites for kids into your lesson plans. Use them as part of a classroom center for focused learning. Have students play math games when they have free time during indoor recess or after finishing an assignment or test early. Homeschool students can also visit these websites for additional learning opportunities. And of course, the games themselves are also just plain fun, so these kid-friendly websites are fun to visit during their down time both at home and at school.

    Be sure to print out the free downloadable at the end with all of the websites listed. It is a great math resource to hang by your students’ computers or include in a math assignment packet for additional learning at home.

    1. Fun Brain

    Find math games by topic or by grade at FunBrain. On this math site for kids, students can enjoy playing a variety of games that reinforce key mathematical concepts and engage young learners. Many of these games focus on a fun theme, like sports, animals or unique landscapes. Educational videos are also included, and there’s a special “Playground” with games suited to pre-K and kindergarten students.

    2. Math Blaster

    The goal at Math Blaster is clear: “Your success depends on your ability to use your brain and logic skills.” With an exciting theme featuring aliens and outer space, Math Blaster lets your students become intergalactic heroes based on their math operation and critical thinking skills. Registration is required, but the game itself is free. Be sure to check out the Teacher Section to find Math Blaster for the Classroom.


    From the Multiplication Grand Prix to the Knight and the Princess, students can practice their basic math skills in a fun and engaging way on this math site for kids. There are additional resources available on the website for parents and teachers who want to help reinforce and teach skills. Check out the Classroom Games section for off-line fun.

    4. Learn Zillion

    Find lessons that complement what you are studying in the classroom based on the Common Core Standards for grades 3 to 9. While less of a math game website than some of the others on the list, Learn Zillion provides a strong, comprehensive approach to online math education. Take time to explore the free resources available to teachers and parents.

    5. Hooda Math

    Logic and reasoning, math fact practice and more make up the free educational games at Hooda Math. There are quite a few games that call for higher order thinking and ask students to problem solve to complete the activities. These challenges help to sharpen students’ math skills through an engaging online activity.

    6. Manga High

    Manga High offers free and subscription packages to classroom and homeschool teachers. The free website allows students to play basic games to reinforce math skills and compete against the computer or others. The subscription version gives teachers the opportunity to track students’ progress and determine if there are any gaps in their basic skills.

    7. Math Game Time

    Designed for students from pre-K through 7th grade, Math Game Time offers fun, educational games focused on critical math concepts. With options like Integer War, Ratio Martian and Jet Ski Addition, students quickly engage with games that are on-target for their grade and the Common Core Standards.

    8. Math Playground

    “Play with Numbers and Give Your Brain a Workout” is the motto of Math Playground. Assign students games to play related to logic, number skills practice, geometry, algebra, probability, fractions and more. There are also math word problems and video instructions to help students remember how to solve them. Does your school use Singapore Math? Math Playground has a section dedicated to it.

    9. CryptoKids

    America’s CryptoKids website is sponsored by the NSA and focuses on code-making and code-breaking. Students can learn more about cryptology and create and break common codes. There are student resources, high school programs and even college programs that can be explored. While the website may not focus on basic math skills, cryptology requires critical thinking abilities that are essential to student success.

    10. BBC KS2 Bitesize

    Math practice with a bit of British humor is what Bitesize is all about. Based off of Britain’s standards, the website still offers ample practice with decimals, factors, multiples, addition, subtraction and more. The games are amusing, but the skill practice is substantial.

    11. Cool Math Games

    Coolmath-Games has exactly what the name implies: fun and unique math learning opportunities for students. One of the most interesting features is an online jigsaw puzzle section that features a variety of photos turned into puzzles. This is especially helpful for developing spatial relations in young learners. They have an extensive preview and review of precalculus and calculus in addition to their elementary and middle school games and reviews.
    It is a comprehensive website worth examining.

    Download a Free Printable Resource with all 11 Free Math Sites for Kids.

    BBQs, grad celebrations and more—we’re out to party.

    How to create a free website for kids

    A+ gifts for your grad

    See our top-of-the-class picks from Amazon for every interest and budget.

    Shop Our Gift Guide All of the products we feature are hand-selected by our editors. Evite may earn a commission.

    Life’s Better Together

    Create online invitations for every celebration

    Sleepover, unicorns, superhero and more.

    Browse All Birthday for Kids

    Baby sprinkle, gender neutral and more.

    Browse All Baby Shower

    Surprise, themed, milestone and more.

    Browse All Birthday for Her

    Easter, birthdays, Cinco de Mayo and more.

    Browse All Spring Invitations

    Family reunion, potluck, dinner party and more.

    Browse All Family Gathering

    Class of 2022 designs, photo frames & more.

    Browse All Graduation

    How to create a free website for kids

    Party themes & ideas

    Evite exists to help make your events effortless and more memorable

    About Evite

    Evite is the world’s leading digital platform for bringing people together face-to-face. We make coming together effortless and more memorable for personal and professional events.

    Start the Party

    Hand-Illustrated Designs

    Choose from thousands of easy-to-use digital invitations and cards. Our free invitations are hand-illustrated, animated, and customizable for occasions big and small.

    Create an Invitation

    Premium Invitations

    Packaged with an animated envelope and digital stamps, Premium Invitations offer a fully customizable, ad-free experience for your guests. Choose packages based on guest list size.

    Browse Premium Invitations

    Evite Pro

    Create and manage professional events like a pro with our annual, unlimited subscription.

    Evite Donations ™

    Turn any event into an opportunity to give back to a non-profit, or crowdfund for a personal cause.

  • Mobile Apps

    Whether you’re hosting or attending, take the party with you with our customer-favorite app.

    Get for iOS | Get for Android

    • About Us
    • Careers
    • Press
    • Blog
    • eGift Cards
    • Affiliate
    • Help
    • Site Map

    Evite® and Life’s Better Together ™ are trademarks of Evite, Inc. in the United States and other countries. The Evite logo and all other Evite-related trademarks are trademarks of Evite, Inc. Please use this mark only to refer to our services.

    • How to create a free website for kids

    Featured Products

    How to create a free website for kids

    Professor Teaches® QuickBooks® 2021

    The most realistic, interactive & complete training!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Professor Teaches® QuickBooks® 2020

    The most realistic, interactive & complete training!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Professor Teaches® Office 2019 & Windows® 10

    The most realistic, interactive & complete training!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Disney: Mickey’s Typing Adventure – Gold – Windows

    Kids are Taught to Type with Mickey Mouse and Friends!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Typing Instructor® Gold – Windows

    A Worldwide Typing Adventure! Learn in English or Spanish

    How to create a free website for kids

    Typing Instructor® for Kids Gold – Windows

    A Motivating Adventure to Teach Kids to Type! Learn in English or Spanish

    How to create a free website for kids

    AnyTime® Organizer Deluxe

    The Organizer That Works The Way You Do!

    How to create a free website for kids

    ResumeMaker® Professional Deluxe 20

    Write a Better Resume. Get a Better Job™!

    New Releases

    How to create a free website for kids

    Ad Creator – Windows

    Create Ads & Social Media Posts in Minutes!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Logo Creator – Windows

    Create Logos in Minutes!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Quicken WillMaker & Trust 2022

    America’s #1 Estate Planning Software

    How to create a free website for kids

    OrgChart Platinum – Small Business Solution for Up to 50 Employees

    How to create a free website for kids

    OrgChart Platinum – Small Business Solution for Up to 100 Employees

    How to create a free website for kids

    Professor Teaches® QuickBooks® 2021

    The most realistic, interactive & complete training!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Family Tree Heritage™ Gold

    Build Your Family Tree. Share Your Family Story!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Business Plan Pro Premier – Gold Edition

    Trusted by Over One Million Entrepreneurs!

    Other Products

    • Family Tree Heritage
    • Professor Teaches
    • Expressions
    • ResumeMaker
    • TypingInstructor
    • TypingInstructor for Kids
    • Disney Mickey’s Typing
    • Typing Instructor Web
    • Professor Teaches Web

    Business to Business

    • AnyTime Organizer
    • Easy Language
    • Professor Teaches
    • ResumeMaker
    • Typing Instructor
    • Disney Mickey’s Typing
    • Typing Instructor
      B2B Review Site
    • Typing Instructor for Kids
      B2B Review Site
    • Typing Instructor Platinum
      B2B Review Site
    • Disney Mickey’s Typing
      Adventure B2B Review Site
    • ResumeMakerPro Web
      B2B Review Site

    Quick Links

    • Free Trials
    • Mac Software
    • Mobile Apps
    • Software for Tablets
    • Software for Schools
    • Software for Organizations
    • Business & Office
    • Trademark & Copyright
    • Privacy Policy

    Free Tech Support

    Customers are our #1 priority!

    Our FREE technical support is a demonstration of our commitment to customer satisfaction.

    For technical issues contact:
    Technical Support

    A platform for beginners, non-designers & professionals to create Animation
    and Live-Action videos for every moment of our life

    Animaker was voted as the No.4 Best Design Product of the World.

    Animaker’s helped over 10M people create awesome videos by themselves!
    And is trusted by some of the world’s leading brands.


    Create Eye-Popping
    Animation Videos in just a few clicks


    Effortlessly Create Visually stunning
    Live-Action videos in mins!

    The World’s most complete Video Making Tool!

    Simplest Drag and Drop Builder

    So simple, even a child could use!

    Super Powerful Character Builder

    So diverse, you can create Billions of unique characters.

    100M+ Stock Videos and Photos

    So ginormous, you can find anything you want.

    Simplest Drag and Drop Builder

    So simple, even a child could use!

    Super Powerful Character Builder

    So diverse, you can create Billions of unique characters.

    100M+ Stock Videos and Photos

    So ginormous, you can find anything you want.

    1000+ Templates

    Pick from 1000s of templates! No matter what
    occasion, you can create your videos in just 5 mins!

    1000+ Templates

    Pick from 1000s of templates! No matter what occasion, you can create your videos in just 5 mins!

    4K Video

    Upload and Edit Videos at 4K Video quality

    Instant Resizing

    Instant Resizing for social platforms

    4K Video

    Upload and Edit Videos at 4K Video quality

    Instant Resizing

    Instant Resizing for social platforms

    Videos Created so far

    Assets in the Library

    Who is it for?


    Business explainer videos give founders a quick way to boost
    their sales and conversion rates like never before.

    Content Marketers

    Online videos are the future of the internet and YouTube is proof of that.
    Now! Is your content going to be a boring blog post or an engaging animated video? The choice is yours.

    HR Teams

    Make super appealing onboarding, orientation, and compliance videos in a jiffy!
    You don’t need to depend on professional video creators anymore.

    Classroom Storytellers

    Have complex ideas you have to teach your kids? No worries.
    Animaker is the ultimate classroom solution to build and tell stories anyone can understand.

    Everyone else

    Be it a Birthday wish, a wedding invite or even a personal resume,
    Animaker has got you covered! Create anything you want, just the way you want!

    What our users say!

    I think one of Animaker’s best benefits is their super useful support. Whenever I tackled an issue or had a question, they responded very promptly. I never had to wait too long.

    Ever since we started using Animaker, we’ve got 4X more new clients, and mostly all the clients that we’ve done a video for using animaker have returned wanting for more

    How to create a free website for kids

    What I loved about animaker is the flexibility and the amazing range of resources available. Be it a character or a property, it has everything in one single place.

    Join Lucy as she learns about some of the great destinations to visit around the world!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Making a travel brochure is a fun thing to do!

    None of the penguins at Penguin School ever want to leave the iceberg – they don’t want to go on holiday! Anywhere!

    But my family are world-famous explorers so I’m making some travel brochures to try and change their minds!

    You’ve probably seen travel brochures in a travel agent. Tourist offices and travel companies create them to promote countries or regions of them.

    More to click.

    • Inside London’s Lost Property Office
    • The future of travel: Airports for space
    • Chaching! Making the station pay

    They’re very colourful – lots of pictures and stuffed full of information to make people want to go there – things like maps, facts, travel ideas, what the foods like and also where to stay. Things which can help someone who’s never visited a place before understand more about it!

    Why don’t you make your own travel brochure with me?

    Step 1: Pick a country!

    There are hundreds of countries in the world to choose from! Maybe you’ve been on holiday somewhere recently and know loads about that country now to share with everyone else?

    Or perhaps there’s somewhere in the world you’ve always wanted to go to and so you’d like to find out a bit more about the place before you travel?

    Step 2: Choose how you’ll make your travel brochure!

    There are lots of different ways you can make your travel brochure! You could do a giant one on a large piece of paper or maybe a small leaflet that your friends can take away with them?

    To make your travel brochure on paper you’ll need:

    • Paper (colourful paper looks good)
    • Glue
    • Scissors
    • Maps, photographs, clippings from magazines etc.

    Alternatively, you could design one on the computer.

    The best program to use is Microsoft Publisher, as they have lots of ready-made templates to make your job easier. But if you don’t have Microsoft Publisher, you can use Microsoft Word instead!

    Step 3: Find things to put in your brochure!

    It’s hard to sum up a whole country in just one brochure so the aim of your travel brochure is to share the most important information and some of the best bits about that place!

    A good place to start is thinking about what that country is famous for (as they usually are the best bits too!)

    For example, if you were making a travel brochure for the UK you might mention Big Ben, Buckingham Palace, tea and the countryside!

    Here are some of the things you might include…

    Places to visit and things to do

    What can you do in this country? Are there famous landmarks that you should check out whilst you’re there? Is there some sort of activity you have to try before you leave?


    You want your travel brochure to look amazing and really sell the country to whoever’s reading it so pictures are a must!

    The country’s tourist board might have some good pictures online that you can use or you could find some off Google Images.

    Just make sure any pictures you use you include a line underneath saying where you got it from and who it belongs to!


    It’s a good place to show where in the world your country is! If you type the ‘place name + maps’ into Google Images you should find it’s been done for you (just remember to credit where you got the map from).


    Before visiting a place, you need to know the weather so you can make sure you’ve got the right stuff packed! There’s no point going to visit Lucy Iflyalot in Antartica with just some flip flops and swimming trunks!


    For lots of people, the best bit of visiting somewhere new is trying out lots of tasty, new food! Is there a particular dish that your place is famous for?

    Other things to include in your travel brochure…

    • Fun and weird facts
    • History
    • Famous people

    Step 4: Put it all together!

    Now you’ve got all the information you need, the next step is to bring your travel brochure to life!

    You might want to start your travel brochure with the place name and a big, attractive image at the top to grab people’s attention (as sometimes there might be a lot of different brochures on the shelf and you want yours to be picked!)

    Next, we need to think about the layout. You might want to split the other parts into different boxes to make it easy to read. Start with the most important information first as often people get bored and don’t read through to the end!

    If you’re still not sure what a travel brochure should look like, check out some of these for inspiration!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Meet the residents at the zoo, discover fun facts, and learn about conservation status.

    Take Smithsonian objects home and share photos and videos with Instagram effects.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Explore some of the Smithsonian’s most treasured objects and become creators as well.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Discover more than a million resources, create personal collections and educational experiences, and share your work.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Fun games and apps for learning about science.

    Art, History, and Culture: Activities and Games

    ECR Kids Art Search Results

    Explore your favorite museums in a fun new way—from the outside with Adventure Lab® scavenger hunts.

    Learn how to create your very own art-making robot—an ArtBot!

    Calling all coloring enthusiasts! Coloring sheets for artists of all ages from Smithsonian Libraries.

    Customizable to any skill set, these digital puzzles feature images from Smithsonian Libraries.

    Try your hand at these fun activities from the Lemelson Center for the Study of Invention and Innovation

    Games and activities for students and lifetime learners.

    Unique hands-on projects inspired by your favorite Hirshhorn artworks. New projects are released every week.

    Download an Illustrated book designed by AstroNuts and build a collagasaurus.

    Aimed at sparking an innovative mindset with K-8 learners, this activity guide features stories of inventors from history and today.

    This 40-page activity guide includes inspiring stories, experiments, and activities.

    Download the National Museum of African American History and Culture’s Joyful ABC activity booklets for early learners.

    “Paint” with light and create photographs inspired by bioluminescent creatures.

    Bel Mills, a collage artist and book designer, demonstrates the simple steps to create your own journal.

    Learners of all ages can #ColorOurCollections and engage with portraits at the National Portrait Gallery.

    Enjoy exploring history through literature, everyday objects, and hands-on activities.

    The National Postal Museum’s website offers a variety of online activities for kids of all ages!

    An at-home K–8 activity guide with hands-on activities, puzzles, and games. (Spanish/English)

    Through documenting memories and stories, the past comes to life in the present.

    Stories, objects, puzzles, and activities are presented in the 12-page guide.

    This 40-page activity guide is filled with hands-on activities, puzzles, and games. (English/Spanish)

    Science and Nature: Activities and Games

    ECRs Kids Search Results

    Mix and match different land uses available and discover the most sustainable combinations for the tropics and the environment.

    Take a virtual visit to the National Zoo any time by tuning into our live webcams.

    From the Smithsonian Science Education Center, a single player can look at data and the distribution of fresh water in light of world events and equity.

    These ducks need your help! Help them reach tasty treats across the pond.

    Engage in activities to explore the impact of COVID-19, understand the science of the disease, and learn how to stay safe.

    Author and illustrate a Smithsonian Earth Optimism comic.

    Help Smithsonville and other cities predict and prepare for natural disasters.

    Find giant deadly hornets, gorgeous fluttering butterflies & stealthy crawling stink bugs in this interactive e-book.

    Tour the forests of Panama and capture their biodiversity on camera!

    Test your geography knowledge with this online quiz.

    Soar above five real world terrains in the United States while learning about different types of land and water features.

    Have fun and match each animal to their correct habitat!

    This simulation asks users to answer questions about plant and animal habitats and habitat ranges. (Grade 2)

    Navigate the fiery aftermath of a supernova in an interactive simulation.

    This simulation allows users to test various light sources in a dark cave. (Grade 1)

    Explore the universe with telescopes you control over the internet, provided by the Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory.

    Learn about bird migration, name that nest, online coloring book.

    Help Morphy locate missing crewmembers so that they can repair their spaceship. For iPad.

    This simulation allows users to take the role of an adult rockhopper penguin helping to raise its young. (Grade 1)

    Travel around the world with Plato to learn about building healthy meals. ¡Ahora en español!

    Meet your female space science heroes (virtually) on a free augmented reality (AR) app that can be used on most AR-compatible devices.

    With the Smithsonian’s National Air and Space Museum’s Rocket Lab, your job is to design a series of rockets and attempt suborbital, orbital, and escape velocity missions.

    Lights! Camera! Action! Our movie director needs your help! Help Walrus pick actors!

    Visiting rare animals at the National Zoo with this online game.

    See skeletons in a new way with 3-D graphics, games, video, and more!

    See what happens to particles when sugar dissolves in water and water evaporates.

    An at-home K–8 activity guide with hands-on activities, puzzles, and games. (Spanish/English)

    View the arc of the sun as it moves throughout the day over the Smithsonian Castle and record your observations. Look around the National Mall in full 360°.

    It’s lunch time and Tami is hungry! Help Tami reach the delicious fruit by building a tower.

    What happens when ocean currents and air masses interact? Find out here!

    This 40-page activity guide is filled with hands-on activities, puzzles, and games. (English/Spanish)

    Build your own zoo, interact with animals through augmented reality, and learn what species need to thrive under human care and in the wild.

    Get a permanent free phone number for your home or business

    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email
    • Tweet
    • Share
    • Email

    In This Article

    Jump to a Section

    Normally, you’re given a phone number only when you pay for a landline service, activate a cell phone or SIM card, or register for a VoIP service. However, you can get free phone numbers without having to sign up for a monthly bill. Free phone numbers often come in a package with other interesting features, and they are available if you know where to look.

    Get a Free Phone Number With Google Voice

    Google Voice gives you a free phone number through which multiple phones can ring at the same time for incoming calls. This means that when you sign up for a free number from Google, and people call that number, you can have your computer, phone, and tablet all ring at the same time to ensure that you won’t miss the call.

    How to create a free website for kids

    One interesting feature you get with Google Voice is transcribed calls, meaning you can read your voicemail instead of listening to it. You can also port your “real” phone number to the Google Voice service.

    Google Voice lets you make free local calls within the U.S. to any phone number, such as businesses, other cell phones, and home phones. International calling is available as well, but you have to pay for it.

    Apps That Give Out Free Phone Numbers

    There are lots of apps that you can use to make free internet phone calls. Google Voice is one example, but there are many others that will give you a real phone number to make and receive internet calls. For example, you can download the FreedomPop app, the TextNow app, or the TextFree app from their respective websites.

    During setup, you’re given a real phone number that others can call and you can use to call others. All calls are managed through the apps, so you get to keep your real phone number, too.

    These apps also give you text messaging capabilities, voicemail options, and other phone-like features.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Try iNum for Location-Independent Numbers

    The iNum project is interesting because the company’s aim is to provide one number that you can use all over the world.

    iNum provides users with phone numbers with the +883 global country code, a code that has been created by the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). You can use a +883 number as a virtual number without having to worry about area codes and associated rates.

    Numbers from iNum are available through the service providers that are listed on the iNum website. Contact one of the service providers to obtain a free SIP account with free calling to all other iNum numbers.

    How to create a free website for kids

    There are several sites you can use on the internet to look up phone numbers. Most search engines, including Google, have a reverse search. Or sites such as ZabaSearch may provide the information you’re seeking.

    Calling mobile or landlines isn’t free as it requires either Skype credit or a subscription (call plan). You can make video or voice calls between two Skype accounts on any platform for free.

    Etsy предоставляет возможность прямой связи покупателей и продавцов со всего мира. Когда вы используете сервисы Etsy (мы будем называть, Pattern by Etsy, наши мобильные приложения и другие сервисы нашими «Сервисами»), вы несете ответственность за соблюдение этой политики, независимо от вашего местоположения.

    Эта политика является частью наших Условий использования. Используя любые наши Сервисы, вы соглашаетесь с этой политикой и нашими Условиями использования.

    Как транснациональная компания из США, ведущая деятельность в других странах, Etsy должна соблюдать экономические санкции и торговые ограничения, включая введенные Управлением по контролю за иностранными активами (OFAC) Министерства финансов США. Это означает, что Etsy или кто-либо, пользующийся нашими Сервисами, не может участвовать в транзакциях, в которые вовлечены определенные люди, места или изделия из этих мест, указанные государственными органами, такими как OFAC, в дополнение к торговым санкциям, предусмотренным соответствующими законами и нормами.

    Эта политика действует в отношении всех, кто использует наши Сервисы, независимо от их местоположения. Решение об ознакомлении с такими ограничениями остается за вами.

    Например, эти ограничения в целом запрещают, кроме прочего, транзакции, в которых участвуют следующие стороны:

    1. определенные географические регионы, такие как Иран, Крым, Куба, Северная Корея, Сирия, Россия, Беларусь, Донецкая Народная Республика («ДНР»), Луганская Народная Республика («ЛНР»), а также любые физические или юридические лица, ведущие деятельность или находящиеся на этих территориях;
    2. физические или юридические лица, состоящие в санкционных списках, таких как Список лиц особых категорий и запрещенных лиц (SDN) или Список иностранных лиц, уклоняющихся от санкций (FSE) организации OFAC;
    3. граждане Кубы независимо от их местоположения, не имеющие гражданства или вида на жительство за пределами Кубы; и
    4. изделия, из Ирана, Крыма, Кубы и Северной Кореи, за исключением информационных материалов, таких как публикации, фильмы, постеры, грампластинки, фотографии, кассеты, компакт-диски и определенные произведения искусства.
    5. Любые товары, услуги и технологические решения из ЛНР и ДНР за исключением информационных материалов и сельскохозяйственной продукции, в том числе продуктов питания для людей, семян сельскохозяйственных культур или удобрений.
    6. Импорт в США следующей продукции российского происхождения: рыба, морепродукты, алмазы непромышленного назначения и любая другая продукция, согласно периодическим указаниям министра торговли США.
    7. Экспорт из США либо гражданами США предметов роскоши и любых других товаров, согласно указаниям министра торговли США, любому лицу, находящемуся в России или Беларуси. Список и определение «предметов роскоши» приведены в «Дополнение № 5 к Разделу 746», опубликованном Федеральным реестром США.
    8. Изделия, изготовленные за пределами США и попадающие под действие Закона о тарифах США и связанных с ним законов о запрещении принудительного труда.

    Для защиты нашего сообщества и торговой площадки Etsy предпринимает меры для соблюдения режимов санкций. Например, Etsy запрещает участникам пользоваться своими аккаунтами в определенных географических регионах. Если у нас есть основания полагать, что вы управляете своей аккаунтом из места, находящегося под санкциями, например, любого из перечисленных выше санкционных мест, или иным образом нарушаете какие-либо экономические санкции или торговые ограничения, мы можем приостановить или прекратить использование вами наших Сервисов. Как правило, участникам не разрешается выставлять на продажу, покупать или продавать изделия из регионов, находящихся под санкциями. Сюда входят изделия, появившиеся ранее санкций, поскольку у нас нет возможности проверить, были ли они вывезены из запрещенного места. Etsy оставляет за собой право обращаться к продавцам с запросом предоставить дополнительную информацию, раскрыть страну происхождения изделия на странице товара или предпринять другие шаги для соблюдения обязательств. Мы можем отключить товары или отменить транзакции, представляющие опасность нарушения этой политики.

    Кроме соблюдения требований OFAC и применимых местных законов, участникам Etsy следует иметь в виду, что другие страны могут вводить собственные торговые ограничения и что определенные изделия могут не допускаться к экспорту или импорту согласно международным законам. Когда в транзакции участвуют лица из разных стран, вам следует изучить законы любых соответствующих стран.

    Наконец, участникам Etsy следует иметь в виду, что сторонние платежные системы, например PayPal, могут самостоятельно отслеживать транзакции на предмет соблюдения санкционных требований и могут блокировать транзакции в рамках собственных программ, обеспечивающих соблюдение требований. Etsy не имеет власти или контроля над процедурами независимого принятия решения в таких системах.

    Экономические санкции и торговые ограничения могут применяться к порядку использования вами Сервисов и могут изменяться, поэтому участникам следует регулярно проверять источники информации о санкциях. За юридической консультацией обращайтесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

    Вы можете прочитать эту политику на вашем языке, но помните, что версия этого документа на английском имеет преимущественную силу в отношении использования вами сервисов Etsy. Язык можно изменить в настройках аккаунта.

    Create a stunning website with the Yola free website creator.

    • Award winning website creator
    • Reliable website hosting for free
    • 100% yours. No pop-up ads. No unwanted ads

    Why use Yola free website creator?

    When you’re ready to take your business online, you have options. You can hire a design and development team and potentially spend thousands of dollars, or you could use a free website creator.

    With an easy-to-use free website creator like Yola, you control the design and development of your business website. You don’t need a computer science degree or art training; if you can point and click, you can use a website creator. With your business website up and running, you’re on your way to a great marketing plan.

    But there’s more to a solid marketing plan than simply putting up a website. You also need to build your brand in a way that best represents your products, services, and mission. Your web presence is a great way to get your brand out there, and a reputable free website creator like Yola can help you get online quickly and easily. But before you start building, here are a few things to think about:

    • Highlight what makes your organization different from other similar organizations.
    • Decide who your target audience is, and focus your website to that audience.
    • Think about the language your visitors use, and avoid using insider jargon.
    • Gather as much content as you can before you start building; it makes the process a lot easier.

    And when you’re ready to build your website using that free website creator you’ve been eyeing, remember to:

    • Write a one-page corporate overview to introduce yourself.
    • Create a site map (a list of all the pages in your site) to help visitors find their way around.
    • Upload pictures of your business, products, and services.

    Your website is a powerful marketing tool. Sign up with Yola and use our free website creator to create a professional-looking website that will make your business stand out.

    The award-winning website where K-5 students go to read — anytime, anywhere!

    How to create a free website for kids

    New to Raz-Kids? Watch our quick video introduction!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Raz-Kids delivers hundreds of interactive, leveled eBooks spanning 29 levels

    • 400+ eBooks and open-book eQuizzes, with new books added every month, even in Spanish!
    • Corresponding eQuizzes test comprehension, providing teachers with skill reports for data-driven instruction
    • Online running records let teachers digitally assess each student, saving valuable classroom time
    • The motivational “Raz Rocket” gets students excited about reading and strengthens the school-to-home connection
    • A winner of numerous awards, including CODiE and EDDIE Awards and a Teachers’ Choice Award for the Classroom

    Free SamplesFree TrialOrder Now

    How to create a free website for kids

    Connecting Raz-Kids to Common Core ELA standards

    400+ eBooks that students can listen to, read, and even record themselves reading

    • Students can listen to books for modeled fluency, read books for practice, and then record themselves reading so teachers can monitor progress
    • Every leveled eBook has an accompanying eQuiz to test reading comprehension
    • Books include Spanish, Song, Nursery Rhymes, Poetry and more
    • Because all books are available 24/7 via the Web, students can practice reading anytime, anywhere

    Free SamplesFree TrialOrder Now

    How to create a free website for kids

    Check out powerful reporting on Raz-Kids

    Raz-Kids makes reading accessible (and fun) like never before

    • Access for Students: With Raz-Kids, students can practice reading anytime, anywhere – at home, on the go, and even during the summer!
    • Keeping Teachers in Control: Teachers can make assignments and track student progress with online assessments and student recordings
    • Results: Viewing reports is simple, for individuals, classrooms, schools and even districts!
    • Common Core: See how Raz-Kids can support your efforts to succeed with Common Core ELA standards

    Free SamplesFree TrialOrder Now

    How to create a free website for kids

    Students can read on-the-go from their favorite mobile device

    Raz-Kids is now on the iPhone, and iPod Touch!

    Besides the iPad, Android, and Kindle Fire tablets, students can now access their assignments right from their iPhones or iPod Touches! Read More

    • On top of being accessible 24/7 via the Web, Raz-Kids also delivers reading access through its free apps, meaning your students can read and take quizzes on their iPad, Android, and Kindle Fire tablets.
    • All student activity in the app is captured and reported to teachers at, thus helping teachers monitor student progress and determine the instruction needed for each student.

    Free SamplesFree TrialOrder Now

    “I like how Raz-Kids motivates students to read. Students want to use the program, and it provides parents an alternative to getting students to read at home. I have seen students improve their reading level simply because they are practicing more.”

    Heidi Springer, Second Grade Teacher
    Henry Hudson School #28; Rochester City School District; Rochester, New York

    We have hundreds of crafts for kids: paper crafts, recycled craft projects, paper plate craft ideas, animal crafts, back to school, holidays, and tons more.

    We think all of our crafts are doable for children, but there are definitely some that are easier and quicker than others. Here’s over 300 craft projects for kids of all ages!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Bird Seed Ornaments

    Author by Meaghan Mountford on May 13, 2022 Updated on May 13, 2022

    How to create a free website for kids

    Fingerprint Flower Pot

    Author by Ann Kollegger on April 22, 2022 Updated on April 22, 2022

    How to create a free website for kids

    Craft Stick Leprechaun Hat

    Author by Ann Kollegger on February 18, 2022 Updated on March 11, 2022

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to Make Play Dough

    Author by Amanda Formaro on August 20, 2021 Updated on August 19, 2021

    How to create a free website for kids

    Sponge Bombs & Sponge Toss Water Game

    Author by Amanda Formaro on July 23, 2021 Updated on July 23, 2021

    How to create a free website for kids

    Paper Plate Ladybugs Craft

    Author by Amanda Formaro on June 25, 2021 Updated on June 25, 2021

    How to create a free website for kids

    Decoupage Paper Plate Ladybug Craft

    Author by Amanda Formaro on May 28, 2021 Updated on May 28, 2021

    How to create a free website for kids

    Star Suncatchers

    Author by Ann Kollegger on May 21, 2021 Updated on May 21, 2021

    How to create a free website for kids

    Paper Plate Tropical Fish Craft

    Author by Amanda Formaro on April 2, 2021 Updated on April 2, 2021

    How to create a free website for kids

    Cardboard Tube Bunny Rabbit Family

    Author by Amanda Formaro on March 19, 2021 Updated on March 19, 2021

    How to create a free website for kids

    Cardboard Tube Lambs

    Author by Amanda Formaro on February 26, 2021 Updated on March 18, 2022

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to Make a Pom Pom

    Author by Amanda Formaro on February 12, 2021 Updated on February 9, 2021

    How to create a free website for kids

    Conversation Marble Magnets for Valentine’s Day

    Author by Amanda Formaro on January 13, 2021 Updated on January 28, 2022

    How to create a free website for kids

    No-Knot Fleece Blanket

    Author by Amanda Formaro on January 6, 2021 Updated on January 5, 2021

    How to create a free website for kids

    Cardboard Tube Penguins

    Author by Amanda Formaro on December 30, 2020 Updated on December 30, 2020

    How to create a free website for kids

    Build a Snowman Printable

    Author by Jessica Hill on December 28, 2020 Updated on December 28, 2020

    How to create a free website for kids

    Snowman Gum

    Author by Amanda Formaro on December 18, 2020 Updated on January 3, 2021

    How to create a free website for kids

    Christmas Coloring Cards

    Author by Jessica Hill on November 16, 2020 Updated on November 13, 2020

    • Go to page 1
    • Go to page 2
    • Go to page 3
    • Interim pages omitted …
    • Go to page 18
    • Go to Next Page »

    All Time Favorites

    How to create a free website for kids

    Deco Mesh Pumpkin Wreath…

    I love working with deco mesh. You can see evidence of . Go To project

    How to create a free website for kids

    Winter Luminaries: Snowy Pinecone…

    Make pretty winter luminaries that appear to be covered . Go To project

    How to create a free website for kids

    Ladybug Painted Rocks…

    I’m going to show you how to make these adorable . Go To project

    How to create a free website for kids

    20 Uses for Prescription Pill…

    You’ve been collecting prescription pill bottles for . Go To project

    Build your brand. Conquer the world.
    Zero code or design skills required.

    Trusted by millions of entrepreneurs and creatives

    Making a website has never been easier.

    Ben Keene

    “Within an hour, we had probably our best landing page yet and for a fraction of the price. It’s amazing. Since then, I’ve built about 15 sites on Strikingly – it’s currently my favorite startup tech tool.”

    Tsveti Kamova

    Owner, Red Paper Plane

    “We chose Strikingly from the very beginning of our project aiming at simplicity and style. Now as our project is growing, we are very happy to see that our favorite platform is enriching its functionalities and will meet our needs.”

    Edd Baptista

    “There is no formula for what ‘cool’ is. It’s a gut reaction. You just know it the moment you see it.”

    The Easiest Website Editor Possible

    Click anything to edit, and publish instantly. Absolutely no code or design experience needed.

    We keep it simple and focused. Build a beautiful website in under 30 minutes.

    E-commerce Built In

    Just add our Simple Store and connect to PayPal or Stripe. Start making sales and getting paid, immediately.

    Strikingly is perfectly optimized for selling. Add shipping, coupons, membership log-ins, and more. Whether you’re selling a single product or a hundred, we make it easy.

    Turn Visitors to Superfans

    Powerful tools to cultivate your audience. Create & manage signups, forms, live chat , and newsletters all in one place. You can even register memberships to keep your audience engaged!

    This isn’t just a static page — Strikingly brings your site to life.

    All the Features You Need

    Domain Names

    Register a new domain name or use one you already own. (Available after upgrading.)

    Simple Store

    Sell products on your site with full e-commerce functionality! Coupons, shipping, digital goods, and much more are all fully built-in.

    Simple Blog

    Keep your visitors updated with our super easy blogging. Each blog post gets its own page.


    All sites come with analytics built-in. See who’s been visiting with easy-to-read charts.

    Sign Up & Contact Forms

    Starting a new service or want to get feedback? Just add a sign up form or a contact form!

    Social Feed

    Show your Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram feed directly on your site.

    HTTPS Built-in

    All wesbites get HTTPS automatically, for free! Enhanced security, SEO boost, and gain visitors’ trust.

    . and much, much more!

    Galleries, video backgrounds, media sliders, custom colors, password protection. It’s all integrated into our slick, modern designs and our intuitive editor.

    Message us anytime by email or live chat. Our Happiness Team is always here to help you succeed.

    Our Customers Love Us

    We’re fanatical about your success. Hear it from our users – Strikingly just works.

    I started using this tool and it turns out it’s a simple web development tool that is all plug and play. It’s hard for me to imagine a website being ten times more beautiful than what you can build with Strikingly.

    I run a small business from home and I quit GoDaddy long ago because it was expensive and pretty byzantine. I work part-time and I don’t want those hours spent on satellite website issues — I want to maximize my earnings. Strikingly is so intuitive and functional. I love it!

    I’ve told tons of my friends about it already.

    I actually just want to say how impressed I’ve been with the site/software/mobile app. I looked at a few options before going with Strikingly, but I’m so glad I did.

    Amazing UI/UX, perfect balance between being simple, yet customizable – and at no point was I “stuck”; everything just seems to work. Great stuff and thanks again!

    I’m one of your big fans! Strikingly is just amazing! I always had problems choosing templates or themes whether it’s on Tumblr or WordPress, with a bunch of options, but only few (like really few) that suits my taste. But Strikingly won my heart!

    When we first starting looking at Strikingly, we were taken back by how beautiful things were. Strikingly makes it so easy to make their templates your own that by the time you’re done, the page won’t have a “theme,” it’ll be yours. Ease of use, check. Beautiful, check. Different, check.

    We help entrepreneurs & creatives thrive.

    Help & Support

    About Strikingly

    Strikingly brings beautiful mobile websites to everyone.

    What’s so special about a Strikingly site? Simplicity, clarity, and accessibility. Owning a professional, mobile-optimized website is more important than ever. Don’t lose your visitors under the weight of a heavy, confusing website. The same goes for editing: don’t stress out about micromanaging your site, and don’t waste time wondering where to change something. Edit it all on one screen, and get it done fast.


    For help with using Strikingly, please email [email protected]


    For press inquiries, please email [email protected]

    Social Media

    You can also reach out to us on Facebook or Twitter.® opened in September 2002 as a free public service to teach children to read. Since then it has expanded to include language arts and mathematics for preschool, kindergarten, first grade, second grade, and third grade. Starfall’s emphasis on phonemic awareness, systematic sequential phonics, and common sight words in conjunction with audiovisual interactivity has proven effective in teaching emergent readers. Starfall activities are research-based and align with Individual and Common Core State Standards in English language arts and mathematics.

    The program emphasizes exploration, play, and positive reinforcement—encouraging children to become confident and intrinsically motivated. Starfall is an educational alternative to other entertainment choices for children and is especially effective for special education, homeschooling, and English language development (ELD, ELL, ESL). It is widely used in schools that serve children with special needs and learning difficulties.

    Our low-cost membership program expands the free content to include animated songs, mathematics, and reading activities spanning K-3. Membership also supports the production of new books, songs, educational games, and movies.

    The program, provided by the Starfall Education Foundation, a nonprofit organization, was conceived by Dr. Stephen Schutz. As a child, Stephen had difficulty learning to read due to dyslexia. He wanted to create a website with untimed, multisensory interactive games that allow children to see, hear, and touch as they learn.

    Free apps are great — but wading through all the terrible free apps in the App Store and the Google Play Store? Not so great. This list features some of our favorite free-to-download apps for kids, and although some of them have optional in-app purchases, we’ve only included the highest-quality selections that are still fun to play. If you’re looking for apps with more learning potential for your kids, check out these awesome educational resources that won’t cost you a dime.

    Daniel Tiger for Parents

    Grr-ific songs and videos in two languages.


    Watch free movies, shows, animated books with library card.

    Khan Academy Kids

    Creative early-learning activities engage and inspire.

    PBS KIDS Video

    TV show clips in easy-to-navigate app for young kids.

    Toca Kitchen Monsters

    Silly spin-off is more fun for Toca veterans than newbies.

    Breathe, Think, Do with Sesame

    Adorable monster de-stresses kids with Sesame Street style.

    Think & Learn Code-a-pillar

    Dancing caterpillar gives young kids easy intro to coding.

    GoNoodle Games

    Jump, wave, and wiggle with fun immersive movement games.

    Libby, by OverDrive

    Browse, borrow books with online library; filters available.

    Nature Cat’s Great Outdoors

    Multitool TV tie-in for capturing outdoor adventures.

    Pick Your Plate!

    Meal-builder game teaches nutrition from around the world.

    Smiling Mind

    Content-rich meditations offer something for everyone.


    Creative challenges, social media for kids with purchases.

    Kinzoo Messenger for Families

    Cute communications platform puts safety first.

    Toontastic 3D

    Same great easy animated story creator, new 3D graphics.

    Angry Birds

    Popular knock-down-blocks app pits birds against pigs.

    Information-packed tool delivers videos, photos, and more.

    Sushi Monster

    Clever and challenging addition and multiplication practice.

    Flow Free

    Color puzzle game grabs grade-schoolers to grown-ups.

    iBiome – Ocean Lite

    Kids dive into virtual world of aquatic food webs.

    Welcome to The Teacher’s Corner Printable Worksheets! We have developed several completely free generators for you to use to make your own worksheets quick and easy.

    If you like our printable worksheets, please link to us or tell a friend about us! Word of mouth has helped us grow by leaps and bound since we started offering lesson plans and worksheets to teachers in 1998! We thank you for your support!

    To get started, just click one of the large icons below! Have fun!

    Printable Worksheets Overview

    Free Premade Printable Worksheets

    Countries of the World
    Free Printables for the different countries around the world.

    Science Worksheets
    Free Worksheets for various science topics.

    Coloring Worksheets
    Check out our coloring worksheets.

    More worksheets coming soon!

    Thank you all for your great feedback!

    Chad & Jennifer
    The Teacher’s Corner

    How to create a free website for kids

    Subscription Features include:

    • All Banner Ads removed from the entire website
      Note: Subscriptions do NOT allow citation removal from puzzles and worksheets created on our site.
    • More options available for customizing puzzles!
      • More stock images to choose from!
      • More images allowed per puzzle!
      • Many more available fonts! (over 125 fonts!)
      • Use ANY font installed on your computer
      • 10 word list save slots – and access your saved lists from anywhere!
      • More word/clues for crosswords (up to 50)
      • More word/clues for match-ups (up to 100)
      • More word/clues for fill-in-the-blank (up to 100)
      • More word/clues for word scrambles (up to 100)
      • More options for Sudoku puzzles
      • No wait delays imposed for saving puzzles to an image or PDF
      • ‘Fake Bank’ on our Fill-in-the-Blank worksheets
      • More features coming soon
    • More Daily Writing Prompts!
      Over 30 extra prompts for our premium members for each month! (excludes July)
    • All subscriptions support The Teacher’s Corner!
    • FAQ: Can I remove the “Created on The Teacher’s Corner” (or similar) citation on the puzzles I create? No. That is not a benefit of our subscriptions. All citations must remain on worksheets and puzzles you create.
    • Go here to view our plans and discounts

    NOTE:ALL Packages contain the same features, longer subscriptions get better price breaks

    SAFE: All subscriptions can be paid via Paypal or Stripe, so your sensitive banking information is never seen nor stored by our website.

    Click on Facebook and LIKE US to get up-to-date information about the release of our subscriptions and get valuable coupon codes!

    DIY Projects’ fun, easy-to-follow (and FREE!) DIY tutorials can help you make the best projects and crafts for your budget, no matter the season!

    Whether that’s getting ahead on spring cleaning, organization tips for every room in the house, a new yard project, the best way to upcycle used goods, or charming crafts that are perfect for weddings and parties… DIY Projects has it here so you can learn to make it yourself alongside tutorials of our community experts.

    Check out our 2020 addition: Crafts to make while you’re quarantined or social distancing during the COVID-19 outbreak. You can take this extra opportunity of free time at home to get crafting and make something fun or useful!

    If you want to start making your own crafts just start right here at DIY Projects! Look around and see what inspires you. Let’s get crafting!

    How to create a free website for kids

    Subscribe To DIY Projects And Get This FREE GIFT!

    Follow Us

    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • Tumblr
    • Twitter
    • YouTube

    How to create a free website for kids

    45 Homemade BBQ Recipes And Mouthwatering BBQ Ideas

    No backyard barbecue is complete without winning BBQ recipes! Your grill takes center stage, and the spotlight is on your BBQ. While there are many barbecue marinades and sauces available on the market, nothing beats a homemade recipe. Help yourself with these delectable BBQ recipes you can make on your own! RELATED: Inexpensive DIY Smoker Grill…Continue Reading

    How to create a free website for kids

    Fuss-Free DIY Chicken Feeder Tutorial

    Building a DIY chicken feeder makes feeding sessions fuss and mess-free. It’s easy to fill up, built to last, and able to withstand the elements. RELATED: 20 Cool DIY Homesteading Projects For a Simpler Life No-Spill DIY Chicken Feeder Tutorial What You Need: 1 4 in.-wide PVC pipe, cut to size depending on your desired length…Continue Reading

    How to create a free website for kids

    7 Ways to Turn Your Garden into a Winter Wonderland

    Make the most out of the snow and turn your garden into your own winter wonderland with these simple tips! RELATED: 17 DIY Winter Decorations Projects Make Your Own Garden Winter Wonderland What You Need For Your Garden Gardening tasks may be postponed during winter, but you can still breathe life into your backyard. Even after…Continue Reading

    How to create a free website for kids

    Make Your Own Fire Starter At Home | 11 DIY Fire Starter Ideas

    Fire starters are part of a survivalist’s essentials. Not only can you save money, but you can also make use of the stuff lying around in your own home! RELATED: How To Reuse Candle Wax To Make New Candles And Save Money DIY Fire Starter Ideas to Keep You Warm in the Winter 1. Cotton…Continue Reading

    Expand your reach and accomplish your vision with an easy-to-create church website.

    Our team is comprised of people who understand the challenges you face as a church leader.

    Whether you want to connect with your member, grow your church, or engage your audience, Clover makes it easy to make a beautiful website, specifically designed for churches like yours, with beautiful themes, unlimited templates, and essential integrations.

    4 Bedrock Principles for Your Website

    When you enter into a Strategy Project, our specialists will walk you through four communication best practice principles that will ensure your web build is moving in the right direction.


    Connect with visitors and church members so they can stay in the loop.


    Inspire giving and move your ministry forward.


    Provide opportunities for your congregation to connect virtually.


    Create and operate your site with ease –anybody can do it.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Want to stay connected with your people? Our church website builder will help you communicate all the things that your audience needs to know. Share with members how to take their next steps. Invite new guests and provide all the information to get plugged in. We understand how important it is to share the gospel – why not use your website to communicate the Good News.

    How can you encourage people to give consistently? Provide all the tools and opportunities they need to make giving easy. Clover Give is ministry-focused and designed to help you advance your mission. Make it simple for donors to give via multiple avenues, including online, text-to-give, kiosks, pledges, and in-person gifts.

    How to create a free website for kids

    How to create a free website for kids

    Especially now, with so much ministry happening online, it’s important to keep your congregation engaged. Many people are seeking connection in this online era. With Clover Sites, your church can provide even more togetherness through livestreaming, virtual groups, prayer walls, a church app, and more. Ministry is no longer a Sunday-only thing; your website can impact the world seven days a week.

    Not only does Clover build beautiful websites, but we offer church management software that integrates with the website. Our smart church management system works from any device, anywhere, and at any time. Keep people from falling through the cracks with workflows, plan your worship services using WorshipPlanning, Improve coordination between ministries and manage all church reservations with our calendar, and so much more.

    How to create a free website for kids

    How The Body Works

    Your body is a brilliant machine with many important parts. These videos take you on a tour of how it all works.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Talking About Feelings

    No matter how you feel — good or bad — it’s healthy to put your feelings into words.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Relax and Unwind

    When life throws stressful stuff your way, learn how to stay calm, de-stress, and solve problems.

    • Slide 1
    • Slide 2
    • Slide 3

    How to create a free website for kids

    Body Questions & Answers

    How to Clean Your Hands

    Think about the things you touched today — the toilet, your gaming device, and your desk. Washing your hands is the best way to stop germs from spreading.

    How to create a free website for kids

    Organize, Focus, Get It Done

    Here are three tips that help you get better at doing homework — or any big task.

    Emily’s Story: Little Person, Big Life

    Emily was born with a type of dwarfism. In this video, she talks about what it’s like to be smaller than other people.

    Icky Q&A

    To understand boogers, you need to know about mucus. It has an important job protecting your nose and lungs.

    As soon as you scrape or break the skin anywhere on your body, special blood cells spring into action to form a protective scab.

    Bacteria are to blame. These tiny critters normally inhabit your feet and love dark, damp places like the insides of sweaty shoes.

    Find out why they’re there

    Note: All information on KidsHealth® is for educational purposes only. For specific medical advice, diagnoses, and treatment, consult your doctor.

    © 1995-2022 The Nemours Foundation. Nemours® and KidsHealth® are registered trademarks of the Nemours Foundation. All rights reserved.

    Print out our free rocket printable and have fun making some straw rockets! The kids loved designing their own rockets and then launching them using straws- such a great way for kids to explore science!

    Follow our Science for Kids Pinterest board for even more ideas!

    How to create a free website for kids

    This post contains affiliate links.
    This post was originally published on June 14, 2015 and has since been updated.

    Here’s an easy way to make straw rockets using just a few materials. This project makes a great addition to a unit on physics, space, the night sky, or things that fly and is also just fun to do on a rainy day!

    A reader, Lisa, suggested a great children’s book to go with this activity: The Darkest Dark by Chris Hadfield. Be sure to check it out!

    How to create a free website for kids

    The kids and I designed our own rockets and launched them using straws! This activity was definitely a hit with both Lucy (age 7) and Theo (age 3 1/2).

    How to create a free website for kids

    The kids loved seeing how far they could get their straw rockets to go and had fun trying them out at all different angles.

    This activity makes a great science exploration and is perfect for the classroom. Kids can compare how different angles of the straw affect the distance the rocket travels or how adding fins or folding the rocket in different ways can affect its flight.

    How to create a free website for kids

    See the straw rockets in action!

    Materials for Making Straw Rockets

    • Straws
    • Tape or glue dots
    • Plastic pipettes (or straws with a larger diameter than the other set of straws)
    • Markers, crayons, or colored pencils
    • Scissors
    • Free Rocket Template

    How to create a free website for kids

    Directions for Making Straw Rockets

    1. Print out the free rocket template. Color the rockets and cut them out.

    How to create a free website for kids

    2. Cut the bottom off a plastic pipette and attach it to the back of a rocket using tape or glue dots. (We love having a stash of plastic pipettes at home. They’re so fun to use with painting and often come in handy for various science activities- like with our color arrays. And they’re super inexpensive!)

    How to create a free website for kids

    If you don’t have any plastic pipettes handy, you can use a straw instead. (Just make sure this straw is wider than the other straw you’ll be using for launching.) Cut the straw to fit the length of the rocket and tape one end shut so it’s completely sealed. Attach it to your rocket with glue dots or tape.

    How to create a free website for kids

    3. Slip a straw into your pipette, and you’re ready to launch!

    How to create a free website for kids

    4. Give your straw a big puff of air, and watch it take off!

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How To Sponge Paint Furniture?

    And we want a little texture. So the paint in some places might be a little thick that’s great I’ll quickly do the sides. But we will really do the sides when we get the second coat.

    What kind of paint do you use for sponge painting?

    Can I paint wood with a sponge?

    If a piece of old wooden furniture is starting to fade and become scratched and stained, give it a makeover by sponge painting it with a couple of colors to create a whole new look.

    Can I paint furniture with a sponge brush?

    What is the best way to apply paint to furniture?

    What can I use instead of a sponge for painting?

    Part of an old T-shirt-shirt might work, or a rag, or a microfiber towel (since these seem to hold a lot of water and also seem to last a long time). Sure, good idea.

    Is sponge painting still popular?

    Sponge Painting Techniques: … And although sponging in high-contrast paint colors and with a heavy-handed technique has since fallen out of favor, this finish is still popular and can look very relevant if you follow the color advice and use updated color combinations as suggested on this website.

    How do you sponge with 3 colors?

    When you choose three colors for a faux finished project, one of them will be the base coat color. Generally this will be the lightest color, such as a soft cream. The other two colors should complement each other, such as two colors from the same color family, for instance, a pale green and a medium green.

    Can you use a sponge with chalk paint?

    There are a number of ways to distress chalk painted pieces including a sanding sponge, a wet cloth or steel wool. … Stencils can also be easily applied after the paint is completely dry with a dry brush technique.

    How do you sponge chalk paint?

    Is it better to brush or roll paint?

    The roller is more economical to use than the brush since its porous surface holds much more paint and distributes an even layer of paint much faster. … The most efficient technique when painting with a roll is ‘V letter’ – it allows you to cover large surfaces uniformly and quickly.

    How do you avoid brush strokes when painting?

    Do foam brushes leave brush marks?

    All the negatives of foam brushes really don’t apply when staining. The stain gets wiped off, so air bubbles aren’t an issue. Stain is really thin, so it’s not much work for the brush to spread, and therefore the brush stays intact for a longer period of time.

    How do you paint furniture without sanding or priming?

    1. MINERAL PAINT (My Favorite Option) With Mineral paint you don’t need to prime anything beforehand. …
    2. CHALK PAINT. Chalk paint is the best way to paint practically anything without sanding. …

    How do you paint furniture without roller marks?

    Dip the nap — the fuzzy part of the roller — into the paint to get a layer of paint on the bottom edge. Avoid dipping the entire roller unit into the paint. Roll the nap over the paint screen to get an even coating of paint on the nap and remove excess paint that could cause drip marks.

    How do you smooth paint finish on furniture?

    1. Sand your furniture piece smooth. …
    2. Vacuum all the dust from the furniture piece. …
    3. Wipe off any remaining dust with a tack cloth.
    4. Fill your paint sprayer with paint. …
    5. Spray the first coat on your furniture. …
    6. After the first coat is dry, lightly sand the entire surface with an ultra fine grit sanding block.

    How do you make a paint sponge?

    What is a foam brush?

    Foam brushes are designed to absorb and hold all types of paints, stains, and urethanes. They give a smooth finish and are priced to throw away after the job is done. Use them on furniture, cabinetry, and trim.

    Do you have to use a glaze when sponge painting?

    One of the reasons why sponging on is a great beginner project is because it works great with water-based mediums – in other words, you don’t need to use oil-based paints or glazes for your base coat or the top layers if you don’t want to.

    What is dry sponge technique?

    Your sponges need to be dry before you apply the first color. Put the paint in a roller tray and dip the sponge into it, but don’t soak it entirely. Have some old newspaper at hand and blot the paint on the sponge to remove any excess material. To apply the paint, press the sponge gently on the wall.

    How do you sponge sponge with a kitchen?

    Is Gray going out of style 2020?

    What is a sponge roller?

    How do you sponge with two colors?

    First, let the finish dry completely. Then, using a sponge, cover the entire surface with another layer of glaze (reuse one of your color mixes, or make a new one in a different color), and immediately wipe it off with a clean damp rag or sponge.

    How do you sponge with 4 colors?

    1. Paint the Base Coat and Prep. To begin, you will need a wall with a base coat. …
    2. Add Glaze and Extender to Paint. This step is pretty self-explanatory. …
    3. Apply the First Color using Sponge. All you have to do is a sponge on the paint. …
    4. Now Apply the Rest of the Colors.

    Is it best to use a brush or roller with chalk paint?

    To use chalk paint with a brush: For a smooth, uniform finish, choose a natural-bristle brush with long, flexible bristles. … Roll a thin layer of paint in a long, unidirectional stroke, then pull it back and make one more stroke in the original direction.

    Can you use a regular brush with chalk paint?

    Can you roller brush chalk paint?

    What are paint pads?

    Do foam paint rollers work?

    Foam roller covers work great with latex paints, as they are made for a thinner paint. Oil paints are generally too thick to achieve good results with a foam roller. Foam rollers are also ideal for smooth surfaces. The uniform thickness of the foam means that they aren’t the best choice for rough surfaces.

    Which paint roller gives smoothest finish?

    foam rollers
    Walls, Wood, and Metal – Small 1/4″ nap roller covers or foam rollers will produce the smoothest finish. Light to Medium Textured Surfaces – Microfiber rollers are best.Nov 13, 2017

    Does paint go on thicker with brush or roller?

    The porous surface of the roller holds much more paint than a brush and distributes an even layer of paint much faster. Different finishes can be achieved with different rollers: Rollers with a smooth surface will produce a smooth finish. Rollers with a thick or fluffy surface will create a more textured finish.

    Why do I use a sponge for furniture painting? | Porch Nook

    How to use a Sea Sponge to paint furniture and cabinets – Part 1

    Sponge Painting Technique with Annie Sloan Chalk Paint

    Painting Tip – Painting Sponge

    sponge painting examples
    heirloom traditions paint sponge
    chalk paint
    yellow drops on wall
    yellow oily drops on wall

    Sometimes more than just a paint finish is required!

    Paint effects allow you the freedom to capture a mood, create an ambience and transform the mundane into something special. Some techniques also have the extremely practical benefit of disguising less than perfect surfaces. In fact, imperfections in the surface can add to the overall impact of the effect. Paint effects are designed for durability giving you confidence that the look you painstakingly create will continue to look good. This website contains a small taste of the paint effects techniques commonly used. There are a wide variety of other paint effects techniques that you can use to achieve highly professional results.

    The Resene website features a range of paint effects projects, from cracking to sponging to ragging, you can try out for yourself. View the paint effects project gallery. Plus get more inspiration with the habitat plus – paint effects book – view it online.

    There are no rules

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    When using Paint Effects for your project, the key thing to remember is that there are no hard and fast rules about what you should do. Spend time getting the effect right by trialing different colours and application techniques until you are happy with the finished look. Then use your trial area as a reference board for the whole project. Wall sockets, skirting boards and door frames should be masked off so that the effect may be continued right to the edge.

    All Paint Effects Medium colours shown have been created by adding one Resene 60ml testpot to one litre of Resene Paint Effects Medium. You can create your own personalised Paint Effects Medium colours simply by experimenting with testpots of your choice. It is often surprising the colour that results when a testpot is added to Resene Paint Effects Medium, so always make sure you test your colour before starting the project. By subtly adjusting either the basecoat or your chosen Resene Paint Effects Medium topcoat you can create a whole new effect. The key to paint effects is to develop your own colour combinations and application technique to add your distinctive mark to the completed job.

    A range of paint effects colour combinations are available online to help you decide the effect that suits you. If you are hiring someone to create the painted effect for you, ask them to prepare a sample panel and agree on that as your standard before the job starts. This way, all parties will know what the finish will look like. If worse comes to worse and the final finish is not what you had in mind, you can always create a new paint effect by reapplying the basecoats and paint effects medium topcoat/s.

    Pick the right product

    Resene Paint Effects Medium is a tintable acrylic medium that allows you to easily create unique paint effects, while still enjoying the benefits of lower odour and easy clean up in water.

    Resene Resitex or Resene Sandtex are good basecoats for paint effects as the texture adds an extra dimension to the effect.

    A coat of Resene Concrete Clear may be applied to the finished paint effect to alter the gloss level and/or add durability to the finish. Over stains and on timber, use Resene Aquaclear. For floors use Resene Concrete Wax.

    You can also use many other Resene products to make paint effects – from Resene Blackboard Paint to Resene Metallics, or even just your favourite testpot colours, a stencil, or low tack masking tape. All you need is a little imagination.

    Introduction: Paint a Faux Marble Finish

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Many years ago, I bought a marbleize kit to paint a table, and the results were surprisingly good. Equally surprising was how simple the kit was, so I will reproduce the steps here.

    The items you need are:

    • 4 colors of paint: black, gray, dark green, and white (In my case, I used black spray paint, and acrylic for the other colors. The type of paint doesn’t seem to matter.)
    • A regular sponge
    • A feather (You can buy these at crafts stores, or you can used a twisted up sheet of paper. This is used to paint “veins” on the surface, as you need an uneven brush stroke.)
    • Two paper plates to stage the paints

    Step 1: Paint the Base Coat

    First, paint the surface to be marbleized completely black. Of course, it’s ideal if the surface is glass-like smooth, so if it’s not, first use a filling agent like sanding sealer or wood filler to make the surface smooth. Even if the surface isn’t smooth, the effect is still quite nice.

    Step 2: Dab on the Contrasting Colors

    After the black paint dries, put swirls of gray and green paint on a plate. You can vary the look of the marble by how tight the swirls are. In the attached picture, I used a fairly tight swirl, but a much looser swirl will also give a good effect.

    If your sponge is new and hard, dampen it with water to soften it. Wring out all water to make it as dry as possible. Now that it’s soft, dip it firmly into the swirled paint, then lightly dab the sponge straight down onto the black surface, only once per dabbed area. Keep dabbing away on the entire surface, dipping into the plate for more paint as needed. Before each dab, rotate the sponge slightly to the left or right to give a more random appearance to the overall pattern. Another way to modify the marbleize effect is to first cut out pieces of the sponge surface with scissors to create larger paint gaps on the surface. In this instructable, I used the sponge as is with no pieces cut out.

    Step 3: Add Marble Veins

    After the gray and green paint dries, you can add “veins” to the marble. Pour some white paint onto a plate, and lightly dip an edge of the feather into the paint. As mentioned, you can also use a twisted up piece of paper instead of a feather. Dab the paint onto the surface in a series of “tree branch” patterns. Be sure to lightly dab the feather in the paint, and lightly dab it onto the surface, as you don’t want the veins to be too heavy. As you can see, one of the vein patterns in my marble surface was a bit too thick, so you should be careful about how much paint you pick up with the feature.

    Step 4: Add a Custom Touch

    You can even be creative/silly and create specific patterns with the veins.

    After this dries, you can coat the surface with a clear gloss to protect the paint. Enjoy!

    By Scarlett (Australia)

    Media Gallery

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Finding a different finish for home decorating projects can be time-consuming and expensive. It’s not surprising that many homeowners decide to go with wallpaper or basic finishes for painting. Fortunately, there’s a finish option that can be learned easily and doesn’t require expensive tools or supplies. This option is a faux marble finish.

    One of the great advantages to learning how to create faux marble finishes is that once learned, this skill can be used to give a marble-like appearance to any surface in the house – walls, counter tops or even furniture.

    Here are some basic steps to creating a faux marble finish.

    First, gather your tools. To create a pale marbling effect (which is a good way for a beginner to start), you’ll need the following:

    • Eggshell paint for walls or undercoat for metal or wood for a background;
    • Artists’ oil paints in various shades of gray, plus the color amber, to create the veins usually seen in marble;
    • A translucent glaze to give a natural-looking sheen to the finish;
    • Several kinds of brushes, including household paint brushes, a soft flat artist’s brush, a soft makeup brush, a natural sponge, and some lint-free rags or cloths;
    • Glass paper and white spirit, a colorless organic liquid solvent distilled from petroleum and used primarily as paint thinner.

    Start the process by mixing paint. A marble effect results from applying several layers of tinted glaze, mottling and veins over a white or pale-colored base-coat. You then dab on oil paint or eggshell paint that’s been tinted to give gradual variations of tone to the background color. The brushes and natural sponge are used to texturize the base-coat color.

    To create an opaque glaze good for walls or counter tops, combine 3 parts oil-based scumble (a type of opaque glaze) with 5 parts white eggshell and 2 parts white spirit. Mix paint and glaze first, then add white spirit until the mixture is creamy. For a more translucent glaze, tint the paint-and-glaze mixture with stain such as the artists’ umber or other oil paint and then add an equal amount of white spirit.

    Follow this sequence of steps in the process:

    Rub the surface to be painted carefully to remove splinters on wood or counter tops and any paint flakes on walls. Apply undercoat or eggshell paint in a suitable color. Take extra care with this foundation step and the marble effect will look better when finished.

    If necessary, apply a second coat of the base. Tint this coat slightly with gray oil paint and use the natural sponge to create some mottled areas.

    Use an artist’s flat brush and artists’ oil paint to apply a random network of diagonal veins across the base surface. With a pale base coat, apply dark gray and burnt sierra. If creating a black marble effect, apply white and green for the veins.

    Apply dark colors to strengthen some of the veins. Then soften the appearance by brushing over the surface with a dry soft brush or a soft feather. Then create variations in tone using a natural sponge to lift off color or apply more paint there it’s needed.

    Finally, finish off the faux marble effect with a translucent glaze tinted with light umber. Choose a few patches to give an extra coat of glaze for a natural weathered appearance. Protect the special finish by applying first a coat of clear gloss varnish, and then a coat of satin varnish. These final two layers will add more depth and sheen to the effect, making it look even more like genuine marble.

    Since the materials for this technique are so inexpensive, you can experience with different shades and try bringing out more of the veins. With patience and practice, you should have some impressive results.

    This article was co-authored by William & Shannon Latil. William & Shannon Latil are Furniture Refinishing & Home Remodeling Specialists and the Founders of Furniture Refinishing Services based in Houston, Texas. With over 30 years of experience, William and Shannon specialize in repairing and restoring wood furniture, refinishing kitchen cabinets, remodeling kitchens, and building live-edge wooden tables. William and Shannon have won Awards for Excellence from the Better Business Bureau and the Houston Chronicle Best Small Business Award. Their work has also been featured in Houston Press Magazine – Kitchen Design. Additionally, the Furniture Refinishing Services team has conducted major refinishing work on venues such as NRG Stadium and Minute Maid Park.

    There are 18 references cited in this article, which can be found at the bottom of the page.

    wikiHow marks an article as reader-approved once it receives enough positive feedback. This article received 20 testimonials and 100% of readers who voted found it helpful, earning it our reader-approved status.

    This article has been viewed 796,227 times.

    Whitewashing furniture is a great way to revive an old piece of wooden furniture while keeping the wood grain visible. Dry brushing uses ordinary paint to achieve a similar effect, while painting furniture white using more typical methods creates an opaque, even appearance. Any of these methods can be achieved with a few basic supplies and a few hours of work.

    Sponge painting is the decorative application or removal of paint glaze onto, or from the walls (or other flat surfaces).

    The technique derives its name from the basic tool – a sponge, and its character from the kind of sponge you use – a sea sponge.

    Sponging was one of the first decorative painting techniques to gain mass appeal in the 1980s.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    And although sponging in high-contrast paint colors and with a heavy-handed technique has since fallen out of favor, this finish is still popular and can look very relevant if you follow the color advice and use updated color combinations as suggested on this website.

    In fact, even today, sponging is usually the first faux finish most people attempt in their homes, and no wonder: it’s the most versatile decorative paint finish that’s quick, easy and inexpensive to create, with materials and tools readily available in any home improvement center or paint store.

    Sponge Painting Is
    Just a Smart Finish

    Paint sponging produces highly textured finishes that offer not only decorative value, but some practical benefits as well.

    For example, they can:

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    • camouflage many flaws and disguise surface imperfections, making them an ideal painting solution for old walls in poor condition, and a cheap alternative to drywall replacement.
    • hide dirt in areas prone to getting soiled and stained – kitchens, hallways, mudrooms and children’s rooms.
    • withstand the use in high-traffic areas because oil glazes are durable, latex glazes can be topcoated with a sealer for extra protection, and the random patterns are easy to touch up inconspicuously if needed.

    Sponging Does Not Always
    Look Like Sponging

    Sponge painting techniques can be done on any flat, painted surface – walls, ceilings, floors and even furniture.

    The look can range from delicate to bold, and can be adapted to any decorating style (the final result will depend on the colors you choose, the transparency and glossiness of your glaze, and how heavily you apply it).

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    For the most common sponging process, sponging on, you use a large sea sponge to dab a glaze onto a painted surface.

    See how the irregular shape and surface of a sea sponge has created a lively flecked effect in the photo example?

    If you do it right, it should look like irregular mottled texture rather than a series of the same sponge imprints.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    For sponging off, a related but quieter technique, you first roll the glaze over a painted surface and then lift off some of the wet glaze with the sponge.

    This treatment will produce a subtler, softly dappled finish where the emphasis is more on the color play than on the texture.

    In addition, these 2 methods can be combined for an even greater visual depth, or as part of other decorative painting techniques (for example, faux marble effects).

    Ready to Learn Paint Sponging?
    Then Let’s Get Started!

    How to Sponge Paint ON the Walls
    Sponging on (also known as the positive, or additive method) can be done using one, two or even 4 glaze colors. Here you will find step by step instructions for the basic and advanced techniques, and modifications for dense and barely-there applications.

    How to Sponge Paint OFF the Walls
    Sponging off (also called the negative, or subtractive method) is usually done with an oil-based glaze, but can work in water-based mediums in some situations. You will learn several ways to lift the glaze off for different decorative effects, and to combine the additive and subtractive techniques in one application.

    Tips and Tricks for Sponge Painting Walls
    Even though sponge painting is considered one of the easiest painting techniques to pull off even for beginners, many people still do it wrong. So if you don’t want your own project to join the unofficial Hall of Shame, use these professional secrets for a smoother sponging process.

    Examples of Sponge Painting Techniques
    Different strokes for different folks – you will agree once you see how many effects a simple sponge + glaze can create on the walls to suit any taste! This page will give you several paint sponging ideas and examples to help you find just the right finish for your situation.

    • Faux Painting
    • Painting Tips
    • Choosing Color
    • Decorative Wall Art
      • Sponge Painting
      • Painting With Stencils
      • Budget Wall Art
      • Inexpensive Wall Art
      • Decorative Stencils
      • Sunflower Sponge Painting
      • Unique Wall Art
      • Online Stencils
      • Canvas Wall Art
      • Bathroom Sponge Paint
      • Seascape Stencils
      • Fabric Wall Art
      • Scorpio Stencil
      • Stenciling Baby’s Room
      • How To Sponge Paint
      • Two-Tone Patina 2
      • Artwork And Paint
      • Chalkboard Paints
      • Entryway Wall Art
      • Paint-by-Number Art
      • Checkerboard Patterns
      • How to Frame Artwork
      • Silk Painting
      • Family Portrait Wall Art
    • Wall Murals
    • Painting Supplies
    • Exterior Paint Color
    • Interior Painting

    Do you want to use a creative finish on your walls that does not require a lot of work? Sponge painting is one of the examples of decorative finishes that are quick and easy to create. Examples of sponge painting can be found on walls, furniture, and even accessories.

    Tools For Sponge Painting

    Taking a look at finished work will help you create the look you want for your walls or furniture. To use the sponge painting technique, you will need a dark color of latex based paint for your bottom coat and a lighter color of paint for your top coat. Latex paint can be easily cleaned with water and is easier to work with than oil based paints. You will also need brushes or a roller and a sponge.

    How To Sponge Paint

    Paint your base coat on the wall or furniture using your brushes or roller. Allow this coat to dry thoroughly. Next, pour some of the top coat color into a pan and dip the sponge into the paint. Blot the sponge on the edge of the pan or use a cloth to remove excess paint.

    Now, dab the sponge onto the wall. You will have to experiment with the amount of pressure you apply untilsponge painting you get an effect you like. If you don’t like the effect you are creating, take another look at your sponge painting examples. You can easily repaint the wall with your base coat of paint and try again. However, sometimes you just need to sponge on more paint to get the effect you want. You also may need to rotate the sponge a bit to soften the edges.

    Other Wall Treatment Options

    If you don’t care for the look of sponge painting, there are other types of decorative finishes you can use. Glazing and ragging are simple techniques that can really dress up a wall. Stenciling can be a bit more time consuming, but can create elaborate faux effects.

    To find out more about faux painting, don’t forget to read the other articles on this topic on this site.

    Be sure to check out 2010 color trends to help you choose the perfect color for your painting experience.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    The Spruce / Margot Cavin

    • Working Time: 10 hrs
    • Total Time: 2 days
    • Skill Level: Beginner
    • Estimated Cost: $100-$ok150

    Getting a little color on your walls is a great idea for when you’re looking to breathe new life into a room. Usually, it’s a matter of coating walls with a solid color of paint, adding contrasting woodwork, or creating an accent wall that uses another color. An option that is not much harder than painting walls a single color, which can give you stunning results, is sponge painting. It is an especially effective approach for creating an eye-catching feature wall that will stand out as the star attraction of a room.

    Using a simple sponge-paint technique, you can quickly transform an otherwise boring, white-walled space into one of the most exciting areas in your home. Most sponge-painting projects use two colors, but you can also experiment with multiple colors applied over one another. You can use as many as five different colors. Perhaps the only drawback is it adds a few extra steps and some time to your painting project.

    What Is Sponge Painting?

    Sponge painting is a technique that can create a beautiful array of ombre color effects—one color blending into another. It involves nothing more than applying a base coat of color, then using sponges to dab on another color, so the underlying color shows through. Varying the colors, the dabbing technique, and the sponges used gives you creative freedom.


    Because sponging adds texture and depth to the walls, this is a good technique for walls with some irregularities in the finish. Although sponge painting can mask minor flaws, it will not hide major wall damage. Fix any damaged wall sections before you start painting. Like any painting project, use the same preparation steps as you would for ordinary painting projects: clean the walls and mask off surfaces you want to protect. Also, practice the sponging technique with your color choices on a piece of scrap cardboard or drywall before you apply it to the walls.

    Safety Considerations

    If you choose to use alkyd-based paint, you might need to use thinner. Wear a mask with a charcoal filter to avoid breathing the thinner fumes. Also, wear plastic or rubber gloves to avoid getting the sticky glaze (or paint thinner) on your hands.

    What Is Alkyd Paint?

    Alkyd paint is an enamel finish similar in consistency to oil paint. Alkyd paint does not contain oil. It is not typically used on walls and is more commonly used on metal or wood. Alkyd paint is tougher than oil-based paint, which is great for a surface that needs something more durable (like a child’s room). The final result of an alkyd painted wall is a hard, semi-gloss finish.

    A metallic faux finish can give a room the look of brushed metal, creating the rustic look of hand-formed metal or an ultramodern appearance, depending on your furniture and appliances. Follow the simple instructions below to successfully create a metallic faux finish on any wall.

    Step 1 – Select the Metallic Glaze and Base

    The base coat determines what kind of metal the faux finish will resemble when you’re done. This is what makes a metallic finish different from other faux finishes or glazing projects. To create a specific kind of metal look, you need the correct two components between the metallic glaze and the base coat. The following base coats are what are needed to create the metallic faux finish of your choice:

    Reddish Brown – This base coat will create a copper finish that is both rich in color and looks like copper

    Dark Mustard – This color will create a finish that looks gold

    Gray – This creates the classic and timeless stainless steel or silver metallic faux finish

    Step 2 – Prepare to Paint

    You must begin with a clean surface or else paint may not adhere correctly. Prepare to wash away oil, dirt, and grime that has found its way onto the wall. Mix some mild detergent with water and begin wiping down the wall with a sponge, working from the top down.

    Next, remove all of the furniture from the room. Place painting tape around windows, doors, molding, and wherever you do not want to paint. Place a drop cloth on the floor.

    Step 3 – Apply the Base Coat

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Apply the base coat on the wall just like you would any normal paint. Pour the base coat into a paint tray, and use a roller to apply it to the wall. Take special care to evenly cover the entire wall. You can use a normal paint brush or small roller to get into and around smaller areas. Let the base coat completely dry before continuing to the next step.

    Step 4 – Create the Metallic Faux Finish

    This is where the project begins to get fun. Pour the glaze into a clean paint tray. Apply a little of the metallic glaze onto the sea sponge, and remove the excess by patting it on newspapers.

    Sponge the glaze onto the wall in random patterns by daubing it. Use varied pressure to create a textured and more natural look to the metallic finish. Keep in mind that the base coat should show through, so take care not to cover the entire wall. Heavy application resembles natural metal patina, but you should use this technique sparingly.

    Learning how to sponge paint clouds is fun, easy and will add texture and realism to your painting. Clouds are a basic image to start and add charm to a child’s room, bathroom or breakfast nook. Follow these instructions to sponge paint clouds on any indoor wall in your home.

    Step 1 – Paint the Sky Background

    Using the color of your choice, paint the sky with a roller. For a more realistic look, choose sky blue, but consider other colors for a more magical, mystical look, like pink, peach or orange. Paint on a piece of practice board or canvas as well, and allow the wall and practice surface to dry for 24 hours before sponge painting clouds.

    Step 2 – Mix the Glaze and White Paint

    Combine 4 parts glaze and 1 part white paint for the clouds. Thoroughly mix with a stir stick until they are blended completely. Start with a small amount first to see how much you will use per cloud.

    Step 3 – Practice and Prep

    Dampen the cheesecloth and sea sponges with water, wringing out well. Dip the sponges into the glazed paint and dab onto the practice board, experimenting with the way you twist your hand, layer the paint and apply pressure.

    Step 4 – Painting Clouds

    Look at pictures of clouds or walk outside on a cloudy day and gaze upwards, noticing how clouds are generally brightest in the center and straighter on the bottom and more billowy and wispy towards the top. Start painting clouds at the bottom, dabbing a somewhat straight line as long as you want your cloud to be. Work upwards, twisting the sponge up and out, creating varying textures.

    Step 5 – Finish off with Cheesecloth

    Wad the damp cheesecloth into a ball and dab over the clouds, using it to soften the paint and blur the edges. Apply more heavily towards the center, fading and softening towards the edges. Make sure the center of the clouds are thicker with paint. Add wispy curls growing out from the sides.

    Step 6 – Vary Sizes and Shapes on your Wall

    For a more realistic look, paint several clouds with varying height and width. Use different techniques and try not to place the clouds equal distance from eachother. Avoid painting a cloud in the exact center of the wall for an asymmetrical design that is more natural. Add wispy tendrils of clouds between larger clouds.

    Invite friends and family to join you in your sponge painting adventure, learning from each other while having fun and changing the look your home!

    Which means we get all the benefits of a beautifully worn finish without any of the gritty sandpaper/paint residue!

    Wet distressing chalk paint checks off all the boxes.

    – It’s easy!
    – It’s quick!
    – And, there’s nothing to sweep or dust or vacuum up afterwards!!

    If you are a lazy DIY-er like me then you’re going to enjoy this furniture distressing tutorial!

    Plus, I’m going to let you in on a little secret.

    The distressing marks you’ll get when you wet distress look so much better than when you use sandpaper to distress your furniture. 😉 Wet distressing really does give you the BEST distressed look for your antique furniture.


    How do you wet distress a piece of painted furniture? It’s easy!

    In short, to get a naturally weathered painted surface with the wet distress method, you take a damp cloth and gently rub back your recently dried chalk paint.

    Wet distressing allows the water to slightly soften the paint so you can then slowly wipe it away.

    Once the chalk paint has been removed, it will reveal the original wood finish underneath or any underlining paint colors you may have applied.

    It’s easy to run a damp rag along your furniture edges when you’re wet distressing. You can also gently rub any flat surface on your piece to create some fantastic natural looking age!

    And honestly that’s the BIG difference. Sandpaper can’t do that for you!

    Sandpaper will give you what looks like chicken scratches.

    I’m slightly deviating here. But, here is one of my very first furniture makeovers. It was a painted farm table that I tried to distress using sandpaper. Promise not to judge!?

    I can laugh at myself now but after you take a peek at it you’re going to nod and say, “Carrie, you’re right! THAT is a great example of what sandpaper chicken scratch looks like.”

    It’s also a prime example of how you SHOULDN’T distress your furniture!. 😉

    Alright, on with THIS furniture makeover!

    Here’s what I started with. A lovely library style farmhouse table.

    It was love at first site.

    I loved her curvy base and her scrolly and chunky legs.

    She had a beautiful cherry finish, but she was scratched up quite a bit along the sides.

    Some of the grooves were rather deep and not in a cute “that adds character” kind of way.

    So, I decided to paint this antique furniture piece but in a way that would still pay homage to her original wood finish. Choosing to distress the painted table and reveal some of her beautiful wood grain seemed like the best of both worlds.

    Distressing chalk paint is a fantastic way to make wood furniture look rustic and in my humble opinion, wet distressing furniture is the best way to make it look as natural as possible!

    Here are the supplies I used to wet distress this farmhouse desk.

    Learn how to create faux verdigris…the easy way! So simple but gives such an elegant and realistic look.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    I’m back today to share one of two tutorials I promised in this post I shared last week: “How To Paint Light Fixtures (without taking them down!)”

    If you missed that post, pop on over and see the tutorial I did in that post for changing the color of your light fixture with paint…and yep, without taking down the fixture. 🙂

    Today I’m I’m sharing how to create faux verdigris and I’ll be back on Thursday sharing the faux patina finish.
    You can see both in the post I linked above.

    This is how my light fixture started…..

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    And how it looked after I gave it the faux verdigris finish….

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    So much fun and truly so easy to do.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    I’ve created a video on how to create faux verdigris finish because I thought it’d be easier to show you how than tell you how. 😉
    But I’ll also give step by step instructions here too.

    How to Create Faux Verdigris Finish:

    1. If the item you are giving the faux verdigris finish to is not already a bronze or copper color, you may want to give it a quick spray of Oil Rubbed Bronze or Copper Spray paint. If it happens to be a light fixture like mine that you don’t want to remove from the wall, you can use something like this product to brush on. Or any other liquid based metallic paint of your choosing.
    2. For this technique, I used Baroque Art Gilder’s Paste Wax.
    3. I create a brush-able product by adding a tiny bit of mineral spirits to the gilder’s paste.
    4. Using a small artist’s paint brush, brush on this gilder’s paste liberally. However, you don’t want full coverage so keep that in mind as you are applying.
      Let some of the bronze show through.
    5. Let this dry.
    6. Next, using an old t-shirt or rag, buff away a bit of the past wax to let more of the bronze/copper show through.
    7. Make a mixture of water/white paint, preferably chalk style paint because it has the correct texture finish for this next step.
      (see video)
    8. With a bit larger artist’s brush, brush on the very watered down white paint. Let it go into the creases but don’t apply so much that it turns white.
      You want it to be almost haze-like.
    9. Using an old rag or t-shirt, wipe some of the white paint away if you’ve gotten too much on there.
    10. Once that is dry, move on to the next and final step. Apply gold paint.
    11. For this step, you will use another small artist’s brush just slightly dipped into the gold paint. Wipe most away on a paper towel and then with a very light hand, hit the high points on the piece. You can apply as little or as much of this as you like.
    12. You are done! You can apply a sealer at this point but it’s really not necessary with these products. A little finish up buffing might be nice.

    NOTE: Keep in mind, this is just a guideline. You can go darker on the green/blue or lighter. You can use more white paint or less and you can add more gold “highlights” or fewer.
    I went a little heavier on the green/blue (gilder’s paste) on my chandelier than I did in the video. It’s a personal choice and will probably vary by piece and by style, so use your judgment and do what you like! 🙂

    Painting on the gilder’s paste.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Rubbing back some of the paste to reveal more of the bronze.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Adding the watered down white paint….

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    You can see that hazy white here….

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Finished up with gold….

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Okay, onto the video.

    Let me first say, I’m SO not a pro at this!! 😉 And I don’t love my voice…or hearing my voice, lol. Eeek.
    And I’m sure there are ums and awkward pauses and such but hopefully the tutorial will be easy for you to follow and understand regardless. 🙂

    I hope that made sense! 🙂

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    If you have any questions at all, please don’t hesitate to ask in the comments below. (or email, if you prefer)

    More posts in the “back to basics” series:

    Sharing is caring!

    • Share
    • Tweet
    • Pin

    How to Create An Antique Finish on Wood Furniture With Painting

    Have you ever purchased anything new and wished it had an antique appearance? A character can’t be bought, but it may be imitated with an ancient paint finish. Using paint and stain, you can easily antique a piece of modern wood furniture and make it seem distressed.

    It’s important not to overdo it when it comes to making wood seem worn. Any wooden furniture that you want to seem old may be painted using the process detailed here.

    Get the furniture ready

    We can start to remove any hardware and use painter’s tape to mask off any places you don’t wish to paint. Then it is better to clean the item thoroughly to remove any dust or filth. Before moving on to the following step, you should make sure the furniture is thoroughly dry.


    There are a number of instructions out there that claim you don’t need to sand, and there are also a lot of primers and paints that claim they don’t need to be sanded. However, as lecturers have demonstrated throughout the years, sanding is required.

    It is important to sand your surfaces with 150-grit sandpaper before beginning any painting endeavor.

    Sand lightly to eliminate any gloss, which will aid in the adhesion of the paint. But be cautious not to gouge the surface: you’re only attempting to roughen it up a little to give the primer something to stick to, not to strip it.

    Then, by using a sanding block, you completely remove the previous painted finish or stain in high-wear areas like the edges and high points.

    The idea is to get to the wood’s bare surface and allow the coloring ingredient to permeate. If you want to speed up the process, you may use a power sander.

    Apply the bare wood color

    After you’ve finished sanding, wipe the surface off with a tack cloth to remove any residue. People complained that using a paper towel is improper and speculated on whether a lint-free cloth would be preferable.

    It’s time to apply wood stain or darker paint as a colorant to low places and regions where wood has been exposed after the preliminary sanding is complete. People often use this job to get comparable effects with any dark wood stain or paint.

    If you’re using a dark color, add a little water to thin it down. A clean cloth is an ideal tool for applying the coloring ingredient. You can use a moist towel, wipe away any excess.

    Don’t be concerned if the color bleeds into the surrounding paint. This will be covered by the following application of paint.

    Paint the main color

    It’s time to start painting! The next steps will be easier if the coating is thinner. You should apply thin coats of semi-gloss latex paint with paint brushes. You should remember that the lighter your hand, the better your antiquing will seem.

    Thick layers of paint will make sanding and achieving the desired appearance more difficult. Allow 24 hours for the first coat to dry before moving on to the next stage.

    If there are any drips or residue on the item, you must sand in-between applications. You should use a new tack cloth and the same sanding block.

    Apply the second coat

    A small coating of the second coat should also be applied. Allow it to thoroughly dry before continuing.

    The second coat of paint will guarantee that all of the surplus colorings have been properly covered and aren’t leaking through, resulting in a more natural-looking ultimate result.

    If you’re dealing with unpainted wood furniture, you might want to use a different color for the second coat so that more layers show through when you distress it.

    After that, sanding and buffing is the stage where the magic happens. Buff the edges with a 150-grit sanding block until the dark regions begin to show through.

    Begin slowly and take a step back to assess the disheveled appearance. Excessive sanding should be avoided. You may softly rub an extra coloring agent into the flat paint throughout the pieces to make the finish seem even more old and rustic.

    Create An Antique Finish on Wood Furniture With Painting

    You should allow two days for the paint to thoroughly dry. Scuff corners, edges, and details using a medium-grit sanding sponge where the item would naturally exhibit wear.

    The key is to apply two coats of color, then sand the edges, corners, and curves where natural wear would occur to show the lighter base coat.

    To add to the impression, sand a bit further to show hints of unpainted wood. It is better for you to continue until you achieve the desired distressed effect. You can achieve this weathered effect on any new or antique object if you know how to paint and sand.

    You are using an outdated browser. Please upgrade your browser to view this site and improve your browsing experience.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Painting your furniture can breathe new life into a room at a fraction of the cost of buying new furniture. With the right preparation, high quality paint and the just-right paint colors, a makeover of your favorite piece is within reach. Repaint a dresser, chairs, a wooden bed frame or a battered coffee table, and your favorite painted wood furniture will enjoy a colorful second life.

    From the classic Simply White OC-117 to the dramatic Black Beauty 2128-10, you’ve got 3,500+ colors to choose from. You might even want to consider adding a pop of dimension to a part of your furniture–think a tabletop or dresser drawers–with Studio Finishes ® Metallic Glaze (620), a metallic paint for furniture that dries quickly to a glimmering, translucent metallic lustre.

    Step #1: Prepare the Surface

    When it comes to repainting furniture, the surface needs to be clean, dry and ready to accept paint. Use a gentle grease remover to remove any grime, then follow with a fresh water rinse to make sure the surface is clear of any remnants of the cleaner. Use a damp sponge for a final wipe down, and let everything dry thoroughly.

    After cleaning and ensuring the piece is 100% dry, it is time to sand. Using a medium sandpaper (we like 100- to 150-grit), sand down your surfaces a little—not enough to sand away the current finish entirely, but enough to give the primer a little more grit to stick to. Wipe away any dust with a slightly damp cloth, then let dry.

    Make sure you repair any cracks, joints, or nail holes with a good wood-patching compound. After the compound has thoroughly dried, sand it down to make it even with the surrounding wood.

    Step #2: Prime the Surface

    ADVANCE ® Interior Primer (790) has great adhesion for wood surfaces, providing the proper foundation for any ADVANCE finish. Plus, it can be sanded and levels well, ensuring a smooth finish and helping to mask minor imperfections. Painting furniture a darker color? Use a tinted primer as your base.

    Step #3: Consider Sheen

    Sheen is an important consideration in addition to the color. To help camouflage minor imperfections, or to give a vintage flavor to your piece, a lower sheen is a good choice. For a sleek, modern feel, a high-gloss gives a design edge. Furniture takes more abuse than the typical wall, so the best paint for furniture is Benjamin Moore’s ADVANCE Interior paint, which offers multiple sheen options to suit your aesthetic: matte, satin, semi-gloss or high gloss.

    Step #4: Paint Your Furniture

    Professional painters prefer ADVANCE Interior paint for painting wood furniture: it offers a durable, furniture-like finish that is easy to apply and easy to clean. ADVANCE works beautifully for painting laminate furniture as well. You can find ADVANCE exclusively at your local Benjamin Moore retailer, where ADVANCE is available in all 3,500+ colors Benjamin Moore has to offer.

    Tip: It is easy to miss areas when you are painting furniture, so if possible, raise the piece onto a table top surface so you can easily view from all angles to ensure no spots are missed.

    Also known as ‘Striй’

    A decorative paint-effect created by dragging the bristles of a brush through wet glaze.

    Learn how to do it with our free, step-by-step, illustrated tutorial,
    containing pictures of the 2 easy steps required to create the dragging effect.


          • Dust sheets or similar material to protect carpets furniture etc.
          • Disposable plastic gloves (optional).
          • A bucket or bowl of clean water plus rags for cleaning.
          • A tin of paint thinned with transparent glaze according to manufacturers instructions.
          • A roller and tray and/or a brush.
          • A long-bristled brush.

    Dragging is a basic form of wood graining. It is particularly attractive when used to frame panels of other paint-effects.
    With large areas, it may be easier & faster to use a worn paperhangers brush or a large wall brush, following the techniques described here.

    Like all paint-effects, dragging can be a little messy, so wear old clothing or overalls.
    Also: remove or cover all carpets, furniture and other valuables from the room.

    Prepare the surface that is to be painted, apply at least 2 coats of mid-sheen paint in your chosen colour and allow to dry thoroughly.

    Water-based paint dries quickly so start on your smallest walls first; your speed will improve with experience.

    Have a bucket or bowl of clean water and some rags close at hand for cleaning purposes.


    In this technique the topcoat, or glaze, is patterned by dragging a long-bristled brush down the surface of the wall.
    Where the brush makes contact, the glaze is lifted revealing the base coat.

    It is advisable to get someone else to paint the wall with the mixed glaze ahead of you, so that you can concentrate on creating the effect.
    If you must work alone, paint small sections, 3ft (1 metre) wide & stop the dragging process 6 inches (150mm) short of the leading edge.
    Then paint the next 3ft (1 metres) strip, and continue the effect.

    Apply the mixed glaze evenly with a brush or roller.
    Brush a small amount of glaze onto the dragging brush.
    Hold the dragging brush, with the bristles pointing upwards at a very shallow angle against the surface.
    Start at the top of your wall, and simply drag the brush down to the bottom (in one single, straight stroke if possible).
    Repeat the process over the surface, keeping the brush strokes parallel.
    If you have difficulty keeping the lines parallel, overlap the previous lines just a little, and concentrate on following these lines.

    You will probably find that the glaze has been wiped out too much at the top & that you were unable to wipe out any glaze from the bottom.
    This is a common problem and is often a telltale sign that an amateur has created the effect. Here’s how to correct it: –

    Bottom edge – You probably couldn’t wipe the glaze from the bottom edge because the skirting board pushed the bristles away from the wall.
    Simply start again from the bottom edge, drag the brush up the wall but this time gradually lift the bush away from the wall as you go.
    This should fade the new brush-strokes into the old.
    Repeat this along the bottom edge of the wall but make sure that each stroke is of a different length to avoid creating a band-like effect.
    If this takes out too much glaze try the top edge technique as below.

    Top edge – Dab some more glaze along the top edge (don’t be concerned about spoiling other paintwork, it can be cleaned or re-painted later).
    Put the tips of the bristles as close as possible to the ceiling and move your brush up and down the first 2 inches (50mm) a few times.
    Then drag the brush down again, but this time, gradually lift the bush from the wall as you go.
    This should fade the new brush-strokes into the old.
    This takes a little practise, but it makes a world of difference.

    Repeat the process over the area to be decorated, lapping-in on wet edges.
    Occasionally wipe the brush on a piece of cloth to prevent a build up of glaze on the bristles. This will help to maintain a uniform finish.

    Allow the first wall to dry before starting another to prevent spoiling the finished effect.

    Allow the paint to dry before protecting with a coat of clear glaze or varnish (optional).

    Introduction: Faux Stone Painting

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    When I replaced my ancient one piece range with new appliances I was left with a big swath of unfinished drywall. Looking at my options and not liking most of them, I decided to paint a faux stone wall. I’m pretty happy with the result, and even more important, so is my family.

    Update: I’ve been using the stove for a few months now. I’ve had plenty of splashes and spills and have had no problem keeping the painting clean. It’s also been well heated and steamed. Nothing seems to affect it.

    Step 1: Before You Paint

    A few notes before you start:

    Clean the area really well. Stray grit or webs will muck up your paint.

    Paint before installing permanent appliances or furniture, if possible.

    Use a paint for the base coat that is also a primer.

    Mix the colors you already have to make other colors and shades.

    Test colors and techniques on spots that won’t show.

    Always have clean water and a rag handy!

    Step 2: What You’ll Need

    Good house paint. Choose your finish, interior or exterior, and several colors. You’ll need at least one background color, one highlight color and one contrasting color for the grout. I got sample sizes of rust, off white, gray and tan.

    A regular sponge

    One medium paintbrush for large areas

    Smaller brushes for details

    Pencil and eraser

    Dish of clean water

    Step 3: Painting Stone

    1) Sketch your design on the wall in pencil. For freeform stones, just draw them in. For bricks or angular designs, you can use a ruler and/or painter’s tape. Make the grout about 1/2 inch wide.

    2) Paint the base color of all the stones. Don’t worry about perfection. You’ll make the lines neater when you paint the grout. Let dry.

    3) Dab some of the highlight color on your bricks with the sea sponge. Work in small sections.

    4) When the highlight paint is nearly dry take a damp regular sponge and wipe gently in small circles. This will spread some of the highlight color and make the stone more realistic.

    Step 4: Sketches

    These are my original sketches. I just found them on my phone so I thought I should share them. (I originally was going to paint a trellis, but decided against it.)

    Step 5: Add the Grout

    5) Continue until all the stones are highlighted. Let dry.

    6) Paint your grout color in between all the stones. Let dry.

    7) If you want them to look more realistic, paint a dark line (shadow) on one side and on the underside of each stone. You can also paint a highlight in a lighter color than the grout opposite the dark lines. Use a small round paintbrush. Let dry.

    Step 6: Finishing the Wall

    8) Make light and dark glazes (transparent paint) by watering down one light and one dark paint color. Test the glazes on a spot that won’t show.

    9) Paint the glazes in a random manner with your sponges. This will add dimension. Wipe off what you don’t like. Dab up excess paint.

    10) Touch up any areas that need work and let dry fully.

    11) Optional: Apply 3-4 coats of varnish if your painting will get a lot of wear. (Like a stove backsplash!)

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Give a patina of age to items in and around your home with simple paint techniques.

    A door with character

    Materials you will need:

    • wood stain in imbuia
    • plastic bowl
    • turpentine
    • paintbrush
    • pine door
    • universal paint stain in red and green
    • wooden or plastic spatula
    • dark wood filler
    • petroleum jelly
    • white candle
    • PVA paint
    • paint scraper
    • hammer
    • chisel
    • acrylic paint glaze medium
    • dark brown acrylic paint
    • old rag
    • steel wool

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 1

    Pour a little wood stain into a plastic bowl and thin it slightly with turpentine so the wood will absorb it more readily. Apply an even coat of the mixture over the door and leave to dry slightly. Repeat until you are satisfied with the colour.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 2

    Drip small amounts of red and green stain onto the wood. Use sparingly.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 3

    Paint the stain into the wood using a dry paintbrush. This will help to give it an aged appearance.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 4

    Use a spatula to apply wood filler to the wood in places to give it extra texture. Apply it with the grain and leave to dry once you are satisfied with the appearance.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 5

    Use your fingers to apply petroleum jelly in places that would normally be the first to show signs of wear, such as grooves and edges. Then rub hard over the surface of the door with a white candle. The petroleum jelly and candle wax will precent the paint from adhering to the surface of the wood, creating the attractive chopped-paint appearance.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 6

    Apply a fairly thick coat of PVA paint over the wood filler, petroleum jelly and candle wax, covering the entire door. Use both colours and paint some parts of the door in one colour and others in the alternative shade. Blend the colours as you go, then leave to dry completely.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 7

    Once the paint has dried, scrape over the surface of the door with a paint scraper. The candle wax and petroleum jelly will come off easily.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 8

    Brush off the loose paint using a dry paintbrush. Give the surface of the door a distressed look using tools such as a hammer, chisel and paint scraper to make dents, scrapes and splinters in the wood.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 9

    Once you are satisfied with the result, mix acrylic paint glaze medium with a little dark brown acrylic paint. Paint the entire door, then wipe most of it off with an old rag and steel wool to expose the bottom layer of paint.

    Sandstone Pot

    Materials you will need:

    • white PVA paint
    • universal paint stain in brown or yellow
    • acrylic paint glaze medium
    • four containers for the paint
    • terracotta pot
    • paintbrush
    • textured sponge
    • paper plates
    • artist’s paintbrush
    • dark brown acrylic paint
    • spirits
    • medicine dropper

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 1

    Paint the pot with an even coat of off-white paint and leave to dry.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 2

    Use a damp sponge to dab on the light ochre paint. The off-white base coat should still be visible in places. Keep a paper plate handy and dab the sponge on it to remove any excess paint before you start.

    Step 3

    Repeat with dark ochre shade.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 4

    Use a dry artist’s paintbrush and a little dark brown acrylic paint to give the pot an aged appearance. Concentrate on the edges and lower part of the pot and dab on the colour, instead of painting it on.

    Step 5

    Lay the pot on its side and dab on the light brown paint, again using a damp sponge.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Step 6

    Concentrating on one area at a time, apply spirits to the wet paint using a medicine dropper. The spirits will react with the wet paint and form whorls that resemble the patterns on sandstone. leave to dry before you turn the pot and work on the next section, to prevent the paint from running. Continue until the entire pot has been covered, then leave to dry completely. If you are not satisfied with the result, you can dab more acrylic paint onto the pot in places.

    Referenced from Gallo images / IDEAS Magazine

    Browse 1000’s of products available to you. Select your country to Shop Online.

    The first in a new series, How To Thursday that incorporates both brand new and updated posts from the archives. Let’s begin with an updated and newly edited post that seems to be a topic of interest to many fellow furniture painters!

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    I’ve been asked quite a few times to write a post on how to create a smooth finish when using chalk paint (or chalk mineral paint). The steps below will create a super smooth finish without brush strokes! It also creates a hard as nails topcoat. This technique actually works for any type of paint (except only sand the paint if you are using chalk paint).

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Wipe piece clean. I typically take a paper towel and go over a piece to get rid of cobwebs, etc. I use a Mr. Clean sponge to get off any stuck on grime, glue or residue. I’m telling you, those sponges are miracle workers!

    Wood filler. If a piece is missing any veneer or is deeply scratched, apply wood filler and let dry. Sand off wood filler and repeat the process until surface is smooth. You can use regular wood filler from Home Depot, or try the Dixie Mud. They both will do the job.

    Mix your paint. If your chalk paint has been sitting in your workroom for a long period, you may need to add a splash of water (about 2 tablespoons) into the paint and stir.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Apply the paint. Many chalk painters use a round, natural bristle brush to apply the chalk paint in a more haphazard way to create texture and I do enjoy this technique and frankly, chalk paint is perfect for those aged finishes.

    However, for a smooth finish, I apply my paint using a synthetic, short handled brush with slanted bristles. For the first coat, work it in back and forth or in different directions to cover but the final pass through needs to be in the same direction. With even strokes, go over the paint stroking in one direction.

    Apply the second coat and finish by stroking in the opposite direction from the first coat. It is very important to make sure your paint is not too thick when you apply your second coat. In fact, I like to spray mist my brush with water as I go to keep the paint thin. Use a very light hand with your brush when you go over it in the opposite direction and allow to dry thoroughly before the next step.

    Sanding (chalk paints only!). Let dry and go over entire piece with 400 grit sandpaper before applying wax. Again, this is for a super smooth finish! I wrap my sandpaper around a sanding sponge and work it over the piece in a circular motion. It will first create scratch marks but don’t worry. Keep at it until the marks disappear. Note: You will find yourself and your work area covered in chalk paint dust after sanding. I recommend doing the sanding outside and always wear a mask. I actually have a leaf blower that I use to blow off the dust. You can also wipe it off with a very lightly dampened paper towel.

    Distress. While sanding, (if desired) distress your piece. You may need to use 150 grit to distress back in places.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Wax (chalk paint finishes). Using clear wax, take either your wax brush (for this process, I use the Dixie Belle La Petit natural bristle brush) or a clean, white old t-shirt or other soft white cloth and apply the wax. Do not use any cloth with color as it will come off onto your piece. I apply my wax in a circular motion. Don’t goop it on – take your time and add section at a time. Dab your brush into the wax, apply and repeat. If applying dark wax, apply it now and wipe off excess using clear wax. Keep at it until desired effect. After the wax has cured for 24 hours, I go back over it with a clean cloth to buff it super smooth.


    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    • 6.9K
    • 30

    Copper patina is a classic look, and it’s easier than you think to create a faux copper patina look on nearly anything you want!

    Quick Links to Information in this Post

    Copper is my favorite metal. I love its shiny, happy color. I usually can’t afford real copper things, so I do a lot of copper spray painting instead. But let’s be real here — real copper oxidizes over time. Weathered copper gets a lovely, blue-green patina when it is exposed to oxygen in the atmosphere. So I set about figuring out how to create a faux copper patina look for more realistic copper decorations.

    Naturally, I turned to the Internet for ideas. What I found was a lot of fancy techniques, specialized materials, and — frankly — unnecessary hard work. I really felt I could create a faux copper patina look using regular paint and tools, and I did!

    To make sure I was getting the look right, I studied real weathered copper metal with genuine patinas from oxidization.

    So allow me to show you how to create a faux copper patina paint technique the easy way! This post contains some affiliate links for your convenience (which means if you make a purchase after clicking a link I will earn a small commission but it won’t cost you a penny more)! Read my full disclosure policy.

    Materials for the Faux Copper Patina Look

    • Something to paint (I painted a 12-year-old faded and weathered green plastic planter)
    • Drop cloth or a something else you don’t mind getting paint on, like an old board
    • Metallic copper spray paints (see best copper spray paints I tested and recommend)
    • Aquamarine interior/exterior acrylic metallic paint
    • Paint brushes
    • Damp paper towel or rag
    • (Optional) Sea sponge
    • (Optional) Spray bottle of water
    • (Optional) Matte sealer

    How to Easily Paint Anything with a Faux Copper Patina

    First, clean and wipe off the item you want to paint.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Next, completely paint your piece with copper metallic spray paint. Paint in several light coats for the best results and minimum dripping. Allow to dry 24 hours before moving on to the next step.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Now brush on your aquamarine paint. Important: Do not allow this paint to dry before the next step.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Using your damp paper towel or rag, lightly wipe off the aquamarine paint in various spots while the paint is still wet. You’ll want to wipe in an up-and-down fashion rather than side-to-side for it to look the most realistic. Where you wipe it off depends on what look you’re going for. Generally speaking, the bits of copper more exposed will oxidize more, so you’ll want to wipe off more of the aquamarine paint in crevices and in areas where it would be a little less exposed to air.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Wipe off as much or as little of the aquamarine paint as you wish. Copper oxidizes into a WIDE variety of patinas, so nearly any level of patina is authentic. It should be noted that not all copper patinas are blue-green — some are more of a brown-black. But I didn’t want that color, so I didn’t use it.

    Tips: You don’t have to just wipe the paint off. Try swirling and dabbing, too! Or get a spray bottle of water and mist your piece while the paint is still wet. Feel free to experiment. Just keep your rag damp as you work.

    If you want more of a mottling effect with your copper patina, dip a dry paint brush or sea sponge in some of your aquamarine paint and dab it very lightly onto various areas of your painted piece.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Here is the faux copper planter all finished:

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    If you want to preserve your hard work, seal it with a matte acrylic sealer. Why not gloss like shiny copper metal? Real copper becomes less shiny and more matte as it weathers, so a matte sealer is more authentic looking.

    I’d love to see your project! If you make one, please share a photo in our Facebook group, email it to me at [email protected], or tag me on social media with #jennifermaker.

    Want to remember this? Save this Easy Faux Copper Patina tutorial to your favorite Pinterest board!

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Easily paint anything with a faux copper patina technique for a classy look!

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    About Jennifer

    Jennifer Marx is a designer, an enthusiastic crafter, a lifelong teacher, and a proud overcomer of a variety of life’s challenges. In her spare time she loves to play D&D and video games, garden, sew 16th c. costumes, and go to Disney. She lives a full, happy life in beautiful Ann Arbor, Michigan with her partner Greg, her teen daughter Alexa, and their two dogs, Hunter and Chloe.

    Reader Interactions

    Success! Now check your email to confirm your subscription to the 30-Day Craft Room Organization Challenge.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    More Posts

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    More Posts

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Leave a Reply Cancel reply

    This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

    A rag and a bit of primer can give plain wood the whitewashed look of driftwood

    Share this story

    • Share this on Facebook
    • Share this on Twitter

    Share All sharing options for: How to Create a Pickled Finish on Wood

    • Pinterest
    • Email

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Project details


    Estimated Time

    Tools & Materials

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Pickling, bleaching, whitewash—they’re all variations on the theme of treating light-colored woods, usually pine, oak, or ash, to make them appear even lighter, almost ethereal. This “limed” look stems from the 16th-century European practice of infusing wood with a paste of caustic lime to ward off insect infestation. Even then, it was appreciated for its decorative value.

    Step 1

    Overview for Pickling an Oak Bench

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Photo by Wendell T. Webber

    Pickling, bleaching, whitewash—they’re all variations on the theme of treating light-colored woods, usually pine, oak, or ash, to make them appear even lighter, almost ethereal. This “limed” look stems from the 16th-century European practice of infusing wood with a paste of caustic lime to ward off insect infestation. Even then, a pickled wood finish was appreciated for its decorative value.

    Today you can just use leftover primer to create a simple pickling solution, or try one of the commercial pickling formulas out there. In either case, the process couldn’t be simpler: Sand the wood, brush on the solution, wipe it off with a rag. The whitewash collects in the darker grain, creating a sort of sun-bleached negative of the natural wood for a weathered, driftwood look. Along with furniture like the red oak bench shown here, pickling is a great choice for pine floors, beadboard wainscot, and paneled shutters. Follow the steps below to see how to pickle wood furniture.

    No primer on your shelf of leftover paints? Try a premixed pickling solution such as Minwax White Wash Pickling Stain, about $12 per quart at paint stores.

    Step 2

    Prep the Bench

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Photo by Wendell T. Webber

    Using a medium-grit sanding sponge, scuff up all the surfaces to open the pores of the wood. Be sure to work with the grain.

    When you’re finished, vacuum up any sawdust and wipe the surface with a reusable microfiber cloth.

    Step 3

    Brush on Pickling

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Photo by Wendell T. Webber

    Mix 1 part white latex primer-sealer with 3 parts water. Using a 4-inch brush, paint on a patch of the pickling solution.

    Tip: When pickling soft woods like pine, apply a water-based wood conditioner first, then sand lightly to allow the pickling to take evenly.

    Step 4

    Rub it in, Wipe it off

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Photo by Wendell T. Webber

    Using a clean, dry rag, work the pickling solution into the wood by rubbing against the grain. Then, using a fresh rag, wipe with the grain to remove the excess and expose the grain.

    Repeat this sequence, working in patches to cover the entire bench evenly. Let your pickled wood finish dry overnight.

    Step 5

    Apply Clear Coat

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Photo by Wendell T. Webber

    Stir—but don’t shake—a can of polyurethane clear coat. Pour some into a lined paint cup. Using a 2½-inch paintbrush, evenly coat the entire surface of the bench. Let dry for 24 hours.

    Sand lightly with a fine-grit sanding sponge. Wipe down the surface thoroughly with a dry rag and apply a second coat. If you plan to leave it on a covered porch, like we did, it will need a third coat, too.

    Have you ever tried salt paint? It’s a super easy way to get that thick, crackled look of things aged by the wear of salt water and time to look like they came straight out of an old beach cottage. Besides being absolutely gorgeous, it’s easy to do with any type of paint by adding just a couple of things you might already have (or can pick up at the craft store for super cheap!) Since I love a good, unique paint finish (like my Shabby Farmhouse Style), I thought I’d share this easy technique you can do, too!

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to Make Your Own Salt Paint Recipe

    I’ve been surprisingly into creating videos lately, and this one is no exception – so there’s a complete video to show you how I did it step by step. But I did want to give you a few quick tips.

    1. Mix your salt paint in a non-reactive dish (I use old glass bowls)
    2. Don’t mix more than you need. While you can put it in an air-tight container to keep for a few days, it won’t be as good as freshly mixed paint.
    3. Use cheap chip brushes to apply the salt paint. All those brush strokes along with the rough texture it creates only enhances the overall finish. You WANT to be messy – gloopy – and very thick. As it dries, this is what makes the texture amazing after sanding.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Salt Paint Recipe

    *this post contains affiliate links to my Amazon shop – which means if you make a purchase then I may earn a commission*

    • 3 tablespoons plaster of Paris
    • 2 tablespoons water
    • 2 tablespoons paint (I used acrylic)
    • 1 tablespoon kosher salt (you need kosher for the texture – plain table salt will not give you the same result.)

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Now that I’ve told you how to make it – here’s a step by step video to show you exactly how I made it, paint it and also finish it.

    Want to see more of that yummy beach cottage paint finish.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Soon I’ll share how to make this sign – but that’s for another day 🙂

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    About Gina Luker

    Gina Luker is a writer, photographer and lover of all things quirky. She’s usually found with a drill in one hand and a cocktail in the other while blogging along the way. She’s addicted to coffee, polka dots, rock stars, Instagram, and everything aqua.


    This turned out BEAUTIFUL. Thank you so much! I’m not sure if you answered this already, but how long should I let it dry before I use it?

    Gina Luker says

    Thanks so much Michelle! Just let it dry until it is completely dry…just give it a touch and you’ll know 🙂

    Hi can I use this on my wooden floor? Will it be non slip and do I have to finish with a wax too make it water tight? X

    Gina Luker says

    I am not sure that would work Shona, I have only used this technique for DIY projects and don’t know how well…if at all it would hold up to foot traffic.

    I have mixed SAND with acrylic paint and painted a front porch and steps–it held up very well to weather and foot traffic!

    Gina Luker says

    Wow, thanks so much for sharing Gigi, I bet it’s beautiful!!

    I’ve also used sand mixed with paint.
    We painted this mix on Pool steps to prevent anyone from slipping on the painted steps.
    The sand made a huge difference!
    That was in 2008, and it’s still working!

    Gina Luker says

    That is a great idea Nancy, thanks so much for sharing 🙂

    Did you mix just paint and sand or all the other ingredients as well?

    Melanie L Partridge says

    I thought of that but since I WANTED it for a beach on souvenir paintings, and needed it to be a little more durable, I mixed my sand with plain old Elmer’s glue, then put paint in to get the right color. Let me tell you, that stuff will NEVER come off!

    Gina Luker says

    Wow, thanks for sharing Melanie!

    Did you use the plaster of Paris or just the sand and paint?

    Gina Luker says

    Just sand and paint Deb 🙂

    Did you really mean: 2 tablespoons of paint, in you list of ingredients?

    Gina Luker says

    Yes I did 🙂 Give it a try, I bet you’ll love it!

    Cynthia Edmondson Ballard says

    I’M SO EXCITED TO TRY THIS! I love Aqua too! So does my sister. I’ve shared this with her & saved you to my board. Reading 3 to see where I can sign up with my email to your blog here hopefully I’ll find it I’m not very goid at blogging! but that’s okay I’m learning and it’s fun and I absolutely love this idea thank you so very very much look forward to reading all of your ideas.
    Thank you, Cynthia.

    Gina Luker says

    Thanks so much Cynthia! Good luck 🙂

    Claudia Tull says

    two tablespoons of paint won’t go very far. Can you mix larger quantities?

    Gina Luker says

    Sure Claudia, I just didn’t need much for this project 🙂

    Is there another ingredient you can use other than Plaster of Paris, or can you make it with products you may have at home?

    Gina Luker says

    I don’t know Kelly, this is the only way I’ve tried it. Let me know if you find another way!!

    This is genius! And I love this color 🙂 Gotta question though. Does it have to be acrylic paint or would work with the chalk paint(or any other paint) as well? Thanks for sharing Gina!

    Gina Luker says

    Hey Kasia,
    Thanks!! Any paint works – but you may have to tweak the amount of paint to get the right consistency 🙂 Have fun!

    Thanks for the tip Gina!

    Wow that turned out really beautiful…love the look of it! thank you for sharing!

    Gina Luker says

    Thanks so much Sherry 🙂

    I’m going to give this a try! I’ve bought the salt wash brand mix and got absolutely no result

    Gina Luker says

    Go for it Leah, I hope you like it and have fun!!

    Thanks for sharing! Does it only need one coat? How long does it take to dry?

    Gina Luker says

    My pleasure Vanessa 🙂 Usually only one coat, you’ll know if you are happy with the results or if you prefer more. It takes about the same amount of time to dry as regular paint.

    Learn how to create faux patina…the simple way (plus video)! A little softer, more subtle look that’s elegant and easy to achieve.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    I’m back again today to share one of two tutorials I promised in this post I shared last week: “How To Paint Light Fixtures (without taking them down!)”

    If you missed that post, pop on over and see the tutorial I did in that post for changing the color of your light fixture with paint…and yep, without taking down the fixture. 🙂

    Today I’m sharing how to create faux patinas and on Tuesday I shared >>> How To Create Faux Verdigris.
    This process is just slightly different and with one less step.

    This is how these light fixtures started…..

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    And how it looked after I gave it the faux patina finish…

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    So much fun and really was easy to do.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    I’ve created a video on how to create faux patina finish because, as you know, I thought it’d be easier to show you how than tell you how. 😉
    But I’ll also give step by step instructions here too.

    How to Create Faux Patina Finish:

    1. If the item you are giving the faux patina finish to is not already a bronze or copper color (or even a dark gold color), you may want to give it a quick spray of Oil Rubbed Bronze or Copper Spray paint. If it happens to be a light fixture like mine that you don’t want to remove from the wall, you can use something like this product to brush on. Or any other liquid-based metallic paint of your choosing.
    2. For this technique, I used Annie Sloan Chalk Paint in the color Provence.
    3. Wet an artist’s paintbrush with water before beginning. Then dip just the ends of the bristles into the paint and then wipe some away on a paper towel. Apply liberally but keep in mind you don’t want full coverage so be sure to let some of the bronze show through.
    4. You can add as little or as much blue as you like. Let this dry.
    5. Next, using an old t-shirt or rag that is only slightly damp, rub away a bit of the paint to let more of the bronze/copper show through.
    6. Now you will apply the finishing touch, Baroque Art Gilder’s Paste Wax.
    7. Rub your finger into the paste wax until you have a small amount on your finger.
    8. Now rub your finger over all of the high points on your project or anywhere else you want the gold color.
    9. Continue applying it until you are satisfied with the look. You can add as little or as much as you like.
    10. You are done! You can apply a sealer at this point but it’s really not necessary as the paste wax acts as a sealer here. A little finish up buffing might be nice.

    NOTE: Keep in mind, this is just a guideline. You can add more Provence blue color or less. You can also use more gold or less. Just decide as you go!

    Beginning to paint with the Provence Chalk Paint.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture
    It looks a bit rough, I know, but keep going. 😉

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    You can see below where I started rubbing back some of the paint to reveal more of the bronze.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    One in the works, one waiting to be beautified…

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    More “distressing” and waiting for the finishing touches.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Still not looking so hot! 😉

    Adding a bit o’ gold….better

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Or magic, as I like to call it. 🙂

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    I told y’all the other day, I’m SO not a pro at this. 😉 And I don’t love my voice…or hearing my voice. Lol Nope, but really who does?
    And I know there are “ums” and awkward pauses and such but hopefully, this new tutorial will be also easy for you to follow and understand! 🙂

    This faux patina finish is a little less involved than the verdigris one was, but even that one is pretty simple.
    The finishes look similar but they are not exact. I think they both have their place.

    • If you want a bold look….go with the faux verdigris tutorial.
    • If you want a softer, less pronounced look…go with the faux patina tutorial.

    PIN it to save it!

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    If you have any questions at all, please don’t hesitate to ask in the comments below. (or email, if you prefer)

    More posts in the “back to basics” series:

    Here’s my latest painted “patina” look project!

    I’m so excited to share this tutorial on how to create acrylic signs in collaboration with Uniqooo, a wax seal and acrylic sign specialty company. I use Uniqooo products often for my wedding and design clients. The variety of wax shades and elegant stamp designs are the best in the industry. All opinions are my own.

    Adding acrylic elements to your reception adds a touch of modern elegance. Acrylic signs are so easy to create use because they are transparent. Which makes drawing your designs as easy as tracing them! Another great thing about acrylic signs is that you can paint them to match any color scheme. It’s easy to see why acrylic signs are trending in event designs for all types of celebrations!

    If you’re looking to add acrylic signage to your wedding but you’re just not sure where to start, you’ve come to the right place! If you’ve hired a calligrapher, chances are he/she will be able to create your acrylic signs for you. But that doesn’t mean you can’t do them yourself if you’re feeling creative! Here I’ll walk you through the different ways to create your acrylic signs and place cards. Enjoy!

    Disclaimer: As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases. This blog post contains affiliate links. I may earn a small commission to fund my calligraphy and caffeine habits if you use these links to make a purchase. You will not be charged extra, and you’ll keep me supplied in ink and caffeine. It’s a win for everyone, really.

    What you’ll need:



    For a design that lasts, use acrylic paint and a brush to add color to the back of your acrylic signs. You can use traditional brushes or sponge brushes. Choose a high quality acrylic paint such as Martha Stewart Acrylic Craft Paint, FolkArt Multi-Surface Acrylic Paint by PLAID or DecoArt Americana Series Acrylic Paint. If you plan to paint the back of the acrylic sheet, do so after you draw your design on the front so you can trace it if you choose.

    Paint pens are the easiest way to create fun and easy designs for your acrylic signs! I use the Sharpie Oil Based Paint Pens as they won’t smear and are permanent. Use the finer tip paint pens for lettering and fine illustrations. The thicker tip paint pens are great for bold numbers and designs. I almost always use white or black paint pens but any color (including metallic) work well on the acrylics.

    Pictured: Acrylic 5×7 Clear Signs by Uniqooo

    I love to use paint pens on the larger signs, but when it comes to mini acrylic signs, I prefer to use ink. I can write much smaller and with crisper lines than I can with markers. So if you’re working on creating place cards I recommend opting for a calligraphy ink like Dr. Ph. Martin’s. As for the nib, I usually grab my Nikko G or Blue Pumpkin nibs. Though most nibs should work just fine as these acrylic sheets have a nice smooth surface.

    I love that the acrylic products sold by Uniqooo are already the perfect size, which means there’s no need to do any cutting! I use the 5×7 signs for creating table numbers and use the 8x10s for bar menus and guest book signs. Both of the larger sizes come in clear and frosted! The 3.5×2 small rectangles and the 3.12×2.75 hexagons are the perfect size for place cards and other mini reception signs. If you’re using the mini signs for a buffet or dessert table be sure to grab the mini stands so guests can see your adorable signage!

    Pictured: Acrylic Rectangle Place Cards by Uniqooo

    If you opt not to paint the backs these acrylic signs look stunning when placed in front of… well, anything! Just lay place cards over a bed of fresh or dried petals and greenery for a stunning display. You can also embellish acrylic sheets with gold foil, wax seals and ribbons!

    Pictured: Acrylic Hexagon Place Cards by Uniqooo

    If you do make a mistake, you can remove most mediums with soap and water or Windex. Oil Based Paint Pens are the exception as those are really, really permanent on the acrylic. Remove calligraphy ink with soap and water if the ink is still wet or with Windex if the ink is already dry. Remove acrylic paint with Windex… and patience. It took a bit of scrubbing to remove the painted back, but in the end it did come off. Just don’t scrape the paint off as it could scratch the acrylic sheet. For quick and easy reference, just refer to the infographic below.

    Hopefully this post leaves you feeling inspired and fully ready to take on your acrylic project!

    Have a question about something I didn’t cover? Feel free to get in touch or leave a message in the comments!

    Are you looking to update your décor without spending big bucks? Well it can be done by simply painting your old rattan or wicker furniture.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Are you looking to update your décor without spending big bucks? Well it can be done by simply painting your old rattan or wicker furniture.

    If your wicker chairs have seen better days and are looking a little worn, there is no need to throw them out yet. With a bit of creativity, you can salvage them and make them look as good as new. One of the best ways to spruce up old rattan or cane furniture is to paint it in an attractive and snazzy color. Such a project is not hard to undertake and all you need are a few painting supplies. When most people think of painting rattan furniture, they opt for a pristine white color. Although white does look elegant and refined, you can experiment with different paint colors like moss green, sky blue and even purple. Applying a coat of paint not only makes the furniture look attractive, it also acts as a protective coating and helps in sealing the furniture. There are two ways to go about painting rattan furniture. One is to paint the furniture with a paint brush and the other is to spray paint it. Spray painting is a better and more convenient option as it allows you to finish the project within a short time.

    Material Required

    • Spray paint
    • Sponge
    • Old newspaper
    • Old toothbrush
    • Strong-hold glue
    • Nail gun

    Clean the Rattan Furniture
    The first thing that you need to do before painting the rattan furniture is to clean it thoroughly. There is no point painting over accumulated dirt and debris as the paint will just flake off after some time. To clean rattan furniture, first clean the entire furniture with a soft rag or duster to remove surface debris. Next make a cleaning mixture by combining one part vinegar to two part warm water. Dip a clean sponge in this mixture and wipe the furniture with the sponge. Make sure that the sponge is just moist and not soaking wet. This will help in removing all surface dirt and grease from the furniture. If you see debris and grease accumulated in the nooks and crannies of the furniture, then use an old toothbrush with soft bristles to remove the debris. Wait for the rattan furniture to dry completely before you paint it.

    Repair the Furniture
    Once you have thoroughly cleaned and dried the furniture, look at the furniture carefully to see if it needs repair. In case of very old furniture or outdoor furniture, some loose rattan or holes in the furniture is inevitable. In such a case it is best that you do all the repair work before proceeding to paint it. If an extensive damage to the furniture has been done, then you need to get it professionally repaired. However, for minor repairs, like fixing loose rattan, you can use strong hold glue and a nail gun.

    Spray Paint the Furniture
    Choose a can of spray paint that is specifically meant for painting over rattan. These type of spray paints are easily available in home improvement stores and if you are unsure which type of paint to pick, you can ask the store sales staff for help. To spray paint the rattan furniture, lay newspaper over the floor and place the furniture over the newspaper. Hold the can at least 10 inches away from the furniture and start spraying them in an even and systematic motion. Painting from the top, in a horizontal motion works best for me, but you can try your own method for spray painting. Make sure that whichever technique you employ for spray painting, the coverage is uniform and even. Allow the furniture to dry completely for at least 48 hours before placing them in your patio or living room.

    Painting rattan furniture is not hard, once you have all the supplies at hand. If you spray paint the furniture indoors, make sure that the area is well ventilated. If you choose to do it outdoors, then keep in mind that dust in the air can compromise the finish of the painted furniture. Painting rattan furniture is an inexpensive way to update your furniture, so give it a try!

    You are using an outdated browser. Please upgrade your browser to view this site and improve your browsing experience.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Bring a more inviting look and feel to any room by using a technique known as color washing or glaze painting. Benjamin Moore’s Studio Finishes ® Latex Glaze (N405) is directly mixed with the paint color of your choice to create the solution needed to color wash walls and create a beautiful faux finish. Drawing from Tuscan roots, color washed walls are ideal for dining rooms and other areas where guests will gather, and its decorative look will exude warmth and charm anyplace in your home.

    Start your color wash journey by choosing your paint color. Selecting shades from the same color strip is the best way to combine hues that complement one another. Use one of the lighter shades from the strip as your basecoat, and choose a satin or semi-gloss finish to start building the finish.

    Color Washing Brushes and Supplies

    One of the keys to a successful color wash, sometimes referred to as “faux painting,” is to have the right supplies. Color washing can be achieved by sponge painting or brushing the latex glaze onto walls. A paint brush will provide a more textured look, while sponges or soft rags will create a softer, more diffused appearance.

    Studio Finishes is available exclusively at local paint and hardware stores authorized to sell Benjamin Moore. Start with this checklist, then visit your local store for more information, or use our store locator to find a retailer near you.

    • 3-inch or 4-inch Benjamin Moore paint brush or soft rags/sponges
    • High-quality acrylic or latex paint, like Regal ® Select Interior or Aura ® Interior Paint, in two or more paint colors, in satin sheen for the basecoat, and eggshell sheen to mix with the glaze
    • Studio Finishes ® Latex Glaze(N405)
    • Disposable latex gloves
    • Drop cloth
    • Paint tray
    • Painter’s tape
    • Water for cleanup

    Step #1: Prepare Walls for Color Washing

    Surfaces must be properly prepared before you begin glaze painting walls. Clean your walls thoroughly and repair any protruding nails or other imperfections.

    For best results, use Fresh Start ® High-Hiding All Purpose Primer (046) before applying your base color. Be sure to tape off any edges you wish to protect, such as those along ceilings, windows, and doors.

    After you have prepared your walls, apply your selected base color, taking care to follow the label directions. Allow the base color ample time to dry. We suggest waiting at least 48 hours before moving on to the next step.

    Step #2: Glaze Painting Your Walls

    Once your base color is dry, you can select the color washing paint technique of your choice, using either a brush or rag/sponge. Begin by mixing Studio Finishes Latex Glaze with a latex or acrylic paint with an eggshell sheen to minimize glare. A good ratio to start with is four parts glaze to one part paint (adding an additional one-half to one part water will further the transparency of the glaze). The more glaze you add, the more transparent the effect. Using less glaze will allow more of the base color to show through.

    Next, dip a soft cloth or sea sponge into your glaze mixture. The soft cloth will give glaze a more subtle appearance, while sponge painting walls will give a more textured look.

    Apply the glaze mixture to your wall using a crosshatch motion, creating large, overlapping X-shaped stripes. Continue this wiping technique until the entire surface is covered, and feather out any harsh brush strokes by lightly sweeping over the glaze with a clean, dry brush. For a gentler finish, apply the glaze in a random wiping or circular motion, as if you were washing the wall. Be sure to let the glaze dry thoroughly.

    Tip: When you color wash an entire room, glaze walls opposite from one another first. This will allow adequate time for drying and avoid smudging the wet glaze.

    Step #3: Discover More Color Wash Painting Techniques

    There are different wall painting techniques that will make your color washed walls stand out.

    • For different visual effects, vary your wiping motions as you apply the glaze.
    • To achieve the look of an aged patina, apply a lighter glaze over a darker glaze.
    • For a look with richer color depth, glaze walls with different paint colors: a base color, a glaze darker than your base paint color, and a third deeper glaze color.

    Have More Questions? Visit your local Benjamin Moore store or contact Customer Support.

    This post may contain affiliate links

    I get a lot of questions about how to make white paint look old or aged or antiqued. It’s a popular look. White furniture, especially if the paint is white white, is kind of blah without some kind of special finish. I can show you how to take the blah look to an AH look. I have a very, very, short video on the antiquing process.

    The small table project for today has a painted top and the original stained legs and base. I liked the original stained finish so I cleaned it up a bit then shined it up. But the white top had to get better or go. I decided on a plan for the top but some plans go out the window like this one did.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    This is how the table looked when I purchased it. I bought it from an acquaintance who was downsizing her stash of to-do projects. I paid $12 for the table.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Before and after table makeover and how to make white paint look old

    I did more work to this table than I needed to but I’ll get into that later in the post.

    How To Make White Paint Look Old

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    The table top was either missing or a mess because Debbie had put a new top on the table before I bought it. The top is just a basic piece of wood painted white.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    The spindle legs and feet were missing a bit of the original stained finish but I decided to work with that instead of painting. The table was too pretty to change it completely.

    Paint The Table

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    The Just Duckie color from Miss Lillian’s No-Wax Chock Paint I’m addicted to was my color choice for the table top. That was the plan but after painting the top blue I decided white was a better contrast to the base of the table. I could have left the top as it was and moved on to the next step. I went through 2 paint steps I didn’t need to do.

    Distress The Paint

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Next I distressed the white paint just a bit using my favorite 3M flexible sandpaper. I like to use a power sander for distressing paint but I have more control when by hand using a small piece of sandpaper.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Make The White Paint Look Old

    To age the white paint I used Caromal Colours Toner. This is one of my favorite DIY products. The process to make any paint color look old is as simple as brushing the toner onto the paint and then wiping it off with a damp rag until you get the desired effect. Easy as pie. At one time I sold the toner on Etsy but had to let that go to concentrate on projects . You can buy the toner at Caromal Colours here .

    You can see how I use the toner in the video tutorial. And just to be clear, you can use the toner on any color paint, not just white. I have a great project here where I used toner on black paint. 5 Steps To Antique Painted Furniture.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    Refresh The Stained Table Base

    For the base I just did a quick cleaning with Simple Green and then I freshened the finish with Howard’s Feed n Wax.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    The table top turned out great and I’m glad I didn’t paint the base. It’s not perfect but that’s okay…..because the table is old and the little imperfections add character.

    A two tone furniture look that includes the original stained finish highlighted with a bit of paint is one of my favorite furniture finishes. I’m taking the table to my booth to sell and the price is really cheap. There are so many of my projects I would like to keep but that means getting rid of piece too!

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How To Make White Paint Look Old The Easy Way

    I took photos of the table in the orange and turquoise bedroom. Be sure and watch the video showing how I used the toner below….

    How To Make White Paint Look Old The Easy Way

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    You can also age, antique, or make paint look old using dark wax. I painted an unfinished wood chest with red paint and used dark wax to make the paint look old. The wax also gives paint a nice patina. Take a look at the photo of the red chest below.

    How to create a sponge paint effect on furniture

    How To Make White Paint Look Old The Easy Way

    How to create a wikipedia account

    my Social Security | Create an Account

    To create a my Social Security account, you’ll be asked to:

    1. Verify your identity by providing personal information about yourself and answering questions that only you are likely to know.
    2. Create a username and password you’ll use to access your online account.
    3. Confirm your email address or phone number by entering a one-time security code within 10 minutes of receiving it in order to help keep your personal information safe.

    Do you have a security freeze or fraud alert on your credit report?

    If you have a security freeze, fraud alert, or both on your credit report, you can still open a my Social Security account by temporarily lifting it.

    1. Contact our Identity Services Provider and request that they temporarily lift your security freeze or fraud alert.
    2. Create a my Social Security account online after lifting the security freeze or fraud alert.
    3. Reinstate the security freeze or fraud alert with the Identity Services Provider if needed. When you request a temporary lift of your credit freeze or fraud alert, the Identity Services Provider may automatically reinstate it after your temporary lift expires.

    If you don’t want to temporarily lift your security freeze or fraud alert, you can visit your local Social Security office to open an account in person. For more information on security freezes and fraud alerts, read the Federal Trade Commission’s Credit Freeze FAQs.

    Your personal my Social Security account is for your use only

    Social Security is dedicated to protecting the information and resources entrusted to us, including your personal information and investment. For your protection, you’re the only one who can create your personal my Social Security account for your own exclusive use. No one can create or use an account on your behalf, even with written permission. Don’t share the use of your account with anyone else under any circumstances, as unauthorized use of this service is a misrepresentation of your identity to the federal government and could subject you to criminal or civil penalties, or both.

    Collecting and Sharing Knowledge at Work

    How to create a wikipedia account

    Create a wiki and harness the power of collaboration.

    Almost every organization needs to gather institutional knowledge, collate material from multiple sources, and share experiences and insights. And many companies achieve this by using wikis – web pages that can be worked on by multiple users.

    But are wikis the best way to keep your information accessible and up-to-date? With a vast array of data-management and communication products now available, businesses have to choose their tools carefully. Wikis have moved on, too, giving organizations fresh options and new decisions to make.

    In this article, we explore whether a wiki is the right way for you to collect and use information. If it is, we explain how to set up your wiki, and how to start using it effectively where you work.

    What Is a Wiki?

    A wiki is a website or online resource that can be edited by multiple users. Some wikis, such as Wikipedia, are publicly accessible. Others are used by organizations to manage information in-house, enabling teams to easily share knowledge and work together more effectively.

    The Advantages of Wikis

    In the right circumstances, a wiki can be a very efficient way to gather and distribute information. It can improve collaboration among team members who need to refer to, or work on, the same material. Anyone with the necessary editing rights can add ideas and observations as they occur, often in response to other people’s updates.

    Because they’re online, wikis can make it easier for teams – especially virtual teams – to cooperate on tasks, share notes and suggestions, and contribute resources. Where several authors are updating the same piece of work, a wiki can aid version control, as it’s always clear which version is the most recent.

    Wikis can be set up temporarily, to support discrete projects, or developed over the longer term as ever-evolving archives of organizational knowledge.

    The flexible structure of wikis allows them to adapt as the information itself changes. Plus, by keeping a record of each step, edit by edit, wikis show how a project, an area of knowledge, or even a whole organization develops over time.

    The Disadvantages of Wikis

    However, in other situations, some of these potential benefits can, in fact, become problems.

    When you let multiple users alter important information, inaccuracies can appear. Shared pages can quickly become cluttered and hard to navigate. And if people disagree about key points, conflict can arise – and be played out in public!

    Wikis aren’t usually the best way to share definitive information that should not be edited, such as formal procedures or records. In these cases, consider using static web pages, databases, or other techniques and tools . You can still link to these from your wiki if you wish.

    Wikis are not ideal for capturing conversations, either. Communication platforms such as Slack, Teams and Asana can give your team members safer and more sophisticated spaces for discussion and debate.

    Even if you do decide to use a wiki, there are many different types, so you’ll need to select wisely in order to reap the benefits and avoid the pitfalls. And the first question to ask is: do you need to create a wiki at all?

    Establish Your Need for a Wiki

    Before building any type of wiki, it’s important to ask what business problem you’ll solve by doing so. What are the benefits of sharing knowledge in this way?

    Perhaps you’ve identified the need for an accurate and up-to-date collection of team-building activities. If you gather these in a wiki, people in different departments will be able to add their own resources and share their ideas.

    If you’re setting up a new project, a wiki might help your team to organize key documents, and add comments to them for others to discuss.

    Or maybe you’ve noticed that important information about your company’s culture and heritage is being lost when people leave. With a wiki, everyone could contribute to a collection of knowledge that would remain in place even after they themselves had moved on.

    You’ll likely get the most value from a wiki if the following points apply:

    • You’re trying to build up a “big picture” based on multiple perspectives.
    • You want to capture information that’s evolving or still being agreed.
    • Everyone on the team needs to see all the knowledge gathered so far.
    • There’s value in creating links to other information, either internal or external.
    • It’s helpful to see all the writing and editing steps that have led to this point.
    • It won’t be disastrous if errors appear, because they’ll quickly be spotted and fixed.

    If not enough of these factors apply, or if you have difficulty stating how a wiki would benefit you, it’s likely the wrong approach. What’s more, if you already have effective ways to store, edit and communicate all the material you work with, a wiki may be more trouble than it’s worth!

    Free Workbook Offer

    Increase your productivity and reduce stress with this FREE workbook when you join the Club before midnight, May 24.

    How to create a wikipedia account

    One of the largest and most successful examples of a wiki site is Wikipedia, whose content is contributed by volunteers from different parts of the world. It is also edited and maintained by volunteers, while allowing anyone to contribute to the site. This has made it one of the top ten most popular websites globally, with hundreds of millions of readers each month and millions of articles in more than 250 languages.

    A wiki is a great tool for communicating and working with other people on a project. It helps teams and organizations collect and capture knowledge and gather content from several sources, while sharing ideas and plans. If you’d like to actively capture and build knowledge, whether for your personal wiki or an organizational one, here’s how you can create your own wiki site.

    Also read: How to Become a Wikipedia Editor

    Setting Up the Wiki Site

    There are a variety of options that can help you set up your wiki site. Among the wiki hosting options you can choose from are Windows SharePoint, MediaWiki and Wikia, which are free to use and will allow you to create your wiki site from scratch.

    Paid services like Same Page offer templates and tools for you to get started. They also work with you to deploy your wiki site and maintain it. There are also options like TikiWiki, which allow you to host a private wiki on your enterprise’s intranet.

    As you pick a free or paid wiki hosting service, consider why you need the wiki, the number of people involved in the project, and the time you’ll devote to the setup and maintenance of the site, plus the security level needed.

    Creating a Wiki Site

    The simplest and easiest way to create a wiki site is by using Google Sites. You don’t need technical know-how, plus its user-friendly interface lets you create easy-to-use and visually appealing wikis.

    1. Sign up for an account in Google to create a wiki site with Google sites.

    3. Click the “+” sign at the bottom-right to create a wiki site.

    How to create a wikipedia account

    4. Pick a layout template for your site.

    How to create a wikipedia account

    5. Pick a name that describes its purpose, and type that at the top left corner labeled “Untitled Site.”

    How to create a wikipedia account

    6. You can choose to share it publicly or with a group of people you work with. Go to the “Share With Others” icon at the top-right menu and click on it.

    How to create a wikipedia account

    7. Select who can access the wiki and make changes based on your selection, and give permissions either as “can view” or “can edit.”

    How to create a wikipedia account

    8. If you want specific people to access it, select Draft and click Change.

    How to create a wikipedia account

    9. Select “Anyone with the link,” and the people you share the link with will get access to the wiki.

    How to create a wikipedia account

    10. Customize your wiki’s theme.

    How to create a wikipedia account

    11. Click “Color and Fonts” menu and pick a header, background, font colors and image.

    Also read: Zim – A Desktop Wiki

    12. Click the Preview icon at the top-right to see your site before publishing.

    How to create a wikipedia account

    13. Google Sites allows you to insert Google documents like a presentation, spreadsheet, or photo album into your wiki site from the Insert tab.

    How to create a wikipedia account

    14. Click Publish once satisfied with your wiki site.

    We’d love to hear your experience with creating your own wiki site. Share in a comment below.

    Our latest tutorials delivered straight to your inbox

    How to create a profitable property portfolio

    Ways to Help Improve Your Portfolio Holdings

    How to create a profitable property portfolio

    Pattanaphong Khuankaew / EyeEm / Getty Images

    How to create a profitable property portfolio

    Building a successful investment portfolio is no simple task for beginners, but six tips can help ease the process. Some of the items on this checklist may sound overly simplistic, but they are vital rules that deserve reiterations. Too many new investors think they can ignore these rules and still succeed, only to find that they would’ve been better off following tried-and-true strategies.

    As you read through these six tips, remember that the application of this advice will depend significantly on the specifics of your situation. Every decision should keep your overall financial situation in mind. When in doubt, seek the advice of a qualified tax professional and investment advisor.

    Set Clear Objectives for Your Investments

    You need to know exactly why you’re investing and what you expect of your money. Otherwise, you are going to be like a rudderless ship at sea—no direction and no purpose. Common investment objectives include capital appreciation, capital preservation, income, and speculation. An investment portfolio that aims to achieve capital appreciation will look much different than an income portfolio, for example, and they’ll perform differently over any timeline.

    If you aren’t clear about your goals, you could become disappointed in your returns. You might’ve followed the strategy perfectly, but you pursued the wrong objective.

    Minimize Investment Turnover

    As the saying goes, “don’t rent stocks, buy businesses.” If you aren’t willing to own a business for at least five years, don’t even consider buying shares unless you fully understand and accept that the short-term stock market is irrational, volatile, and capricious.

    Aside from the volatility, there are tax advantages to holding onto investments. The profits on long-term investments are taxed at a lower rate than short-term investments, and dividends from those investments are often taxed at a lower rate than distributions from recent additions to your portfolio.    

    Short-term positions are more associated with trading than investing. Trading strategies differ from investment strategies because they seek to capitalize on the short-term volatility of the stock market.

    Minimize Costs

    Every dollar you give up in fees, brokerage commissions, sales loads, and mutual fund expenses is a dollar that can’t compound for you. While an expense ratio of less than a percent might not seem like much, it adds up over time. By finding ways to reduce your costs early on in your investment timeline, you could end up saving hundreds, thousands, or even millions of dollars by the time you retire.

    Take Advantage of Tax-Efficient Accounts

    Two great investment tax shelters designed for lower and middle classes in the United States are the Roth IRA and the 401(k). Both account types have tax benefits that can make them incredibly lucrative, but there are unique rules and contribution limits that must be kept in mind. You’ll also pay a penalty tax if you withdraw money from these accounts before age 59½ (though there are exceptions to this rule).

    While both retirement accounts come with tax benefits, the benefits are different. Investors need to choose an account that fits with their goals and investment style.

    A 401(k) plan allows you to invest in a variety of mutual funds, and employers may offer to match your contributions to the account. Whatever you contribute is deducted from your taxable income.   You’ll pay taxes on the money when you withdraw it in retirement. By deferring taxes until retirement, you’ll likely pay fewer taxes, since your income (and income tax rate) will likely be lower in retirement.

    As far as taxes go, a Roth IRA is a kind of opposite to the 401(k) plan; money is taxed upfront, but it can be withdrawn tax-free in retirement.   That means you don’t pay taxes on the capital gains, dividends, or interest your money earned as it sat in the Roth IRA.

    Never Overpay for an Asset

    There is no getting around it—price is paramount to the returns you ultimately earn on your investment portfolio. Stock prices fluctuate in the short-term, so even a good investment can be overpriced. This is where fundamental analysis comes in handy. By researching the details of the company’s finances, you can feel more confident in paying a fair price for a stock.

    On the other hand, a low price doesn’t offset an otherwise bad investment. You cannot buy a cheap stock with a low earnings yield and expect to do well unless you have reason to believe the company will grow significantly or experience a turnaround.


    Another classic saying offers some investment wisdom on this issue: “don’t put all your eggs in one basket.” Nor should you put all your money in a single investment. You may have heard that you should seek out high-quality blue-chip stocks with steady dividend yields, but you don’t have to choose just one blue-chip stock. You could easily find a dozen companies with similarly beneficial characteristics.

    By diversifying, you’re spreading your risk across different sectors, industries, management styles, and geographic regions. When something negative happens—a company goes bankrupt or a natural disaster affects industries in a certain region—the impact will only hit a segment of your portfolio. Sure, you will feel the negative effects, but not as intensely as you would have if you had put all your money in that one company or region.

    For many investors andВ developers, keeping a property portfolio can be a challenge, and growing your portfolio can sometimes seem nigh on impossible. Here are 5 tips to consider that could help you along your way.

    • Managing and building your property portfolio
    • How to build a property management portfolio

    Managing and building your property portfolio

    For many investors andВ developers, keeping a property portfolio can be a challenge, and growing your portfolio can sometimes seem nigh on impossible. Here are 5 tips to consider that could help you along your way.

    How to build a property management portfolio

    There are a number of things to evaluate before attempting to build up a property portfolio. Start with one, and get that right before adding to it. Hindsight is useful — think about the risk before you end up managing multiple properties you can’t sustain or develop.

    Reinvest your profit

    By pumping your profits back intoВ developments, you’ll drive the quality of your portfolio way up. The next step is to reinvest money into expanding your portfolio, as this can lead to very positive results. The main challenge here is patience, as it can take time to build these funds up — and you need to keep an eye on yourВ cash flowВ andВ working capital.

    Do your research and buy at the right time

    When redeveloping a property, you should ensure you do all of your research early so you can avoid the small problems. Make sure you research the property area. For instance, if you specialise in multiple-occupancy development, know that you can fill your house – you’d never develop a house intended for students in a town with no university!

    It’s simple, but take your time to understand your market before you buy or do any work – don’t buy a property just because you like the way it looks, and ensure the developments you make suit its potential tenants or buyers. Finally, get your timing right. Don’t rush into a project you have any reservations about.

    Consider all property uses

    Going back to your research, you should already know what’s best, but if you have a number of options available it’s worth speaking to an expert. There are some great options for a property once developed, with buy-to-let and HMO being the most common, and a consideration could be a straight property development. These are suited to different areas and demographics and it’s worth spending time to understand what they involve and how they can work for you.

    Refinance your portfolio

    There are lots of different ways you canВ manage your outgoings, but for those struggling to confidently maintain the complicated finances of multiple properties, a consideration could be to wrap all of your existing loans into one. Not only is this a great way of giving you clarity on what you’re managing, but it can also help you reduce associated costs like arrangement fees — giving you a clear idea of where you money is going.

    If you think you’ve got what it takes, when building a portfolio of properties you could look for alternative finance options designed to help you on your way. You should also take a look at some of the property finance solutions which can help if you have this under control – as you could be missing out on a better deal.

    Investing in property can be a profitable venture if done correctly. Follow these tips and you will soon be well on your way to building a property empire.

    1. Choose flats over houses

    Most successful investors will tell you that smaller properties, like flats, generate a better return than houses.

    If your budget can stretch that far, go for a 2 bedroom, 2 bathroom flat. The greater flexibility will make the property attractive to a wider range of tenants so it’s less likely to lie empty.

    2. Be patient

    Make sure that you weigh up the pros and cons of an investment before you commit. Always remember that property is a long term investment. If you want to make money from it, you need to be prepared to be in it for the long haul. Don’t put yourself in a position where you’re forced to sell quickly because you over extended yourself financially.

    3. Look for ways to add value

    One of the best ways to make money out of a property is to add value to it. Renovating bathrooms and kitchens, for instance, will ensure you get a better return when renting the property out and make you more money when you’re ready to sell.

    4. Become tax-efficient

    You will never become a property millionaire if you pay the taxman more than you absolutely have to. Speak to a tax advisor on the best entities for buying a property and how you can save tax on your rental income.

    5. Don’t put all your eggs in one basket

    If you were investing in stocks and shares, any financial advisor worth his salt would advise you to diversify your portfolio so that the risk is spread. The same would be true for property investments. Spread your property portfolio across different properties in different areas to minimise your risk.

    6. Exploit local knowledge

    There is little point in trying to spot a property bargain hundreds of kilometres away. You’re not an expert on the area and are not likely to be able to judge whether the location, price etc. are good or not. A bargain will be much easier to spot in your own backyard. It will also be much easier to keep an eye on your tenants if you live nearby.

    7. Find professional partners you can trust

    Unless you’re part accountant, part lawyer and part DIY expert you’re going to need professional help in building up your property portfolio. Finding dependable builders, lawyers and accountants is not just key to maximising your profits, but will offer you peace of mind during a complex process.

    8. Don’t turn your nose up at unfashionable suburbs

    You don’t have to pay a premium for a property in a fashionable area in order to make a decent return. A property in an unfashionable suburb will often give you a return that is as good, if not better than a more “happening” one.

    Looking for a new tenant?

    Advertise your property to rent FOR FREE quickly and easily on our website.

    Posted on December 2, 2020 by BenBarnes –

    How to create a profitable property portfolio

    There are many private landlords in the UK, and they all need to keep track of how their properties are doing and whether they are making a profit on their investment.

    Estate agencies will often do all these functions under a managed service contract. Still, to do this properly, the estate agent needs a robust and reliable system to monitor the income and outgoings and capital growth and explain any discrepancies in the financial numbers.

    The Excel Experts recently built a custom Excel spreadsheet system for an estate agency offering management services to private landlords. If you need something similar please do contact us.

    The Brief: Create a Robust Tracking and Financial Reporting Tool

    The estate agency managed a large number of properties on behalf of the landlords. It urgently required a system to keep track of what was happening with each property to report back to the landlords on how well their property portfolio was doing financially.

    Using Excel, we built the property portfolio workbook for an estate agency to keep track of their clients’ property portfolios and investments.

    The idea was that the agent put in the necessary data. The workbook calculated all the important indices such as ROI and net annual returns over a possible 10 year period. This could clearly save the agency a lot of time, offering an excellent potential ROI on the original project’s cost.

    How to create a profitable property portfolio

    The Finished Spreadsheet

    The completed Excel Workbook made a huge difference to the efficiency and reporting capabilities of the estate agents. The easy to use solution has 5 Tabs – Income, Rent, Total Returns and 2 sheets of charts.

    The Income Tab

    On the Revenue side the spreadsheet needed to keep track of the following for each property for a landlord:

    • Rental income received
    • Agency management fees
    • Agency charges, e.g. finding a tenant
    • Outgoings such as repairs and refurbishing
    • Ground rent and insurance
    • Compliance charges, e.g. gas safety certificate and electrical safety checks
    • Void costs
    • Service charges and insurance
    • Monthly net payments to the landlord.

    It also kept track of the length of the tenancy length and inspection visits to be planned for when required or when the tenancy was coming to an end.

    The Capital Tab

    On the Capital side, a separate sheet or tab kept track of the property’s capital growth, showing the capital gain in each year, compared to the original cost of the property, and taking into account the one-off costs like stamp duty and conveyancing.

    The Total Returns Tab

    This tab brought everything together into a summary and showed:

    • Rental Earnings
    • Total One-Off Costs
    • Capital Gain (including One-Off Costs)
    • Net Annual Returns
    • Total ROI%

    The supporting tabs for Income and Capital provided an audit trail to show how these summary figures were calculated.

    The Total Returns tab also duplicated the Chart Tab charts so that a visual picture was instantly available.

    The Chart Tab

    Charts were incorporated in the spreadsheet on a separate tab to show the information visually either by 12 months, rolling 12 months, or historical or forecast years using the following data:

    • Gross Rental Yield Per Property Per Year
    • Capital Gain Per Property Per Year
    • Total ROI (Return on Investment) per property per year

    The Application

    The Excel Experts created a multi-tab spreadsheet to capture all this information easily and reliably and add filters so that the estate agent could focus on a particular landlord or a property to see the exact financial picture point in time for a given property portfolio.

    Important indices were calculated, such as the ROI percentage (Return On Investment), and using Excel’s forecasting tool, showing net annual returns over a possible future 10-year period.

    Using specific filters on the spreadsheet data, the estate agent could easily produce meaningful and informative reports on property portfolios to be emailed to the landlord regularly.

    The whole application was designed to run on Microsoft Windows and can easily be adapted to run on an Apple Mac.


    Thanks to the Excel Experts and the ingenuity of their team, a robust and informative system was put in place that satisfied all the client’s requirements.

    The big advantage for the estate agency was that many employee time and costs were saved through this system’s use. The estate agency customers were delighted with the timely and accurate reporting that this system produced on their property portfolios.

    A robust platform like this application could easily be developed further according to future client requirements and changes.

    Client Feedback

    “The Excel Experts has helped me with two projects. The experience of working with the expert assigned to my project has been excellent. The patient asking questions, the completion on time and the follow up have all been highly professional.” N.C

    “Excellent all-round service, no complaints at all and will use again.” TCE.

    Contact The Excel Experts with your requirements and we’ll help you to automate and streamline your business with a custom Excel application.

    Property investment is a business. It has its own particular characteristics, but it also shares a lot of fundamental traits with businesses in general.

    One of those traits is that setting out a clear business plan is often crucial to long-term success and should ideally be undertaken before you begin your property investment journey and updated regularly as you progress in line with your changing circumstances. Even if you are already involved in property investment, taking some time out to review and preview could be a very worthwhile exercise.

    Start with the why

    Why are you interested in investing in property? The answer to this question has to be something more specific than “to make money” because there are plenty of other ways to do that. What, exactly, has attracted you to an investment property for sale as opposed to any other kind of investment? This should help you gain an insight into your real motivation, which should always inform your decision-making processes.

    Decide whether you are mainly interested in capital gains or yield

    There are basically only two ways to make money from any investment, including property, namely capital growth and yield. Knowing your motivation for investing in property will help you to decide which one to target. For example, if you know you have a major life event coming up in five years or so, perhaps a child going to university, then you might look for properties where there a reasonable expectation of locking in good capital gains during that time. Alternatively, if you are looking for a means to pay your bills regularly in retirement, then rental yield is likely to be your better option.

    Size your goals to your resources

    Every so often there is a story about an investor who made a tiny investment and promptly became an overnight millionaire. It can happen, it does happen, but it doesn’t happen often, not even in the most vibrant and buoyant of property markets. Generally speaking, people with smaller investment funds can expect smaller returns than those with larger investment funds and hence should set their goals and expectations accordingly. On the plus side, those smaller gains can still add up over time and create very meaningful returns.

    Set processes in place to manage your portfolio effectively

    Astute investors think ahead and manage their resources to deliver the best returns. One of these resources is your time and given the legalities around managing property these days, particularly residential property, there is often a very strong case for using letting agents deal with the day-to-day running of a property. You might also with to enlist the services of a proper accountant to ensure that you hold on to as much of your hard-earned profits as you possibly can.

    Define an exit strategy

    You may have no immediate plans to exit the property market, you may never intend to exit it, but it is still wise to have an exit strategy in case your plans change as life does happen and yours may lead you in directions which are unexpected, even if they are welcome.

    For more information on UK property investment, please contact Hopwood House.

    Here’s what it means to construct a balanced portfolio and how to make sure your portfolio stays that way.

    Balancing your portfolio means constructing a portfolio that fits your individual risk tolerance and investment goals. But it isn’t enough to just “set it and forget it.” You also need to make sure your portfolio stays balanced, which is known as rebalancing.

    Here’s a quick summary of what investors should know about balancing and rebalancing an investment portfolio:

    • Balancing your portfolio ensures that you have a mix of investment assets — usually stocks and bonds — appropriate for your risk tolerance and investment goals.
    • Rebalancing your portfolio allows you to maintain your desired level of risk over time.
    • Portfolios naturally get out of balance as the prices of individual investments fluctuate over time.
    • You can rebalance your portfolio at predetermined time intervals or when your allocations have deviated a certain amount from your ideal portfolio mix.
    • Rebalancing can be done by either selling one investment and buying another or by allocating additional funds to either stocks or bonds.

    With that in mind, what is the goal of balancing and rebalancing your portfolio, and why is it so important?

    Why is balancing and rebalancing a portfolio so important?

    The purpose of balancing a portfolio is to achieve your desired proportions of risk and return potential in your investment portfolio.

    When you first design and commit funds to an investment strategy, that is known allocating your assets. As a simplified example, you may want to have 70% of your portfolio in stocks and 30% in bonds. When you initially fund your portfolio in this manner, it would be what you consider a balanced portfolio.

    The problem is that, over time, these allocations in your portfolio don’t stay the same. Let’s say the stock market’s value doubles in five years while the value of the bond market grows but not nearly as much. The value of the stocks in your portfolio would become much greater than the value of the bonds, which puts your investment portfolio significantly out of balance.

    You can and should rebalance your investment account to maintain a balanced portfolio over time. If your original risk tolerance spurred you to invest 70% of your money in stocks, then your rebalanced portfolio should be 70% stocks once again.

    How to rebalance your portfolio

    How does portfolio rebalancing work? In a nutshell, rebalancing means selling one or more assets and using the proceeds to buy others in order to achieve your desired asset allocations. Continuing with the example above, you would either sell some of your stock investments and put the money into bonds or buy more bonds in order to realign your asset allocation with your risk tolerance.

    Which of these options sounds more appealing to you?

    • Sell high-performing investments and buy lower-performing ones.
    • Allocate new money strategically. For example, if one stock has become overweighted in your portfolio, invest your new deposits into other stocks you like until your portfolio is balanced again.

    You may prefer the second option because rebalancing in the “traditional” way — without investing any additional money — requires you to sell your highest-performing assets. We’re generally fans of the second option since rebalancing by contributing new funds enables you to leave your winners alone to (hopefully) continue to outperform.

    It’s worth mentioning that if you invest through a robo-advisory service or an employer-sponsored retirement plan such as a 401(k), your portfolio may rebalance automatically.

    Determining how a balanced portfolio looks for you

    Unfortunately, there’s no perfect method of determining your ideal diversification in a balanced portfolio.

    One method of determining the best asset allocation for you is called the Rule of 110. Subtract your age from 110 to determine what percentage of your portfolio should be allocated to stocks, with the remainder mostly in bonds. For example, if you are 39, so this means that about 71% of your portfolio should be in stocks, with the other 29% in bonds.

    You can use this method, but it’s also important to consider your individual situation. If you consider yourself to be a risk-tolerant person and short-term market fluctuations don’t bother you, then your balanced portfolio could shift a bit in favor of stocks.

    On the other hand, if stock market volatility keeps you up at night, then you can err on the side of caution by allocating more money to bonds or even to cash. A portfolio that is balanced for me may not be — and is probably not — balanced for you!

    When should you rebalance your portfolio?

    Once you’ve determined your target asset allocation and have created a balanced portfolio, the next logical question is, “When should I rebalance my portfolio?”

    There are two general ways to approach rebalancing. You can either rebalance your portfolio at a specific time interval (say, yearly), or you can rebalance only when your portfolio becomes clearly unbalanced. There’s no right or wrong method, but unless your portfolio’s value is extremely volatile, rebalancing once or twice a year should be more than sufficient.

    One big advantage of portfolio rebalancing for long-term investors

    When market values plunge, instinct tells us to sell our holdings before conditions get worse. And, when market values only seem to rise and “everyone” is making money, that’s when we want to put our money into the market. This is human nature, but it is also the exact opposite of buying low and selling high.

    Being essentially forced to sell high and buy low is one of the most significant benefits of maintaining a balanced portfolio over time. For example, if the stock market crashes and equities lose 30% of their value, then the bond allocation in your portfolio is likely to become too high. Restoring balance to your portfolio could involve selling some of your bond investments and buying stocks while they’re cheap. Establishing a balanced portfolio and taking steps to keep it that way can help you to avoid relying too much on emotions when making important investment decisions.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    If you recently started using Telegram as your primary messaging platform for texting your friends and colleagues, you may want to check out one of its unique features called Channels. Before you jump to conclusions, this is not a fancy word for group chats. In fact, it differs from groups in many ways.

    Telegram Channels is a feature that allows users to broadcast messages to a large number of people. Channels can be public or private and depending on these settings, people can subscribe to channels to stay notified of all the messages that are posted in a channel. Unlike Telegram groups where anyone in the group can send messages, only the creator and admins can post in a Telegram channel. This makes it easy to stay up to date on the topics you’re interested in following, whether it’s news, entertainment, business, or anything else really.

    You may have already noticed the option to make a new channel while trying to start a new conversation or create a group, but what about joining an existing public channel? If you haven’t figured it out, read on to learn how you can find and join Telegram channels for topics that interest you.

    How to Find & Join Telegram Channels on iPhone & iPad

    Joining a Telegram Channel is actually pretty easy, as long as it’s public. Of course you’ll need Telegram setup on your device first, but assuming that’s the case let’s take a look at what you need to do:

      Upon launching the Telegram app, you’ll be taken to the Chats section. Here, simply swipe down anywhere to reveal the search bar.

    Next, type in any topic that you’re interested in or the public channel’s name if you know it to begin the search.

    The channel results for what you typed will show up under “Global Search” as shown in the screenshot below. Simply tap on the channel’s name to proceed.

    This will give you a preview of the channel and you’ll be able to see the recent messages that were broadcasted. If you want to get notified about new messages from this channel, tap on “Join”.

    Now that you’ve successfully joined the channel, you’ll get a notification every time a channel admin posts a message.

    How to Leave Telegram Channels on iPhone & iPad

    At some point, if you ever change your mind and want to stop getting notified, you can follow these steps to leave a particular channel that you’ve subscribed to:

      Simply open the channel and tap on the channel name located at the top.

    Now, choose “Leave” which is located just below the subscriber count.

    That’s pretty much all you need to do unsubscribe from a channel.

    Do remember that the above procedure to find and join Telegram channels is only applicable to public channels. If you want to join a private Telegram channel, you can either get invited to it by the channel admin or click on an invite link that was shared with you.

    As you can see, a Telegram channel works in a fairly similar way to a group chat except that there are usually a lot of people in a channel, and only admins can send messages. Leaving a channel is similar to how you’d leave a normal group chat as well.

    Now that you know a lot more about Telegram channels, you may be looking to create your own channel. It’s very similar to creating a new group chat within the app as well. As the channel owner, you can invite the first 200 subscribers to your channel, after which the channel will operate on its own with a join or invite link. Unlike group chats which are restricted to 200,000 members, a Telegram channel can have an unlimited number of subscribers.

    Did you find and join some interesting Telegram channels on your iPhone and iPad? How many Telegram channels have you joined so far? Have you created your very own channel yet? Share your valuable thoughts and opinions on this unique feature in the comments section down below.

    Are you looking for a privacy-focused messaging app that keeps your data secure with end-to-end encryption for text messages? Telegram might just be the answer you’re looking for. You may have heard of this app already, which has been around for years, but it has become more popular due to the vast array of privacy features it offers. Telegram is somewhat similar to Signal in this regard, but of course it’s a different app and protocol. Telegram is also cross-platform compatible, meaning you can use it on iPhone, iPad, Mac, Windows, and Android too, and communicate back and forth between anyone using those devices and the Telegram app as well.

    Recently, there has been a spike in the popularity of Telegram after being mentioned in popular media as a viable alternative to the Facebook-owned WhatsApp. People who are particularly concerned about their privacy or user data being sold to third-party companies have been looking at instant messengers like Telegram (or Signal) whose primary selling point is privacy and security. Some of this attention was exacerbated due to a planned recent WhatsApp privacy policy update (which has since been postponed for a few months), but nonetheless some users of the app may have been on the fence about switching to Telegram or Signal anyway.

    No matter what your reason for wanting to use Telegram is, we’re here to help you get started with the app on your device, as we’ll walk through how you can set up and use Telegram with a new account on your iPhone.

    How to Setup & Use Telegram Messenger on iPhone

    First and foremost, you will need a valid phone number to get started with Telegram on your device, just like WhatsApp, Signal, and other popular instant messengers. Therefore, unlike iMessage, you cannot use Telegram with only an email address. Assuming you have access to a cell phone with your phone number, let’s check out the required steps:

      Click here to go to Telegram on App Store, or just head over to the App Store on your iPhone and search for the Telegram app. Tap on “GET IT” to download and finish the installation.

    Once you launch the app for the first time, you’ll be taken to the welcome screen. Tap on “Start Messaging” to begin the setup.

    You’ll now be prompted to enter a valid phone number. Select your country for the country code, type in the phone number and tap on “Next” to continue.

    Telegram will send a verification code to your phone number via SMS. Type the code in the app and tap on “Next”.

    First-time users will be prompted to type in your name and choose a profile picture for your Telegram account. Once you’re done, you’ll be taken to the main chat section of the app. To start a new conversation, tap on the compose icon located at the top-right corner of the screen.

    Here, you’ll be able to view all the people in your contacts list who use Telegram already. You can tap on their names to start a new conversation with them. Additionally, you have options to make a new group, new channel, and add new contacts manually if needed.

    You’re all set to chat with your friends on Telegram, provided you’ve followed the above steps correctly anyway.

    Once you enter the verification code enter the chat screen of Telegram, the app will request access to your contacts along with permissions for notifications. However, giving Telegram access to your contacts isn’t mandatory at all since you can manually add contacts using their phone numbers within the app. This allows you to just keep the people you talk to in your Telegram contacts list.

    The steps that we covered here were obviously focusing on the iPhone, but the set-up process is identical for the iPad as well. However, you still need to have access to a cell phone with a valid phone number to receive the SMS verification code and complete the initial set-up. Once complete, you can keep using Telegram even if you lose your phone, provided you don’t uninstall and re-install the app or switch to a new device.

    If you’re a privacy buff like me, you may want to disable notification previews for the Telegram app. This will prevent incoming messages from showing up on your iPhone or iPad’s lock screen that can otherwise be seen by anyone even when the device is locked. To do this, simply head over to Settings -> Notifications -> Telegram -> Show Previews and set it to “Never” or “When Unlocked”.

    As mentioned earlier, Telegram is also a cross-platform instant messaging service, meaning you’ll be able to use it on iPhone and Android, and use Telegram on your computer too, regardless of whether you’re using Windows, macOS, or Linux. Your Telegram conversations are automatically synced across all the platforms over the cloud.

    Not having a good time on Telegram? Perhaps, not a lot of your friends are using it? In that case, you may be interested in checking out Signal which is another good privacy-oriented cross-platform messaging app that has gained popularity among iPhone and Android users recently.

    We’re glad that we could help you get started with Telegram on your iPhone and iPad. Did you face any issues during the initial set-up process? What are your first impressions on the Telegram messaging app? Share any relevant opinions, thoughts, tips, or experiences in the comments!

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Tech-Recipes has come up with yet another interesting tutorial on Telegram. Telegram stands out to be one of the best messaging apps on PlayStore. In this tech-Recipe, you are going to find out How to Create a New Channel on Telegram.

    In the late ’60s telegram was the quickest means of sending a written message. Somehow it still is. But we are talking about the digital messaging app Telegram. In our previous tutorial, How to do secret chat on telegram, we promised that we will come up with more information about this amazing app.

    Why choose Telegram?

    Telegram is one of the fastest and most providing messaging apps on the Playstore. In comparison to WhatsApp, telegram steps ahead by providing a whopping 1.5 GB of data while WhatsApp limits it to only 16MB. That’s a huge gap.

    Channels are a feed in which only a set group of users may post while everyone else can just read. This can serve as a useful and immediate media channel for publishers or content creators just like any other social media platform. Channels are great because they do not let mayhem happen even with a thousand people in it, unlike groups.

    Tech-Recipe is here to present you a tutorial on creating a new channel on telegram.

    Step-by-Step procedure to make and use a Telegram channel.

    1. Open your Telegram app

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    2. Open the list menu

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadList menu

    3. Choose the option “New Channel”

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadNew channel

    4. Write a name for your channel and channel description

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadNew Channel, name and description

    5. There are two settings to channel broadcast. You can create a Public, private channel.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadHow to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Public channels are found in search, anyone can join them.

    Private channels can only be joined via an invite.

    6. For a public channel, you can send a permanent like, like a web address

    7. For a private channel, you can send an HTTP link, to whomever you want to invite

    8. You can add members from your contact list.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadAdd members

    Quick Fact
    You can add an unlimited number of members…What.

    9. You can even edit your sent messages.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadEdit Texts

    10. Mute notification if you are not free.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadMute Notifications

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    What is Telegram?

    Telegram is one of the fastest growing messenger apps in the world. It was founded by the Durov brothers, who are also the founders of Russia’s largest social network, Valued at $5 Billion, Telegram is popular for its encrypted and insanely fast messaging.

    To date, Telegram has over 200 million users. That is more than 30 times the size of Singapore’s population. Not to mention, Telegram has spent $0 on marketing to achieve this impressive feat. Take a look at the other statistics of this messenger app by DMR statistics.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadSource

    What’s so good about this Telegram, I already got Whatsapp leh...

    I wouldn’t fault you for thinking that way. After all, I used to be a heavy Whatsapp user. However, everything changed when I started using Telegram.

    Here are some of the reasons I love Telegram and why you should try it:

    Insanely fast

    By insanely fast, I mean at an instance. The moment you press the “send” button, your message is delivered right away with no lags. This is unlike WhatsApp and I’m sure you will know what I mean once you’ve experienced it.


    Whatsapp has groups but Telegram has Supergroups! What’s the difference? Telegram doesn’t limit you to 200 people in a group. You can add in 10,000 members into a Supergroup. If you ever have such a big group, Telegram offers you an awesome admin panel to take control. Give admin rights to those you trust. Restrict someone who is creating trouble in your group. If you are handling many different Whatsapp groups, maybe it’s time to change platform.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadAdmin Panel

    Out-of-the-world Stickers & GIFs

    Find all sorts of sticker packs you can imagine. From Simpsons, to Game of Thrones to even our Prime Minister, Lee Hsien Loong. If you can’t find it, simply make them yourself! There is nothing more satisfying than personalizing your own stickers.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadTelegram Sticker Packs How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadLHL sticker pack

    And yes, Telegram also made it so simple to send your favorite funny GIFs to your family and friends. Type @gif “something” and choose the GIF you want to send. Easy peasy lemon squeezy.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad@gif confused? Not so confusing after you try it out. I swear.

    Cloud-based service

    You have many devices. iPad pro, iPhone Xs, Mi 8 pro, Macbook Air and probably more. It doesn’t matter. You are able to access your Telegram account in all the devices you own. That is amazing as I can be on Telegram whenever and wherever without the hassle of logging in and out.

    Telegram channels

    Telegram has channels where people collect important information without being in a groupchat. Often times, you want information right away. You don’t want to scroll through a bunch of spammy messages by other people. This is what Telegram channels can provide you with.

    Take for an example: sgAirfarePromos. If you join the channel, whenever there is a new airfare promotion, you will be notified straight away. This saves you time from searching online on the different airline sites on what is the best promotions out there.

    There are also other useful channels like sgTuitions and sgQuickJobs. Both channels allow you to list your job offers to thousands of people right away.

    The most amazing part about such channels is that there is absolutely no sign ups required. You simply just to have a Telegram account and join the channels to start.

    How to get started in 3 steps?

    1. Download Telegram for Andriod, iPhone/iPad or Windows.

    2. Key in your mobile number

    3. Start messaging your family and friends.

    For some more awesome Telegram channels you can join, check out this medium article.

    Disclaimer: Tim and his team are on a mission to provide Singaporeans a community to share and add value to each other through Telegram.

    Have a questions or comment to share about this article? DM @JerekChng directly on Telegram!

    Khamosh Pathak is a freelance technology writer who specializes in tutorials. His work has also been published on Lifehacker, iPhoneHacks, Zapier’s blog, MakeUseOf, and Guiding Tech. Khamosh has nearly a decade of experience writing how-tos, features and technology guides on the internet. Read more.

    As far as messaging apps go, Telegram is quite unique (especially compared to Signal). You get access to third-party clients, bots, drop-in audio chats, and more. Telegram’s public broadcasting channels are one such feature. Here’s how to find and join Telegram channels.

    What Are Telegram Channels?

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Telegram channels are different from Telegram groups, though they do appear to be similar. For instance, Telegram groups can have up to 200,000 users, and they can be open to the public.

    Channels, on the other hand, are specifically designed for broadcasting messages to a large audience. Unlike groups, they are not designed for conversations.

    You can have an unlimited number of subscribers to a public or private channel. Public channels get their own “” URL.

    Only the channel owner or the admin can post to the channel, each message has a view count and details of who shared the message, and channels can include rich media like video, audio, polls, and more.

    Find Telegram Channels Online

    You’ll find Telegram channels for anything and everything, from news organizations to sports updates, to books and movies.

    While you can search for a keyword directly in Telegram, there’s a better way to find Telegram channels. And that’s by using organized online repositories.

    The Telegram Channels website is an online repository of channels that are organized based on topics and interests. You’ll find a list of channels for movies, books, technology, and more.

    From the site, you can explore multiple channels, see their latest posts, and view the number of subscribers.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    When you’re ready, simply tap the “Subscribe” button to open the channel in the Telegram app.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    From the Telegram app, just tap the “Join” button to join the channel.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Search and Join Telegram Channels

    If you know the name of the Telegram channel that you want to join, you can do so directly from the Telegram app. The process is slightly different for the iPhone and Android app.

    On your Android smartphone, open the Telegram app and tap the search button from the top-right corner.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Now, type in the name of the Telegram channel that you want to join and select it from the search results.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    This will open the Telegram channel. You can browse around to see the latest updates.

    When you’re ready to join the channel, just tap the “Join” button.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    If you’re using an iPhone, open the Telegram app and go to the “Chats” tab. Here, tap the search bar from the top of the screen. Scroll down if you don’t see it.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Here, type in the name of the Telegram channel that you want to join. Then, select it from the search results.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    To join the channel, simply tap the “Join” button.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    You are now subscribed to the channel. You’ll find the channel in the “Chats” tab, along with all your other conversations. When a channel shares an update, you’ll be notified about it.

    Mute Telegram Channels

    Telegram channels are a great source of the latest information on any topic. But if you have too many channels, your notifications can go haywire. Muting channels can help. And if it gets to be too much, you can always leave a Telegram channel.

    The process of muting and unmuting a channel is the same on both the Android and iPhone apps. From the Telegram app, open the Telegram channel in question, and from the bottom, tap the “Mute” button to mute the channel. You can come back and unmute it from the same place.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Leave Telegram Channels

    The steps for leaving a Telegram channel are different depending on your device. On your Android smartphone, open the Telegram channel that you want to leave, then tap the channel’s name from the top.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Here, tap the three-dot menu icon from the top-right corner.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Then, choose the “Leave Channel” option.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    From the pop-up message, tap the “Leave Channel” option to confirm.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    On your iPhone, go to the Telegram channel that you want to leave and tap its name, which is found at the top of the screen.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Tap the “Leave” button.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    From the pop-up message, choose the “Leave Channel” option.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Instantly, the channel will disappear from the Telegram app.

    Did you know that you can send Snapchat-style self-destructing messages in Telegram? Here’s how to send disappearing messages in Telegram.

    Are you trying to join a blocked or banned Telegram channel?

    A Telegram channel/group is typically blocked or banned because it shares adult content.

    If you’re using an iPhone, you might not be able to join these channels.

    This is because there is a filter that prevents you from joining them.

    However, the filter cannot be disabled on the Telegram app.

    Instead, you’ll have to disable it using the desktop version of Telegram.

    In this guide, you’ll learn how to access, bypass, join, or open blocked or banned Telegram channels on iPhone and Android.

    • How to open blocked Telegram channels
    • How to open banned Telegram channels

    How to open blocked Telegram channels

    To open blocked Telegram channels, you need to download Telegram for Windows (or for your operating system).

    After you’ve downloaded it, log in to your account by scanning the QR code using the Telegram app.

    Lastly, navigate to your privacy and security settings and enable “Disable filtering”.

    By doing so, you’ll be able to access blocked Telegram channels.

    However, you need to force close the Telegram app first.

    This will apply the changes that you’ve made on the desktop version of Telegram to the Telegram mobile app.

    Here is how to open blocked Telegram channels:

    1. Download Telegram for Windows

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Firstly, you need to download Telegram for Windows (or for your operating system).

    This is because you can only disable the sensitive content filter on the desktop version of Telegram.

    Click on this link to download the desktop version of Telegram:

    After you’ve clicked on the link, you’ll land on the “Telegram Desktop” page.

    On the page, click on “Get Telegram for Windows x64” to download Telegram.

    Lastly, click on “tsetup.exe” to install it.

    2. Scan the QR code using the Telegram app

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    After you’ve installed Telegram, you need to open it.

    When you open Telegram, you’ll see a QR code.

    Now, you need to log in to Telegram by scanning the QR code.

    To do so, open the Telegram mobile app on your phone and tap on “Settings”.

    Secondly, tap on “Devices” followed by “Scan QR Code”.

    Lastly, use the QR code scanner to scan the QR code.

    3. Click on the menu

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    After you’ve scanned the QR code using the Telegram mobile app, you’ll be logged in to the Telegram.

    Now, you’ll see all of your chats.

    On the top-left corner, you’ll see a menu icon.

    Click on the menu icon to open the menu.

    4. Open your settings

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    After you’ve clicked on the menu icon, the menu will open.

    On the menu, you’ll see multiple options.

    This includes “Contacts”, “Settings”, “Night Mode”, and more.

    Click on “Settings” to go to your settings.

    5. Click on “Privacy and Security”

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    After you’ve clicked on “Settings”, you’ll land on your settings.

    There are multiple settings including “Edit profile”, “Notifications”, “Privacy and Security”, and more.

    The option to disable filtering is located in the privacy and security settings.

    Click on “Privacy and Security” to go to your privacy and security settings.

    6. Enable “Disable filtering”

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    After you’ve clicked on “Privacy and Security”, you’ll land on your privacy and security settings.

    There are multiple settings that you can change including “Privacy”, “Two-step verification”, “Sensitive content”, and more.

    To unblock Telegram channels, you need to disable filtering.

    Under “Sensitive content”, enable “Disable filtering”.

    After you’ve enabled “Disable filtering”, force close the Telegram mobile app on your phone and re-open it.

    This is to apply the changes that you’ve made to the Telegram mobile app.

    Lastly, try joining the blocked channel/group on the Telegram mobile app again.

    This time, you should be able to join it without getting an error!

    How to open banned Telegram channels

    Here’s how to open banned Telegram channels:

    1. Download Telegram on your computer.
    2. Open Telegram after you’ve installed it.
    3. Open the Telegram mobile app and tap on “Settings”.
    4. Tap on “Devices” followed by “Scan QR Code”.
    5. Scan the QR code to log in to Telegram.
    6. Click on the menu icon and click on “Settings”.
    7. Click on “Privacy and Security”.
    8. Scroll down until you find the “Sensitive content” setting.
    9. Enable “Disable filtering”.

    After you’ve “Disable filtering”, you’ll be able to open banned Telegram channels.

    Before you do so, force close the Telegram mobile app on your phone and re-open it.

    Lastly, try joining the banned Telegram channel/group again.

    This time, you should be able to join it without getting an error.

    Why is a Telegram channel blocked?

    A Telegram channel is blocked because it contains adult content.

    It can also be blocked because the channel shares pirated movies, TV shows, or music.

    In 2021, the Ministry Of Communication And Information (Jakarta) has stepped in to block Telegram groups and channels from sharing free movies.

    This is due to multiple reports from the public.


    A Telegram channel/group can be blocked or banned if it contains adult content.

    However, you can easily unblock the block or unban the ban by following the guide above.

    Keep in mind that you need to force close the Telegram mobile app on your phone after you’ve made changes in the desktop version of Telegram.

    Otherwise, the changes that you’ve made will not be applied.

    Submitted by Jon Reed on May 26, 2018 – 6:21am

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    For those not familiar with it, Telegram is a popular messaging app with privacy features such as end-to-end encryption on “secret chats” that can only be accessed on the devices they originated on. Because of this it has gained notoriety as a tool used by terrorists and has even been banned in Russia and Iran where it has been deemed a tool of social dissidents. Nevertheless, Telegram is a well-done app for simple, fast and secure messaging.

    Like with email or other messaging services, users often want more than one account – one for personal and one for business, or maybe just as a safety if the primary gets banned from a channel. Unfortunately, while multiple Telegram accounts are supported by the Android version, Telegram for iOS has not been updated to do so yet. You can, however, still have a second Telegram account by using a third party app like Loopy, a top-notch Telegram client. You will also need a second mobile number (a Google Voice number will suffice, and it is easy to set up), because if you use the same mobile number as your primary Telegram account you will simply end up with a clone of it.

    Here’s how to create a second Telegram account on iPhone or iPad:

    1. Download Loopy from the App Store and, if you don’t already have a Google Voice number, follow these instructions to set one up.
    2. Open the Loopy app and tap Start Messaging at the bottom of the page.

    Khamosh Pathak is a freelance technology writer who specializes in tutorials. His work has also been published on Lifehacker, iPhoneHacks, Zapier’s blog, MakeUseOf, and Guiding Tech. Khamosh has nearly a decade of experience writing how-tos, features and technology guides on the internet. Read more.

    Telegram isn’t just about the large group chats and bots. Telegram has a great voice and video calling feature, too. Here’s how to make voice and video calls on Telegram.

    While the chat messages are only server-side encrypted, voice and video calls in Telegram are end-to-end encrypted.

    Currently, Telegram only supports voice and video calls in one-on-one conversations. It has a separate Voice Chat feature where anyone in the Telegram group can drop in and talk. In this article, we will be focusing on making voice and video calls in private conversations.

    Make Voice or Video Calls in Telegram on Android

    You can quickly place an audio or video call in Telegram using the menu option. To get started, open the Telegram app and select the contact you want to call.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Here, tap the three-dot menu icon found in the top-right corner.

    From the menu, choose the “Call” option to start an audio call or the “Video Call” option to start a video call.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    You can also switch to a video call after placing a voice call. To do this, just tap the “Start Video” button.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Once you’re done with the call, just tap the red “End Call” button to stop the call.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Make Voice or Video Calls on Telegram for iPhone

    You can make voice and video calls from the contact’s profile. To get started, open the Telegram app and choose the contact who you want to call.

    Here, tap the contact’s name from the top of the screen.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    You can choose the “Call” option if you want to make a voice call or the “Video” option if you want to make a video call.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    You can convert a voice call into a video call by tapping the “Camera” button.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    From the pop-up message, tap the “Switch” button.

    To end the call, just tap the red “End” button.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Make Voice or Video Calls in Telegram for Desktop

    Telegram’s Desktop app handles calls in a different way. Instead of directly starting a video call, you need to place a voice call first. From there, you can switch to the video call by turning on the camera.

    To get started, open the Telegram Desktop app on your computer, then navigate to the conversation that you want to start a call from.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Click the phone icon from the top-right corner of the screen to start the call.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Once the call is picked up, you can select the “Camera” button to turn on your camera and switch to a video call.

    To end the call, click the “Decline” button.

    If video calling isn’t your thing, you can also use Telegram to send disappearing photos and videos.

    Telegram is an app known for its features such as disappearing messages and secret chats. Now the company has launched a new feature for Channels on its platform that will enable users who have subscribed to a particular channel to have a discussion on a topic and chat with one another.

    This feature is called the Discussion Button. Up until now, users who had subscribed to a particular channel could only see the feed by a particular channel but not respond to a particular message.

    The newly launched Discussions button changes that by allowing users to discuss contents of a message in a channel. This, however, happens in a separate group chat window that is attached to the main channel. This feature also enables users following a channel to chat with one another.

    “All the messages automatically get re-posted in this chat group once you send a message to the main channel. The concerned authorities can also pick up feedback and queries coming from their users posting on the group chat, and can act accordingly,” Telegram wrote in a press release.

    Here’s how you can create a Discussion Chat Group attached to a closed channel on Telegram:

    Step 1: The admin of the channel needs to click on the top right corner button of a channel.

    Step 2: Tap on Manage Channel option.

    Step 3: Now select Discussion followed by a button named as Add a Group.

    Step 4: Tap on Create a Group option

    Step 5: Insert desirable Name for your associated group chat forum. And you are good to go.

    Follow HT Tech for the latest tech news and reviews , also keep up with us on Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram. For our latest videos, subscribe to our YouTube channel.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Is it possible to hack someone’s Telegram messages on iPhone, iPad, and Android? The answer is: yes. Telegram Messenger has become an increasingly popular messaging app, especially for teenagers, because Telegram can accommodate many groups and individuals. This situation has increased the need to monitor the Telegram activities of children or employees. As a parent who cares about children, you need to spy on Telegram messages on iPhone, iPad, and Android phones and tablets.

    Why Do You Need to Hack Someone’s Telegram Messages?

    Table of Contents

    Telegram is one of the social apps widely used by young people. It can be used to keep in touch with friends and family. However, children or employees may also be abusing the Telegram app. You need to monitor Telegram activities to ensure your children’s online safety or protect your company’s interests.

    Parental Control

    With the opening of countless communication channels on the Internet, today’s society makes our communication methods simple and fast. However, on the other hand, it also has many adverse effects on contemporary youth. Some malicious people, such as online predators will threaten your children’s online safety, you need to hack their Telegram messages to keep them away from potential dangers.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Employee Monitoring

    Monitoring Telegram is also useful for business owners and managers who provide employees with mobile devices. If you do not take measures to monitor employees, the company’s confidential data may be at risk. Data leakage and misuse of company equipment are the main problems that endanger your company. In order to ensure the security of company data and the efficiency of employees, you need to hack Telegram chat history of your employees.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    3 Ways to Hack Somone’s Telegram Messages

    Just like other social media platforms, Telegram has unlimited access to the Internet. Without strong self-control, children may be addicted to Telegram. Therefore, you need to pay close attention to your children’s activities on Telegram. Here are 3 ways to hack someone’s Telegram messages:

    Hack Telegram Messages with iKeyMonitor for Free

    iKeyMonitor Telegram spy app is a monitoring app that enables you to spy on the Telegram activities of your kids and employees. You can follow the steps below to install it:

    1. First, sign up for a free trial and install iKeyMonitor.
    2. Next, log in to the Online Cloud Panel.
    3. Last, you can go to LogsChatsTelegram to read Telegram messages.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Hack Telegram Messages Using Telegram Web

    1. Open your web browser, navigate to
    2. Pick the country from the drop-down menu and enter the target device user’s phone number which is linked to their Telegram account and then tap on Next.
    3. When prompted for confirming the phone number, tap on OK.
    4. Once you do this, a login code will be sent to the given number.
    5. Access this message on the target phone user and enter this code on the system screen in the designated field.
    6. Once this is done, you can check all incoming and outgoing messages and other data shared on Telegram.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Hack Telegram Account Using iCloud Backup

    1. Go to ‘Settings’ on your iPhone and then tap the ‘General’ section.
    2. After that hit the ‘Reset’ button and choose ‘Erase All Content and Settings’.
    3. Let your device reboot and when you reach the ‘Apps & Data’ screen, tap on ‘Restore from iCloud Backup’ option.
    4. You will be prompted to sign in to your ‘iCloud’ account. Do that and select ‘Choose Backup’. If required confirm your selection.
    5. After this, you can check the backup for the Telegram data.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad


    The above are three effective ways to help you hack someone’s Telegram messages. If you accidentally deleted your Telegram chats, you can use the iCloud backup to hack your Telegram chat history. If you don’t want to reset your device, then iKeyMonitor will be your best choice. Download it and start hacking now!

    Chris Hoffman is Editor-in-Chief of How-To Geek. He’s written about technology for over a decade and was a PCWorld columnist for two years. Chris has written for The New York Times and Reader’s Digest, been interviewed as a technology expert on TV stations like Miami’s NBC 6, and had his work covered by news outlets like the BBC. Since 2011, Chris has written over 2,000 articles that have been read nearly one billion times—and that’s just here at How-To Geek. Read more.

    At the start of 2021, Signal and Telegram are on top of the app store charts. Both chat apps promise more privacy than WhatsApp, Facebook Messenger, and SMS. But there are some big differences between the two. Here’s what you should know—and which you should use.

    What Signal and Telegram Have in Common

    Signal and Telegram both advertise themselves as private and secure. Neither is owned by a big tech company. Signal is owned by a non-profit organization, while Telegram is owned by a for-profit company.

    Both Signal and Telegram are chat apps with all the standard features, from stickers to photo and file transfers to voice and video calls.

    Signal and Telegram both offer apps for iPhone, iPad, and Android. Each is free, and a phone number is all you need to sign up for either. Both offer optional desktop apps so that you can chat on a Windows PC, Mac, or Linux system, giving you the option to chat on your computer with its full keyboard.

    Signal Has Better Privacy Features Than Telegram

    Signal is built from the ground up for privacy, and it shows. All conversations and other communications on Signal are end-to-end encrypted between devices running Signal. The company in charge of Signal, the Signal Foundation, couldn’t even see your messages if it wanted to.

    Telegram offers optional end-to-end encryption. You have to start a “Secret Chat.” In Signal, everything is a secret chat—by default, and always. All Telegram messages are encrypted between you and the Telegram server, but the company in charge of Telegram could technically view your messages on its server if it liked—unless you start a “Secret Chat.”

    Also, in Telegram, you can’t have a group “Secret Chat.” You can only get end-to-end encryption in conversations between two people. Unlike Telegram, Signal offers encrypted group chats.

    All your Signal conversations are stored only on your device by default. In Telegram, they’re stored on Telegram’s servers and can be synchronized between your devices. (You can still use Signal between multiple devices and synchronize messages from one device to another. But you can’t just log into Signal on the web and find all your conversations right there.)

    Signal is completely open-source—both the code for the Signal clients and the code for the Signal server can be found on GitHub. The code for Telegram’s apps is open-source, but Telegram’s server software is not open-source.

    Some security researchers have argued that Signal’s encryption protocol is better and more bulletproof than Telegram’s MTProto encryption protocol, although this is a complicated and disputed topic.

    The Signal app is developed by the Signal Foundation, a non-profit organization founded by donations. Telegram is run by a for-profit corporation and has wrestled with a variety of plans to make money, including an ill-fated cryptocurrency offering.

    Signal also has other built-in features around privacy, including the ability to automatically blur faces in the photos you send.

    Telegram Has Some Niceties Signal Doesn’t Offer

    While Signal has the clear advantage when it comes to privacy, Telegram offers a variety of convenience features that Signal doesn’t have.

    In Telegram, you can have up to 200,000 people in a group chat. In Signal, you can only have up to 1000 people. In Telegram, you can transfer files up to 2 GB in size. In Signal, you can only transfer files up to 100 MB in size.

    Telegram offers cloud message synchronization—you can even sign into Telegram on the web and continue your conversations. That’s a tradeoff—unlike in Signal, where your conversations are all stored locally on your devices, the conversations are all stored on Telegram’s servers. (Unless you start a “Secret Chat.”)

    Telegram lets you add bots to conversations, but this means that conversations you add bots to have less private encryption. Signal doesn’t have bots that can interact with conversations, ensuring privacy—but not giving you the option to use bots.

    Overall, the Telegram app also has a shinier interface, with more available sticker packs, animated stickers, and customizable background images for your conversations. As of January 11, 2021, Signal is working on adding many of these features.

    Signal vs. Telegram: Which Should You Use?

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    If you’re serious about maximum privacy for your communications, you should pick Signal. It’s built from the ground up to be as private as possible by default. It’s clear why (as of early January 2021) Signal is beating Telegram on the App Store charts.

    If some of Telegram’s features appeal to you—for example, if you want bots, very large group chats, or transfers of larger files, that’s a good argument for using Telegram. Maybe you’re fine with storing all your conversations on a cloud server for convenience, but you just want to get away from Facebook—that’s a good argument for using Telegram.

    Of course, which service you end up using depends on which service your friends, family, coworkers, and other people you want to talk to use. You might even end up using both to talk to different people. Feel free to give both a try.

    Ultimately, either Signal or Telegram beats WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger when it comes to privacy. Neither app is linked to Facebook, as WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are. Both Signal and WhatsApp are much more secure than SMS, which allows your cellular carrier to see every message you send.

    Of course, both Signal and Telegram are changing over time and gaining new features. It’s worth doing your own research and playing with them to see which you prefer.

    For privacy-focused users, the big difference is that everything is always end-to-end encrypted in Signal, whereas Telegram offers end-to-end encryption as an optional feature that you have to go out of your way to use.

    The Low Power Mode helps iPhone or iPad last longer by reducing power consumption. By default, the Low Power Mode turns off automatically once the battery charges over 80%. But what if you want to keep Low Power on all the time to get the maximum battery life possible? Here’s how you can enable always-on Low Power Mode on your iPhone or iPad.

    Enable Always-On Low Power Mode On iPhone or iPad

    Table of Contents

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipadStarting iOS 13, Apple added a new app called Shortcuts on iPhone and iPad. Using it, you create personal automation to keep the Low Power Mode enabled forever. Read the detailed steps below.

    Permanent Low Power Mode On iPad (iPadOS)

    To get permanent low power mode on your iPad, you need to create an automation that automatically enables Low Power Mode when it is turned off by either iOS or you. Check the steps in detail below.

    1. Open the Shortcuts app on your iPad. Can’t find it? Search for “shortcuts” in Spotlight and click on it from the results. Or look for it in the App Library.

    2. Tap the > menu at the top left corner. Select Automation.

    3. Here, click on Create Personal Automation. If you have previously created automation, you’ll have to tap + first.

    4. In the “New Automation” window, scroll down to Low Power Mode. Tap it.

    5. Now, select Is Turned Off (Is Turned On should not be selected) and tap Next.

    6. Then, click on Add Action.

    7. A search panel will appear. Here, search for “low power.”

    8. Click on Set Low Power Mode.

    9. By default, it’ll say “Turn Low Power Mode On.” Leave it as it is and tap Next.

    10. Disable the toggle for Ask Before Running. Click Don’t Ask when prompted.

    11. Finally, tap on Done at the top right.

    Permanent Low Power Mode On iPhone (iOS)

    Similarly, you can enable always-on Low Power Mode on your iPhone, as shown below:

    1. Open the Shortcuts app on your iPhone.

    2. Select Automation at the bottom of the screen.

    3. Now, click on Create Personal Automation.

    4. Scroll down, select Low Power Mode.

    5. Make sure only Is Turned Off is selected. Tap Next.

    6. Click the Add Action button.

    7. Search for “low power” and tap Set Low Power Mode from results.

    8. Keep it as “Turn Low Power Mode On” and hit Next.

    9. On the next screen, disable Ask Before Running and tap Don’t Ask to confirm.

    10. Finally, click on Done at the top right.

    The automation is now set. From now onwards, whenever the Low Power Mode is turned off by either you or by iOS when the battery charges to 80%, this automation will automatically turn it back on.

    To get it in action, turn on Low Power Mode and turn it off. The Low Power can be turned on/ off from either the control center or via Settings > Battery > Low Power Mode. Doing so will trigger the always-on Low Power Mode automation.

    Turn Off Low Power Mode Automation

    Once you enable the always-on Low Power Mode, you won’t be able to disable it in the normal way. As soon as you disable it, the automation will trigger, turning it back on. If you want to get rid of the permanent low power Mode, you’ll have to disable the automation:

    1. Open the Shortcuts app and head to the Automation section.

    2. Tap the When Low Power Mode is turned off automation you created.

    3. On the Edit Automation screen, switch off Enable This Automation. Tap Done, and you’re good to go.

    The Low Power Mode will now start working normally on your iOS device.

    What Happens When You Turn On Low Power Mode on iOS?

    The Low Power Mode does several things to reduce your device’s overall power consumption like:

    • Reduces the overall CPU and GPU performance
    • Turns off automatic fetching of new email in the background
    • Lowers down the screen brightness
    • Stops automatic downloads
    • Limits visual effects and animations
    • Tones down the auto-lock time to 30 seconds
    • Photos and videos won’t sync with iCloud
    • The device will limit the 5G connectivity and more

    Is It Ok To Keep iPhone or iPad on Low Power Mode All the Time?

    As mentioned, the Low Power Mode limits many background activities on iOS. It also throttles down the CPU and GPU performance which may cause the device to feel slow at times, especially while running heavy apps or games.

    If you can compromise on performance and other features like background sync, visual effects, and can manage with the lower screen brightness, then yes, you can keep using your iPhone or iPad on Low Power Mode all the time.

    But again, this may hamper your overall experience with the device, which is why Apple turns it off automatically once the battery has enough charge.

    Wrapping Up

    This was all about how you can enable always-on Low Power Mode on your iPhone or iPad. I hope this helps you shell out the maximum battery life on your iOS device. Anyways, let me know your experience in the comments below. Stay tuned for more.

    You can also follow us for instant tech news at Google News or for tips and tricks, smartphones & gadgets reviews, join GadgetsToUse Telegram Group or for the latest review videos subscribe GadgetsToUse Youtube Channel.

    By Dann Berg published 5 March 14

    With the news of Facebook’s acquisition of WhatsApp, all eyes are turning to alternate messaging apps. With its clean user interface and variety of features, it’s no surprise that Telegram is getting a lot of attention. Unlike other chat clients, Telegram is cloud-based, which means you can seamlessly move your conversations between your smartphone, tablet and even your desktop, thanks to independent developers.

    Telegram is more than just a messaging client, allowing users to enter secret chats that are encrypted end-to-end for extra security. You’re also able to share more than just pictures and videos — Telegram lets you transfer documents or send your current location to a friend with the click of a button. Best of all, there are no ads and it’s completely free.

    If you want to start using Telegram to message your friends, here’s how to get everything set up.

    1. Install the Telegram app. Open either the App Store or Google Play and search for Telegram. Find the app with the paper airplane logo and install.

    2. Enter your phone number. After flipping through the welcome screen, you’ll be prompted to enter your phone number. Telegram will immediately send you a text message with a four digit code to verify that it’s your real number. Enter that code into the app to continue.

    3. Add your name and a picture. Telegram lets users create their own profiles, complete with name and picture. Enter this information to continue.

    4. Find a friend with Telegram. Telegram can automatically search your contacts for friends who use Telegram if you grant the app permission to access your address book. When you tap the Contacts tab at the bottom left of the screen, Telegram will show a list of your friends who use Telegram followed by contacts currently not signed up for the app. You can send an invite to join a chat by tapping on a friend’s name that’s not yet using Telegram.

    5. Start a regular chat. Select a friend who has a Telegram account to start a new chat. Similar to WhatsApp and other traditional texting apps, there’s a text field at the bottom of the screen that’s used to type messages.

    6. Send a photo, Web image, video, document, contact or your current location. Unlike most messaging apps, Telegram lets you send a wide range of information to your friends. Tap the paperclip icon next to the chat text field and choose the type of information you want to send. You can choose to immediately take a photo or video, or select one from your library. There’s also an option to search the Web for an image, which opens a search prompt that shows only image results.

    If you want to send your current location to a friend, select the Location option and approve that app’s access to your current location. Your friend will then be send an interactive map with you as a pin, which can be useful for finding each other when out and about. There’s also the option to share documents and contacts, for when you need to share a file or pass along someone’s information.

    7. Start a secret chat. From the Contacts tab, select the option that says New Secret Chat and then select a friend’s name. Any messages sent in this window are encrypted, meaning that no one else will have access to the chat, even Telegram. You can send texts, media and documents just like you would in a regular chat.

    You can also choose to make secret chat messages self-destruct, which means they’re securely erased after a set time. In a secret chat, tap on your friend’s name at the top of the screen > tap the Info button > and go into the Self-Destruct Timer settings. Choose one second, two seconds, five seconds, one minute, one hour, one day or one week.

    8. Adjust your chat background. In the Settings tab at the bottom right in the app, you can choose an image for your chat backgrounds. Telegram has a large selection of images to choose from, allowing you to customize the look and feel of your chats. There is also the option to select an image from your photo library to use as a background for a more personal touch.

    Fast. Secure. Powerful‪.‬

    Telegram FZ-LLC

      • #4 in Social Networking
      • 3.9 • 1.1K Ratings
      • Free



    Pure instant messaging — simple, fast, secure, and synced across all your devices. One of the world’s top 10 most downloaded apps with over 500 million active users.

    FAST: Telegram is the fastest messaging app on the market, connecting people via a unique, distributed network of data centers around the globe.

    SYNCED: You can access your messages from all your phones, tablets and computers at once. Telegram apps are standalone, so you don’t need to keep your phone connected. Start typing on one device and finish the message from another. Never lose your data again.

    UNLIMITED: You can send media and files, without any limits on their type and size. Your entire chat history will require no disk space on your device, and will be securely stored in the Telegram cloud for as long as you need it.

    SECURE: We made it our mission to provide the best security combined with ease of use. Everything on Telegram, including chats, groups, media, etc. is encrypted using a combination of 256-bit symmetric AES encryption, 2048-bit RSA encryption, and Diffie–Hellman secure key exchange.

    100% FREE & OPEN: Telegram has a fully documented and free API for developers, open source apps and verifiable builds to prove the app you download is built from the exact same source code that is published.

    POWERFUL: You can create group chats with up to 200,000 members, share large videos, documents of any type (.DOCX, .MP3, .ZIP, etc.) up to 2 GB each, and even set up bots for specific tasks. Telegram is the perfect tool for hosting online communities and coordinating teamwork.

    RELIABLE: Built to deliver your messages using as little data as possible, Telegram is the most reliable messaging system ever made. It works even on the weakest mobile connections.

    FUN: Telegram has powerful photo and video editing tools, animated stickers and emoji, fully customizable themes to change the appearance of your app, and an open sticker/GIF platform to cater to all your expressive needs.

    SIMPLE: While providing an unprecedented array of features, we take great care to keep the interface clean. Telegram is so simple you already know how to use it.

    PRIVATE: We take your privacy seriously and will never give any third parties access to your data. You can delete any message you ever sent or received for both sides, at any time and without a trace. Telegram will never use your data to show you ads.

    For those interested in maximum privacy, Telegram offers Secret Chats. Secret Chat messages can be programmed to self-destruct automatically from both participating devices. This way you can send all types of disappearing content — messages, photos, videos, and even files. Secret Chats use End-to-End Encryption to ensure that a message can only be read by its intended recipient.

    We keep expanding the boundaries of what you can do with a messaging app. Don’t wait years for older messengers to catch up with Telegram — join the revolution today.

    Telegram is really bigger than any other messaging platform, with groups and channels that can accommodate over 200,000 members. You must be already a member of dozens of groups and channels. Many of them might be of no use, while you are too lazy to leave each of them manually. This affects really badly when we look out for personal chats among other groups and channels. Well, Telegram has a solution to this.

    Here we will see how to filter out personal chats and filter groups and channels into a different section in Telegram.

    Filter Chats in Telegram

    Telegram supports the chat folder to help you sort out the chat window. The smart filtering and sorting in Telegram will help you take the personal chats into a new folder and keep the annoying groups and channels out of it.

    1. Open the Telegram app and go to Settings.
    2. Tap on “Chat Folders.”
    3. Tap the “Create New Folder” option.
    4. Select Add Chats.
    5. Choose Groups or Channels from the next window and tap Done.
    6. Provide the folder a name and tap Create.

    This is it. You now have an extra folder in the main chat window of the Telegram app. You could be able to see the new folder tab from the chat window other than All Chats and Personal chats. This will help you filter chats and find only groups or channels in Telegram easily.

    Disclosure: Mashtips is supported by its audience. As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    iOS 8 has made many improvements to Apple’s built-in browser. Safari supports the mobile version of websites quite well. However, no matter now well a site’s mobile version fits into a handheld device’s smaller screen, there are instances when you want to view the desktop version instead. Searching through Safari may lead you nowhere unless you know how to find the option to enable desktop browsing. Hidden somewhere in Apple’s browsing app is a link where you can request the desktop version of a site. To find out how to locate that link, read on.

    How to View the Desktop Version of a Website in Safari (iOS8)

    The option to enable desktop browsing in Safari is somewhat hidden within the app. To find and enable it, follow the steps below:

    1. Go to your iPhone’s Home screen by pressing the Home button.
    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad
    2. Open Safari by tapping on its icon.

    3. Go to the website you want to view.
    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad
    4. Once the website opens, tap on the Address bar.
    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad
    5. Icons, bookmarks and frequently visited sites will be shown. Scroll down the screen.
    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad
    6. You will now see an option to Request Desktop Site. Tap on the link to enable it.
    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad
    7. Wait for Safari to reload, and you will now see the desktop version of the website.
    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Frequently Asked Questions:

    Q: Can I switch back to the mobile version of the website once I am on the desktop version of it?
    A: No. Once Desktop View is enabled, you cannot switch back to the mobile version. You can always open a new tab if you want to view the mobile version of the site.

    Q: Is there an option where I can enable the Desktop Version of websites on all tabs?
    A: For now, you can only enable Desktop View by following the procedures above. You need to repeat the procedures for every tab that you want to view in Desktop Mode.

    Do you have problems when viewing a website in Desktop Mode in Safari? Do you have some tips for our readers? We would like to know them! Share them in the comments.

    Fast. Secure. Powerful‪.‬

    Telegram Messenger LLP

      • 4.3 • 846 Ratings
      • Free



    Pure instant messaging — simple, fast, secure, and synced across all your devices. One of the world’s top 10 most downloaded apps with over 500 million active users.

    FAST: Telegram is the fastest messaging app on the market, connecting people via a unique, distributed network of data centers around the globe.

    SYNCED: You can access your messages from all your phones, tablets and computers at once. Telegram apps are standalone, so you don’t need to keep your phone connected. Start typing on one device and finish the message from another. Never lose your data again.

    UNLIMITED: You can send media and files, without any limits on their type and size. Your entire chat history will require no disk space on your device, and will be securely stored in the Telegram cloud for as long as you need it.

    SECURE: We made it our mission to provide the best security combined with ease of use. Everything on Telegram, including chats, groups, media, etc. is encrypted using a combination of 256-bit symmetric AES encryption, 2048-bit RSA encryption, and Diffie–Hellman secure key exchange.

    100% FREE & OPEN: Telegram has a fully documented and free API for developers, open source apps and verifiable builds to prove the app you download is built from the exact same source code that is published.

    POWERFUL: You can create group chats with up to 200,000 members, share large videos, documents of any type (.DOCX, .MP3, .ZIP, etc.) up to 2 GB each, and even set up bots for specific tasks. Telegram is the perfect tool for hosting online communities and coordinating teamwork.

    RELIABLE: Built to deliver your messages using as little data as possible, Telegram is the most reliable messaging system ever made. It works even on the weakest mobile connections.

    FUN: Telegram has powerful photo and video editing tools, animated stickers and emoji, fully customizable themes to change the appearance of your app, and an open sticker/GIF platform to cater to all your expressive needs.

    SIMPLE: While providing an unprecedented array of features, we take great care to keep the interface clean. Telegram is so simple you already know how to use it.

    PRIVATE: We take your privacy seriously and will never give any third parties access to your data. You can delete any message you ever sent or received for both sides, at any time and without a trace. Telegram will never use your data to show you ads.

    For those interested in maximum privacy, Telegram offers Secret Chats. Secret Chat messages can be programmed to self-destruct automatically from both participating devices. This way you can send all types of disappearing content — messages, photos, videos, and even files. Secret Chats use End-to-End Encryption to ensure that a message can only be read by its intended recipient.

    We keep expanding the boundaries of what you can do with a messaging app. Don’t wait years for older messengers to catch up with Telegram — join the revolution today.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    While the social networks introduces restrictions on free listening to music from mobile devices, you can catch a virus on sites for free downloading tracks. and subscriptions to Apple Music are Google Musik basically paid, Telegram does not hesitate to give its users the opportunity to listen to music in Telegram without any restrictions.

    How to do this best, where it is better to search for songs and create your own playlists, in general everything about music in the Telegram, we will tell in this article.

    Telegram Music: Key Features and Functions

    To begin, consider the Telegram player for listening to music and what possibilities it basically has. To do this, go to the channel @cctracks, which was created specifically to demonstrate all the delights of listening to music on Telegram.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    We turn on the song and on top we see the name of the track and artist who is playing right now. At the time of song playback, the track is automatically loaded into the cache, that is, the next time you play it, you do not need the Internet.

    The song will already be on your phone. In this, a huge plus messenger.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Tap on the top line and open a full-fledged music player in Telegram. Here you can change the location of the playback tracks. Button to repeat the entire playlist or one track. Switch back and forth, and of course, pause and play the song.

    And also, bonded covers are a pleasant bonus, which cannot but please the eye of a picky user.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    We’ll talk separately about song caching. As we said earlier, the track you want to play is immediately loaded into memory.

    We recall that in the “Memory Usage” tab in the Telegram, you can configure how many files will be stored in the messenger, and there is also the ability to clear the cache.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    If from time to time you yourself clear the Telegram cache, if you don’t want to re-download music on a new one, then when you click the “Clear Telegram Cache” button, there is an opportunity to REMOVE the checkmark for clearing Music.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    A nice bonus for Android owners is that you can add the downloaded track to the standard “Music” application, which, alas, cannot be done in iOS. Actually, these are all the main features of the built-in Telegram player.

    The most interesting further! We will tell you where to look for music in Telegram and how it can be conveniently structured so that listening to tracks reaches a new level.

    How To Find Music in Telegram

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Finding a channel or bot in Telegram to listen to music is very easy. We go to the site “” in the music section and select the channels that you like for example by the number of subscribers.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    In order not to search for a long time, we suggest choosing Music Region | Spotify Songs MP3.

    ATTENTION. Access to the channel on iOS and macOS platforms is limited. Therefore, if you use an iphone or an iPad, do not even try to open a channel with such a label. Try another one.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Several times a day, the administrators of such channels upload new tracks and music to Telegram, so you will never miss music news.

    And if you need to find a specific artist or song, tap on the name of the channel and select “Search”. We tried to find popular tracks, and we managed to do it.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    In addition to music channels, there are also bots for finding music. I immediately draw your attention to the fact that most of them do not work for iOS and MacOS devices. But Android and the desktop version are easily supported.

    Enter the desired track or artist in the search, and get the desired results. Everything is as simple as possible. Links to working bots with Telegram music will be below.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Below we will talk about how to make a playlist, not to lose your music in Telegram and turn the messenger into a full-fledged music player.

    Your Playlist For Music

    In a large number of channels and bots with music, you can easily get confused, and this is not surprising, because if you start a track from a channel with music, the playlist will consist of all the songs that are presented on the channel. But you can make your own playlists. I think you have already guessed how to organize all this.

    We’re creating a separate-private channel for our future playlist. For example, we call it “new music”, and then, just do not forget to send new tracks there.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Thus, in this channel your playlist will be formed, and you will not get lost in where you listened to this or that song. And since there are hundreds of private channels that a user can create in Telegram, you can have enough of these playlists. By genre, mood and so on.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    Do not be too lazy to do this, and then Telegram will be an excellent platform for you to listen to music!

    By the way, do not forget that music can also be loaded from the desktop version itself. For example, if you have some kind of rarity or exclusive on the computer, and it is nowhere to be found on channels and on the Internet.

    We also recommend watching a video that clearly shows how to use the player:

    Telegram Music

    That’s all for today. The t9Gram project is all about Telegram.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

    * O link para o vídeo completo está no final desse artigo.
    Saiba mais clicando em Robô IQ OPTION de AUTOMATIZAÇÃO de Lista de SINAIS
    E conheça também sobre o Melhor Bot Para Opções Binárias 2022
    Que tal um robo gratuito para IQ Option? Sistema Para IQ Option Grátis

    No computer? No problem! TradingView has an amazing app with all of the features you need to be a successful trader. Tradingview has been a huge tool for traders all over the world, and it keeps getting better. In this video, I explain the basics of the tradingview mobile app. I cover how to use the trendline tool, zoom in on price, add indicators, and more.

    If you’d like to learn how to multiply money from your smartphone, tablet, or computer with an easy to apply strategy contact me. My exclusive group makes this seemingly complex market digestible for the newbie and is filled with master traders for the experienced investor looking to sharpen their skills or be around like minded individuals.

    Sign up for Tradingview –

    How to Count Pips Using TradingView –

    Send Me A Message to Get Access to Our Investment Community

    Join my Telegram Channel:

    Join my private Facebook community:

    Email: [email protected]
    Text +1-757-778-9207

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

    Full-Time Working Mom & Entrepreneur Makes Money First Month Trading Forex & HFX Binary

    How to get what you really want in life! 💡

    Success Formula – It’s Okay To Be WACC

    Learn how a Doctor, Entrepreneur, Stylist, and Truck Driver are making money from their cell phone

    Why you should Invest in You! The problem with ONLY having a 9-5

    Learn How To Read Forex Charts

    [ [email protected] ]

    To see how my personal coaching program works, add yourself to my free info group:

    Make sure you put “Mr. Healthy Pips” as the person who referred you to the group then contact me directly so I can be sure you are added in a timely manner.

    (We do 3-4 Live Trainings Sessions a week with traders around the world. I like things easy and I know you do too! You can be on our next Live Webinar where we teach and help people grasp simple Forex Strategies that have me profitable in the markets!)
    Like this video, share this video, Subscribe to this YouTube Page, and Click the Bell to be notified in the future when I upload videos. Thanks for watching!


    Email: [email protected]
    Text +1-757-778-9207

    #MyMillennialMentor #JustNVision #MrHealthyPips #RetiredIn365 #Jevon #JVonJamal #TheSkittlesStrategy #Forex #ForexBasics #CountingPips #TradingView #MetaTrader4

    Telegram Lock

    In some countries, Telegram is blocked. To connect to it and work with the Telegram Signal utility, you need to use VPS that are located outside your country or third-party programs (for example, WindScribe). The first option is preferable, because a third-party program will send the transmitted information first to a foreign server, and only then to Telegram, which can sometimes cause failures, and also slows down the speed of information transfer.

    If you install the program, first activate it, and only then follow the instructions. If you use a foreign VPS – then all manipulations are carried out on it.

    In order not to read the article, you can watch the video

    Creating a Telegram channel and Telegram bot

    • Open Telegram, type @BotFather in the search
    • Send him the / newbot command
    • Give a name to your bot, send that name
    • Now set a unique address, but be sure that the address ends with bot: Tetrisbot or tetris_bot, send the address
    • In response, you will receive the following message:

    Done! Congratulations on your new bot. You will find it at You can now add a description, about section and profile picture for your bot, see /help for a list of commands. By the way, when you’ve finished creating your cool bot, ping our Bot Support if you want a better username for it. Just make sure the bot is fully operational before you do this.

    Use this token to access the HTTP API:


    Keep your token secure and store it safely, it can be used by anyone to control your bot.

    For a description of the Bot API, see this page:

    • I selected the token of your bot in bold, save this token, you will still need it
    • We go to the settings and click “Create Channel” there.

    How to create a telegram channel on iphone or ipad

  • Give a name, wait for “Next”, select “Public”.
  • When adding participants in the search, enter the name of the bot that you gave when creating, instruction point 3. Select it, click “add”. A notification window will pop up, click “assign”, then “save”.
  • Now we have a bot and there is a channel where signals will be transmitted. It remains only to get the id of this bot:

    • In Telegram in search of looking for our bot
    • Go to it and click “Run”
    • Next, open any browser and enter in the address bar: /getUpdates

    Instead of , put the value that you received when creating the robot from @BotFather, in our example I highlighted this value in the field above – 1156728106: AAELhH6iRg8nqwa7kIEbUc25zcLef_DjTn0

    In response to the request, you will receive a message:

    What I highlighted in bold is id. Also save it.

    Install Telegram Signal Utility

    • Download the utility and in MetaTrader go to Tools => Settings => Expert Advisors.
    • Check the box “Allow WebRequest for the following URLs.”
    • Double click on the green plus sign below and enter in the active field
    • Then click OK
    • Put the utility on the chart and set the settings that you need, but be sure to fill in:

    Token Bot – enter the token here, it looks like 1156718906: AAELhH6iRg8nqwa7kIEbUc25zcLef_DjTn0, we got it when creating the bot.

    id Bot – enter id here, it looks like -1001160699861, we got it in the browser.

    • Click “ok,” and then on the graph itself, click “ON” or “ON” (depending on the language settings).
    • Wait a few seconds until you receive a notification about the successful connection of the utility and Telegram. You can send a test message from this notification by pressing the “YES” or “YES” button.
    • If this test message arrived, it means that you did everything correc